HYDROPOWER IN NORWAY

Mechanical Equipment


A survey prepared


by


Arne Kjølle
Professor Emeritus
Norwegian University of Science and Technology




















Trondheim, December 2001
I
CONTENTS

Preface Page VIII


CHAPTER 1
Hydropower Machinery Page
Introduction 1.1
1.1 Brief review of hydropower machines 1.2
1.1.1 The eldest hydropower machines 1.2
1.1.2 Turbines 1.3
1.2 Arrangement of hydropower plants 1.5
References 1.7
CHAPTER 2
Energy Conversion Page
Introduction 2.1
2.1 Fundamentals and definitions 2.1
2.2 Transforming hydraulic energy into mechanical energy 2.2
2.2.1 General considerations 2.2
2.2.2 Impulse turbine - Pelton 2.3
2.2.3 Reaction turbines 2.6
2.2.4 The main equation of turbines 2.12
2.3 A brief outline of the hydraulic design of turbines 2.13
2.4 Efficiency 2.16
References 2.17
Bibliography

2.17
CHAPTER 3
Classification of Turbines - Main Characteristics Page
Introduction 3.1
3.1 Fundamental similarity considerations 3.1
3.1.1 Similarity relations 3.1
3.1.2 Speed number 3.3
3.1.3 Classification of turbines 3.4
3.1.4 Performance characteristics 3.5
3.1.5 Cavitation and suction head 3.8
3.2 Pelton turbines 3.9
3.2.1 Main hydraulic dimensions 3.9
3.2.2 Pelton bucket dimensions 3.10
3.2.3 Performance diagram 3.10
3.3 Francis turbines 3.11
3.3.1 Main hydraulic dimensions 3.11
3.3.2 Performance diagrams 3.11
3.3.3 Cavitation, suction head and reaction ratio 3.13
3.4 Kaplan turbines 3.14
3.4.1 Main hydraulic dimensions 3.14
II

Classification of turbines - Main Characteristics
(Cont.)
Page
3.4.2 Performance diagram 3.15
3.4.3 Cavitation, suction head and reaction ratio 3.16
3.5 Choice of turbine 3.16
3.5.1 Choice between Pelton and Francis turbines 3.16
3.5.2 Choice between Francis and Kaplan turbines 3.20
References 3.20
Bibliography

3.21
CHAPTER 4
Governing Principles Page
Introduction 4.1
4.1 Feedback control system 4.2
4.2 Governor adjustment facilities 4.4
4.2.1 Proporsjonal-integral-derivative funtions (PID) 4.4
4.2.2 Permanent speed droop 4.4
4.3 Turbine governing demands 4.5
4.3.1 Frequency and load regulation 4.5
4.3.2 Start and stop sequence control 4.5
4.3.3 Disconnection, load rejection 4.6
4.3.4 Load limiting 4.6
4.4 Regulation requirements of water power plants 4.6
4.4.1 Mass oscillation 4.6
4.4.2 Water hammer pressure rise versus closure time and speed 4.8
4.5 Governing stability 4.13
4.5.1 Modes of operation 4.13
4.5.2 Rules of thumb 4.14
References 4.15
Bibliography

4.15
CHAPTER 5
Performance Tests Page
Introduction 5.1
5.1 Tests on prototype 5.1
5.1.1 Principles for test 5.1
5.1.2 Measurement of the turbine power 5.2
5.1.3 Methods for determination of discharge 5.2
5.1.3.1 Current meter method 5.2
5.1.3.2 Pitot tube gauging 5.3
5.1.3.3 The pressure-time method (Gibson method) 5.4
5.1.3.4 Tracer methods 5.5
5.1.3.5 Ultrasonic method 5.7
5.1.3.6 Weirs 5.9
5.1.3.7 Standardised differential pressure devices 5.10
5.1.3.8 Volumetric gauging method 5.11
5.1.3.9 Relative discharge measurement 5.11

III
Performance Tests
(Cont.) Page
5.1.4 Thermodynamic measurement of flow losses 5.12
5.1.4.1 Measurement of power losses 5.12
5.1.4.2 Efficiency and specific energies 5.13
5.1.4.3 Measuring technique 5.14
5.1.4.4 Corrections for leakage and friction 5.16
5.1.5 Dynamic properties of the turbines 5.16
5.1.6 Cavitation behaviour of prototype 5.16
5.1.7 Governor test - Rejection tests 5.17
5.2 Model tests and scale effect of effiency from model to prototype 5.17
5.2.1 Laboratory qualifications 5.17
5.2.2 Model tests 5.18
5.2.3 Scale effect on efficiency from model to prototype 5.20
References 5.21
Bibliography

5.22
CHAPTER 6
Pelton Turbines
Page
Introduction 6.1
6.1 Horizontal Pelton turbine arrangement 6.1
6.2 Vertical Pelton turbine arrangement 6.2
6.3 Main components and their functions 6.4
6.3.1 Runner 6.4
6.2.2 The turbine shaft 6.6
6.2.3 Turbine radial bearing 6.6
6.2.4 Bend and distributor 6.7
6.2.5 Straight flow injector 6.8
6.2.6 Deflector mechanism 6.9
6.2.7 Turbine housing 6.10
6.3 Condition control 6.10
6.3.1 Turbine guide bearing 6.10
6.3.2 Runner 6.11
6.3.3 Main injector with needle servomotor 6.11
6.3.4 Seal ring in deflector bearing 6.11
6.3.5 Filter 6.11
6.4 Monitoring instruments 6.11
6.5 Assembly and dismantling 6.12
Reference 6.12
Bibliography

6.12
CHAPTER 7
Francis Turbines
Page
Introduction 7.1
7.1 Horizontal Francis turbine 7.1
7.2 Vertical Francis turbine 7.2
7.3 Main components and their functions 7.4
7.3.1 Scroll casing 7.4

IV

Francis Turbines
(Cont.) Page
7.3.2 Guide vane cascade 7.4
7.3.3 Turbine covers 7.5
7.3.4 Runner 7.5
7.3.5 Turbine shaft and bearing 7.6
7.3.6 Shaft seal 7.7
7.3.7 Regulating mechanism 7.8
7.3.8 Draft tube 7.9
7.4 Drainage and filling system 7.9
7.5 Contition control 7.10
7.6 Monitoring instruments 7.11
7.7 Assembly and dismantling 7.11
References 7.12
Bibliography

7.12
CHAPTER 8
Kaplan Turbines

Page
Introduction 8.1
8.1 Kaplan turbine construction 8.1
8.1.1 Arrangement 8.1
8.1.2 Kaplan turbine construction 8.2
8.2 Main components and their functions 8.3
8.2.1 Scroll casing 8.3
8.2.2 The guide vane cascade 8.4
8.2.3 Covers 8.4
8.2.4 Runner 8.4
8.2.5 Runner blade servomotor 8.5
8.2.6 Regulating mechanism of the runner blades 8.5
8.2.7 Cooperation of the regulation of the guide vanes and the
runner blades
8.6
8.2.8 Runner chamber 8.6
8.2.9 Turbine shaft 8.7
8.2.10 Turbine bearing 8.7
8.2.11 Shaft seal box 8.7
8.2.12 Draft tube 8.8
8.3 Drainage and filling arrangement 8.9
8.4 Condition control 8.9
8.4.1 Runner 8.9
8.4.2 Runner chamber 8.9
8.4.3 Guide vane mechanism 8.9
8.4.4 Shaft seal box 8.9
8.5 Monitoring instruments 8.9
8.6 Assembly and dismantling 8.10
References 8.10
Bibliography 8.10
V

CHAPTER 9
Bulb Turbines
Page
Introduction 9.1
9.1 General arrangement 9.1
9.2 Main components 9.1
9.2.1 Stay cone 9.2
9.2.2 Runner chamber and draft tube cone 9.2
9.2.3 Generator hatch 9.3
9.2.4 Stay shield 9.3
9.2.5 Rotating parts 9.3
9.2.5.1 The runner 9.4
9.2.5.2 The turbine shaft 9.4
9.2.6 Shaft seal box 9.4
9.2.7 Turbine shaft bearing 9.6
9.2.8 The feedback mechanism and oil piping 9.7
9.2.8.1 The oil transfer unit 9.7
9.2.9 The guide vane mechanism 9.7
9.3 Condition control 9.8
9.3.1 Runner 9.9
9.3.2 Runner chamber 9.9
9.3.3 Guide vane mechanism 9.9
9.3.4 Shaft seal box 9.9
9.3.5 Generally for Bulb turbines 9.9
9.4 Monitoring instruments 9.9
9.5 Assembly and dismantling 9.10
References 9.10
Bibliography 9.10
CHAPTER 10
Governors
Page
10.1 Governor system structure 10.1
10.2 Electrohydraulic controllers 10.2
10.2.1 Analogous controller 10.2
10.2.2 Digital computer based controller 10.3
10.3 Servo system 10.4
10.3.1 Governor desk 10.4
10.3.2 Main control servomoter 10.6
10.4 Specific turbine governing equipement 10.6
10.4.1 Dual control of Pelton turbines 10.6
10.4.2 By-pass control for Francis turbines 10.7
10.4.2.1 Function and general arrangement 10.7
10.4.2.2 The valve control system 10.8
10.4.3 Dual control of Kaplan/Bulb turbines 10.9
References 10.10
Bibliography

10.10
VI

CHAPTER 11
Valves
Page
Introduction 11.1
11.1 Spherical valves 11.1
11.1.1 Valve housing and valve rotor 11.1
11.1.2 Valve rotor trunnions and bearings 11.2
11.1.3 Seals for closed valve 11.2
11.1.3.1 Main seal 11.3
11.1.3.2 Auxilliary seal 11.4
11.1.4 Operation mechanism 11.4
11.1.5 Control system 11.5
11.2 Butterfly valves 11.6
11.2.1 Valve housing 11.6
11.2.2 Valve disc 11.6
11.2.3 Bearing 11.7
11.2.4 Seal 11.7
11.2.5 Operating mechanism 11.8
11.3 Gate valves 11.8
11.5 Ring valves 11.9
11.6 The bypass valve 11.10
11.7 Guidelines for inspection of valves 11.11
References 11.12
Bibliography 11.12
CHAPTER 12
Auxilliary Equipment
Page
Introduction 12.1
12.1 Oil pressure system 12.1
12.1.1 System construction 12.2
12.1.2 System operation 12.7
12.2 Air supply system 12.8
References

12.10
CHAPTER 13
Forces transferred to the foundations
Page
Introduction 13.1
13.1 Horizontal turbines 13.1
13.2 Vertical turbines 13.2
References

13.4
VII

CHAPTER 14
Causes to damages
Page
Introduction 14.1
14.1 Cavitation 14.1
14.2 Sand erosion 14.2
14.3 Material defects 14.3
14.4 Fatigue 14.5
References

14.6
CHAPTER 15
Condition Control
Page
Introduction 15.1
15.1 Activities for Pelton turbine 15.1
15.2 Activities for Francis turbines 15.2
15.3 Activities for Kaplan and Bulb turbines 15.3
References

15.4
CHAPTER 16
Quality Assurance (QA)
Page
Quality assurance 16.1
References 16.3








VIII



Preface


This book was originally aimed to constitute a section called Mechanical Equipment, in a
series of books that in total describe the THE DEVELOPMENT OF HYDRO POWER IN
NORWAY. In fact much of the literary work during the preparation of this book, was
however, evaluated to be a more suitable presentation of the material for a textbook than for
the above mentioned series of books. Therefore it was preferred to edit this book separatly
with the intention that it may partly serve as a supplementary textbook for students on hydro
power machinery.
The subjects being mentioned comprise all main components of a hydro power plant from the
upstream end with the basin for water intake to the downstream end of the water flow outlet.
Those parts of the plant which are not specifically of the mechanical equipment category, are
simply mentioned to inform about their function and position in the system structure.
For the the mechanical equipment it is given basic theory for the hydraulic design of turbines,
theory and description of methods for tests of models and prototypes of turbines, theory for the
dynamics in water conduits and governing of turbines. Further descriptions are given of the
design structure of all actual turbines, valves, governors and auxilliary equipment. In addition
a touch on forces transferred to the foundations, causes to damages on the machines, condition
control and quality assurance is given.
The preparation of this book has been effected through comparisons and reflections on the
material in the references, which are listet at the end of each chapter. However, my colleague
Professor Dr.techn. Hermod Brekke, has earlier prepared a manuscript of a book which is
containing much of the same subjects as in this case. With allowance from him, I have adopted
from his manus quite a lot of the material about the design of the modern turbines and turbine
governing. For this important support, I thank Professor Brekke. For the skillful scanning in of
the figures, I thank head clerk Rundi Aukan.

Trondheim, December 2001 Arne Kjølle
Hydropower Machinery 1.1
CHAPTER 1
Hydropower Machinery
Introduction
Hydropower machine is the designation used for a machine that directly convert the hydraulic
power in a water fall to mechanical power on the machine shaft. This power conversion involves
losses that arise partly in the machine itself and partly in the water conduits to and from the
machine.
The utilization of the power in the waterfall is evaluated by the so-called power plant efficency η
a
,
which is the ratio between the mechanical power output from the machine shaft and the gross
hydraulic power of the power plant. The plant efficiency η
a
is a variabel quantity that depends on
the design of the water conduits to and from the hydropower machine and the operating conditions.
The conduits are normally made with flow cross sections according to optimal design criteria. In
practise that means conduit cross section areas are as small as possible to get low investment costs.
However, the smaller the cross sections are, the higher the losses become. Similar consequenzies
are resulting from increasing lengths of the conduits. Both these effects means a correspondingly
lower plant efficiency η
a
.
The hydropower machine may be operated with different flow rates Q from time to time according
to the variable grid load, the alternating heads and flow discharges in the plant. These
circumstances means that the hydropower machines necessarily are equipped with facilities for
regulation of the power input and output. In practise this is carried out by regulation of the flow
discharge.
The input power to the hydropower machine is however, not efficiently similar utilized at all
operating conditions. The fact is that the machine performs the optimal efficiency for only one
single combination of flow discharge, water head and rotational speed. This means a characteristic,
which is denoted as the efficiency of the machine and generally expressed by
power input net
power output mechanical
= η (1.1)
where net input power means the gross hydraulic power of the power plant minus power losses in
the conduits to and from the hydropower machine.
According to the regulation means another quantity is defined as the admission κ and expressed as

efficiency max. at ischarge d
discharge erating op
= κ (1.2)
Hydropower Machinery 1.2
An example of the efficiency characteristic of a hydropower turbine as a function of the admission,
is shown on Fig. 1.1. As being discribed in the following chapters, the efficiency charateristic may
be rather different from one turbine type to the other as shown in the example Fig. 1.2.

Fig. 1.1 Efficiency of a hydroturbine Fig.1.2 Efficiency of two different tubine types
A similar difference may also be found for the same turbine type dependent on the design of the
turbine.
By preliminary and approximate evaluations of the output power of hydromachines, the plant
efficiency η
a
is chosen fairly low, for example η
a
= 0.765 at full load. With discharge Q [m
3
/s],
water head H [m], water density of ρ = 1000 kg/m
3
and the indicated value of η
a
the mechanical
power output from the machine becomes
P = 7.5 QH [kW] (1.3)
1.1 Brief review of hydropower machines
1.1.1 The eldest hydropower machines
The eldest and most primitive type of machines for utilizing water power are the water wheels.
They were in use in China and Egypt several tousand years ago. The eldest type of these were the
undershot wheels, Fig. 1.3, which were arranged in the river channel with horizontal shaft. The river
water was flowing into the buckets on the underside of the wheel, which in this way was revolved
by the velocity energy in the river flow. With this type of water wheels rather low powers were
obtained because of low efficiency and the effective flow discharges were small.

Fig. 1.3 Undershot wheel /1/ F ig.1.4 Overshot wheel /1!



Hydropower Machinery 1.3












Fig. 1.5 Breast wheel /1/

Later on the water wheels were installed in artificial
falls that were erected by building a canal to guide the
water into the wheel. Depending on the available water
head two other wheel types in addition came up to be
used. These were the so-called overshot wheels, Fig.
1.4, and breast wheels, Fig.1.5, which also were
arranged with horizontal shaft. On the overshot wheel
the water was guided into the buckets on the top side of
the wheel, whereas on the breast wheel the water was
guided into the buckets somewhere about the height of
the wheel shaft. These wheels were revolved by the
weight of the water filling in the buckets, and for the
best designs of the wheels an efficiency up to 85 % was obtained at water heads higher than three
meter.
The water wheels were employed mostly in Middle Europe throughout the Middle Ages. In
Norway on the other hand, the so-called Kvernkallen (the Old mill-man) was the most widespred
hydro machine. This had a vertical shaft to which the runner was fixed. The runner was equipped
with radial tilted blades to which the water was flowing along a steep open canal. In this way the
Kvernkallen utilized only the velocity energy of the flowing water. And this power transfer went on
with relatively great losses especially for the plane blades, and the efficiency might be lower than
50 %..
1.1.2 Turbines
The industrial development throughout the 18. and 19. century the need for more energy was
increasing so much that the water wheels no longer got hold of sufficient energy supply. New
energy sources like wapour power was adopted, but further development toke place also on
utilization of water power. In 1750 the physicist J. A. Segner invented a reaction runner, which has
got its name after him. This runner utilized the impulse force from a water jet and was the
forerunner of the turbines. Just after this the mathematician Leonard Euler developed the turbine
theory, which is valid today too.
Turbine is a designation that was introdused in 1824 in a dissertation of the French engineer Burdin.
Next step was made by engineer Fourneyron when he
designed and put to operation the first real turbine in
1827. At that time this machine was a kind of a revolution
with the unusual great power output of 20 – 30 kW and a
runner diameter of 500 mm.
A principle sketch axially through the guide vane cascade
G and the runner R of Fourneyron’s turbine is shown on
Fig. 1.6. Because the water flow has a radial direction
through the turbine runner, it may be designated as radial
turbine.
However, two other turbine designers Henschel and
Jonval,developed about 1840, independent of each other, a
Figur 1.6 Radial turbine of Fournevron /4/
Hydropower Machinery 1.4



Fig. 1.7 Axial section of Francis turbine /4/





Figur. 1.8 Principle of Pelton turbine /2/

Fig. 1.9 Kaplan turbine /2/
turbine each with axial water flow through it. In addition they were the first ones to apply draft tube
and in that way to utilize the water head between runner outlet and tail water level.
In the time interval until 1850 several designers
improved the machines, but most serious was the work
by the English engineer Francis. He developed and made
a turbin in 1849, which has got its name after him. This
turbine looked fairly similar to that one Euler had
foreseen. An axial section through the guide vane
cascade and the runner of this turbine is shown on Fig.
1.7. The water flows radially through the guide vane
cascade G towards the runner R and further out in the
axial direction.
In the year 1870 professor Fink introdused an important
improvement by making the guide vanes turning on a
pivot in order to regulate the flow discharge.
The turbines mentioned above, were operating at relatively low heads compared with turbines
nowadays. Addionally the water was flowing into the turbine runner with a certain pressure above
the atmospheric through a guide vane cascade comprising
the whole periphery of the runner. A turbine design
principally different from these, was developed by the
American engineer Pelton. He made his first runner in
1890, and Fig. 1.8 shows that the water in this case flows
as a jet from a nozzle through atmospheric air into the
runner buckets. The buckets are designed to split the jet in
two halves, which are deflected almost 180
o
before they
leave the buket. In this way the impulse force from the
deflection is transferred to the runner. By the invention of
the Pelton turbine a machine type was developed for
utilization of the highest water heads in the nature.
In the region
of low pres-
sure turbines a great step forward was made when
professor Kaplan designed his propeller turbine, which
was patented in 1913. This turbine had fixed runner
blades, and was developed for utilizing the lowest water
heads. Fig. 1.9 shows an axial section through a Kaplan
turbine. Not very long after making the propeller
turbine, Kaplan further developed his turbine by making
the runner blades revolving. This was an important
improvement for an economic and efficient governing
of the turbine output.
After the brief review above of the hydropower
machines, one can summerize that the only machine
types that have been developed to be dominant in
Hydropower Machinery 1.5
modern times are Pelton, Francis and Kaplan turbines. The reason is that these three types
supplement each other in an excellent way. As a basic rule one can say that Pelton turbines are used
for relatively high heads and small water discharges, Kaplan turbines for the lowest heads and the
largest water discharges and Francis turbines for the region between the other two turbine types.
1.2 Arrangement of hydropower plants
The discharge operating a water turbine, is conveyed from a river or a water course through an
intake and a conduit to the turbine. From the turbine the discharge is conducted through a so-called
tail rase canal to a downstream river course.
A brief review of the main details in a hydropower plant is given in the following sections. Fig. 1.10
shows schematically an example of a plant arrangement with indication of the localisation of the
details to be mentioned.

Fig. 1.10 Arrangement of a hydropower plant /2/
Fig.1.11 shows in principle
/3/
the water conduits of a traditional Norwegian power plant with a high
head Francis turbine. Downstream from the upstream reservoir the coarse trash rack, intake gate,
head race tunnel, surge shaft, sand trap, fine trash rack, penstock isolating valve with air valve,
pressure shaft, spherical valve, turbine, draft tube, draft tube gate, outlet surge shaft and tale race
tunnel.
Water intake
The water intake is normally constructed in connection with an accumulation dam (1) Fig.1.10, in
the river course.
The shallow water intake is equipped with a coarse trash rack (3) which prevents trees, branches,
debris and stones from entering the conduit system to the turbine. An intake gate (2) is arranged to



Hydropower Machinery 1.6

Fig. 1.11 Sketch showing in principle the water conduits of a traditional Norwegian high head power plant /3/
shut off the water delivery when the conduit system has to be emptied. In addition a small gate (4)
may be arranged for drainage of the leakage through the main gate.
A deep water intake takes the water directly from the reservoir. It has no trash rack. There is a sump
below the intake. Its main function is to collect blasting stones from the piercing of the the head
race tunnel into the reservoir. It also traps stones sliding into the reservoir close to the intake. Deep
water intakes allows for very strong regulation of the reservoirs. An intake gate is installed with the
same function as described for the shallow water intake.
Conduit system
From the water intake to the turbine it is a conduit system constructed as open canal, tunnel,
penstock or pressure shaft or a combination of these.
Open canals are usually digged in the ground, blasted in rock or built up as a chute of wood or
concrete.
In high head power plants it is normally a so-called head race tunnel between the water intake and
the pressure shaft. It may either be drilled and blasted or bored with a tunnel boring machine
(TBM). The latter method leaves a much smoother wall surface than the first one, and consequently
the head loss is significantly smaller for the same cross section. At the end of the head race tunnel
there is a sand trap. Beside the sump in the tunnel floor the cross section of the tunnel is gradually
increased to reduce the water velocity and allow for a better sedimentation of suspended particles.
At the downstream end of the head race tunnel there is also a surge chamber system. The function
of the surge chamber is briefly to reduce water hammer pressure variations and keep the mass

Hydropower Machinery 1.7
oscillations, caused by load changes, within acceptable limits and decrease the oscillations to stable
operation as soon as possible. At the end of long head race tunnels it is also normally istalled a gate.
This makes it possible to empty the pressure shaft and penstock upstream of the turbine, for
inspection and maintenance without emptying the head race tunnel. Before the water enters the
pressure shaft it passes a fine trash rack. It is the last protection of the valve and the turbine against
floating debris or smaller stones if the sand trap is full or omitted.
The pressure shaft may either be lined or unlined. Where the rock is of sufficiently high quality the
shafts are normally unlined. The excavation of the rock masses may be done either by drilling and
blasting or by boring with TBM-machines. Shafts in lower quality rock is being lined either by
concrete or by steel plate lining embedded in concrete. Lining of the shafts reduces the losses but
increases the costs.
A steel penstock connects the shaft with the valve in the machine hall. Inside the rock the penstock
is embedded in a concrete plug. Penstocks are normally welded pipe constructions of steel plates. A
flange connects the penstock with the valve.
Penstocks above ground are mounted on foundation concrete blocks where the penstock may slide
according to thermal expansion. In certain positions the penstocks are fixed in reinforced concrete
anchoring blocks (8) on Fig. 1.10. Between these anchoring blocks the penstocks are equipped with
expansion stuffing boxes (7) in Fig. 1.10.
At the upstream end of a penstock an automatic isolating valve is normally installed. This valve
closes automatically if a pipe rupture should occur.
Turbine
The main parts of the turbine, with reference to Fig. 1.10, are:
- the guide vane cascade, usually adjustable, gives the water flow the velocity and the
direction required for the inlet to
- the runner where the hydraulic power is transferred to mechanical power on
- the turbine shaft (9) to which the runner is fixed. The turbine shaft is guided in a
- radial bearing and an
- axial bearing that is loaded with the axial force from the runner, caused by the water
pressure and impulses from the flow, and the weight of the rotating parts.
- The scroll case (10) conducts the water flow to the guide vane cascade.
- The draft tube (11) conducts the water flow from the turbine outlet into the tale race
canal.
Closing valve
Upstream of the turbine a closing device (12) on Fig. 1.10, is installed. Depending on water head
and capasity it may be a gate, butterfly valve, gate valve or a spherical valve. By submerged
turbines a closing device, normally a gate, is installed also at the outlet from the draft tube.
References
1. Hunter, Louis C.: A History of Industrial Power in the United States, 1780 – 1930. The
University Press of Virginia, 1979. ISBN 0-8139-0782-9 (v.1).

Hydropower Machinery 1.8
2. Kjølle, A.: Water Power Machines (in Norwegian), Universitetsforlaget, Oslo, 1980. ISBN 82-
00-27780-1.
3. Kværner Brug: COURSE III Lecture compendium, Oslo 1986.
4. Sundby, G.: Abstract of Lectures on Water Power Machines (in Norwegian) at NTH 1937- 38.
Trondheim






Energy Conversion 2.1
CHAPTER 2
Energy Conversion
Introduction
A water flow from an upper level to a lower level represents a hydraulic power potential. This
power flow can be utilised in a water power plant by conversion to mechanical power on the
shafts of turbines. However, some fractions of the power potential are lost partly in the plant’s
conduits and partly in the turbines.
In this chapter a brief description is given of the power conversion in the turbines that are
common in hydro power stations.
2.1 Fundamentals and definitions
Specific energy
The specific energy of a hydro power plant is the quantity of potential and kinetic energy which
1 kilogram of the water delivers when passing through the plant from an upper to a lower
reservoir. The expression of the specific energy is Nm/kg or J/kg and is designated as [m
2
/s
2
].
In a hydro power plant as outlined on Fig. 2.1, the difference between the level of the upper
reservoir z
res
and the level of the tail water z
tw
is defined as the gross head
H
gr
= z
res
- z
tw
(2.1)
The corresponding gross specific hydraulic energy
E
gr
= gH
gr
(2.2)
where g is the acceleration of gravity.
When a water discharge Q [m
3
/s] passes through the plant, the delivered power is
P
gr
= ρQgH
gr
(2.3)
where P
gr
is the gross power of the plant
ρ is the density of the water
Q is the discharge
To look further on the hydropower system in Fig. 2.1 the specific hydraulic energy between the
Sections (1) and (3) is available for the turbine. This specific energy is defined as net specific
energy and is expressed by
E
n
= gH
n
(2.4)
and the net head of the turbine H
n
=
E
g
n
(2.5)
Energy Conversion 2.2
As shown on Fig. 2.1 there are two ways of expressing the evaluation of the net head. The one
way
H
n
= h
p
+ c
2
/2g
And the other way
H
n
= H
gr
-
E
g
L
= H
gr
- H
L

where h
p
is the piezometric head
above tailwater level measured in
section (1), c
2
/2g is the velocity head
in section (1) and E
L
/g is specific
hydraulic energy loss between
reservoir and section (1) converted to
head loss H
L
.

Note.
Some comments to the specific
energy definitions according to
Equations (2.2) and (2.4) should be
mentioned. For efficiency tests of
hydro turbines a relatively high
exactness of the determination of the
specific energy is required. Therefore
an international standard exists for
the measurements and evaluations of
such tests. The name of it is International Standard IEC 41.
In addition to the specifications of relevant levels this standard take into account the influences
of: Compressibility and temperature effects of the water; the weight of the air column difference
between the reservoir and the tail water; the difference of specific kinetic energy between
defined sections of the system and at last that the acceleration of gravity depends on the altitude
and latitude.
The specific energy expressed by putting H
gr
corresponding to Fig. 2.1, in Equation (2.2) and H
n

in Equation (2.4) respectively, is consequently approximations according to this standard.
However, the mentioned influences are relatively small, i.e., totally of the order 1% in extreme
cases. This means that these influences are essentially smaller than the tolerance accuracy of the
hydraulic dimensioning of the turbomachines. Therefore the hydraulic considerations of
calculation and design in the following sections are based on constant values of the acceleration
of gravity and the density of water, no influence of temperature and the weight of the air column.
2.2 Transforming hydraulic energy into mechanical energy
2.2.1 General considerations
Ordinary turbines.
The discharge and the net head for turbines differ in wide ranges from one power plant to
another. This indicates that not only different types of turbines but also a very large register of
sizes of turbines are needed.




Fig. 2.1 Hydro power plant. Definition of gross head H
gr

and net head H
n

Energy Conversion 2.3
The ordinary turbine types in water power plants are distinguished in two main groups:
- impulse turbines
- reaction turbines
This distinction is based on the difference between the two cases of energy conversion in these
turbines. Briefly these two ways of energy conversion may be pronounced as follows.
• Basically the flow energy to the impulse turbines is completely converted to kinetic energy
before transformation in the runner. This means that the flow passes the runner buckets with
no pressure difference between inlet and outlet. Therefore only the impulse forces being
transferred by the direction changes of the flow velocity vectors when passing the buckets
create the energy converted to mechanical energy on the turbine shaft. The flow enters the
runner at nearly atmospheric pressure in the form of one or more jets regularly spaced around
the rim of the runners. This means that each jet hits momentarily only a fraction or part of the
circumference of the runner. For that reason the impulse turbines are also denoted partial
turbines.

• In the reaction turbines two effects cause the energy transfer from the flow to mechanical
energy on the turbine shaft. Firstly it follows from a drop in pressure from inlet to outlet of
the runner. This is denoted the reaction part of the energy conversion. Secondly changes in
the directions of the velocity vectors of the flow through the canals between the runner blades
transfer impulse forces. This is denoted the impulse part of the energy conversion. The
pressure drop from inlet to outlet of the runners is obtained because the runners are
completely filled with water. Therefore this group of turbines also have been denoted as full
turbines.
The most commonly used turbines today are:
- impulse type: Pelton turbines
- reaction type: Francis turbines
Kaplan turbines
Bulb turbines
In the following sections the hydraulic energy transfer in Pelton turbines as well as the reaction
turbines is described in more detail
/1/,/3/,/4/
.

2.2.2 Impulse turbine - Pelton
A section through a Pelton runner is shown in Fig. 2.2. The water jet from the nozzle hit the
buckets that are spaced equidistant around the runner disc. In the left lower corner of the figure a
look into a bucket in the same direction as the incoming jet is shown. To the right of the figure a
section through two neighbouring buckets are shown for the indicated section line A - A. In this
section is shown how the jet flow is split symmetrically at the bucket edge and passing over the
bucket. The jet deflection is nearly up to 180
o
, but limited to a little smaller angle because the
leaving jets have to run clear of the subsequent bucket behind.
For a net head H
n
the theoretical velocity of the water jet out of the nozzle is found according to
Bernoulli´s equation
c gH
n 1
2 = (2.6)
However, an energy loss occurs in the nozzle. This influence is corrected for by a friction
coefficient ϕ, and the velocity then becomes
Energy Conversion 2.4
c gH
n 1
2 = ϕ (2.7)
A value of the friction coefficient based on experience may be ϕ = 0.98.


Fig. 2.2 The water jet flow into a Pelton runner. Velocity diagrams at inlet and outlet of the buckets /3/
The runner is assumed to rotate with a constant angular speed ω.
One water particle is considered, for example the particle in the centre of the jet just at the
splitting edge of the bucket and marked as position (1) on the Fig. 2.2. This bucket is drawn for a
position corresponding just to the moment that the full jet is entering the bucket. The absolute
Energy Conversion 2.5
velocity c
1
is known from Equation (2.7). The peripheral velocity of the runner u
1
= r
1
ω
corresponds to radius r
1
in position (1). The direction of this velocity vector is the same as the
tangent in position (1) of the circle with radius r
1
.
When the absolute velocity c
1
of the water particle and the peripheral velocity u
1
in position (1)
are known, the velocity v
1
of the water particle relative to the bucket in position (1) can be
found. The absolute velocity c
1
is the geometric sum of the peripheral velocity u
1
and the relative
velocity v
1
. Therefore one has to draw the three velocity vectors from point (1) so that c
1
is the
diagonal in the parallelogram with u
1
and v
1
as sides. This parallelogram is called the velocity
diagram of the water particle at the inlet of the bucket.
The water particle moves over the bucket and changes its direction gradually until it leaves the
bucket at position (2) as shown in section A - A on Fig. 2.2. During this movement the particle
transfers its impulse force corresponding to the change from the direction of the relative velocity
vector v
1
to the relative velocity vector v
2
. The magnitude of v
2
depends on energy losses during
the passage of the bucket. These losses can be expressed as ζ
2 2
2
2
v
where ζ
2
is defined as loss
coefficient. From experience an estimated value of ζ
2
= 0.06. The relation between v
1
and v
2
is
found according to Bernoulli’s equation:
h
v
g
h
v
g
v
g
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 2 2
+ = + + ς (2.8)
In this case h
1
= h
2
, and therefore
( ) 1
2 2
2
2
2
1
2
+ = ς
v
g
v
g
(2.9)
and
v
v
2
1
2
1
=
+ ς
(2.10)
The magnitude of velocity v
2
is nearly as great as v
1
and has a direction as shown in position (2),
section A - A on Fig. 2.2. The peripheral velocity u
2
is assumed the same as u
1
because in an
approximate approach it is supposed that the water particle enters and leaves the runner bucket at
the same radius of the runner. Therefore the velocity diagram may be drawn from position (2)
with u
2
and v
2
as the parallelogram sides and the absolute velocity c
2
as the diagonal. This
velocity diagram shows that the magnitude of c
2
is much smaller than of c
1
, which is just the
main intention to obtain, because c
2
2
/2 is a direct measure for the loss at outlet of the turbine.
The passage of the water particle from position (1) to position (2) lasts a certain time interval,
and during this time the runner rotates a corresponding angle. If the corresponding positions of
the bucket and the absolute flow path under this passage over the bucket are drawn, one get an
absolute flow path which ends up with the velocity vector c
2
as shown in section A - A on Fig.
2.2. The absolute velocity vector is therefore tangent to this path all the way of the passage.
The description of the movement over the bucket of one water particle is valid also for all the
other particles of the full jet. These particles will however trace different paths, but even so, in
practise it is assumed that the impulse force and the corresponding torque transfer to the runner
is the same from all water particles in the jet.
When the runner is rotating and the bucket starts splitting the jet, it gradually takes up more and
more of the full jet area until it cut the jet completely. But immediately after this cut the
Energy Conversion 2.6
succeeding bucket starts splitting the jet and repeats the same behaviour as the preceding bucket.
In the time interval between the first water particle enters and the last one leaves a bucket at a
distance as indicated on Fig. 2.2, is covered.
The total deflection of the jet may be made greater for a relatively large spacing between the
buckets compared with a smaller one. Therefore the spacing between the buckets is made as big
as possible, but not larger than to secure that all water particles will hit the bucket.
With the same torque transfer to the runner from all water particles in the jet, the velocity
diagrams for the inlet and outlet respectively for one of the water particles is valid for all the
water particles of the jet. The general expression for the transferred power P
R
is therefore
P Q u c u c
R u u
= − ρ ( )
1 1 2 2
(2.11)
where Q is discharge
u
1
is the peripheral velocity of the runner where the jet hit the bucket
u
2
is the peripheral velocity of the runner at jet outlet of the runner
c
u1
is the component of the absolute velocity c
1
in the direction of u
1

c
u2
is the component of the absolute velocity c
2
in the direction of u
2

As previously mentioned the peripheral velocity u
1
= u
2
for the Pelton turbine. Moreover it is
suggested to insert the peripheral velocity corresponding to the runner diameter to which the
centre line of the jet is tangent. The power equation then becomes:
P Qu c c
R u u
= − ρ
1 1 2
( ) (2.12)
How this power varies if the rotational speed is changed, is interpreted as follows. As basis is
ascertained that the absolute velocity c
1
is constant and therefore c
u1
is constant. The discharge Q
is constant while the angular velocity ω is varied. The rotating speed u
1
= r
1
ω. From Fig. 2.2 it is
found that c
u2
varies when ω is varied. In the case u
1
= 0, i.e., the runner is at standstill, the
power P
R
= 0 and c
u2


≈ - c
u1
. When the runner is rotating, the velocity component c
u2
decreases
as the rotational speed increases and it approximates to zero when u
1
increases towards c
1
/2. At
the same time it is observed that the power P
R
increases when u
1
increases from zero.
If u
1
increases towards c
u1
, c
u2
also increases and approaches to c
u1
so that (c
u1
- c
u2
) advances
towards zero. In this case the power again approaches towards zero. This case corresponds to the
run away speed.
A closer examination shows that the transferred power P
R
to the runner has its maximum value
when c
u2
is close to zero and accordingly u
1
approximately like c
1
/2.
Regulation of the power means to regulate the discharge Q by adjustment of the needle position
to larger or smaller openings of the nozzles. For constant angular speed the regulations really
cause minor or no changes of the velocity diagrams.

2.2.3 Reaction turbines
Francis, Kaplan and Bulb turbines are the reaction turbines normally applied. The transfer of
hydraulic energy into mechanical energy is principally similar in these turbines. However, the
hydraulic design of Francis turbines differ so much from that of Kaplan and Bulb turbines that an
interpretation of the energy transfer will be given for each of these two groups.

Energy Conversion 2.7
Francis turbines
Fig. 2.3 shows an axial section through a Francis turbine with the guide vane cascade (G) and the
runner (R). The runner is fastened to the turbine shaft (S).


Fig. 2.3 Axial section through a Francis turbine. Velocity diagrams at inlet and outlet of the runner /3/

The energy transfer will be considered on the basis of the movement of one water particle along
the coaxial stream surface of revolution having a contour (a - b), in the axial section through the
turbine. To observe the movement of this particle through the turbine, a section across the guide
Energy Conversion 2.8
vanes and runner blades perpendicular to the paper plane in Fig. 2.3 is needed. This should be
made along the contour (a - b), i.e., along (a - o) through the guide vane cascade and along (1 –
2) through the runner cascade.
However, the stream surface (a - b) in Fig.2.3 has a double curvature. Therefore the surface
cannot be unfolded unless by a transformation from the real surface to a single curved surface. In
practise this can be done by using conform transformation method because the angles of
geometry then are kept unchanged from the real surface to the transformed surface.
The section through the runner cascade shown to the right on Fig. 2.3, is assumed to represent a
conform transformation onto a conical surface tangential to the contour (1 - 2).
It is assumed that the turbine is installed at the bottom of an open reservoir filled with water up
to a certain level above the guide vane cascade. The guide vane direction angle α
o
is assumed
constant and the runner is rotating with a certain angular speed ω and the water is filling all the
runner canals completely.
The consideration is assumed to start with a water particle at the inlet edge of the guide vane
cascade. Through the guide vane canal the water particle is assumed to follow the streamline in
the middle of the canal width as shown on the figure. The guide vanes are designed so that the
movement of the particle is changed from the radial direction at inlet to leave the outlet edge of
the canal with a rather large velocity component in the peripheral direction. The outlet edge of
the guide vanes is indicated with the index (o), and the absolute velocity of the water particle at
this edge is accordingly denoted c
o
. The direction of c
o
is supposed to coincide with the direction
of the vanes at the outlet of the guide vane cascade.
It is assumed that the water particle passes without friction through the ring chamber between the
guide vane outlet and the inlet of the runner. Therefore it will keep an unchanged vortex
momentum. That means rc
u
is constant, and the relation between the rotational components c
uo

and c
u1
of the absolute velocities c
o
and c
1
respectively become
c c
r
r
u uo
o
1
1
= (2.13)
where r
o
is the radius to the guide vane outlet marked (o)
r
1
is the radius to the inlet of the runner marked (1)
The peripheral velocity of the runner corresponding to radius r
1
is found by u
1
= r
1
ω.
Now the absolute velocity c
1
and the peripheral velocity u
1
are determined. The relative velocity
v
1
is then found as one side in the parallelogram where the peripheral velocity vector u
1
is the
other side and the absolute velocity vector c
1
is the diagonal. These three velocity vectors are
drawn in Fig. 2.3 and form the velocity diagram of the water particle at the inlet of the runner
canal.
During the movement through the runner canal the particle changes its direction again as shown
on the figure. By this deflection an impulse force is transferred by giving the runner a torque in
the rotational direction.
The relative streamline through the runner canal is also drawn in the Fig.2.3. At the outlet edge
of the canal on this streamline the relative velocity is denoted v
2
. The figure shows that the
relative velocity v
2
has got a rather large peripheral component in the opposite direction of the
rotation. The magnitude of v
2
can be found by means of the continuity equation
v
2
a
2
= v
1
a
1
(2.14)


Energy Conversion 2.9
where a
1
and a
2
are the areas of the runner blade canal taken perpendicular to the streamline at
inlet and outlet of the canal respectively. The direction of v
2
is the same as the outlet direction of
the runner blades. The peripheral velocity u
2
= r
2
ω where r
2
is the radius to the marked point (2)
at the runner outlet.
The velocity diagram for the water particle at the outlet edge of the runner canal can be
determined by drawing the parallelogram with the sides u
2
and v
2
from point (2) and thereafter
the diagonal which is the resultant c
2
drawn from the same point.
The passage of the water particle from point (1) to point (2) in the runner canal, needs a certain
time interval for this movement, and simultaneously the runner rotates a certain angle. By
drawing corresponding positions of the runner canal in the rotational direction and the position
of the particle in the canal for some intermediate time intervals, the absolute path of the water
particle is found. A such path is drawn on Fig. 2.3, and the absolute velocity vector is
everywhere tangent to the absolute flow path.
The absolute as well as the relative movement of all particles in the water flow through the
turbine will behave in the same way as described for the considered water particle. In a
corresponding way the same impulse and torque is supposed to be transferred to the runner from
all water particles.
The power transfer P
R
to the runner from the water flow is then
) c u - c u ( Q P
2 u 2 1 u 1 R
ρ = (2.15)
As mentioned for the impulse turbine, c
2
2
/2 represents the energy at outlet. However, during the
passage of the draft tube a fraction of this energy is recovered by retardation of the flow velocity,
but a flow friction loss occurs also in the draft tube which again means a slight reduction of the
the recovered energy.
A discussion of Equation (2.15) may be carried out in the same way as done for the Pelton
turbine. Examples are drawn in Fig. 2.3 of the velocity diagrams at inlet and outlet of the runner
respectively for three angular velocities, ω = ω
normal
, ω < ω
normal
and ω > ω
normal
. A difference
should however, be remarked that when the power is near maximum, u
1
and c
u1
nearly have the
same magnitude, while u
1
is approximately half of c
u1
for the Pelton turbine.
For regulating the discharge Q of the turbine the width of the guide vane canals must be varied.
An increase of Q means to adjust the guide vanes to a larger angle α
o
and a decrease of Q means
an adjustment in the opposite direction. This regulation causes corresponding changes in the
direction of the absolute velocity c
1
. Accordingly the velocity diagrams will change.
Both the variation of the angular velocity ω and the regulation of the discharge Q involve
changes in the direction and magnitude of the relative velocity v
1
. The relative velocity v
2
varies
accordingly in magnitude with the regulation of Q. Moreover the difference (u
1
c
u1
- u
2
c
2
) and
thereby also the power transfer, is entirely dependent of these changes.
The most efficient power transfer however, is obtained for the operating condition when the
relative velocity v
1
coincide with blade angle β
1
at the runner inlet and simultaneously the
rotational component c
u2
≈ 0. Therefore the hydraulic lay out of all reaction turbine runners are
based on the data of rotational speed n, discharge Q and net head H
n
for which the optimal
efficiency is wanted.

Energy Conversion 2.10
Kaplan and Bulb turbines
The hydraulic design of Kaplan and Bulb turbine runners is quite similar while the flow direction
through the guide vane cascades is radial in Kaplan turbines and approximately axial in
Bulb turbines. This means no significant difference for an interpretation of the flow through
these turbines. Therefore an illustration of the flow through a Kaplan is valid also for a Bulb
turbine.
Fig. 2.4 shows an axial section through a Kaplan turbine with the guide vane cascade (G), runner
(R) and the shaft (S).
In the same way as for Francis turbines the consideration of the flow through the Kaplan turbine
is based on the movement of one water particle along the flow surface with the contour (a - b) as
shown on Fig. 2.4. This particle is given a flow direction in the guide vane canal before it enters
the runner canal. The particle movement through the guide vane canal and runner canal is shown
to the right in the figure. The canal section across guide vane cascade is radial (perpendicular to
the plane) along contour (a - o) and across the runner blades the section is cylindrical along the
contour (1 - 2).
The considerations are further based on a constant guide vane direction angle α
o
and constant
angular velocity ω. The particle flow through the turbine is quite analogous to that described for
the Francis turbine. Therefore the description is focused mainly on the velocity diagrams.
The fluid flow in the axisymmetrical hollow space between outlet of the guide vane canal
marked (o), and the inlet of the runner marked (1), is denoted as free vortex. The flow is again
assumed free of losses along the flow path. The relation between the rotational component c
uo
of
the absolute velocity c
o
and the rotational component c
u1
of the absolute velocity c
1
then
becomes
c c
r
r
u uo
o
1
1
= or c c
u
u
u uo
o
1
1
= (2.16)
The peripheral velocities are u
1
= r
1
ω and u
2
= r
2
ω. By the given angle α
o
at the outlet of the
guide vane canal and the angle β
2
at the outlet of the runner canal all data are now prepared for
drawing of the velocity diagrams at inlet and outlet of the runner. The drawing of these diagrams
is as described for Francis turbines, and in Fig. 2.4 examples are shown for three different
angular speeds, ω = ω
normal
, ω <ω
normal
and ω >ω
normal
.
The designation ω = ω
normal
means again the rotational speed for which the turbine obtain the
lowest energy loss at outlet represented mainly by c
2
2
/2. This is also the operating condition for
which the turbine obtain the highest hydraulic efficiency for the given angle α
o
of the guide vane
canal.
The movement that is considered for a single water particle through the turbine, is an illustration
also for all the other particles in the total water flow. As mentioned for Francis turbines that is an
assumption for Kaplan and Bulb turbines as well that all particles transfer the same impulse and
torque to the runner. The power transfer from the flow is therefore generally expressed by
Equation (2.15)
) c u - c u ( Q P
2 u 2 1 u 1 R
ρ =
A look at Fig. 2.4 indicate also that the peripheral velocity u
2
= u
1
. The power equation then
becomes
Energy Conversion 2.11
P
R
= ρQu
1
(c
u1
- c
u2
) (2.17)







Fig. 2.4 Axial section through a Kaplan turbine. Velocity diagrams at inlet and outlet /3/
An interpretation of power regulation by changing the discharge Q with adjustment of the
openings of the guide vane cascade follows the same reasoning as for Francis turbines.
However,
Energy Conversion 2.12
in Kaplan and Bulb turbines the direction of the runner blades can also be varied. This property
will be further interpreted in Chapter 3.
2.2.4 The main equation of turbines
Losses along a flow path
The flow through turbines is exposed to energy losses. In reaction turbines the flow friction and
change of flow directions in the guide vane cascade, the runner and the draft tube mainly cause
these losses. According to the turbulent flow conditions these energy losses are defined
/4/
by
ς
1
1
2
2
c
is the energy losses in the guide vane cascade
ς
2
2
2
2
v
is the energy losses in the runner
(1+ς
3
3
2
2
)
c
is the energy losses in the draft tube
The coefficients ζ
1
, ζ
2
and ζ
3
are assumed as constants
/4/
, but their values depend on the
operating conditions of the turbine. In general this dependence behaves so that ζ
1
and ζ
2
have a
smaller variation than ζ
3
when operating conditions changes. Values of general validity of these
coefficients cannot be given. However, at favourable operating conditions for a reaction turbine
one can estimate values of ζ
1
and ζ
2
in the region 0.06 - 0.15 and of ζ
3
= 0.1 - 0. 3.
In addition to the losses by friction and changed directions, so-called impact losses can occur at
the inlet of the runner. These losses which are designated by E
I
2
, are introduced when the
relative velocity vector of the flow enters the runner with another direction than the inlet
direction of the blade.
The total sum of the losses along the flow path is
h
L
=
[ ]
1
2
1
1 1
2
2 2
2
3 3
2 2
ς ς ς c v c E
I
+ + + + ( ) (2.18)
The available net head for the turbine is designated H
n
. The specific energy head transferred to
the runner is then
h
R
= H
n
- h
L
(2.19)

Note
When the operating conditions by regulations deviate quite a lot from the design operating
conditions, the same assumptions of the magnitude of the loss coefficients along the flow paths
do not hold completely.

The main equation of turbines
The total available power of a plant is
P QgH
n n
= ρ (2.20)
The net head H
n
is defined at the inlet of the turbine referred to the level of the tail water of

reaction turbines or the outlet of the nozzle of a jet turbine.
Energy Conversion 2.13
The power transfer from the fluid to the turbine runner is
P Q u c u c
R u u
= − ρ ( )
1 1 2 2
(2.21)
The ratio between these powers
) c u c u (
gH
1
P
P
2 u 2 1 u 1
n n
R
h
− = = η (2.22)
which is defined as hydraulic efficiency.
The following rearrangement of Equation (2.22) is called the main turbine equation
) c u c u (
g
1
H
2 u 2 1 u 1 n h
− = η (2.23)
Another version of the main turbine equation is obtained by substituting for u
1
c
u1
and u
2
c
u2
from
the velocity triangles respectively

g 2
E
g 2
c
) 1 (
g 2
u
g 2
u
g 2
v
g 2
v
) 1 (
g 2
c
g 2
c
) 1 ( H
2
I
2
3
3
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1 n
+ ς + + − + − ς + + − ς + = (2.24)
This last version expresses the total sum of the energy transfer in the runner and the head losses
in the guide vane cascade, the runner and the draft tube as equal to the net head H
n
. For Pelton
turbines however, it should be remarked that the two last terms in equation (2.24) are omitted,
i.e., these terms do not occur in the energy conversion analysis for these turbines..

2.3 A brief outline of the hydraulic design of turbines
The axial flow out of reaction turbines
By the considerations of the flow along the stream surface of revolution having a contour given
in Fig. 2.3, the main obtained result was the main turbine equation which is expressed in several
equations (2.23 - 2.24). For the conditions being the design basis of a turbine, the major
objective of the design is to obtain the same hydraulic efficiency for any flow surface of similar
properties as the surface with the contour a - b, through the turbine over the whole width of the
flow space.
To deal with this design process in detail is not the aim in this text. Therefore only a brief
description of it will be given. Principally this will be about the hydraulic designing.
One of the first steps in the design is to form the contours of the axial section of the turbine. It
may start with a trial of the form and thereafter a computational verification of the distribution of
the meridional flow velocity through the axial section. The determination of the meridional
velocity profile is based on the law of irrotational flow

dc
dn
c
R
z z
= − (2.25)
where c
z
is the meridional component of the absolute velocity
n is the length parameter of the width perpendicular to the flow surface
R is the radius of the curvature of the flow path contour
When the velocity profile is determined according to equation (2.25) a control of how far this is
correct, has to be done by use of the continuity
Energy Conversion 2.14
dQ rc dn
z
= 2π (2.26)
equation where r is the radius to the actual position on the flow surface. The examination of a
correct flow distribution may be done in the following way. The axial flow section is thought to




Fig. 2.5 Axial section of a Francis runner divided in four subsections by five numbered paths /3/
be divided in a certain number of coaxial subsections through the turbine as shown on Fig. 2.5,
where the number of subsections is four. Each of these subsections shall represent a fraction of
the total discharge Q, that means one quart of Q. To obtain this the velocity profiles of c
z
from
equation (2.25) are tested and corrected by use of equation (2.26) until the discharge is the same
in all the subsections. Further it is important to check that the shape of the axial section performs
an even or smooth meridional velocity c
z
so that it does not increase or decrease disorderly in
magnitude along the flow path.
Runner canals and blade forms
The shaping of the blades and the runner canals is a topic task for skilled designers. This process
is again a combination of theoretical computations, experiences, certain criteria and rules.
As one of the first steps an estimation of the number of blades has to be done. The turbine
manufacturers have normally specific criteria of their own for this choice. But there are also
some general requirements that have to be satisfied. For example the smallest openings between
blades must be large enough to let expected firm contamination in the flow run freely through.
Further the designers have to give the blades a shape based on control procedures so that the
energy conversion in the runner for the whole flow path is satisfied.
To have an idea of some details in this type of design work, it may be beneficial to have a look at
a section through a few pairs of blades and the canals they constitute. At first a glance back on
Figs. 2.3 or 2.4, gives examples of blade forms and canals. In some of these canals a streamline
is drawn. This streamline served as basis for the considerations being carried out on the
kinematics of the hydraulic energy transfer in reaction turbines. Furthermore this streamline was
assumed to represent the average velocity in the corresponding cross-sections along the canals.
Now a look in more detail on the flow conditions through the runner canals will show velocity
Energy Conversion 2.15
distributions over the cross-sections as indicated on Fig. 2.6. To determine the velocity profile in
the respective cross-sections of the canals, the following differential equation may be used
δ ω − − = cos 2
R
v
dn
dv
(2.27)

where
v is the relative velocity in the
runner canal
R is the curvature radius of the
relative streamline
ω is the angular speed of the
turbine
δ is the angle between the turbine
axis and the perpendicular to the
cone surface in which the section
through the runner blade canal are
depicted
n is the length parameter of the
width of the canal perpendicular
to the streamlines.
The estimations of the velocity
profiles according to equation (2.27)
have again to be examined by means
of the equation of continuity.
In general one can say that the blades should never be formed with particular sharp curvature. It
is considered as ideal to give the blades a smooth form between the inlet and the outlet of the
canals. This may often hit upon opposing requirements that lead to judgements and compromises
between blades of short length and sharp curvature on one side and long blades with a smooth
curvature on the other. Long canals are exposed to larger viscous friction losses than the short
ones, while short canals are exposed to larger impulse and impact losses. The best solution is to
be found somewhere in between these extreme limits. In such cases skilled designers are of
course the right experts to do the job.

Pelton buckets
The design of buckets of Pelton runners
/2/
involves preliminary drafts of the hydraulic form of
the buckets followed by computational and experimental examination and adjustment of the draft
/2/
.
To have an idea of how the hydraulic modelling of the buckets may be done, Fig. 2.7 shows a
calculated flow picture over a Pelton bucket at a certain moment. This analysis is based on the
fact that the accelerations of the fluid particles must be perpendicular to the surface of the water
flow in the bucket at any moment. The traces of fluid particles can then be found as shown on
the figure. The following equations are used to find the accelerations and traces:


Fig. 2.6 Section through runner blades. An example of the skew
velocity profile
Energy Conversion 2.16
a
d x
dt
R u
x y
= + +
2
2
2
2 ω φ ω cos (2.28)
where cosφ = x/R and R = runner radius
a
d y
dt
R u
y x
= + +
2
2
2
2 ω φ ω sin (2.29)
a
d z
dt
z
=
2
2
(2.30)















Fig. 2.7 Flow traces over a Pelton bucket at a certain moment (calculated) /2/

2.4 Efficiency
The equation of hydraulic efficiency, Eq. (2.22), expresses
η
h
R
n
P
P
=
The power transfer to the runner is further exposed to additional losses before the resulting
power P is transferred to the generator shaft. These losses are composed of mechanical friction in
the bearings and stuffing boxes, viscous friction from the fluid between the outside of the runner
and the covers of the reaction turbines and ventilation or air friction losses of the runner in
impulse turbines.
Through the space between the covers and the outside of the runner a leakage flow also passes
according to the clearances of the labyrinth seals, from the inlet rim to the suction side of the
runner. Some energy is also required for operation of the turbine governor, tapping water for
sealing boxes, ejectors and cooling of bearings and the governor oil.


Energy Conversion 2.17
On account of all these losses the turbine efficiency is always lower than the hydraulic
efficiency. Therefore, at the discharge Q and the power P transferred from the turbine shaft to
generator shaft, the turbine efficiency is
η
ρ
= =
P
P
P
QgH
n n
(2.31)
Usually the maximum efficiency point which is represented by the best operating conditions, is
reaching values of say η = 0.93 to 0.95 of the larger and best reaction turbines. Corresponding
values estimated for the hydraulic efficiency η
h
= 0.95 to 0.97. For the best Pelton turbines η
max

reaches values about 0.92

References
1. Alming, K.: Hydraulics, basic course lectures at NTNU 1953 (in Norwegian),
Vannkraftlaboratoriet NTNU, Trondheim, Norway.
2. Brekke, H.: A brief presentation of the KVAERNER Water Turbine. Production with a
special description of the Pelton turbines. Presented in Bogota, Columbia, 7.November 1978.
3. Kjølle, A.: Water Power Machines (in Norwegian), Universitetsforlaget, Oslo, Norway 1980.
4. Sundby, G.: Water Power Machines, abstracts from lectures at NTNU 1938 (in Norwegian),
Vannkraftlaboratoriet NTNU, Trondheim, Norway.
Bibliography
1. Raabe, J.: Hydraulische Maschinen und Anlagen. Zweite Auflage der Teile 1 bis 4 in einem
Band. VDI-Verlag GmbH 1989.
2. Wislicenus, G. F.: Fluid mechanics of Turbomachinery, Volume 1 and 2, Dover Publication,
New York, USA, 1965.




















Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.1
CHAPTER 3
Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics
Introduction
This chapter takes into account similarity properties of hydrodynamic machines. That means to
describe the performance of a given machine by comparison with the experimentally known
performance of another machine. This other machine may be a model with geometrically
similar fluid passages, or it may be the same machine with somewhat modified operating
conditions such as a change of speed. Such comparisons are simple and reliable, as they are
limited to cases in which not only the fluid passages but also the flow inside these passages can
be considered geometrically similar.
3.1 Fundamental similarity considerations
3.1.1 Similarity relations
Reduced parameters
Principally every turbine is designed according to the available discharge Q, net head H
n
and a
chosen optimal rotational speed n. These parameters however, differ over wide ranges from
one site to the other.
For this variability it is very useful to have similarity relations at hand for comparison means.
In the following it is therefore, introduced some ratio parameters which are designated as
reduced quantities
/7/
transferred from corresponding dimensional quantities.
The main turbine Equation (2.24) is rearranged by dividing it through by the net head H
n

1 1
2 2
1
2 2 2 2
1
2 2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
3
3
2 2
= + − + + − + − + + + ( ) ( ) ( ) ς ς ς
c
gH
c
gH
v
gH
v
gH
u
gH
u
gH
c
gH
E
gH
n n n n n n n
I
n

(3.1)
In this way all components of the equation have become dimensionless and all energy
quantities are expressed as fractions of the total net energy. Since all components on the right
hand side of Equation (3.1) are expressions of velocity heads, it is convenient to define
c
c
gH
n

=
2
as reduced absolute velocity
u
u
gH
n

=
2
as reduced peripheral velocity
Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.2
v
v
gH
n

=
2
as reduced relative velocity
Velocity diagrams based on dimensional values of the velocities are valid for only one single
value of the net head H
n
. If reduced velocities however, present the corresponding velocity
diagrams, these diagrams keep a similar shape. The velocity diagrams based on reduced
velocities are therefore beneficial because these diagrams are valid for any value of H
n
.
Additional useful reduced quantities are:
h
h
H
p
n

= is reduced piezometric head
Q
Q
gH
n

=
2
is reduced discharge
ω
ω

=
2gH
n
is reduced angular velocity
Insertion of the reduced parameters in the version (2.23) of the main turbine equation gives
η

= 2(u
1
c
u1
- u
2
c
u2
) (3.2)
A turbine operating at different heads
Similar flow conditions through a turbine for all values of the net head is prevailing when all
reduced velocities are constant. This statement is based on the assumption that the coefficients
of losses are independent of the net head H
n
. This is valid if the magnitude of H
n
does not
become extremely large and the pressure in the turbine and the draft tube does not fall below
vapour pressure.
Moreover, for similar flow conditions the following relations are fullfilled
- the angular velocity
ω
H
n
is constant (3.3)
- the discharge
Q
H
n
is constant (3.4)
Geometrically similar, but different size of the turbines
Similar flow conditions in geometrically similar turbines create common reduced velocity
diagrams for corresponding positions in the turbines.
Taking the ratio between corresponding dimensions may compare the size of geometrically
similar turbines. For similar operating conditions the following relations are then valid:
- for the reduced angular velocity the product ω

D is constant (3.5)
- for the reduced discharge the ratio
Q
D

2
is constant (3.6)
By combining these two equations for elimination of D, is obtained
Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.3
ω


Q is constant (3.7)
In these considerations the efficiency of the turbines has been assumed the same. This is an
approximation, but deviation between model turbines and the large prototypes are corrected for
by upscaling formulas.
3.1.2 Speed number
The reduced discharge Q has the dimension of an area, and gives a direct measure of the size
of
the turbine. The reduced discharge however, is dependent of the guide vane openings and the
angular velocity. Therefore it is reasonable to choose the reduced discharge at the best
operating conditions, i.e., maximum efficiency point, of the turbine as its capacity
/7/
. The
capacity is designated with a star as
*
Q. To designate the best efficiency point accordingly,
other parameters too are marked in the same way so as
*
ω,
*
Q,
*
c,
*
v etc..
The capacity is as stated only a measure of the size of the turbine and does not give any basis
for the shape of the axial section of the runner. To get a criterion for the shape the similarity
relations must be applied. Further the notation unit of turbine size is introduced. This unit
means that a capacity equal to 1 is unit area.
A turbine with capacity
*
Q and diameter D has a geometrically similar unit turbine with a
corresponding diameter D
U
and capacity 1. By a given set of operating conditions the
considered turbine has a reduced discharge Q and a reduced angular velocity ω. The
corresponding unit turbine for the similar conditions has a reduced discharge Q
U
and reduced
angular velocity Ω. According to the similarity relations Equations (3.3 and 3.4):

D
D
Q
Q
U
U
= =





ω

At the best efficiency point where the capacity of the unit turbine is 1, the unit turbine has the
reduced angular velocity

* * *

− −

= ω Q (3.8)
which is denoted the speed number
/7/
. The speed number is dimensionless and all geometrically
similar turbines have the same speed number.
Admission
The admission or capacity ratio is defined as



= κ
Q
Q
*
at the angular reduced speed *ω of the best operating point. (3.9)
The admission is a quantity proportional to the opening of the guide vane cascade of turbines,
and it is dimensionless. Its value is κ = 1.0 for the best operating point, i.e., for Q = *Q and ω =
*ω. Some turbines are designed to operate with overload. That means the turbine can operate
with a maximum discharge larger than *Q. This maximum discharge is designated

Q. The
corresponding value of the admission

κ =

Q/*Q for ω = *ω.
Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.4
Note
The speed number may also be expressed by the application of the parameters
*
Q, H
n
and
*
n
directly

4
3
n
* *
*
) gH 2 ( 30
Q n π
= Ω

(3.10)
Another classification parameter than the speed number is also in use. That is the specific speed
defined in two ways
n
n Q
H
q
n
=
3 4 /
or n
n P
H
s
n
=

5 4 /
(3.11)
where n is the rotational speed
Q is discharge at the best efficiency point
H
n
is the net head at the best efficiency point


P is the maximum turbine power
These two expressions of specific speed are not dimensionless, which is the fact for the speed
number. The relations between these specific speeds and the speed number are
n
q
= 89
*
Ω and n
s
= 379
• •

η κ
*
Ω (3.12)
where

η is the efficiency at maximum turbine power


κ is the admission at maximum turbine power
3.1.3 Classification of turbines
The speed number is a parameter for classification of the turbines. This means that the different
types of turbines group themselves in certain ranges of speed numbers. The ordinary turbines
cover ranges as specifically marked on a speed number scale as shown in Fig. 3.1.


Fig. 3.1 Water turbines classified by speed number
*

A main purpose for turbine design is to obtain an optimal adaptation to the plant conditions.
When the discharge Q and net head H
n
are known, this involve choice of the rotational speed n.

Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.5
The criterion then is to choose n equal to the maximum synchronous speed for which the
turbine-generator unit becomes economically optimal.
According to such guidelines Pelton turbines are built for speed numbers
*
Ω < 0.22, that means
for plants with relatively low discharge Q and the largest net heads H
n
.
Qualitatively spoken Francis turbines are applied when the discharge Q is larger and the net
head H
n
lower than suitable for Pelton turbines. The range of Francis turbines 0.2 <
*
Ω < 1.25.
The lower part of the speed numbers represents the so-called radial runners, which have a
limit range 2.0 < D
1
/D
s
< 2.5.
For increasing discharge Q related to decreasing net head H
n
the speed number increases. Then
the relation D
1
/b
1
between diameter D
1
and the width b
1
decreases and the outlet edge of the
blades is positioned farther downstream in the runner.
For speed numbers *Ω > 1.0 the discharge Q is as large and the net head H
n
as low that the
choice has to be Kaplan or Bulb turbines. However, the region 1.0 <
*
Ω < 1.25 may be
characterised as choosing zone of either Francis or Kaplan turbine.
3.1.4 Performance characteristics
Introduction
By theoretical analysis and available methods for computation it is not possible, even by
advanced approaches, to obtain exact results of the real flow state and the performance of
turbomachines. The accuracy will be poor or unreliable especially for operating conditions far
from the design point.
Therefore experimental research is necessary to carry out in laboratories on models of the
prototype turbines. Results from these model tests are valid for the prototype through the
similarity relations and certain upscaling formula for the efficiency, provided that the model
size is larger than certain minimum international standardised values. A model turbine has to
be geometric similar to the prototype in all hydraulic passages from the turbine inlet to the
outlet of the draft tube.
A standard for model testing of water turbines is the International Electrotechnical Commission
(IEC) Recommendation, Publication 193. In general the code applies to any type of reaction or
impulse turbine tested under prescribed laboratory conditions and may accordingly be used for
acceptance tests of the prototype turbines as well.
Determination of performance characteristics
Parameters to be measured are those determining the power P
n
delivered to the turbine and the
power P transferred to the turbine shaft. These powers determine the efficiency, which is
expressed in Chapter 2, Equation (2.31):
η =
P
P
n

where P
n
= ρQgH
n
is the hydraulic power supplied to the turbine
P = Tω is the power out of the turbine shaft
Q is the discharge
H
n
is the net head
T is the torque
Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.6
ω is the angular velocity
ρ is the density of water
g is the acceleration of gravity
For the determination of η the hydraulic parameters Q and H
n
, and the mechanical parameters
T and ω have to be measured in each test point. For the density it is usually sufficient to
ascertain the value according to the measured fluid temperature and pressure. The acceleration
of gravity g is ascertained according to latitude and altitude.
According to the regulation facilities of the turbines there are also some turbine parameters to
be measured. These are the opening of the guide vane canals and in addition the slope of the
runner blades on Kaplan and Bulb turbines.
The testing procedure is to carry out these efficiency measurements for certain points within an
estimated range of operation of the turbine by stepwise changes of the rotational speed and the
turbine parameters.
The measured data has to be treated for presentation of the turbine performance curves in a
two-dimensional diagram. The efficiency is calculated for each test point directly from the
measured data. The measured discharge Q, rotational speed n and power P are recalculated to
conditions for net head H
n
as constant according to the similarity relations. The resulting data
are then ready to be set up in diagrams.
One principle for setting up diagrams is shown in Fig. 3.2. There are two diagrams, with η-
curves in the upper one and Q-curves in the lower one, both with the rotational speed n as
abscissa. Each of the curves in both diagrams is marked with a corresponding value of the
admission κ = Q/
*
Q. For this illustration of the treating procedure only four κ-values are
indicated.
The optimal point on each η-curve is marked. The η
max.
-point may be determined by drawing a
side projection of the η-optimal-points as shown to the right on Fig.3.2. This point is marked
by projection into the Q - n-diagram, and the best operating point of the turbine is then found
by the indicated values *Q and *n.
In normal practise the presentation of one diagram for η and one for Q as functions of n is
further worked out in one single diagram. This is done by converting the efficiency curves in
the upper diagram of Fig. 3.2, into corresponding curves where η is constant in the Q - n-
diagram as shown. The result obtained is a hill chart of efficiencies of the turbine, and this
presentation is designated performance diagram.
Performance diagrams based on reduced parameters
The results from the efficiency measurements of a model turbine can be converted to the
geometric unit turbine on the basis of the similarity relations. First may be determined:
turbine capacity
*
*
Q
Q
gH
n

=
2
(3.13)
reduced angular speed
*
*
ω
ω

=
2gH
n
(3.14)
Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.7

Fig. 3.2 Sketched drawing of the performance diagram of a turbine /5/
speed number
* * *
Q = ω Ω (3.15)
where *Ω also represents the angular speed of the geometric similar unit turbine at the best
efficiency point.
Considering now an arbitrary point of operation of the test turbine, the reduced discharge
through the unit turbine corresponding to this point is
Q
Q
Q U −


=
*
(3.16)
For the performance diagram it is reasonable to introduce Q/*Q instead of Q for the ordinate.
For the abscissa it is adequate to introduce the ratio between the unit turbine angular speed Ω
and the speed number *Ω so that







=
* *
ω
ω
(3.17)


Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.8
By this presentation of the performance diagram is obtained an efficiency hill chart which is
valid for all turbines geometric similar to the unit turbine.
3.1.5 Cavitation and suction head
Cavitation
When the pressure in a liquid is lowered down to vapour pressure, cavities are created in the
liquid, i.e., bubbles filled with air and vapour. This may occur in the low-pressure regions of
the turbines, especially at the outlet of runners and inlet of the draft tube in reaction turbines.
However, the cavity bubbles will again collapse when coming into regions of higher pressure.
These collapses produce a strong characteristic noise, and bubbles collapsing on surfaces of
runner blades, runner discs, draft tube wall and so on, may damage the surfaces by a more or
less terrific erodation. The whole range of turbine operation should therefore be free of
cavitation. In practise that means to estimate maximum suction head.
Suction head
The conception of suction head is described in the IEC Publication 41.This publication presents
definitions and specifications of the net positive suction energy NPSE and the net positive
suction head NPSH
For normal calculations it is sufficient to evaluate the suction head as schematically shown in
the Fig. 3.3 for different arrangements of the turbine axis. The suction head h
s
is defined as
positive when measured upwards and as negative downwards from the tail water level. This
suction head however, does not alone determine the pressure and the cavitation conditions. But
by application of the Bernoulli’s equation the pressure head system can be expressed as follows
H h h
c
g
h
A v s s
s
= + + − + ( ) 1
2
2
ς ∆ (3.18)



Fig. 3.3 Specification of suction head h
s
of reaction turbines /5/
where h
v
is the vapour pressure head
H
A
is the atmospheric pressure head
h
s
is the suction head
c
s
is the mean velocity in the narrowest cross section area of the draft tube
ς
s
is the coefficient of the total head loss in the draft tube
∆h is the resulting pressure head above the head of the vapour pressure
Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.9
The pressure head ∆h is just the pressure which is defined as net positive suction head NPSH.
According to Equation (3.18) this is
NPSH H h h
c
g
A v s s
s
= − − − − ( ) 1
2
2
ς (3.19)
Cavitation limits
The performance of a turbine under operating conditions with cavitation, can be experimentally
investigated in several ways. Depending on the physical phenomenon as basis for the
investigation, the following methods of detecting cavitation may be mentioned:
• By the change of the hydraulic performance of the machine as expressed by head,
power, capacity or efficieny.
• By visual or photographic observation of the vapour pockets or bubbles on the runner
blades.
• By observation and, if possible, measurements of the noise and vibration accompanying
the operation of the machine.
Of these methods only the first one has so far given proper reliable results of practical value.
On the other hand, it is also recognised that a change in the hydraulic performance is not a
sufficient reliable indication of cavitation. The reason is that appreciable noise and other
indications of cavitation have at times been observed without accompanying changes in any of
the performance characteristics.
Testing of cavitation in a turbine has to be carried out on a model in a laboratory. The NPSH of
the turbine is gradually reduced under otherwise constant operating conditions. As long as the
efficiency η, the discharge Q and the power P of the turbine remain at constant values, no
cavitation occurs. Conditions with cavitation occur as soon as η, Q and P start decreasing and
the limit value of NPSH is then reached.
Similarity relations to include cavitation
Provided that similar hydraulic cavitating flow remain unchanged relative to the flow canals,
the relations of hydraulic similar flow, i.e. Equations (3.3) and (3.4), are valid also for flow
including cavitation.
The net head H
n
in the Equations (3.3) and (3.4) may then be replaced by NPSH. The law of
Thoma is introduced
σ =
NPSH
H
is constant (3.20)
which is valid for similar cavitating conditions in turbines and pumps.
3.2 Pelton turbines
3.2.1 Main hydraulic dimensions
Pelton turbines represent the lowest region of speed numbers and may extend a tiny overlap in
the lower end of the Francis turbine range. The reduced angular velocity of a Pelton turbine is
ω = 2u
1
/D
1
. If the turbine has one single jet with a reduced velocity c
1
and a jet diameter d, then
the reduced discharge becomes Q = (π/4)d
2
c
1
. Correspondingly the speed number with one jet
Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.10

* * *
*
*

− −



= = ω
π
Q
u
D
d c
2
4
1 2
1
(3.21)
Intended values of the reduced velocities are
c
1
= 0.98 and
*
u
1
= 0.485
The largest speed number with one jet is in practise limited to
*
Ω = 0.1. This high value is not
recommended because maximum jet diameter

d has to be kept

d/D < 0.1. An example shows
that at maximum admission

κ = 1.4 and

d/D = 0.1, one jet makes a speed number

Ω = 0.085.
The maximum number of jets is considered as six. In this case the speed number becomes


Ω = 0.085⋅√6 = 0.21
Pelton turbines can be applied up to heads around 2000 m, however with decreased speed
number because that is favourable in regard to avoid high stresses and fatigue problems and
cavitation damage.
3.2.2 Pelton bucket dimensions
To indicate intended values as a guide to the bucket dimensions a specifying concept
/7/
is given
on Fig. 3.4. According to the specifications on this figure the following values should be
acceptable.
B = 2.8 to 3.4⋅

d
L = 2.3 to 2.7⋅

d
x = 1.0 to 1.1⋅

d
y = 1.3 to 1.6⋅

d
z = 1.1 to 1.2⋅

d
Bucket section View perpendicular Velocity triangles at
longitudinal to the jet the inlet and outlet
of the jet of the bucket

Fig. 3.4 Pelton turbine, indication of main dimensions and the bucket form /5/
3.2.3 Performance diagram
Fig. 3.5 shows an example of a performance diagram for a unit Pelton turbine with speed
number *Ω = 0.04. That means a one jet turbine and this diagram is valid for all geometric
similar Pelton turbines with the same speed number. The efficiency is represented by relative
efficiency curves
η = η/η
max
.
Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.11
In the performance diagram it is of major interest to examine the efficiency η as a function of
the discharge Q along the ordinate for ω/*ω =1.0. It is then observed a rather steep progress
from a relative efficiency η = 0 at Q ≈ 0 up to η = 0.9 at Q ≈ 0.25*Q. Further it increases to η =
0.95 at Q ≈ 0.5*Q, and 0.95 < η < 1.0 for the interval 0.5*Q < Q < 1.5*Q.
Another important characteristic is the
runaway speed. This can be read in the
diagram for η = 0 at Q/*Q = 1.0. The
read value ω/*ω ≈ 1.75, which means a
runaway speed n = 1.75*n.
The admission κ can be read along the
ordinate of ω/*ω = 1.0. In diagram Fig.
3.5 there are indicated three κ-curves,
and these curves are lines parallel to the
abscissa axis and therefore independent
of the runner speed. This is always the
case in Pelton turbines because the jet
passes through the free open air from
the nozzle to the bucket.
The shape of the hill chart is naturally
dependent on the speed number. This
dependency however, does appear only
with relatively small changes.
3.3 Francis turbines
3.3.1 Main hydraulic dimensions
Francis turbines are located in the region of speed numbers 0.2 <
*
Ω < 1,25. Hydraulic design
of these turbines is based on reduced quantities. Intended values, which may be applied as a
guide of the reduced velocities, are given as functions of the speed number in the diagram Fig.
3.6. Reduced peripheral velocity
*
u
1
corresponds to the largest diameter D
1
of the runner
cascade. Reduced meridional velocity
*
c
s
corresponds to the smallest cross section of the
runner outlet and reduced meridional velocity
*
c
oz
corresponds to the diameter of the outlet
edge of the guide vanes. In the diagram it is shown a curve of the admission

κ , which indicate
values of the opening of the guide vane cascade for the admission at maximum discharge and
maximum turbine output power. As shown in the diagram, this parameter decreases as the
speed number increases. The reason is that runners of low speed numbers perform a more even
efficiency curve than runners of high-speed numbers. For the extreme high-speed numbers of
Francis turbines

κ approaches values between 1.1 and 1.2.
The range of speed numbers for Francis turbines indicates that they may be applied for heads
within a wide range. Turbines of the lowest speed numbers are today built for heads up to 700
m, and turbines of the highest speed numbers may be built for any low head of some few
meters.
3.3.2 Performance diagrams
The Figures 3.7 and 3.8 show two examples of performance diagrams of unit Francis turbines,


Fig. 3.5 Performance diagram
/5/
of a Pelton turbine,
*Ω = 0.04

Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.12


Fig. 3.6 Hydraulic design data for Francis turbines (intended values as a guide) /4/
the one on Fig. 3.7 with a speed number
*
Ω = 0.25 and the other on Fig. 3.8 with a speed
number*Ω = 0.75. The shapes of the hill chart of these two diagrams indicate considerable
differences. Both the “copiousness” and “width” on the top of the hill chart decrease all the
way from the low speed Pelton turbines to the most high-speed Francis turbines.










Fig. 3.7 Performance diagram
/5/
of a Francis turbine Fig.3.8 Performance diagram
/5/
of a Francis turbine
*Ω = 0.25 *Ω = 0.75



Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.13
The relative efficiency η as a function of reduced discharge Q along the ordinate through ω/*ω
= 1.0, is not so steep for Francis turbines as for the Pelton turbine on Fig. 3.5. For the speed
number *Ω = 0.25 the efficiency η increases from η = 0 at Q/*Q = 0.1 up to η = 0.9 about
Q/*Q = 0.55 and further to η = 0.95 about Q/*Q = 0.62.
For the speed number *Ω = 0.75 the efficiency increases from η = 0 at Q/*Q = 0.125 up to η =
0.9 about Q/*Q = 0.62 and further to η = 0.95 about Q/*Q = 0.82.
As a conclusion it may be pronounced that the efficiency characteristics of hydro turbines
become more and more pointed with increasing speed number.
It is important also to notice that the idle running discharge increases with an increasing speed
number. As seen from the diagrams the reduced idle running discharge has the value Q/*Q =
0.1 for *Ω = 0.25 and Q/*Q = 0.125 for *Ω = 0.75.
The runaway speed increases also with increasing speed number. For *Ω = 0.25 and κ = 1.0 the
runaway speed is about n = 1.5*n, and for *Ω = 0.75 and κ = 1.0 the running speed is about n
=1.8*n.
Another quality to notice is the different courses of the admission κ-curves in the performance
diagrams on the Figures 3.7 and 3.8 respectively.
3.3.3 Cavitation, suction head and reaction ratio
In Section 3.1.5 cavitation and suction head was considered and Thoma coefficient σ
introduced. This is here supplemented by a method being used by a turbine manufacturer, to
determine the NPSH.
The peripheral velocity u
2
at the outlet of the runner is a significant parameter for estimation of
the tendency of cavitation and finally the setting of the turbine
/2/
. Therefore the speed number
and the NPSH are converted to expressions with a dependency of the velocity u
2
.
The speed number expressed by the reduced velocity u
2
and blade angle β
2
at the runner outlet
is

* /
tan( ) Ω
− −
= − u
2
3 2
2
π π β (3.22)
An equation for NPSH is established as follows

[ ] [ ]
NPSH H u a b
u
g
a b
n
= − + = − +

• •
2
2 2 2
2
2
2
2 2
2
2
κ π β κ π β tan ( ) tan ( ) (3.23)
where 1 < a < 1.2 and 0.05 < b < 0.5 depending on the speed number, blade number and blade
geometry.

κ is the admission of maximum discharge.
According to Equation (3.23) a given setting of a Francis turbine (and also for a Kaplan
turbine) appoints a limit both for the speed number *Ω and the peripheral velocity u
2
at the rim
of the outlet of the runner due to tendency of cavitation.
For the blade loading and cavitation occurrence the reaction ratio is also a very important
parameter. The reaction ratio is describing the pressure drop from the runner inlet to the outlet
at best efficiency flow, i.e. c
u2
= 0 in Equation (2.22) or (2.23). If the losses in Equation (2.24)
are neglected, this equation becomes
2(u
1
c
u1
- u
2
c
u2
) = h
1
+ c
1
2
- h
2
- c
2
(3.24)
Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.14
Now c
1
2
= c
u1
2
+ c
1z
2
and c
2
2
= c
u2
2
+ c
2z
2
. Further is assumed c
1z
= c
2z
. By introducing these
transformations into Equation (3.24), the reaction ratio is
h
1
-h
2
= 2u
1
c
u1
- c
u2
2
= c
u1
(2u
1
c
u1
- c
u2
) (3.25)

Decreased <----------- Reaction ratio -------------> Increased

Fig. 3.9 Blade cascades for different reaction ratios with c
u2
= 0; /2/ .
Fig. 3.9 is illustrating qualitatively different magnitudes of c
u1
depending on the different inlet
directions of the blades, and consequently different reaction ratios.
The reaction ratios for different Francis turbines may be clarified by an example. For the best
efficiency point of two turbines a hydraulic efficiency η
h
= 0.97 is assumed. From the diagram
Fig. 3.6 intended values of the peripheral velocity *u
1
may be read.
Francis turbine: *Ω = 0.35, *u
1
= 0.72 (from Fig. 3.6) amounts a reaction ratio h
1
- h
2
= 0.516
Francis turbine: *Ω = 1.0, *u
1
= 1.075 « « amounts a reaction ratio h
1
- h
2
= 0.766
The reaction ratio is consequently increasing with increasing speed number. For the lower end
of the speed number range the reaction ratio is approaching that of the Pelton turbine when
u
1
/c
1x
--> 0.5 and (h
1
- h
2
) --> 0. For increasing speed numbers, the runners approach those of
Kaplan/Bulb turbines with the highest reaction ratios.
Cavitation at the inlet of the blade cascade in low head turbines, i.e. Francis and Kaplan/Bulb
turbines, is significantly linked with blade loading.
3.4 Kaplan turbines
3.4.1 Main hydraulic dimensions
Kaplan and Bulb turbines belong to the same grope of turbines. They represent the extension of
speed numbers above the range of Francis turbines, however with a minor overlap in the
Francis range, and consequently expressed by






= Ω ω Q
indicating maximum discharge and maximum output power from the turbine. According to this
convention the Kaplan and Bulb turbines are located in the region of speed numbers 1.5 <



< 3.5.
In the diagram Fig. 3.10, curves are given for average values of the reduced velocities
*
u
1
,

c
s

and

c
oz
corresponding to the locations given in the diagram as functions of the speed number.
The speed number

Ω does not represent the best efficiency point of the turbine operating
conditions. Because of the excellent regulating possibilities of the Kaplan and Bulb turbines
Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.15
they perform a relatively even efficiency curve. In practise therefore it seems favourable to
design the turbine for the best operating conditions about a capacity
*
Q = 0.65⋅

Q to 0.70⋅

Q.
3.4.2 Performance diagram
An example of the performance diagram of a unit Kaplan/Bulb turbine is shown on Fig. 3.11.
This diagram is rather different from those shown for the Pelton turbine Fig. 3.5 and the
Francis turbines in Figs. 3.7 and 3.8. The reason is the regulation parameter for the slope of the
runner blade angle ϕ. The regulation of the opening of the guide vane cascade and the
regulation of the runner blade angle is interconnected in such a way that the turbine operates
with optimal efficiency in every case of operation.

Fig. 3.10 Hydraulic design data for Kaplan turbines (intended values as a guide) /4/
To determine the overall optimal operating conditions of a Kaplan/Bulb turbine, proper model
performance tests have to be carried out. The basis for the test procedure is three free variable
parameters:
n = the rotational speed [RPM]
α = direction angle defining opening of the guide vane cascade[
o
]
ϕ = angle defining the direction of the runner blades [
o
]
With a chosen blade angle ϕ, efficiency η and discharge Q are measured for chosen values of
the guide vane angle α as functions of the rotational speed. Then the blade angle ϕ is changed
to another position and a new series of η-curves and Q-curves are measured in the same way as
in the first case. Analogous series of measurements are further carried out for as many ϕ-values
as being prescribed.

Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.16
The succeeding treatment of the data is to
work out diagrams from which the
combinations of parameter values can be
determined corresponding to optimal
performance for any point of operation.
Finally the results of this working
procedure can be presented in a
performance diagram as in Fig. 3.11.
In this performance diagram the relative
efficiency η as a function of reduced
discharge Q along the ordinate through
ω/*ω = 1.0 is steeper than of the Francis
turbines Figs. 3.9 and 3.10, but not so
steep as of the Pelton turbine Fig. 3.7.
The runaway speed of a Kaplan/Bulb
turbine is strongly dependent of the
combination of the guide vane angle α and
the blade angle ϕ and may differ from say
1.5*n to 3.0*n.
3.4.3 Cavitation, suction head and reaction ratio
The remarks about cavitation, suction head and reaction ratio in section 3.3 on Francis turbines,
are valid also for Kaplan/Bulb turbines.
3.5 Choice of turbine
The four types of turbines Pelton, Francis and Kaplan and Bulb turbines mainly have each their
own region of speed numbers. In that way they are ideally supplementing each other.
Therefore, when the actual speed number is estimated, the determination of the turbine type is
normally done as well. On the other hand there are many questions to deal with before relevant
values of speed numbers are estimated. Main problems are connected with evaluation of the
costs of the plant and the trends in the development of the design of turbines. Furthermore the
operating conditions play a principal role.
3.5.1 Choice between Pelton and Francis turbines
The costs of Pelton and Francis turbines are compared in the diagram Fig. 3.12, where the
abscissa divides the diagram in one upper field where the Pelton are the cheapest turbines and
one lower field where the Francis are the cheapest ones.
The prices of the turbines of the same type become cheaper the higher the rotational speed.
That means a decreasing price with increasing speed number. Fig. 3.13 again shows the limit
price curve between Pelton and Francis fields in a (Q - H)-diagram, which also has curves of
constant power output and constant rotational speed for Pelton and Francis turbines
respectively.




Fig. 3.11 Performance diagram
/5/
of a
Kaplan turbine,
*
Ω =1.3
Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.17

Fig. 3.12 Comparison of price index between Pelton and Francis turbines, /1/.
The Figures 3.12 and 3.13 show that Francis turbines can be the cheapest choice for heads up
to 700 meters and even higher for large units. But for higher heads than this limit the Pelton
turbines are ruling the domain.

Fig. 3.13 Diagram indicating decreasing prices versus increasing speed number of turbines, /1/,/2/.
Efficiency characteristics
However, to compare the economy of the turbines the efficiency characteristics must be
compared as well. Fig. 3.14 shows average qualitative efficiency curves of four types of
turbines as functions of capacity ratio. Generally the Pelton and Kaplan turbines perform the
wellrounded efficiency curves, while the Francis turbines and also the propeller without any
Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.18
adjusting control of the runner blades, perform more pointed efficiency curves the higher the
speed number.


Fig. 3.14 Efficiency characteristics of different types of turbines as functions of capacity ratio /4/

For the best efficiency point it can be noticed a slight increase in the optimal efficiency value
of Francis turbines with increased speed number. This is due to a reduction of frictional losses.
But the character of this tendency depends also on the design and the finish of the guide vanes
and the runner.
The losses in Francis and Pelton turbines
at best efficiency point versus capacity
and the head as parameter are compared
in the diagram Fig. 3.15 which confirms
the statement mentioned above.
The losses in power production due to the
variation of turbine efficiency versus
power output is compared in Fig. 3.16 for
a Francis turbine and a Pelton turbine,
each of 50 MW at 470 m head. At best
efficiency point the Francis turbine is the
best choice for operation from 50 % load
up to full load. However, if a typical
peaking operation is wanted at very low
load, the Pelton turbine will be the best
choice especially if an automatic
selection of operating jets is chosen.
A valuation by integration of the output loss over the whole output range of the turbines makes
clear that the Pelton turbine is the best choice if the time in operation is equally distributed

Fig. 3.15 Losses in Pelton and Francis turbines as function
of capacity and , /1/,/2/.

Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.19
from zero load to full load. This is illustrated in Fig. 3.16. However, if any operation below 25
% load is avoided or the loads are higher than 25%, the Francis turbine will be the best choise.
A similar comparison between Pelton and Francis turbines may be made for different sizes and
different heads of the turbines. On Fig. 3.17 boundary selection curves may be drawn as shown
for different operations. The zigzag illustrates the different kinds of operations as follows:
Zigzag for peaking operation from 0 to 100 % load (the lowest curve), for 25 % - 100 % load
variation, for 50 % - 100 % load variation and finally best efficiency point operation + 10 %
load variation (the uppermost curve).
Time out of operation
The time out of operation for repair is a significant criterion for the choice between Francis and
Pelton turbines
/1/
. The cases of repair are normally related to sand erosion. With sand laden
water













Fig. 3.16 Comparison of losses in a F rancis turbine Fig. 3.17 Boundary curves between Pelton and Francis
and Pelton turbine of 50 MW at H = 470 m turbines based on different kinds of operation
repair may be necessary every year to keep the loss of power production at minimum. If the
water is clean a well-designed turbine will be in operation at least 10 years without any repair.
The parts most exposed to sand erosion are those with the surfaces where the water velocity
and the acceleration is high. Such parts are:
In Pelton turbines: - Nozzles
- Needles
- Runner buckets
In Francis Turbines: - Guide vanes and guide vane facing plates
- Runner inlet and outlet
- Labyrinth seals
The behaviour of the erosion from sand laden water in high head Francis turbines occurs
slightly different and depends on the design of runners. This appears by a lower erosion in


Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.20
runners with splitter blades than in ordinary runners, because the double number of blades in
the low velocity region at the runner inlet make the flow more uniform. At the outlet of the
runner where the velocity is high, the number of blades is lower than in an ordinary runner, but
even so the velocity distribution is fairly uniform in this region.
Dismantling and assembly of the sand eroded parts takes shorter time for Pelton than for
Francis turbines. Therefore Pelton turbines will normally be preferred where much sand
erosion is expected. However, this again depends rather strongly on the plant’s operation
schedule. If one or more turbines are stopped for a long period of for example two months a
year, Francis turbines may be chosen even if the water has a high sand content because there
will be enough time for an annual repair.
3.5.2 Choice between Francis and Kaplan turbines
The choice between Francis and Kaplan turbines may be made in a similar way as for Francis
and Pelton turbines. But the parameters are somewhat different.
In general the Kaplan turbines are chosen for heads below 30 m. But Kaplan turbines have
been built for higher heads as well even up to 60 m. The reason is to a large extent given by the
more wellrounded efficiency curve compared with a low head Francis turbine (see Fig. 3.14). A
Kaplan turbine offers also an advantage with its smaller dimensions for a certain capacity than
the corresponding Francis turbine. Especially for large machines where capacities of 200 - 500
m
3
/sec are wanted the Kaplan turbine is chosen. In this case one big high-speed unit allowing
for a cheaper powerhouse than the alternative with more than one Francis turbine or one big
Francis turbine which can handle such capacity.
The upper economic and practical limit for the Kaplan turbine head is in the range of 60 m,
though extreme cases of 70 - 75 m have been planned for this turbine type as well. The head
limit is caused by mechanical strength problems in hub and blades.
For low heads Bulb turbines will be an alternative to the Kaplan turbines. The Bulb turbine
offers more favourable inlet flow conditions to the runner than a Kaplan turbine. These
favourable flow conditions have the effect that the runner diameter of a Bulb turbine may be
made 15 % smaller than for a Kaplan turbine under otherwise equal conditions. The flow
conditions will also reduce the cavitation risk for the Bulb turbine, which means a less
submergence is needed than for the Kaplan turbine.
The Bulb turbine is still more favourable if only one unit shall be built because the scroll casing
of a Kaplan turbine makes the power station much wider. The Bulb turbine will however, reach
an upper limit design head because of the concentrated hydraulic load on the concrete
foundation through the ribs. Thus the pressure will be limited to 15 - 20 m head for this turbine
type.
References
1. Brekke, H.: A Discussion of Pelton Turbines versus Francis Turbines for high Head Plants.
Joint Symposium on Design and Operation of Fluid Machinery, Colorado State University
Fort Collins, Colorado, USA, June 12. – 14. 1978.
2. Brekke, H.: The Layout of Power Plants and Choices of Turbine Types for Electricity
Production on Isolated Load. CONFERENCIA LATINOAMERCANA DE
ELECTRIFICATION RURAL. Lima, Peru, November 26. – 30. 1979.
Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.21
3. Christie, H.: Features from the Design of Francis Turbines in Norway (in Norwegian).
Teknisk Ukeblad no. 10, 1064, Oslo, Norway.
4. Kjølle, A.: WATER TURBINES: Hydraulic Design Base and Turbine Design and
Manufacture. Lecture 2 and 3 at Central-South Institute of Mining and Metallurgy,
Changsha , Hunan, China, 03.11. – 04.11.1983.
5. Kjølle, A.: Water Power Machines (in Norwegian), Universitetsforlaget, Oslo, Norway
1980.
6. Kjølle, A.: Hydraulic Measurements (in Norwegian), lectures at NTNU, 1971, Trondheim,
Norway.
7. Sundby, G: WaterPower Machines, Notes from Lectures at NTH 1938 (in Norwegian).
Water Power Laboratory, NTNU, Trondheim, Norway.

Bibliography
1. Nechleba, M.: Hydraulic Turbines. Artia-Prague. Constable & Co. Ltd., London, England
1957.
2. Raabe, J.: Hydraulische Maschinen und Anlagen. Zweite Auflage der Teile 1 bis 4 in einem
Band. VDI-Verlag GmbH 1989.
3. Wislicenus, G. F.: Fluid Mechanics of Turbomachinery, Volume 1 and 2, Dover
Publication, New York, USA, 1965.













.
Governing Principles 4.1
CHAPTER 4
Governing Principles
Introduction
Turbine governors are equipment for the control and adjustment of the turbine power output and
evening out deviations between power and the grid load as fast as possible.
The turbine governors
/3/,/4/,/5/,/6/
have to comply with two major purposes:
1. To keep the rotational speed stable and constant of the turbine-generator unit at any grid
load and prevailing conditions in the water conduit.
2. At load rejections or emergency stops the turbine admission have to be closed down
according to acceptable limits of the rotational speed rise of the unit and the pressure rise
in the water conduit.
Alterations of the grid load cause deviations between turbine power output and the load. For a load
decrease the excess power accelerates the rotating masses of the unit according to a higher rotational
speed. The following governor reduction of the turbine admission means deceleration of the water
masses in the conduit and a corresponding pressure rise.
To keep the rise of the rotational speed below a prescribed limit at load rejections, the admission-
closing rate must be equal to or higher than a certain value. For the pressure rise in the water conduit
the condition is opposite, e.g., the closing rate of the admission must be equal to or lower than a
certain value to keep the pressure rise as low as prescribed.
For power plants where these two demands are not fulfilled by one single control, the governors are
provided with dual control functions, one for controlling the rotational speed rise and the other for
controlling the pressure rise. This is normal for governors of high head Pelton and Francis turbines.
For Pelton turbines the principle is:
- To set the closing rate of the needle control of the nozzles to a value which satisfies the
prescribed pressure rise
- To bend the jet flow temporarily away from the runner by a deflector so the speed rise does
not exceed the accepted level.
For Francis turbines the principle is:
- To set the closing rate of the guide vane opening to a value, which satisfies the rotational
speed, rise limits
Governing Principles 4.2
- To divert as much of the discharge through a controlled by-pass valve that the pressure rise
in the conduit is kept below the prescribed level.
4.1 Feedback control system
The governor function for a turbine with water conduit is shown in the block diagram on Fig. 4.1.
The input reference signal is compared with the speed feedback signal. By a momentary change in
the load a deviation between the generator power output and the load occurs. This deviation causes
the unit inertia masses either to accelerate or to decelerate. The output of this process is the speed,
which again is compared with the reference.

Fig. 4.1 Block diagram of a turbine closed loop system /6/


Fig. 4.2 A hydraulic governor with a direct acting pendulum /6/

Governing Principles 4.3
A simple but classic example of a turbine governor is shown schematically in Fig. 4.2. This is a
governor with a belt driven centrifugal pendulum. For explaining the governor actions it is chosen to
start at a moment of stable equilibrium between power and load. In this condition the control valve
is closed by the spool, which is in the neutral position.
When a decrease in the grid load occurs, the rotational speed starts increasing and the pendulum
sleeve and the connected end of the floating lever moves upwards. The lever moves the spool
accordingly upward out of the neutral position and opens the hydraulic conduits to the servomotor.
High-pressure oil flows to the piston topside. The piston moves downwards and reduces the gate
opening and the turbine power. At the moment when the power is equal to the load, the rotational
speed culminates as indicated on Fig. 4.3.

Fig.4.3 Time response of power output and rotational speed after a load reduction step
At this moment however, the spool valve is still open. The piston movement continues and the
power output decreases even more. Consequently the speed decreases and the pendulum sleeve and
the spool are moving downwards again.
During this movement the spool valve passes the neutral position and opens then for high-pressure
oil flow to the opposite side of the piston. The piston movement is thereby returned and the power
output increasing. Next time the rotational speed culminates the power again is equal to the load and
therefore a succeeding swing in the speed and power output take place as previously described.
As Fig. 4.3 indicates, the swings are strongly damped because of the feedback system. This feed-
back is arranged by a linkage connection between the servomotor rod and the end of the floating
lever that is opposite to the sleeve as shown on the Fig. 4.2. When the piston moves in the closing
direction, the floating lever moves the spool accordingly in the same direction towards the neutral
position. In this way a stable control process is obtained.
A governor of a type as shown in Fig. 4.2 has a one-stage amplifier. Water turbine governors have
normally several stages of amplifiers. The governors in use are of various designs, e.g., as
mechanical-hydraulic and electro-hydraulic products. Design of governors and governor systems are
described in Chapter 10.
Governing Principles 4.4
4.2 Governor adjustment facilities
4.2.1 Proportional-integral-derivative functions (PID)
In governor systems as shown in Fig. 4.2 the rotational speed is dependent on the load for
power/load
equilibrium conditions. That means higher rotational speed at zero loads than at max. load and this
dependency are linear.
This type of governor function is designated as proportional control and denoted by the label P.
For units delivering the power to a grid system the frequency has to be constant at any load.
Governors for these units therefore have adjustment means also for automatically recovering of the
speed according to the grid frequency during regulation processes.
This type of governor function is designated as integral control and denoted by the label I.
Groups of governors are provided also with a derivative function in addition to the above functions.
It may be utilised for improvement of the phase angle of the frequency response for the governor
system.
This type of governor function is designated as derivative control and denoted by the label D.
Mechanical hydraulic governors are provided with PI-functions only while electro-hydraulic
governors are designed with PID functions.
Governors with PID-functions have large ranges for adjustment of each of the PID function
parameters.
4.2.2 Permanent speed droop
A special and major property of a turbine governor is
the permanent droop. It is defined as the percentage
change in the frequency for a 100 % change of the
power output from the unit.
For example a unit with a set value of the permanent
droop at 5 % will respond with 40 % power increase
for a change in frequency from 50 Hz to 49 Hz.
The permanent droop is adjustable and in practice it is
chosen in the range 0 - 6 %.
In connection with the permanent droop another notion also plays a certain role. That is the strength
of regulation
/4/
, which is defined as
Strength of Regulation = −


P
F

where ∆P is power change



∆F is frequency change
Fig.4.4 Permanent droop and strength of
regulation
Governing Principles 4.5
as illustrated in Fig. 4.4.
The load distribution between turbine-generator units connected to the same grid is dependent on
the permanent droop setting of these units. In Fig. 4.5 two units with different permanent droop are
shown where the load distribution for a given frequency change is indicated.


Fig. 4.5 Load distribution for different permanent droop of two units connected to the same grid /4/
4.3 Turbine governing demands
4.3.1 Frequency and load regulation
The governor shall be able to maintain stability of the generating unit when running on an isolated
grid. Generally the units are designed for stable operation up to full load. In this mode of operation
the governor shall keep the frequency within certain limits of deviation.
Load regulation on a rigid system is the most common operation mode. Each unit has little influence
on the grid system frequency. The governor controls the load to the desired value. The variation of
the load as function of the change in frequency is dependent on the permanent droop setting.
A special mode of operation is the manual mode where the guide vane openings are controlled
manually by means of a mechanical hydraulic load limiter. In this mode only the load can be
controlled.
4.3.2 Start and stop sequence control
During the period of start the unit shall be run up to nominal speed as quickly and smoothly as
possible. A start can be carried out both manually and automatically. The admission must be opened
only when permitted by all overriding start conditions.
In shut down mode the admission shall be closed as quickly as possible but limited by the
magnitude of the pressure rise in the tunnel and pressure shaft system. Due to safety reasons, the
shut down signal will be given simultaneously to different stages in the governor, e.g. closing of the
load limiter or the emergency operated shut down valve. The shut down valve is also functioning if
the ordinary voltage supply has failed. The stop command can be given both manually and
automatically.
Governing Principles 4.6
4.3.3 Disconnection, load rejection
Disconnection means to open the generator main circuit switch. The generator is thereby separated
from grid and the turbine power output results in a speed rise of the unit. The function of the
governor is then to shut down the turbine not faster than the caused pressure rise is kept below the
guaranteed level.
4.3.4 Load limiting
Load limiting must be possible according to external conditions. The load limiter device may be
operated both manually and automatically.
4.4 Regulation requirements of water power plants

The governing of water turbines requires limitations of speed rise and pressure rise as well as
fulfilment of regulating stability demands. To guarantee these requirements the adaptation of the
dynamic behaviour of the conduit system and the generator inertia mass have to be examined
carefully. Basic theory and principles for these examinations are surveyed in the following.
An example of the layout of a traditional high head power plant is shown in Fig. 4.6.


Fig. 4.6 The layout of a high head Hydro Electric Power Plant /6/
In such a power plant the pressure rise and regulating stability may be divided in two parts:
1. The mass oscillation problem for the tunnels and surge shafts both on the pressure side
and the suction side.
2. The water hammer problem of the conduit between the turbine and the water level in the
surge shafts both on pressure side and suction side.
4.4.1 Mass oscillations
The mass oscillation stability problem is treated according to the criterion for the minimum critical
Thoma cross section area of the surge shaft, ref. /9/, for obtaining stable mass oscillations.

This criterion which is based on the equation of continuity, the equilibrium of forces and the
assumption of an ideal turbine governor, is well described in the literature.
An ideal turbine governor is assumed to be able to keep the product of discharge and pressure as
constant. However, this statement is not fulfilled if the tunnel is short with short surging time
Governing Principles 4.7
because the turbine governor then will be too slow to obtain constant output of the turbine. For short
tunnels the margin to the critical Thoma cross section area of the surge shaft must be increased
accordingly.

Fig. 4.7 Tunnel and surge shaft with values used in the simple Thoma criterion /6/
With reference to Fig. 4.7 the equation of continuity is
(4.1)
where A
s
is the cross section area of the surge shaft
h = H
o
- H is the head difference between reservoir level and surge shaft level
q is the turbine flow
Q is the flow in the tunnel
The equilibrium of forces

L
A
dQ
dt
g h h
Q
Q
o
o
= −






( )
2
(4.2)
where A is the cross section area of the tunnel
g is the acceleration of gravity
h
o
= (f/R
h
)LQ
o
2
/(2g A
2
) is the head loss in the tunnel
f is the Darcy-Weissback friction factor
L is the length of the tunnel
Q
o
is the steady state flow before disturbance or mean flow
R
h
is the hydraulic radius of the tunnel cross section area
The equation of discharge and pressure control of the turbine (with an idealised turbine governor)
q H h Q H h
o o o o
( ) ( ) − = − (4.3)
According to ref./8/ the three equations give the following critical cross section area
A
LQ
gh H h A
scr
o
o o o
=

2
2 ( )
for h H
o o
<
1
3
(4.4)

When substituting for head loss h
o
and H
o
- h
o
= H
n
which is the net head,

Governing Principles 4.8
A
AR
fH
scr
h
n
= (4.5)
For a tunnel with an air cushion surge chamber the cross section area of the surge shaft A
s
could be
substituted for an equivalent cross section area A
eq.
By the equation of polytrophic changes of the
air volume, the area A
eq
is calculated for the compression of the air and surging of the level.
According to ref./2/ the equation for A
eq
is
A
A
H
V
eq
w
o
o
=
+
1
1
κ
'
(4.6)
where A
w
is the water level area in the air cushion surge chamber
H
o
'
= H
o
+ 10 is the absolute air pressure head [m] in the air cushion surge chamber
V
o
is the air volume in the air cushion surge chamber
κ is the polytropic exponent normally κ ≈ 1.3
Normally
1
A
H
V
w
o
o
<<κ
'
so that the formula may be simplified to
A
V
H
eq
o
o
=
κ
'
(4.7)
Then the critical air volume can be found by the simplified equation
V H A
ocr o scr
≈κ
'
(4.8)
Normally a safety factor to the critical cross section area should be 1.3 - 1.5. According to ref./2/
however, it has been proven that for smooth full profile driven tunnels a larger margin should be
used because of a smaller difference between steady state flow friction and friction of flow
oscillations. For short tunnels an even larger margin is required than for long tunnels because a real
turbine governor cannot satisfy Equation (4.3) for short tunnels on account of the shorter surging
time of the pressure.
4.4.2 Water hammer pressure rise versus closure time and speed
The water hammer problems may be divided in to main areas:
1. The water hammer transient problems causing pressure rises that affects the stresses in
penstocks and stress carrying parts of the turbine.
2. The governing stability problems caused by pressure oscillations in the conduit system.
The treatment of water hammer problems are based on ref. /1/. General solutions of governing
stability problems and transients are based on ref. /8/. Special stability theory for power plants with
influence of the frictional damping of oscillations in rough and smooth tunnels as well as the
influence from the turbine characteristics is presented in ref. /2/.
The general equations
With reference to Fig. 4.8 parameters additional to those being used previously are:

Governing Principles 4.9

Fig. 4.8 Serction of pipe with diameter D

A is the cross section area of the pipe
D is the diameter of the pipe
l is the parameter of the pipe length from the pipe
outlet
L is the length of the pipe
The most commonly used dynamic equations of
water hammer problems yields:
The equation of continuity




q
l
AH g
a Q
h
t
L o
o
L
=
2
(4.9)
Equilibrium of forces
(4.10)
where h
H
H
L
o
=

is relative pressure variation
∆H = H - H
n
is the pressure head variation
H is the instantaneous pressure at the turbine inlet
H
n
is the net head
K
D
Q q
o L
=
π τ
ρ
is the head loss friction factor, ref. /2/ (4.11)
q
Q
Q
L
o
=

is the relative flow variation
∆Q is the change of the flow
ρ is the density of the fluid
τ is the friction shear force per unit length of the pipe
These basic Equations (4.9), (4.10) and (4.11) may be solved according to methods described in
refs. /2/ and /7/.
Important parameters
The stability of the governing process of a hydro turbine-generator unit is dependent on the velocity
c of the water in the conduit, the inertia of the rotating masses of the unit and the length L of the
water conduit. The length L is defined as the distance between the turbine and the surge chamber or
the distance between the turbine and the reservoir if there is no surge chamber.
According to the dependency of these parameters, some important compound parameters are
created:
T
a

=
π
2 2
2
n I
P
n
(30)
is the acceleration time of the rotating masses of the unit [sec]
Governing Principles 4.10
T
w
=
Lc
gH
n

is the inertia time constant of the water masses in the conduit [sec] (4.12)
h
w

a
w
n
m
T
T
gH 2
ac
= = is the water hammer number (4.13)
where a is the propagation speed of the water hammer wave
g is the acceleration of gravity
H
n
is the nominal head
c =
Q
A
n
is the water velocity in the conduit
A is the cross section area of the water conduit
Q
n
is the nominal flow
c
m
=
Lc
L


is the mean water velocity
n is the rotational speed
I is the inertia of the rotating masses
P
n
is the nominal power of the unit

a
L 2
T
r

= is the penstock reflection time
Simplified analysis of pressure rise from water hammer
During shut down of the unit a fast closure of the guide vanes (or needles of Pelton turbines) is
required to avoid high speed rise. A fast closure however, causes a high pressure rise in the penstock
and the speed rise has influence on the flow through reaction turbines.
For Pelton turbines the speed rise problem is normally solved by jet deflectors which deflect the jets
quickly away from the runner and thus allowing for a slow closure of the needles. The
corresponding solution of the speed rise problem of Francis turbines is to bypass the discharge
through an energy dissipater with a valve controlled by the governor, see Chapt. 10.
For keeping speed rise and pressure rise within specified limits, some simple formulas are used for
determination of closing and opening times of a gate at the downstream end of a penstock. These
formulas
/3/
which are presented in the following, are valid for linear closure with constant speed.
Frictional damping is neglected and the relative pressure z = H/H
n
is introduced.
• Closing time T
CL
:
For elastic water and a long elastic penstock 2h
w
< (1 + √z), then the closing time for linear
closing from 100% opening
T T
z
CL w
=

2
1
(4.14)
Note: T
CL
is negative for ∆Η> 0
• Opening time T
O
:
Governing Principles 4.11
For elastic water and elastic penstock
T T
z
z
O w
=

2
1
(4.15)
Note: T
O
is positive and ∆Η < 1.0
• For inelastic water and inelastic penstock:
Inelastic water and inelastic penstock means a short penstock 2h
w
< 1 +√z.
Closing time
T T
z
z
CL w
=
− 1

Opening time (4.16)
T T
z
z
O w
=
− 1

In this case maximum pressure occurs from large openings.
Note
The maximum value z is obtained with the maximum closing speed; that means 100% closure
during the time T
CL
. If the closure from a certain opening to zero takes the time 2L/a, then the
reduction in velocity will be ∆c = c
o
(2L/a)/T
CL
. By substituting for z = 1 + ∆H/H
o
, T
w
= L∆c/(gH
o
)
and T
CL
= 2L/a in formula (9.14), the maximum pressure rise becomes
∆Η

=
a c
g
(4.17)
The simplified formulas may be used also for complex high pressure systems. In such cases the
length of the penstock should be regarded as the length from the turbine to the nearest water level in
the surge shaft. If an air cushion surge chamber is used, the nearest water level will be in the air
cushion chamber where full reflection of pressure waves occurs. The air cushion surge chamber will
be located within a relatively short distance from the turbine, and thereby excellent regulating
conditions will be obtained.
Speed rise of turbine and generator
The speed rise of the turbine may also be calculated in a simplified way. According to the 2. law of
Newton the maximum rotational speed n is found by the formula:

n
n
d
n
n
P P
T
dt
n n
G
a
( ) =


where n is rotational speed of the turbine
n
n
is the nominal rotational speed of the turbine
P
G
is the generator load
P is the turbine power output
P
n
is the nominal turbine power output
Governing Principles 4.12
Fig. 4.9 Illustration of the integration of the
accelerating torque versus time /3/
T
a
=
πnI
P
n
30
is the acceleration time of the rotating masses of the unit
I is the moment of inertia of the rotating masses of the unit
t is the time

By introducing the speed rise parameter ε‘ and integrating one get the area A
n
as indicated in Fig.
4.9.
ε' ( ) ( ) =

=

=

1
2
2 2
2
0
n n
n
P P
T
dt
A
T
n
n
G
a
n
a
T
CL
(4.18)

The presentation of the integrated torque as like the
shaded area A
n
in fig. 4.9, is based on a simplified
consideration of the effect of the zero efficiency
point. The zero efficiency point occurs just before
closure of the guide vane cascade. The effect of this
may be accounted for by simply to evaluate ε‘ in
equation (4.18) satisfactorily by the following
equation
ε'
( )( )
=
− −
=
=
1
2
1
0
T
Y P P
T
A
T
CL
G
t
a
n
a
(4.19)
where
T
C L
is the closing time
(P - P
G
)|
t=0
is the difference between turbine
power and generator power at t = 0
Y is a numerical value dependent on
the net head H
n

Values of Y are:
High head turbines H
n
> 300 m Y = 0.30
Medium head turbines 150 m < H
n
< 300 m Y = 0.20
Low head turbines H
n
< 150 m Y = 0.15
The pressure rise may also be accounted for by multiplying the expression of ε‘ by z
3/2
, where
z = H/H
n
is the relative pressure. Then the speed rise becomes
ε' =
A
T
z
n
a
3
2
(4.20)
Further the maximum speed can be calculated according to Equation (4.20)
2 1
2 2
2
2
ε' ( ) =

= −
n n
n
n
n
n
n n

From this

n
n
n
= + 1 2ε' , and n = n
n
+ ∆n
then
Governing Principles 4.13

∆n
n
= + − 1 2 1 ε' (4.21
4.5 Governing stability
4.5.1 Modes of operation
Regarding governing conditions there are three different modes of operation on isolated loads:
1. Steady state operations when the unit is operating at constant load, head and command
input.
2. The total system is subject to small changes caused by fluctuations in load or command
input. In this mode none of the governor elements will reach the limit of closing or
opening speed. The stability guarantees are always referred to this mode.
3. The total system is subject to changes, which is resulting in speed limits, closing and
opening movements of parts of the governor system. This is the situation during load
rejections when the main servomotors are operating at maximum closing speed.
When the generator is connected to a large grid with constant frequency, the function of the
governor is only to change the generator output. If the generator is being disconnected, a load
rejection will occur, which means that the system is in mode 3.
For stability analysis of operation on isolated grid it will often be sufficient to consider the system
on the basis of the three compound parameters T
a
, T
w
and h
w
35/
. However, some power plants have a
rather complex tunnel and conduit system which makes it necessary to work out stability analysis of
the complete water way system.
As an example a conventional high or medium high head system with inlet tunnel, surge chamber,
penstock with a 45
o
slope and a tailrace tunnel, is sketched in Fig. 4.10. Concerning stability
analysis the constants T
w
and h
w
are calculated from the length of the penstock between the water
level in the surge chamber and the nearest free surface level in the tail water.

Fig.4.10 System with surge chamber /6/
In Norway high pressure tunnels have been excavated for increasing pressure levels. As a
consequence the surge shaft length has increased. Therefore a relatively large part of travelling
water
Governing Principles 4.14
hammer waves in the conduit passes the surge shaft because of the increased inertia mass of water in
the surge shaft. These waves are more or less reflected from every free water level in all branches of
the tunnel and conduit system. In turn this leads to unstable turbine governing.
An improvement of the conditions has been made by the introduction of an air cushion surge
chamber schematically shown in Fig.4.11. By means of such surge chambers the distance from the
turbine to the nearest water level becomes short as well, and an excellent governing stability is
thereby obtained.
In addition a short closing time of the turbine governor can be obtained with low speed rise without
a high-pressure rise.

Fig.4.11 System with air cushion surge chamber /6/
For the stability analysis the Equations (4.9) and (4.10) have been Laplace transformed and the
frictional shear force has been found to be a function of the flow oscillations and the frequency of
the oscillations, ref. /2/. It should be emphasised that the influence from the turbine characteristics
must be included to find the correct stability margins.
4.5.2 Rules of thumb
Some rules of thumb
/3/
may be established to make a brief judgement of the governing stability
based on the water hammer number h
w
and the relation between the time constants T
a
and T
w
. These
rules are:
2 < h
w
T
a
/Tw ≥ 2.5
1 < h
w
< 2 T
a
/T
w
≥ 3.0
0.7 < h
w
< 1 T
a
/T
w
≥ 3.5
0.5 < h
w
< 0.7 T
a
/T
w
≥ 4.0
0.3 < h
w
< 0.5 T
a
/T
w
≥ 4.5
An efficient test for proving the governing stability is the frequency response test. Because the
frictional damping of oscillatory flow is of great importance to know, it is most correctly estimated
by this test.
Note
Modern governors with pressure feed back signal systems have additionally improved the stability
of the governing systems.
Governing Principles 4.15
References
1. Allievi, L: Theory of Water Hammer. Riccardo Garoni, Rom, 1925.
2. Brekke, H.: A stability study on hydro power plant governing including the influence from a
quasi non-linear damping of oscillatory from the turbine characteristics. Dr. techn. dissertation,
NTNU, Trondheim, 1984.
3. Brekke, H.: Governing of hydro power machines. Lecture compendium at NTNU, 1999. (In
Norwegian)
4. Condition Control of Hydropower in Norway: Handbook – Governor (in Norwegian).
5. Ervik, M: Governors for Hydro Turbines (in Norwegian), Universitetsforlaget, Oslo, 1971.
6. Kværner Brug: COURSE III, Lecture compendium Oslo, 1986.
7. Li, Xin Xin and Brekke, H.: Surge tank stability as influenced by governing characteristics.
IRCHBM Symposium, Beijing, China, 1989.
8. Streeter, Victor L. and Wylie, E. Benjamin: Hydraulic Transients. McGraw-Hill Book Company,
1993.
9. Thoma, D: Zur Theorie des Wasserschlosses bei Selbsstätig Geregelten Turbinenanlagen,
Oldenburg, München, Germany, 1910.


Performance Tests 5.1
CHAPTER 5
Performance Tests
Introduction
Performance tests of hydro turbines are part of the commissioning and acceptance of the
delivery of electro-hydraulic equipment.
The tests of hydro turbines should be made in accordance with the IEC recommendations. This
is a claim by model tests as well if the prototype is a low head turbine and performance tests on
the prototype is difficult to carry out with acceptable tolerances.
A turbine must in general meet a guarantee of the efficiency within a certain range of output
and head variation. The turbine power output must fulfil the guarantee as a function of the net
head as well. The operation in the given range of head shall also be without damage such as
cavitation pittings and fatigue problems, on the turbine during the guarantee period.
Shuts down tests of inlet valves are also often a part of the acceptance tests when required.
In the course of the running time wear occur on vital parts of the turbine and the efficiency
decreases accordingly. Therefore efficiency tests of a turbine may come into question several
times.
Detailed guidelines for field acceptance tests are given in the International standard IEC 41
/9/

and for model tests in IEC 193
/10/
.
5.1 Tests on prototype
5.1.1 Principles for test
The efficiency of hydro turbines may be determined according to two different principles:
1. Measuring the output P and the available power P
n
at the turbine inlet and calculate
the efficiency
η =
P
P
n
(5.1)
2. Measurement of the total power losses ∆P
loss
in the turbine and the suction pipe and
determine the efficiency
η = − 1
∆P
P
loss
n
(5.2)
5.1.2 Measurement of the turbine power
Performance Tests 5.2
Power output P
For a prototype turbine the electrical power output from the generator P
G
is measured. Through
the knowledge of the efficiency η
G
of the electrical generator the turbine power output P is
calculated.
The generator efficiency as function of cosφ and the load can always be obtained from the
generator manufacturer or measured on site as part of the generator performance tests.
The available power P
n

P
n
= ρQgH
n
(5.3)
The discharge Q and the net head H
n
are to be measured. The density ρ = 1000 kg/m
3
is
generally used in the calculations if the contract of the measurements do not involve
requirements of an exact check. For the acceleration of gravity g = 9.82 m/sec
2
.
The net head H
n
is evaluated above tail water level just at the outlet of the suction pipe of a full
turbine, and above average level of the inlet of the jets in the buckets of a Pelton turbine. Net
head H
n
is composed of the hydraulic pressure head and the velocity head in the pipe cross
section area A just in front of the turbine. For the velocity head it is usual to evaluate this
directly as the average velocity head c
m
2
/(2g) = Q
2
/(2gA
2
).
The main methods for the determination of the discharge in hydro power plants are described in
the following section.
5.1.3 Methods for determination of discharge
Measuring methods being used for the determination of the discharge in water power plants are:
1. Current meter method
2. Pitot tube gauging
3. Pressure-time method (Gibson method)
4. Tracer methods
5. Ultrasonic method
6. Weirs
7. Standardised differential pressure devices
8. Volumetric gauging method
9. Relative discharge measurement
Weirs, venturimeters, nozzles and volumetric meters are used especially for the measurements
of discharge of smaller turbines.
Not all of these methods are generally applicable, and which of them are to be used in the
respective power plants is a matter of choice based on main aspects as compatibility, economy
and accuracy.
5.1.3.1 Current meter method
The current meter method requires a number of propeller-type current meters. These are located
at specified points in a suitable cross section of an open channel or closed conduit.
Simultaneous measurements of local mean velocity with the meters are integrated over the
gauging section to estimate the discharge.
Performance Tests 5.3
Current meters are instruments designed as propellers with 2 or 3 blades. Fig. 5.1 shows an
example of a current meter design with a two-blade
propeller.
The current meter is put in the flow with the propeller axis
parallel to the flow direction and the propeller peak
against the flow. The rotational speed n of the propeller is
a linear function of the flow velocity c in the measuring
point.
c = kn + b (5.4)
where k and b are constants of the respective current
meter and has to be determined by calibration tests.
The rotational speed of the current meter is detected by an electric contact giving a pulse
frequency signal proportional to rotational speed.
The flow velocity is recorded in the centre of gravity of each grid element of the cross section
area as shown on Fig. 5.2. By considering an arbitrary element with area A
i
where the recorded
velocity is c
i
, the discharge ∆Q
i
= c
i
A
i
through
this element. If the flow cross section is divided
in n elements, the total flow discharge is found
by
Q c A
i
i
n
i
=
=

1
(5.5)
Depending on the conditions on site the
arrangement of current meter measurements may be carried out by a number of current meters
installed in a kind of structure being built across the flow section.
Current meter measurements may be applied in open drains, channels, rivers as well as in
closed pipes. To achieve accurate results, it is however important that the flow through the
cross section of the measurements is regular and as rectilinear as possible.
The accuracy by current meter gauging of the discharge depends essentially on factors related
to the flow, the quality of measurements, a careful reflection of the gauge point distribution
and the method of discharge calculation. With good measuring techniques and flow
conditions, the
estimated uncertainties
/9/
should be about:
- in closed conduits + 1 to + 1.5 %
- in open channels with rectangular section + 1.2 to + 2 %
- in open channels with trapezoidal section + 1.4 to + 2.3 %
5.1.3.2 Pitot tube gauging
The pitot tube gauging means to measure the stagnation pressure of the flow velocity directed
into the tube end opening. Pitot tubes are found in a great variety of designs. Fig. 5.3 shows an
example of a frequently applied type called Prandtl tube.
Standardised pitot tubes are reported in ISO 3966
/13/
, which covers the design, installation and
use of these tubes. This standard also gives guidelines for the selection and installation of pitot
static tubes, choice of measuring section and the computation of the discharge and its

Fig. 5.1 Current meter /3/

Fig. 5.2 Flow cross section /3/

Performance Tests 5.4
uncertainty. ISO 3966 shall be used only with the standardised
Pitot tubes that are described therein and equipped with a single
total pressure tap and one or more static pressure taps. Such tubes
may be used uncalibrated and the flow coefficient assumed to be
unity.
The local velocity v
i
is given by:

i i
v 2 p / = ∆ ρ (5.6)
where ∆p
i
is the difference between the total stagnation pressure
and the static pressure measured with the pitot tube located at
point “i”.
Pitot tubes are applied in the same way as described for current
meter measurements, for gauging the flow velocity in chosen points
of a flow cross section. The total discharge Q is also determined analogous to the scheme
described for current meters.
Pitot tubes are not well fit for velocity measurements in liquids when the flow velocity is lower
than 1 m/s.
With good measuring techniques and flow conditions the estimated uncertainty should be about
1.5 to 2.5 %.
5.1.3.3 The pressure-time method (Gibson method)
The pressure-time method
/1/
for discharge determination is based on the pressure rise when a
flow regulating device in a closed conduit reduces the water flow.
The pressure rise on the upstream side of the regulation device depends on the closing speed,






Fig. 5.4 Measurement of differential Fig. 5.5 Pressure differential-time-diagram /3/
pressure in a pipeline /3/
the conduit length, the net head and the flow velocity in the conduit at the start of the closing
operation. On Fig. 5.4 is schematically shown a turbine connected with a pipeline. A
differential manometer is connected to the pipe through pressure tappings in the pipe wall, and
the distance between the upstream and downstream tappings is called L.
When the turbine admission has a closing movement, a pressure head difference ∆h as function
of time may be recorded on the differential manometer, as shown on the diagram Fig. 5.5.
This pressure head differential-time-diagram is a measure of the total flow.
The equilibrium of the retarded water flow mass for an element of the cross section in the
considered pipe length L may be expressed by:

Fig. 5.3 Prandtl tube /3/
Performance Tests 5.5

dc
g hdA LdA
dt
ρ ∆ = −ρ (5.7)
If t
l
is the time during which the velocity changes, and if ∆h
loss
is the pressure head loss due to
friction between the two pipe sections, then:
A dc
gA
L
h h dt
t
t t
loss
t
t t
l l
= − +
=
=
=
=
∫ ∫
0 0
( ) ∆ ∆ (5.8)
The discharge Q before the closure operation begins, is then:
Q Ac
gA
L
h h dt Ac
o loss t
t
t t
l
o
= = + +
=
=

( ) ∆ ∆
0
(5.9)
The discharge q = Ac
t1
is the leakage flow past the gate after shut off. This leakage must be
determined separately with the machine running.
The pressure-time method is applicable on flow in closed pipes only. Moreover the measuring
length L must be 9 meter or two times the pipe diameter if this product is greater than 9 meter.
The pressure-time method requires especially good instrumentation
/1/
and a highly qualified
staff of specialists to carry out the tests. Under favourable conditions an overall uncertainty of
about + 1.5 % to + 2 % may be expected.
Indications are that applying the pressure-time method in conduits less than 1 meter in diameter
leads to overestimating the discharge.

5.2.3.4 Tracer methods
Allen salt velocity method
A salt in water dilution increases the electric
conductivity of the water. By injecting a salt
dilution dose in a water flow conduit, the
transit time of this dose between two
electrodes in the conduit can be traced
electrically. The conduit volume V between
these two electrodes divided by the average
transit time t
mean
of the passage of this salt
dose, gives the true value of the discharge:
Q
V
t
mean
= (5.10)
Fig. 5.6 shows schematically an arrangement
/6/
for the application of this method.
A dilution of common salt is kept in the container A. This dilution is pressurised to a certain
level. As soon as the rapid operating valve B opens, an adequate dose of salt dilution is forced
into the pipeline through the spring loaded valve C. The injected dose is transported along the
pipeline with the same velocity as the main flow. However, it will be rapidly diluted and its
extension in the flow direction is durably increasing due to the larger flow velocity in the
central part than in the neighbourhood of the wall of the pipe cross section.

Fig. 5.6 Allen salt velocity method /6/

Performance Tests 5.6
In cross sections of the chosen lengths of the pipe, electrodes are installed as shown
schematically on the figure. When an electric voltage E and an electric recorder F is connected
in series with the electrodes, the recorder will record an electric current dependent on the
conductivity of the water analogous to the diagram shown on Fig. 5.7.
For the application of this
method expert knowledge of a
number of details in the
experimental equipment is
needed.
For the evaluation of the
discharge, several methods
have been applied for the
calculation of the time interval
of the passage of the salt cloud
between the respective
electrode stations. However,
these methods do not differ
from each other so much that
not any of them is recommended as the most preferable. Therefore this is a matter of choice for
the experts.
With good measuring techniques and flow conditions, it is generally accepted that the discharge
may be determined to an accuracy around + 1 % to + 1.5 % by the use of the Allen salt velocity
method.
Salt dilution method
This method is apt to be called the chemical method. It incorporates Mohr’s procedure for
titration of chlorides by means of silver nitrate.
The method has been used for the measurements of the discharge in mountain rivers
/5/
. The
results being obtained has shown a development of accuracy that has led to application of this
method for efficiency determination of water turbines.
The salt dilution method is principally different from the Allen salt velocity method. In a flow
through pipes or open channels as shown on Fig. 5.8, two cross sections (I) and (II) with a
certain mutual distance, are chosen. In cross
section (I) a steady continuous flow of a
homogeneous and relatively strong concentrated
solution of sodium dichromate is injected into
the main water flow in points evenly distributed
over the cross section. The flow downstream in
the channel becomes a dilution with a
concentration depending on the relation between
the magnitude of the main water flow and the
magnitude of the injected flow of salt solution.
In cross section (II), which is a distance far
enough downstream to ensure thorough mixing, samples are taken out from several positions in
the cross section. By means of Mohr’s titration method and application of silver nitrate and

Fig. 5.7 Record of a salt cloud passing the electrode stations in a
pipeline /6/


Fig. 5.8 Dilution method /5/
Performance Tests 5.7
potassium chromate an accurate gauging of the concentration of the dilution may be obtained in
these samples.
It is not necessary to know the geometric characteristics of the pipe, but it is essential to ensure
that reverse or side currents do not exist which could abort some of the injected solution. Also
the concentration of salt in the natural water must be constant and not exceed 15 % of the
concentration at the sampling point during injection of the salt solution.
The discharge Q can be determined from:
o 2
2 1
C C
C C
q Q


= (5.11)
where Q is the discharge to be measured
q is the discharge of the salt solution injected
C
o
is the initial concentration of the salt in natural water
C
1
is the concentration of salt in the injected salt solution
C
2
is the concentration of the salt dilution at the sampling station
For the application of this method the flow must be perfectly turbulent, otherwise the mixture
of the salt solution and the main water flow will be uneven. Moreover, the salt solution must be
injected in points positioned relatively close to each other over the cross section. The samples
in the cross section downstream as well must be taken in points correspondingly close
distributed.
The concentration of the injected salt solution may be one part by weight of salt to four parts by
weight of water.
Instead of the salt solution being described above, other radioactive and non-radioactive tracers
can be used, provided the recommendations and procedures described in Parts 1, 6 and 7 of ISO
2975
/12/
are applied.
With good measuring techniques and flow conditions, the obtained accuracy of the discharge
determined by the dilution method should be about + 1 % to + 1.5 %.
5.1.3.5 Ultrasonic method
Small-magnitude pressure disturbances are propagated through a fluid at velocity which is the
sound velocity relative to the fluid. If the fluid also has a velocity, the absolute velocity of the
pressure disturbance propagation is the algebraic sum of the two. Since the discharge is related
to fluid velocity, this effect may be used in several ways as the operating principle of ultrasonic
flow metering.
The term ultrasonic refers to the fact that the pressure disturbances usually are short bursts of
sine waves whose frequency is above the range audible to human hearing.
The various methods
!2/,/4/
of application of the above phenomenon all depend on the existence
of transmitters and receivers of acoustic energy. A common approach is to utilise piezoelectric
crystal transducers for both functions. In a transmitter electrical energy in the form of a short
burst of high-frequency voltage, is applied to a crystal and causing it to vibrate. If the crystal is
in contact with the fluid, the vibration will be communicated to the fluid and propagated
through it. The receiver crystal is exposed to these pressure fluctuations and responds by
vibrating. The vibratory motion produces an electric current signal in proportion according to
the action of piezoelectric displacement transducers.
Performance Tests 5.8
Fig. 5.9 shows the most direct application
/2/
of these principles. With zero flow velocity the
transit time t
o
of pulses from the transmitter to the receivers is given by
t
L
a
o
= (5.12)
where L is the distance between transmitter and receiver.
The velocity
a is the acoustic (sound) velocity in the fluid
If the fluid is moving at a velocity c, the transit time
becomes
t
L
a c
L
a
c
a
c
a
L
a
c
a
=
+
= − + −
|
\

|
.
|
≈ −
|
\

|
.
|
1
1
2
2
3
..... (5.13)
and defining ∆t = t
o
- t, then
∆t
Lc
a

2
(5.14)
Thus, if a and L are known, measurement of ∆t allows
calculation of c. However, while L may be taken as constant, a varies both with temperature
and pressure and may cause significant error because of its appearance as a
2
. Also, ∆t is quite
small since c is a small fraction of a. Since it is not directly provided for measurement of t
o
in
this arrangement, the modification of Fig. 5.10a may be preferable. If t
1
is the transit time with
the flow and t
2
is the transit time against the flow, then it is obtained
∆t t t
Lc
a c
Lc
a
= − =


2 1
2 2 2
2 2
(5.15)
This ∆t is twice as large as before and is also a time increment that may be directly measured.
However, the dependence on a
2
is still a drawback.








Fig. 5.10a Sound signal sent with and against the Fig. 5.10b Two self-excited oscillated systems /2/
flow direction /2/

In Fig. 5.10b two self-excited oscillating systems are created by using the received pulses to
trigger the transmitted pulses in a feedback arrangement. The pulse repetition frequency in the
forward propagating loop is 1/t
1
while in the backward loop is 1/t
2
. The frequency difference ∆f

Fig. 5.9 Principle of ultrasonic
signalling /2/
Performance Tests 5.9
= 1/t
1
- 1/t
2
can be measured by multiplying the two signals together to get a beat frequency.
Since t
1
= L/(a + c cosθ) and t
2
= L/(a - c cosθ), then

2ccos
f
L
θ
∆ = (5.16)
which is independent of a and thus not subject to errors due to changes in a.
The above analysis assumes a square velocity profile which does not occur in practice. For
actual profiles c can be replaced by c
mean
as long as the profiles are symmetrical about the pipe
centre line. If certain mathematical conditions such as continuity and differentiability are met
by the velocity distribution, the discharge can be obtained from the equation for a circular
section:
Q k
D
Wc D
i meani
i
n
i
=
=

2
1
sinα (5.17)
where D is the diameter of the pipe in the intersecting acoustic plane
W
i
are weighting coefficients depending on the number of paths and the applied
integration technique
n is the number of acoustic paths in one plane
k is correction coefficient which accounts for the error introduced by the integration
technique
α
i
defines the angular location of the end path relative to D
Experience with the acoustic methods of discharge measurement is limited and obtained
accuracy is about + 2 %.
5.1.3.6 Weirs
The measurement principle is to measure the discharge by interposing a thin plate weir in a free
surface flow and observe the head over the weir. A unique functional relationship between the
discharge and the head over the weir is employed. In order to have the best known relationship,
only rectangular weirs without side contraction sharp crested, with complete crest contraction
and free overflow shall be used.
The basic formula for calculating the discharge is due to Poleni and can be written as
/9/
:
Q Cb gh =
2
3
2
3
(5.18)
where Q is the discharge
C is the discharge coefficient
b is the length of the weir crest (perpendicular to the flow)
g is the acceleration of gravity
h is the measured upstream head over the weir
The weir plate shall be smooth and plain, particularly on the upstream face, and shall remain
unaltered for the whole duration of measurements. It shall preferably be made of metal which
can resist erosion and corrosion. It shall be rigid, watertight and perpendicular to the walls and
to the bottom of the channel.
Fig. 5.11 shows a sketch of a rectangular weir. The surface of the weir crest shall be a
horizontal, flat and smooth surface perpendicular to the upstream face of the plate. Its
Performance Tests 5.10
intersection with the upstream face shall be straight and form sharp edges free from burrs or
scratches. The width e of the edge, perpendicular to the upstream face, shall be 1 to 2 mm. If
the weir plate is thicker than the allowable crest width, the downstream edge shall be chamfered
at a 45
o
angle.
Aeration of the free efflux from the weir shall be secured with a ventilation sufficient to keep
the air underneath the free
efflux at approximately
atmos-pheric pressure. The
weir is commonly located
on the low pressure side of
the turbine, and care shall be
taken to ensure that smooth
flow exists in the approach
channel. With this location
it shall moreover, be far
enough from the turbine or
the discharge conduit outlet
to enable the water to
release the air bubbles
before reaching the weir.
The approach channel shall be straight and of a uniform cross section and with smooth walls for
a length of at least 10 times the length of the weir crest b. Along this length the bottom slope
must be very small (< 0.005).
The sides of the channel above the level of the crest of the weir shall extend without
discontinuity at least 0.3h
max
downstream of the plane of the weir.
With good measuring techniques and flow conditions, estimated obtainable accuracy should be
about + 1.7 % to + 3 %.
5.1.3.7 Standardised differential pressure devices
Discharge determination by pressure differential is based on installing a device creating a
constricted cross section in the conduit and gauging the pressure difference generated by this
constriction. Such devices are orifice plates, nozzles and venturi tubes.
The method of discharge measurement by differential pressure devices is the subject of ISO
5167
/14/
supplemented by ISO 2186
/11/
, concerning pressure signal transmission.
These standards give all the necessary directions concerning the design and the setting of the
primary element, the choice of the section of measurement, the value of the flow coefficient, the
computation of discharge and its uncertainty. These standards apply only in the range of the
pipe diameter D and Reynolds number R
eD
specified in ISO 5167.
Whenever possible to satisfy the requirements of the ISO standards, it is unnecessary to
calibrate the apparatus as the flow coefficients indicated in the standards may be used provided
their resulting accuracy is considered sufficient. All data necessary to estimate the total
uncertainty in discharge measurement are given in ISO 5167.
With good measuring techniques and flow conditions, obtainable accuracy is estimated to + 1%
to + 1.5 % for orifice plate, nozzle and venturi tube.

Fig. 5.11 Sketch of a sharp-crested rectangular weir
Performance Tests 5.11
5.1.3.8 Volumetric gauging method
The conventional volumetric gauging method is confined to low discharges, because of the
limitation caused by the size of the tanks or reservoirs required. Therefore, it is unlikely to be
applied to discharge measurement in the field.
Nevertheless, a variant of this method can be adopted for large scale discharge measurements
/9/
.
It consists in determining the variation of the water volume stored in the headwater or tailwater
pond on the basis of the variation of the water level. If necessary, provision shall be made for
isolating the pond to ensure that there shall be no inflow to or no outflow from it during the
measuring time.
Artificial ponds best suited for volumetric measurements are concrete basins with vertical
walls. with increasing size the ponds are generally provided with inclined concrete walls. These
ponds are particularly suitable for volumetric measurements if the slope of the walls remains
constant over the whole measuring range. The shape of a basin and the slope of the walls
should be considered carefully in the planning stage of the plant if the basin is to be used for
volumetric measurements.
Approximate values of the uncertainty of the volume determination of concrete ponds with
vertical walls should be + 0.5 % to + 0.8 %, and for concrete pond with sloping banks + 0.7 %
to + 1.0 %.
5.1.3.9 Relative discharge measurement
Relative discharge measurement
/9/
can be done by measurement of the pressure difference
between suitably taps on the scroll case of a turbine as shown on Fig. 5.11.
This is the Winter-Kennedy method and the discharge is usually well represented by


Fig. 5.12 Winter-Kennedy measurement

Q = kh
n
(5.19)
where h is the reading of a differential manometer connected between the taps
n is theoretically equal to 0.5
Performance Tests 5.12
As a general rule this method is applicable to turbines only. In installations with a steel scroll
case it requires taps
/9/
located in the same radial section of the scroll case. The outer tap 1 is
located at the outer side of the scroll case. The inner tap 2 shall be located outside the stay
vanes on a flow line passing midway between the two adjacent stay vanes. It is recommended
that a second pair of taps be located in another radial section.
5.1.4 Thermodynamic measurement of flow losses
5.1.4.1 Measurement of power losses
The energy flow losses through a hydro turbine, is converted to heat energy in the water flow.
Thus the temperature in the discharge increases through the passage. On this basis the
thermodynamic method
/17/
for determination of turbine efficiency is established.
However, the relatively small temperature changes in the water flow cause applicability limits
for the method. For example, a turbine with net head H
n
= 427 m and an efficiency η = 90 %,
the energy loss in the turbine corresponds to 10 % of H
n
, which in this example means a
temperature increase about 0.1
o
C.
In practice, by lack of uniformity in measured values, limitations of measuring equipment and
relatively high magnitude of corrective terms, the range of application of this method is
therefore limited to heads above 100 meter.
Measuring equipment
The instrument for the application of the thermodynamic method consists of: elements for
temperature measurements, calorimeter through which water is drawn off from the turbine, and
precision manometer for pressure measurements.
An usual principle for measurements of temperatures is to connect two platina resistance
thermometers S
1
and S
2
in a Wheatsones bridge together with two constant resisters R
1
and R
2

as schematically shown on Fig. 5.13.
The nominal resistance of the thermometers S
1
and S
2
is about 100 Ω. These thermometers have
relatively high temperature sensitivity and linear temperature dependence.
Drawing off water through a calorimeter at the turbine inlet is in principle shown on Fig. 5.13.
A hollow probe is mounted radially through a bore in the wall of the conduit. The drawn off
flow is conducted through the probe via the regulating valve R into the chamber M for
measurement of temperature and pressure.
Precision measurement of pressure is shown to the right on Fig.5.13. The pressure in chamber
M is regulated to any desired level by the valve R, and this pressure may be measured through a
branched off pipe from the chamber.
5.1.4.2 Efficiency and specific energies
The hydraulic efficiency of a turbine is, as expressed in Equation 2.22:
η
h
R
n
R
n
P
P
E
E
= = (5.20)
where E
R
is the specific mechanical energy at the runner
E
n
is the available specific hydraulic energy at the turbine inlet

Performance Tests 5.13


Fig. 5.13 Arrangement of thermodynamic measurements on a turbine /3/
These specific energies are now to be expressed from calculations based on the first and second
laws of thermodynamics together with empirical data for some physical and thermodynamic
properties of the fluid in use. The properties include compressibility, cubic expansion or Joule-
Thomsen coefficient, and specific heat at constant pressure.
On this basis and with reference to Fig. 5.13:
The specific available hydraulic energy of the turbine may be determined by
E p p
c c
g z z
n abs abs
= − +

+ −
1 2
1
2
2
2
1 2
2
( ) (5.21)
where p
abs1
is the absolute static pressure at the turbine inlet, level z
1

p
abs2
is the absolute at turbine outlet, level z
2

c
1
is the average flow velocity at the turbine inlet, pos. 1
c
2
is the average flow velocity at the turbine outlet, pos. 2


g is the acceleration of gravity
z
1
is the level of the turbine inlet, pos. 1
z
2
is the level of the tail race water, pos. 2
The specific mechanical energy at the runner
E a p p c
c c
g z z
R abs abs p
= − + − +

+ − ( ) ( ) ( )
1 2 1 2
1
2
2
2
1 2
2
θ θ (5.22)
where a is the isothermal factor of water |m
3
/kg|
c
p
is the specific heat capacity of water |J/kg/K|
θ
1
is the temperature of the water at the turbine inlet |K (Kelvin degrees)|
θ
2
is the temperature of the tail race water, pos. 2 |K|
Performance Tests 5.14
From first and second laws of thermodynamics and differentiation of the enthalpy h, is known:
dh dq
dp
ds
dp
= + = +
ρ
θ
ρ

or
dh
s
d
s
p
dp
dp
p
=
|
\

|
.
|
+
|
\

|
.
|
+ θ

∂θ
θ θ

∂ ρ
θ
(5.23)
where h is the enthalpy
q is the heat flow
s is the entropy
ρ is the density of the water
From the thermodynamics


∂ ρ
∂θ
θ
s
p
p
|
\

|
.
|
= −
|
\

|
.
|
( / ) 1

and the specific heat at constant pressure
c
s
p
p
=
|
\

|
.
|
θ

∂θ
(5.24)
Therefore the differential of the enthalpy can be converted in
dh c d dp
p
p
= + −
|
\

|
.
|

θ
ρ
θ
∂ ρ
∂θ
1 1 ( / )

and the isothermal factor of water is then:
a
p
= −
|
\

|
.
|
1 1
ρ
θ
∂ ρ
∂θ
( / )
(5.25)
In the International Standard IEC 41
/9/
tables are given of the properties of water for:
- the isothermal factor a |m
3
/kg| with total range from
a = 1.0184 at temperature 0
o
C and absolute pressure p = 1 bar, to
a = 0.8790 at temperature 40
o
C and absolute pressure p = 150 bar
- the specific heat c
p
|J/kg/K| with total range from
c
p
= 4207 at temperature 0
o
C and absolute pressure p = 1 bar, to
c
p
= 4145 at temperature 40
o
C and absolute pressure p = 150 bar
5.1.4.3 Measuring technique
The measurements to be carried out with the equipment described in Section 5.2.4.1, are to
determine the quantities in the Equations (5.21) and (5.22), which means two measuring
procedures for each point to be tested of the turbine efficiency.
To illustrate the measuring technique an ordinary arrangement of the thermodynamic
measurements on a Francis turbine as shown on Fig. 5.13, is used.
Performance Tests 5.15
Determination of the specific available hydraulic energy E
n

The probe is a kind of a pitot tube. With the opening directed against the flow velocity in the
conduit, the total pressure that is the sum of the static pressure and the stagnation pressure in
the conduit, can be measured. By closing the valve V downstream of the orifice D, the drawn
off flow is shut off, and the total pressure p
abs.man
= p
abs1
+ c
1
2
/2 is measured by the dead weight
manometer at the reference level z
man
.
The pressure p
abs2
is the barometric at the tail water level z
2
. The velocity c
2
is a relatively small
quantity and c
2
2
/2 may be neglected as a first approximation. But after the net head H
n
= E
n
/g,
the hydraulic efficiency η
h
and the generator output P
G
are determined, the velocity c
2
can be
calculated as c
2
= P
G
/(η
G
η
h
A
2
) where A
2
is the cross section area of the outlet of the suction
pipe.
On the base of these measurements and observations of z
man
and z
2
the specific available
hydraulic energy is
E p p
c
g z z
n abs man abs man
= − − + −
.
( )
2
2
2
2
2

and the net head H
n
= E
n
/g.
Determination of the specific mechanical energy E
R

The drawn off flow is exposed to heat exchange with the surroundings by the flow through the
apparatus. Therefore the measured temperature has to be corrected for the corresponding
temperature change. This is done by measuring the temperature and pressure for a series of
different magnitudes of the drawn off flow by regulating the valve R.
On the base of these temperature and pressure observations the pressure and temperature
corresponding to zero heat exchange can be determined. The total pressure in this case at the
level z
1

of the temperature sensor S
1
is p p g z z
abs z
abs man man
.
.
'
'
( )
1
1
= + − where p
abs.man
include
stagnation pressure c
1
2
/2, and the temperature is θ
1
.
The temperature θ
2
is measured by sensor S
2
in the position of level z
2
’ in the outlet of the
suction pipe. The corresponding pressure p
abs z .
'
2
is the sum of the barometric pressure p
abs2
at
level z
2
and the difference of gravity g(z
2
- z
2
’).
The velocity c
2
is the same as in the determination of E
n
.
The isothermal factor a and the specific heat capacity c
p
are to be taken from tables (f.ex. IEC
41) and evaluated for the average pressure ( )
. .
' '
p p
abs z abs z
1 2
2 + and the average temperature

1

2
)/2.
By these measurements and observations the specific mechanical energy becomes

' '
1 2
2
' ' 2
R p 1 2 1 2
abs.z abs.z
c
E a(p p ) c ( ) g(z z )
2
= − + θ −θ − + −
and the corresponding head utilised by the runner is H
R
= E
R
/g.
The measuring technique as illustrated for the measurements of a Francis turbine, is valid also
for the measurements of a Pelton turbine. However, the temperature sensor S
2
has to be
positioned in the tail water downstream of the turbine runner outlet at a distance which is longer
Performance Tests 5.16
or equal to a minimum length defined in the Standard IEC 41. Moreover, the level of the tail
water is usually lower than the average level of the nozzles, and this level difference has to be
corrected for in the temperature measurements.
The practise of measurements described above, is not the only method the different
practitioners of the thermodynamic method are applying. In addition a great many of them
instead of evaluating the specific energy quantities, prefer to convert these quantities into
heights. Further information about these details are given in the Standard IEC 41.
5.1.4.4 Corrections for leakage and friction
The hydraulic efficiency η
h
= E
R
/E
n
is determined on the basis of the measurements described
in Subsection 5.1.4.2.
In addition to the energy losses by the flow through the turbine there are some other losses also
to be taken into account. In practise that is mainly losses in the bearing, the leakage flow and its
friction losses outside the runner shrouds. With certain adaptation and arrangement of
measuring equipment these losses too are measured. The corresponding power is denoted P
L
and the mechanical efficiency
η
ρ
m
L
R
L
R
P
P
P
QE
= − = − 1 1 (5.26)
where the turbine discharge is
Q
P
E
G
G n
=
η ρ

Finally the turbine efficiency becomes
η = η
m
η
h
(5.27)
With good measuring techniques and flow conditions, the efficiency of a turbine determined by
the thermodynamic method, is in general obtained with an accuracy around + 1.0% for the
higher heads and ± 1.5 % for the lower heads.
5.1.5 Dynamic properties of the turbines
During comissioning, shaft vibrations and vibrations of the guide vanes, top and bottom cover
and the draft tube may be recorded if the dynamic properties are regarded to be unfavourable.
Noise level is often recorded, but a mutual agreement must be made to include noise level in
the guarantee.
For shaft vibrations a new IEC code somewhat similar to the ISO norms for pumps, is under
progress.
5.1.6 Cavitation behaviour of prototype
During commissioning cavitation may be observed by abnormal noise. In the future
hydrophones seem to be a tool for indicating severe cavitation at an early stage.
Cavitation damage deeper than 0.5 mm is normally defined as eroded surface. The eroded
volume is than calculated to be 0.5 x deepest point multiplied by the eroded surface deeper than
0.5 mm according to norms. However, for satisfactory operation no material pitting should
occur and this is the goal for the owner and producer of a turbine.
Performance Tests 5.17
5.1.7 Governor test – Rejection tests
Rejection of a turbine generator unit is actually a governor test
/15/
. But the turbine characteristic
has also an influence on speed and pressure and this test is therefore normally combined with
the turbine performance tests.
The governor system and turbine performance however, will always be tested in a shut down
test of each unit normally at 25 %, 50 %, 75 % and 100 % load. If overload has been
guaranteed, a rejection test must also be made at the guaranteed overload.
It should be emphasised that for a high head power plant with more than one unit, simultaneous
part load rejection with all units normally gives higher pressure rise than full load rejection.
During the rejection test the maximum pressure should be recorded by fast pressure transducers
with short connecting pipes in order to record the real pressure peaks with minimum damping.
Besides the maximum pressure peak, the maximum speed of the unit should be recorded.
During the shut down test also the minimum pressure in the draft tube should be recorded, and
special attention should be paid to this if the draft tube is relatively long.
The surging of the water level in the draft tube surge shaft should be carefully observed because
in some cases a quick unloading after a full rejection followed by a new repeated rejection may
cause overflow and drowning of a cavern power station.
5.2 Model tests and scale effect of efficiency from model to prototype
Performance tests of prototype turbines by means of model tests may be used to prove
guarantees given by the manufacturer. Model tests may also be used to compare models from
several manufacturers. Such tests have to be carried out in neutral laboratories.
5.2.1 Laboratory qualifications
The laboratories qualified for performance tests of turbines by means of model tests, have
technical data around the following values
/7/
:
Pump capacity: H
max
= 160 |m| and Q
max
= 1.5 |m
3
/sec|
Dynamometer: P = 350 |kW| and n
max
= 1500 |RPM|
Traceable calibration range: H: 0 - 155 |m| and Q: 0.05 - 1.5 |m
3
/sec|
Water reservoir: V = 650 |m
3
|
The flow system in which the model test turbines are installed, must have an upstream inflow
and a downstream outflow system with dimensions and designs satisfying certain standard
rules. The supply pump must be continuously adjustable in head and capacity within the
calibration range, and the control system must be prepared to keep any operation point in this
range constant within required limits.
The parameters to measure on the models are: pressure p and/or head H, discharge Q, torque T,
angular velocity ω and density ρ of the water. The laboratory must be equipped with facilities
for calibration and checking control of the metering devices to required accuracies for all these
parameters. A device for metering and control of the air content in the water is also needed.
Normally the indications from the metering devices (transducers) of the respective parameters,
are converted to electric signals which are transmitted to recording devices in a central control
room. The recorded data may further be fed into a computer, which is programmed for
evaluation of the resulting efficiency and other relevant data.
Performance Tests 5.18
In addition to the facilities for calibration and measurements of the parameters of the model
tests, some other instruments as a precision barometer, thermometer and a hygrometer, are
necessary for control of the environmental conditions in the laboratory.
5.2.2 Model tests
Required size and surface roughness of the models
A major point by the model tests is the minimal size of a model, for which reliable test results
must be obtained for the succeeding evaluation of the corresponding prototype turbine. This
will generally depend on Reynolds number of the tests and the roughness of the surfaces being
in contact with the flow. However, provided that the models are manufactured with hydraulic
smooth surfaces, the Reynolds number creates the criterion for the sizing of the models.
In practise this means to establish a lower limit of the Reynolds number. The basis for the
evaluation of this limit is the distribution of the laminar and turbulent flow layers on the runner
vanes, which is representing the skin friction losses. In addition this distribution is also
influencing the stability conditions and the flow direction out of propeller runners .
Tests have however shown that synonymous critical values of the Reynolds number may be
established. In the Standard IEC 193
/10/
the values in the following table are adopted for the
minimum Reynolds number R
e min
of the models of Kaplan/propeller, Francis and Pelton
turbines.
The definitions of the Reynolds numbers are:
- for Francis and Kaplan/propeller turbines
e s
2gH
R D =
υ

- for Pelton turbines
e
2gH
R B =
υ

where D
s
is the diameter of the runner at the outlet of Francis and Kaplan turbines
B is the width of a Pelton bucket
H is the head of the model turbine
ν is the kinematic viscosity of the water
Kaplan model turbine Francis model turbine Pelton model turbine
R
e min
2⋅10
6
2.5⋅10
6
3.5⋅10
6

D
s min
250 mm 250 mm B
min
80 mm
H
min
1 m 2 m 40 m
Besides the lower limits of the model size, it is required that all hydraulic details from inlet to
outlet of the model turbine are geometric similar to the prototype. This means inclusion of the
scroll case and the suction pipe in the similarity requirements as well. Likewise such
components as bends, branch pipes and valves at the turbine inlet may be included in these
requirements.
The flow leading surfaces of the model shall have the same relative smoothness as the
prototype.
Performance Tests 5.19
Testing procedure
The testing procedure for determination of performance characteristics of the model turbine
/8/
,
is reported in Subsection 3.1.4.
Accuracy of model tests
The probable errors of the measurements of an operating point on the turbine
/8/
, may be
estimated statistically by introducing the error of each of the measured quantities. These errors
may be summed up, as an example in the following way
∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ η η η η η η
ω ρ
= + + + +
H Q T
2 2 2 2 2
(5.28)
where ∆η
H
is the error of the efficiency caused by the error of the head
∆η
Q
is the error of the efficiency caused by the error of the discharge
∆η
T
is the error of the efficiency caused by the error of the torque
∆η
ω
is the error of the efficiency caused by the error of the angular speed
∆η
ρ
is the error of the efficiency caused by the error of the density of the water
It may be required in model tests that the probable error of the efficiency shall be ∆η ≤ 0.25 %.
In practise it is difficult however, even with the best measuring methods, to obtain lower errors
of the measured quantities than the following values:
∆η
H
= ± 0.1 %, ∆η
Q
= ± 0.2 %, ∆η
T
= ± 0.1 %, ∆η
ω
= ± 0.05 %, ∆η
ρ
= ± 0.05 %
With these values the probable error of the efficiency becomes ∆η = 0.255 %.
Cavitation tests on model
Cavitation, suction head and similarity relations including cavitation are dealt with in
Subsection 3.1.5. Methods for testing and determination of cavitation limits on models are
indicated there as well.
According to these outlines the Thoma parameter for the model:
σ =
|
\

|
.
|
NPSH
H
el mod
(5.29)
can be calculated from the measured pressure referred to the reference height according to
Standard IEC 41 for NPSH. On the base of the measured σ value the critical setting H
s
of the
prototype can be calculated.
However, the content of nucleis and air in the water has a great influence on the value of σ
measured in a model. The lowest value of σ will be obtained in the laboratory by degassed
water.
Further the content of silt in the water at site for the prototype also has some influence.
For safety reasons it has been recommended to use degassed water and inject nucleis (micro
bubbles of air) until the highest σ value is obtained. However, so far the experts on cavitation
have not agreed upon a standard which includes nuclei injection, and the majority of
laboratories have no nuclei injection systems. So far natural water saturated with air has been
regarded to be the best alternative by many laboratories for model tests, because degassed water
gives a lower value of σ and a lesser margin for the prototype if plant σ is based on model test.
Performance Tests 5.20
Runaway test
It is a question of safety for the dimensioning and design of the rotating parts of the turbine and
generator unit to know the runaway speed.
In the discussions of the performance diagrams of Pelton, Francis and Kaplan turbines in the
Sections 3.2, 3.3 and 3.4 respectively, the runaway speed of these turbines has been mentioned.
With reference to these diagrams, the runaway speed differs essentially from one type of
turbines to another.
On the base of these facts the runaway test with zero torque should be carried out during the
normal model performance tests. It should be noted however, that the runaway speed normally
increases with low values of the Thoma parameter σ. For this reason the runaway tests should
be run at the plant σ. Runaway test on prototypes should be avoided at site due to the
consequences if the generator cannot withstand the centrifugal forces.
5.2.3 Scale effect on efficiency from model to prototype
The efficiency of a prototype will normally be higher than for the model. The reason is less
friction due to higher Reynolds number R
e
= U
2
D
2
/ν where U
2
and D
2
is the circumferential
speed and the diameter respectively of the runner at outlet and ν is the water viscosity.
The formula for upscaling the efficiency from the model to the prototype for Francis turbines
according to IEC code
/10/
yields:
( ) ∆η = − −
|
\

|
.
|
|
|
\

|
.
|
|
1 1 η
α
m
em
ep
V
R
R
(5.30)
where ∆η is the difference in efficiency of the prototype and the model
η
m
is the efficiency of the model turbine
R
em
is the Reynolds number of the model
R
ep
is the Reynolds number of the prototype
V is the scaleable part of the losses. V≈ 0.7 according to IEC code
/10/
. However, it
is proven that V = f(
*
Ω)
α is exponent, estimated α = 0.16
For Kaplan turbines a similar formula as for Francis turbines is established, but with a different
value of V. For Pelton turbines a minor scale up effect at part load has been proven. At best
efficiency point the increase in efficiency is normally very small and at full load a decreased
efficiency is normally observed for multinozzle turbines.
A scale effect of the Thoma cavitation parameter σ has not yet been proved. However, the σ
value for the prototype is regarded to be the same as for the model.
References
1. Alming, K.: Some problems related to and experiences gained from the use of the Gibson
method. Proc. Inst. NEL 1960, vol. 2.
2. Doeblin, E. O.: Measurement Systems. Application and Design. Mc Graw-Hill Book
Company, New York, 1976. ISBN 0-07-017336-2.
3. Kjølle, A.: Hydraulic Measurements (in Norwegian), lectures at NTNU, Trondheim,
Norway 1971.
Performance Tests 5.21
4. Fischbacher, R. E.: Measurement of liquid flow by ultrasonics. Water Power, June 1959.
5. Hermant, C: Application of flow measurements by the comparative salt dilution method to
the determination of turbine efficiency. Proc. Inst. NEL 1960. Vol. 2. Paper E - 2.
6. Hooper, J. L.: Dischage measurements by the Allen salt velocity method. Proc. Inst. NEL
1960. Vol. 2.
7. Hutton, S. P..: The National Engineering Laboratory, Fluid Mechanics Division. East
Kilbride. Scotland.
8. Hutton, S. P.: Über die Voraussage des Verhaltens von Wasserturbinen auf Grund von
Modell-Versuchen. Sonderdruck aus dem Bulletin des Schweizerischen Electrotechnisches
Vereins, 1959, Nr. 10 und 13.
9. IEC 41: International code for field tests of hydraulic turbines. Publication 41, 1963.
10. IEC 193: International code for model acceptance test of hydraulic turbines. Publication
193, 1965.
11. ISO 2186, Fluid in Closed Conduits – Connections for Pressure Signal Transmissions
Between Primary and Secondary Elements. First Edition, International Standards
Organisation, 1973.
12. ISO 2975, Measurement of Water Flow in Closed Conduits – Tracer Methods – Part I –
VII, International Standard Organisation, 1998.
13. ISO 3966, Measurement of Fluid Flow in Closed Conduits – Velocity Area Method Using
Pitot Static Tubes, International Standard Organisation, First Edition, 1977.
14. ISO 5167, Measurement of Fluid Flow by Means of Pressure Differential Devices – Part i:
Orifice Plates, Nozzles and Venturi Tubes, Inserted in circular Conduits Running Full,
International Standard Organisation, First Edition, 1991, Amendment 1 – 1998.
15. Kværner Brug: Course III, Lecture compendium, 1986.
16. Suzuki, H., Nakabori, H., Hoshikawa, T. and Satake, T.: Ultrasonic method of flow
measurement in an open channel. Water Power, May/June, 1970.
17. Whillm, G. and Campmas, P.: Mesure du rendement des turbines hydraulique par la
méthode termometrique Poirson. La Huille Blanche 1959.

Bibliography
1. Hayward, A. T. J.:FLOWMETERS. A basic Guide and Source-Book for Users. The
Macmillan Press Ltd., 1979. ISBN 0-333-21920-1.
2. Wislicenus, G. F.: Fluid Mechanics of Turbomachinery. Dover Publications. New York
1965.

Pelton Turbines 6.1
CHAPTER 6
Pelton Turbines
Introduction
The specified data of water flow rate, head and rotational speed determine the Pelton turbine
designs.The number of jets depends on the speed number and stepping up values of the speed
number means to step up in number of jets. For a certain plant that means often a matter of choise
between numbers of jets for the turbine. If for example the design should be either four or five jets
of the turbine, then the cost of the generator for a five jet turbine will be correspondingly lower
than the alternative of a four jet turbine.
However, it is a serious demand that the jets enter the buckets so far from each other that no mutual
disturbances can occur. In practise this means that six jets represent the upper limit of their
number, and an evaluation of the speed number according to Equation (3.8) will show that speed
numbers of Pelton turbines ranges below
*
Ω = 0.2.
Pelton turbines can be arranged either by a horizontal or a vertical shaft. In general a horizontal
arrangement is found only in the medium and smaller sized turbines with one or two jets. Some
horizontal Pelton turbines have however, been built with four jets as well.
6.1 Horizontal Pelton turbine arrangement


Fig.6.1 Horizontal Pelton turbine with one jet (To the left: Radiell section; to the right: Longitudinal section)
(Courtesy of Escher Wyss)

Pelton Turbines 6.2
Main details:
1. Nozzle
2. Jet
3. Runner
4. Runner bucket
5. Needle head
6. Tail water level
8. Runner disc
12. Inlet bend
13. Needle rod
17. Lower bend
18. Emptying pipe
20. Deflector
21. Feed back rod
22. Servomotor piston
for needle movement
23. Closing spring for
needle
24. Solenoid valve for
the control of needle
servomotor
25. Steering wheel for
needle movement
31 and 32. Turbine housing
32a. Screen for guiding
water from runner
outlet to tail water
32b. Drain canals for
for guiding spray water
away from shaft
34. Steel lining
40. Turbine shaft
40a. Cam for axial bearing
42. The outer turbine bearing
43. Coupling

The flow passes through the inlet bend (12), the nozzle outlet (1) where it flows out as a compact
jet through atmospheric air into the wheel buckets (4). From the outlet of the buckets the water
falls through the pit down into the tail water canal (6).
Further comments to some of the details are given in Section 6.3.
Fig. 6.2 shows another example of a horizontal Pelton turbine with two runners and two jets on
each runner.

Fig. 6.2 Cross sections through a horizontal Pelton turbine with two runners and two jets to each runner. (Courtesy
of Atelier des Charmilles)
6.2 Vertical Pelton turbine arrangement
Large Pelton turbines with many jets are normally arranged with vertical shaft. The jets are
symmetrically distributed around the runner to balance the jet forces. The Fig. 6.2 and Fig. 6.3
show as an example of the vertical and horizontal section respectively of the arrangement of a six
jet vertical Pelton turbine.

Pelton Turbines 6.3
1. Pipes for efficiency tests
2. Distributor pipe
3. Deflector mechanism
4. Turbine shaft
5. Deflector servomotor
6. Wheel pit cover
7. Guide bearing
8. Turbine housing
9. Main injector with
needle servomotor
10. Runner
11. Runner cart rails
12. Runner cart
13. Inspection platform




Fig. 6.3a Vertical multinozzle Pelton turbine, vertical section (Courtesy of Kværner Brug)













Fig. 6.3b Vertical multinozzle Pelton turbine, horizontal section (Courtesy of Kværner Brug)




Pelton Turbines 6.4
Numbered details in Fig. 6.3b:
1. Runner
2. Deflector
3. Inspection platform
4. Main injector with
needle servomotor
5. Needle
6. Bifurcation
7. Distributor
8. Expansion/dismantling joint
9. Runner cart rail
6.3 Main components and their functions
The examples of Pelton turbines shown in the Figures 6.1, 6.2, 6.3a 6.3b, indicate that the turbine
constructions consist of a rather great number of components. Naturally some of these do not exist
in every manufactured Pelton turbine. This matter of fact imply that the constructions appear
different from one manufacturer to the other or from a small to a bigger size of the turbine.
For these reasons our considerations will mainly according to ref. /1/, be dedicated to main
components which are vital in all turbines. Of these components further attention will be paid to
the folloving parts referred to Figs.6.1, 6.3a and 6.3b:
- runner
- shaft and bearings
- oil reservoir
- guide bearing
- bend and distributor
- straight flow injector
- deflector
- turbine housing
6.3.1 Runner
The Pelton runners may be designed either for casting of the disc and buckets in one piece, i.e.
monocast, or the disc and each of the buckets are casted in separate pieces. The method first
mentioned is preferred and common for the Pelton turbines in modern power plants where the the
turbine units are of the high power and bigger sizes. Fig. 6.4 shows a photograph of a runner of
monocast type, and Fig. 6.5 shows a runner with buckets having ears through which they are bolted
to the disc.
Some details of such buckets on Fig. 6.5 show how some manufacturers in addition to bolts (9) also
use pins (10) or wedges (11) between the buckets. The reason for this is that, while the runner is
rotating, the buckets run in and out of the jets with a frequency according to the rotating speed and
the number of jets. During this process they are exposed to shocks occurring with the same
frequency. In the same way the bolts (9) are strained. To take care of these bolts conical pins (10)
may be fitted into corresponding holes and driven in to a certain degree of prestressing between the
buckets and the disc. If such pins are too weak, wedges (11) can be used as shown to the right on
Fig. 6.5.
The material of the runner and buckets are chosen according to the head, stresses, content of sand in
the water and other strain factors, and may be cast iron, cast steel or casted of high quality alloy
steel. For the large high head turbines the main strain factors are cavitation, sand erosion and cycle
fatigue. Runners working under such conditions are normally casted of 13%Cr4%Ni alloy steel. In
addition to the strength qualities the material must be adequately weldable.
Pelton Turbines 6.5















Fig. 6.4 A monocast Pelton runner Fig. 6.5 Pelton runner with bolted buckets
The shape of the buckets is decisive for the
efficiency of the turbines. For keeping and
improving high efficiency characteristics great
efforts of theoretical analysis and model tests
follow the runner design. Limitations however, in
these works are that bucket shape always will be a
compromise between a hydraulically ideal and a
structural optimum design.
The surfaces, over which the water jet flows are
milled, ground and polished to the correct shape.
The correctness is checked with templates.
Surfaces close to jet flow out of the downstream
neighbour bucket, and places where fatigue cracks
may occur, are ground and polished as well.
The runner disc is fastened to the shaft by bolts
and nuts
/1/
as shown on Fig. 6.6. The bolts are
screwn in threaded holes in the shaft flange and
protrude through holes in the disc and have
tightening nuts screwn on the other end. This
connection establishes a pure frictional joint by a
corresponding prestressing of the bolts by means
of heat or a special oil hydraulic tool. This type of























Fig. 6.6 Rotating parts of a vertical Pelton turbine /1/


Pelton Turbines 6.6
joint enables a simple dismantling and replacement of the runner. A shield to reduce windage losses
caused by air and droplet circulation protects the nuts.
6.2.2 The turbine shaft
The turbine shaft of vertical Pelton turbines is made of forged Siemens-Martin steel with an integral
flange at both ends as shown on Fig. 6.6. A hole is drilled centrally through the whole length of the
shaft. The surface of the shaft is machined in a lathe to a final appropriate tolerance and even
surface.
An oil reservoir is a rotating member bolted to the shaft flange
/1/
as shown on Fig. 6.6.

6.2.3 Turbine radial bearing
The details of a turbine bearing shown on fig. 6.7, is a radial guide bearing
/1/
. The bearing house (3)
consists of two halves bolted together and mounted to a flange on the runner pit cover.
Two semicircular segments bolted together are




1. Bearing cover
2. Oil temperature sensorl
3. Bearing house.

4. Scoop
5. Bearing shell
6. Lower rotating oil
reservoir

7. Level switch
8. Temperature sensor, bearing
shell
Fig. 6.7 Turbine guide bearing (Courtesy of Kværner Brug)
forming the bearing shell (5) as a rigid cylinder, which is mounted to the lower side of the bearing
house (3). These segments are provided with four fixed babbit bearing pads. They ensure a proper
centring of the turbine shaft. Oil pockets between the four fixed bearing pads create the entrance of
cooled lubricating oil to the bearing pads. At standstill the total oil quantity is staying in the rotating
reservoir (6).
The rotating oil reservoir encloses the bearing shell. The oil rotates together with the reservoir as a
layer on the wall. A stationary scoop (4) is installed with one end against the rotational speed of the
oil in reservoir (6). The scoop is fastened to the bearing house (3) with a pipe connected to an
external oil cooler. From the cooler a pipe returns to the upper oil reservoir of (3). The stagnation
velocity pressure at the scoop opening causes an oil flow from the lower reservoir through the oil
cooler to the upper reservoir.
Pelton Turbines 6.7
To keep a certain oil quantity in the rotating reservoir the scoop is set at a predetermined distance
from the wall. For large turbines however, two scoops are normally installed, and one of these with
a larger distance from the wall than the other. This is advantageous under start while the oil layer in
the rotating reservoir is thick enough for both scoops to deliver oil from the lower to the upper
reservoir. Thus the time needed to establish the stationary oil circulation is decreased.
During the stationary circulation the oil flow exists as a continuous thin film along the wall of the
rotating reservoir. An air stream outside the wall of the rotating reservoir mainly cools the oil layer.
The slightly conical shape of the wall of the rotating reservoir is ideal for this cooling. Air-cooling
may however be insufficient especially if the shaft rotational speed relative to the guide bearings is
in the high-speed range. Therefore an external cooler is normally provided.
The cooled oil flows downwards along the shaft as it is distributed to the four pockets between the
bearing pads. The oil film follows the shaft rotation, enters the bearing segments and establishes the
load carrying coolant film in the bearing pads.
The bearing shell (5) is provided with a throttling edge at the lower end. The throttling edge controls
the oil circulation in the bearing and ensures that the oil pockets in the shell are always filled with
oil during operation.
6.2.4 Bend and distributor
The distributor pipe (7) for a multijet Pelton turbine
/1/
is shown on Fig. 6.3b. From this a bifurcation
(6) is made to each of the injectors (4). The distributor is designed to provoke an acceleration of the
water flow through the bifurcation towards each of the main injectors. This design is advantages by
contributing to keep a uniform velocity profile of the flow.
The distributor pipe is a welded plate design manufactured completely from fine grain high tensile
steel. The maximum main stress for this material must be limited to about 200 MPa. The bifurcation
is reinforced with external and internal ribs. Because of the steel quality, welding of the distributor
must be performed with a specified heat treatment.
The distributor is completely embedded in concrete when installed in the power house. However, to
transfer the large axial forces to the power house an extension must be welded to the inlet flange.
This is done for reducing the specific pressure on the concrete to avoid crushing and cracking.
The distributor is provided with a manhole with cover as access for internal inspection and
maintenance. A manually operated drain valve is installed underneath close to the inlet flange of the
distributor. This valve should be operated only when the main spherical valve upstream of the
distributor is closed.
The distributor is joined to the main spherical valve via a joint, which is installed for dismantling
purposes. This is furnished with a telescope flange connection to the distributor entrance. The main
injectors are joined to the bifurcation by means of rigid flange connections.
An automatic relief valve is normally installed on the top of either the distributor entrance section or
the dismantling joint. This valve closes automatically when most of the air in the distributor is let
out during water filling, and remains closed as long as the distributor is pressurised.
For emergency stop a water jet braking system is provided to obtain a fast reduction of the rotational
speed of the runner after the nozzles are closed. This system consists of one automatically operated
needle valve connected to one or two brake jet nozzles, which are fed via pipes directly from the
Pelton Turbines 6.8
penstock. The braking valve is controlled by a solenoid valve operated by an emergency control
system actuated by the water pressure from the penstock.
For emptying the penstock upstream of the spherical valve a draining system is provided. This
consists of five parts: a pipe installed just upstream of the spherical valve, a manually operated gate
valve with a bypass valve, one manually operated needle valve in series downstream of the gate
valve and an outflow pipe. The outflow pipe has its outlet above the water surface in the turbine pit
to prevent cavitation during drainage of the penstock.
6.2.5 Straight flow injector
The straight flow injector with needle servomotor is shown on Fig. 6.8.
The injector
/1/
consists of three outer parts bolted together, the main body (14), the beak (3) and the
nozzle ring (17). The beak is provided with two external brackets with self-lubricating bushings for
the deflector (7) support.
Inside the injector two fins to the main body fix the inner cylindrical body (23). The inner body
contains: the needle, servomotor with needle rod (15), disc spring column (8) and feedback
mechanism.


1. Arm
2. Arm with split boss
3. Beak
4. Cap
5. Carrier
6. Cover
7. Deflector
8. Disk spring
9. Elbow lever
10. Guide
11. Guiding piece
12. Lid
13. Needle head
14. Main injector
15. Piston rod
16. Needle tip
17. Nozzle
18. Piston
19. Shield for beak
20. Spindle
21. Spring plate
22. Spring retainer
23. Inner injector body
24. Oil box

Fig. 6.8 Straight flow injector (Courtesy of Kværner Brug)
The needle consists of two parts, the head (13) and the tip (16). The guidance for the needle is the
guidance piece (11). A U-seal ring in the needle head seals against the water pressure outside the
guiding piece. The seal ring is protected against sand by a synthetic rubber scraper ring. Another U-
seal ring in the guidance piece seals against the oil pressure in the servomotor.
Pelton Turbines 6.9
The needle servomotor is double acting and operated with oil pressure from the governor oil system
through a control valve. Disc spring elements and the water pressure from the penstock balance the
needle. The disc spring column (8) will function satisfactorily also when one of the discs is broken.
With this spring design the servomotor will work even though the oil pressure should fall to about
25% of the normal level. If the oil pressure should be decreasing towards zero the water pressure
will move the needle servomotor towards closed position and the turbine brought to stop if the
generator is disconnected from the grid.
When the servomotor is out of operation and no pressure either from oil or water exists, the needle
will be in the middle position and the spring discs relieved.
The governor feedback mechanism is located inside the upstream cap (4). The feedback shaft (20) is
passing through one of the structure ribs into the external oil box (24). At the end of the shaft the
arm (1) is fastened and further connected via a mechanical linkage system to a control cubicle on the
turbine floor.

During operation with load alteration and corresponding regulation the feedback system will move
the control valve in the control cubicle back to neutral position when the needle has reached correct
position.
Due to the high exposure of sand erosion and cavitation the nozzle ring (17), the needle head (13),
the guiding piece (11) and piston rod (15) with the nut are made of corrosion resistant steel normally
13% Cr 4% Ni. The beak is also lined with stainless steel.
The piston (18) is made of cast iron. The servomotor cylinder is lined inside with a cast iron bushing
which cover the stroke length of the piston. On the upstream side the piston rod is supported in the
servomotor cover with a bushing and a U-seal ring against the oil pressure.
The chamber bounded by the piston rod (15), the needle head (13) and the end of the guiding piece
(11) has a volume varying with the piston
movement. This chamber is vented to the
atmosphere through a hole drilled along the
guiding piece (11) and corresponding to a
drilled hole in the wall of the inner injector
body (23) and finally through the structure rib.
A replaceable cast steel shield (19) mounted
on the beak protects the jet against exit water
from the runner during normal operation.

6.2.6 Deflector mechanism
The deflector
/1/
has the function to bend the jet
away from the runner at load rejections to
avoid too high speed increase. Moreover it
protects the jet against exit water spray from
the runner.
The deflector mechanism is shown on Fig. 6.9.
The deflector arc (1) is bolted to the deflector
support structure frame (2). The deflector support frame is connected to the deflector shaft (4). The
deflector pivot (3) is supported in the beak on water lubricated bearings. The deflector shaft (4) is



Fig. 6.9 Deflector mechanism (Courtesy of Kværner Brug)

Pelton Turbines 6.10
supported in a self-lubricating spherical bearing located in the bearing housing (5) on the top plate
floor. A seal ring around the deflector shaft bearing housing prevents water and moisture from
penetrating into the bearing.
The deflector arc (1) is made of stainless corrosion resistant cast steel 13% Cr 4% Ni.
The governor deflector servomotor controls the deflectors through rods, turnbuckle forks and lever
(6) which is fastened to the deflector shaft (4). In addition a dead band-eliminating servomotor is
mounted in the deflector mechanism to prevent play in the governor lever system.
The control valve of the needle servomotors is joined by a link connection to feed forward
mechanism connected to the deflector servomotor.
6.2.7 Turbine housing
The housing of a vertical Pelton turbine
/1/
is shown in Fig. 6.3a, pos. (8). This consists of an upper
turbine housing and a lower pit lining. Both parts are made of steel plates welded together at site
during construction. Moreover, cylindrical connections for the distributor inlet flanges are welded to
the pit lining.
The pit lining is cylindrical and the upper turbine housing is externally reinforced by ribs and anchor
bolts. The entire housing is embedded in reinforced concrete. Together these parts form a rigid unit
with passages for needle servomotor piping and feedback mechanisms and the deflector shafts
through the pit cover up to the turbine floor.
The wheel pit cover pos. (6) on Fig. 6.3a is conical. A plane top plate is provided with a flange for
support of the turbine guide bearing, pos. (7). The shape of the wetted side of the wheel pit cover is
important for leading the exit water effectively away from the runner.
The wheel pit cover is filled with concrete except for the canals of embedded pipes leading air from
the tail race tunnel to the runner disc. The wheel pit cover is welded to the upper and lower plate on
the turbine housing and forms a rigid support for the turbine guide bearing.
An inspection platform below the runner, pos. (13) on Fig 6.3, is designed to carry the weight of the
runner and the main injectors during assembly and dismantling. Transport rails are mounted on the
inspection platform, and a runner cart is provided for the transport of heavy parts in and out of the
turbine pit.6.3 Condition control.
6.3 Condition control
6.3.1 Turbine guide bearing
The first oil change should be done after 3 - 6 months of operation
/1/
. The later oil changes have to
be done as required by evaluating oil sample tests.
To empty the bearing for oil it has to be done at standstill by pumping through the oil level pipe in
the bearing housing.
If babbit metal particles are found in oil samples, the bearing should immediately be dismantled for
inspection.

6.3.2 Runner
Pelton Turbines 6.11
The runner should be regularly inspected
/1/
to record possible damages from foreign objects in the
water. The time interval between each inspection is dependent on sand content in the water.

The runner inspection is done visually by means of magnaflux and/or dyes penetrant. Particular
attention should be paid to the area between the buckets.

If minor cracks or defects have been formed, these should be removed by grinding and polishing
according to advises from the manufacturer.

The special shape of the runner buckets makes it difficult to detect material defects just below the
surface. These defects may penetrate up to the surface during the first operation time period. To
prevent an extensive crack propagation they must be rectified as soon as possible.
6.3.3 Main injector with needle servo motor
The needle tip and the nozzle should be inspected
/1/
with respect to cavitation damage and damage
from foreign objects. If the water contains fine silt or sand, the needle tips may loose their original
shape.
It is of great importance that the nozzle is inspected from the inside.
The needle servomotor should be run to neutral mid position and the oil pressure shut off for safety
reasons. The leakage indicators should be regularly inspected.

6.3.4 Seal ring in deflector bearing
Leakage in this seal does not require immediate replacement of the seal ring, but replacement should
be done as soon as possible to avoid bearing corrosion. The seal ring must be provided with a spring
of stainless material.
6.3.5 Filter
Filter for breaking system control water supply should be checked and cleaned if necessary. It may
be cleaned after closing of the valves for this water supply system from the penstock.
6.4 Monitoring instruments
The turbines are normally equipped with the following instruments:
• A contact manometer for reading of penstock pressure just upstream of the spherical valve.
The manometer transmits signals either to the control room or to the operation control centre
if the pressure exceeds or falls below certain pre-set values.
• A manometer for reading the pressure in the distributor.
• A contact thermometer for measuring the temperature of the turbine bearing. The reading
instrument is mounted on the wall close to the governor control desk. The temperature
sensor is located in one of the pads of babbit metal.
The thermometer is provided with a contact that gives an alarm signal to the control room at a
temperature which is normally 5
o
C above the highest stable set temperature of the bearing.
If the temperature should rise a further 3
o
C, another contact will give automatic emergency
shut down. The stable set temperature will vary from one bearing to another. By symmetric
Pelton Turbines 6.12
operation (i.e. balanced jet forces on the runner) the temperature will however, be
approximately 75
o
C. By unsymmetrical operation with a reduced number of jets in action,
the unbalanced jet force must be carried by the turbine bearing. In this case an increase in the
temperature of 5 - 7
o
C will occur. Another sensor for direct transmission of the temperature
reading to the control room is normally also installed in one of the bearing pads.
• A resistance thermometer is mounted in the upper oil reservoir with remote display in the
control room for reading of the bearing oil temperature.
• Two oil level switches are installed to give warning signals at high and low oil levels in the
bearing. Low oil level may be caused by oil leakage in the oil reservoir, or defects in the oil
scoops that may lead to spraying oil so that an oil evaporation occurs.
Cooling water leakage into the bearing normally causes a too high oil level. In this case an
overflow may occur with oil pollution in the environment. This is also a warning against
filling too much oil in the bearing.
6.5 Assembly and dismantling
The assembly operation is of great importance to the completed turbine quality. At first this has to
do with the reliability of operation, the further maintenance and the hydraulic efficiency.
Furthermore the progress of the assembly should be carefully planned, as it is essential for ensuring
commissioning at the right time. The civil works, the turbine and generator assembly is often
directly interdependent and must therefore be carefully co-ordinated. The use of the crane in the
machine hall as well must be co-ordinated between the parties involved.
The turbine must in general be ready for embedding in concrete prior to the commencement of the
formwork. Moreover the generator assembly cannot start before the turbine shaft alignment is
completed. This is again dependent on the completed embedding of the turbine and the completion
of cleaning operations.
The great advantage of the Pelton turbine compared with the Francis turbine is its simple
maintenance and dismantling. The dismantling is almost without exception performed in the
opposite sequence of assembly.

Reference
1. Kværner Brug: COURSE III, Lecture compendium. Oslo 1986.
Bibliography
1. Brekke, H.: Hydro Machines, Lecture compendium at NTNU, Trondheim, 1992.
2. Kjølle, A.: Water Power Machines (in Norwegian), 2. edition, Universitetsforlaget, 1980. ISBN
82-00-27780-1.
3. Nechleba, M.: Hydraulic Turbines. Artia-Prague. Constable & Co. Ltd., London, England 1957.
4. Raabe, J.: Hydraulische Maschinen und Anlagen. Zweite Auflage der Teile 1 bis 4 in einem
Band. VDI-Verlag GmbH 1899.
Francis Turbines 7.1
CHAPTER 7
Francis Turbines
Introduction
In Chapter 3 the hydro turbines are classified by speed numbers, and the Francis turbines are in the
range 0.2 <
*
Ω < 1.5. This wide range imply that the hydraulic design of the runner in these turbines
differ rather much from the lowest to the highest speed numbers.
In general the Francis turbines have a guide vane cascade encompassing the whole circumference of
the runner. Adjustable vanes in the cascade create the canals which are equal in shape and size, for
regulation of the discharge and flow direction before entering the runner. The water flow fills up all
canals completely in the guide vane cascade and the runner respectively. Therefore the water is
under pressure when it enters the runner.
The Francis turbines may be
divided in two groups, the one
group with horizontal and the other
with vertical shaft. In practise it is
normal that turbines with
comparatively small dimensions
are arranged with horizontal shaft,
while larger turbines have vertical
shaft. The vertical arrangement is
normally used also for small
dimensions if the tail race water
level is above the turbine centre.
7.1 Horizontal Francis
turbine
A design example of a horizontal
Francis turbine is shown in Fig.
7.1, which is an axial section
through the turbine. The water
from the supply penstock flows
through the scroll casing (26), the
guide vane cascade (28), the runner
(4), the draft tube (34) and into the

Fig. 7.1 Horizontal Francis Turbine


Francis Turbines 7.2
tail race canal. To obtain an even, quite undisturbed water flow without thrust losses through the
turbine, it is of great importance that any sharp edges or any sharp bends in the flow path should
never exist.
The numbered details on Fig. 7.1 are:
4. Runner
7. The runner cone
9. Servomotor rod
10. Servomotor
14. Turbine shaft
16. Bearing pad
20. Bearing cover
22. Shaft sealing box
23. Turbine cover
24. Runner seal ring
25. Stay vane
26. Scroll case
28. Guide vane
29. Guide vane stem
30. Guide vane lever
32. Link
33. Regulating ring
34. Draft tube

7.2 Vertical Francis turbine
An illustration of a vertical Francis turbine is shown in Fig. 7.2. This figure represents a




1. The scroll casing
3. Runner
4. Shaft
5. Draft tube cone
8. Stay vanes
9. Guide vanes
12. Upper cover
13. Sealing box
14. Guide bearing
14a.Bracket for the bearing(14)

15. Regulating ring
17. Lower cover
21.Replaceable wear and
labyrinth rings
22. Link
23. Lever
24. Lower bearing for guide
vane
25.Upper bearing for guide vane
26. Bearing for the regulating
ring
27. Floor
28. Rotating oil cylinder
29. Oil scoop fastened to
(14a) and (14) with the
opening against the
rotating oil in rotating
oil cylinder (28)
Fig. 7.2 Perspective of an axial section through a Francis turbine

Francis Turbines 7.3
perspective of an axial section through the turbine. The position numbers point to details that are
named in the list underneath.
An illustration of a vertical Francis turbine
arrangement is given in Fig. 7.3, where the units
are built up in an underground cavern. A vertical
section through a unit is shown to the left and a
horizontal section across all units in the cavern is
shown to the right at the bottom of the figure.
The water flow enters the turbine through the pipe
(32), the gate valve (33), scroll casing (1) and
further through the guide apparatus and runner,
draft tube cone (5), bend (5a) out in the tail race
tunnel. The other position numbers are listed
below.



30. Relief valve and energy dissipation
chamber
31. Outlet from energy dissipation chamber
34. Valve in the bypass pipe for pressurising the
scroll casing before opening the gate valve
35. Governor housing with servomotor and
accumulator
36. Pilot control of the governor
37. Ejector pipes
38. Penstock for auxiliary turbine
39. Auxiliary turbine
40. Tail race pipe from the auxiliary turbine
41. Vertical drain pumps
42. Motors for water cooling pumps
43. Staircase and conveying pit
44. Generator (above highest level of the tail water)
45. Emptying the penstock
46. Emptying pipe from the draft tube

Fig 7.3 Power plant with vertical Francis turbines

Vertical section


Horizontal section
Francis Turbines 7.4
7.3 Main components and their functions
The examples of the building up of Francis turbines in Figs. 7.1 to 7.4, show that these turbine
constructions consist of a great number of components. Many of these components are tailor made,
and not all of them are found in every turbine. The constructions are to some extent time dependent
and the different manufacturers construct some details different. Moreover the turbine
constructions depend on the turbine size.
In the following considerations only
main components
/1/
which are vital are
dealt with. These components are:
- Scroll casing
- Guide vane cascade
- Turbine covers
- Runner
- Shaft
- Bearing
- Shaft seal
- Regulating mechanism
- Draft tube
7.3.1 Scroll casing
The water from the penstock is
conducted through the scroll casing and
distributed around the stay ring and the
complete circumference of the guide
vane cascade.
The scroll casings are normally welded
steel plate constructions for turbines at
low, medium as well as high heads. An
example of this type is shown on Fig.
7.4. This type is made for heights of
600 m to 700 m. However, scroll
casings are also made as a combination of cast steel and steel plates in a welded construction.
The stay ring as shown on Fig. 7.4, consists of an upper and a lower ring to which the stay vanes
(8) are welded. The stay vanes are given a favourable hydraulic shape to conduct the water towards
the guide vanes with minimal losses. The stay vanes also carry the axial forces inside the scroll
casing.
The scroll casing is provided with taps for pressure measurements, drain, air vent outlets and a
manhole.
Analogous to Fig. 7.3 the scroll casings are partly or completely embedded in reinforced concrete.
7.3.2 Guide vane cascade
The guide vane cascade is represented by pos. (9) on Fig. 7.4. The openings of the guide vanes are

Fig.7.4 Vertical Francis turbine, axial section (Courtesy of
Kværner Brug)
Francis Turbines 7.5
adjustable by the regulating ring (15), the links (22) and levers (23).
The vanes are shaped according to hydraulic design specifications and given a smooth surface
finish. The bearings of the guide vane shafts are lubricated with oil or grease.
7.3.3 Turbine covers
The covers are represented by pos. (12 and 17) on Fig. 7.4. These covers are bolted to the stay ring
of the scroll casing. They are designed for high stiffness to keep the deformations caused by the
water pressure at a minimum. This is of great importance for achieving a minimal clearance gap
between the guide vane ends and the facing plates of the covers. Between the runner and the covers
the clearance is also made as small as possible.
For high head turbines with sand in the water flow an intense wear is expected. Therefore it is
common to weld layers of wear resistant stainless steel on the exposed surfaces. The upper and
lower cover facings adjacent to the guide vanes are normally lined with high tension stainless steel.
This may either be fastened to the covers with screws or clad welded.
The covers are supporting the guide vane trunnion bearings. The upper cover supports also the
regulating ring bearing, the labyrinth ring, the turbine bearing and the shaft seal box. The lower
cover supports the lower labyrinth ring and the draft tube cone.
The stationary labyrinth rings fixed to the covers are usually made of Ni-Al bronze, and they are
replaceable. For large turbines the labyrinth rings are replaceable for the runners as well. The rings
for the runners are usually made of stainless steel 13 % Cr 4 % Ni.
7.3.4 Turbine runner
The turbine runner pos. (3) on Fig. 7.4, may either be of cast steel or a welded construction where
hot pressed plate blades are welded to the cast hub and ring. In most cases the runner is made of
stainless steel.
As examples of runners Fig. 7.5 shows a photograph of a low head turbine and Fig. 7.6 shows a
photograph of a high head turbine.










Fig. 7.5 Low head Francis turbine Fig. 7.6 High head Francis turbine

Francis Turbines 7.6

The manufacture however, may be different from one manufacturer to the other and depends on the
size and speed number.
The water flow through the labyrinth seals is a leakage flow and is not utilised by the runner. This
flow is depending on the seal clearances. In a new turbine the seal clearances are small and the
leakage flow losses lower than 0.5 %. However, during turbine operation the seals are worn, the
leakage increases and the turbine efficiency decreases. Sand laden water causes a fast seal wear,
and for high head turbines an increase of leakage losses of 2 - 5% has occurred after a relatively
short running time.
On high head turbines the leakage water is normally utilised as cooling water for the generator,
transformers and bearings. The runner is provided with a pump ring which is indicated on Fig. 7.7.
This ring is pumping sufficient power for the cooling water system and prevents water to reach the
labyrinth shaft seal. Through outlets in the upper cover filtered water is then provided.
Low head turbines cannot be provided with a similar pumping device because of low rotational
speed. Instead the seal water normally runs through holes in the hub and directly into the draft
tube.
The runner torque is transferred to the turbine shaft through a bolted friction joint or a combined
friction and shear joint as shown on Fig. 7.7. For large dimensions the bolts of this joint are
prestressed by means of heat. The bolts are made from high tensile strength steel and provided with
a centre bore for measurements of elongation during prestressing.
7.3.5 Turbine shaft and bearing
The turbine shaft Fig. 7.7, is manufactured from
Siemens Martin steel and has forged flanges in both
ends
/1/
. The turbine and generator shafts are
connected by a flanged joint. This joint may be a
bolted reamed or friction coupling where the torque
is transferred by means of shear or friction.
An oil reservoir is bolted to the turbine shaft as
shown on Fig. 7.7. On Fig. 7.8 this oil reservoir (2)
is shown together with the construction of the
bearing system.
This bearing is a rather simple and commonly used
design and has a simple way of working and a
minimal requirement of maintenance. The bearing
house (1) Fig. 7.8, is split in two halves and mounted
on the upper flange of the upper cover.
The bearing pad support ring (3) consists of two
segments bolted together and mounted to the under
side of the bearing house. The pad support ring has
four babbit metal bearing surfaces with correctly

Fig 7.7 Rotating parts of a Francis turbine /1/

Francis Turbines 7.7
shaped leading ramps ensuring stable centring of the turbine shaft. In the pad support ring there are
also four oil pockets. The upper part of the housing has a cover (5) split in two halves with
inspection openings.
The cover is provided with a cylindrical extension sleeve around the shaft reaching to the bottom
of the housing, but leaving a slit for the oil to access the bearing pads. The extension prevents the
oil in the housing from rotating with the shaft. The bearing pad support ring is surrounded by the
oil reservoir. A riser pipe connected to an oil scoop passes through the bottom of the stationary
bearing house and bearing pad support ring.
Under rotation the centrifugal forces keep the oil as a layer along the vertical cylindrical wall of the
reservoir. The stagnation pressure from the rotating
oil at the inlet end of the scoop, forces oil through
the riser and cooler to the stationary upper oil
reservoir.
From the upper reservoir cooled oil flows to the
pockets in the pad support ring. From these
pockets the oil film follows the shaft rotation,
enters the bearing segments and establishes the
load carrying film in the bearing pads. Finally the
oil comes back to the rotating reservoir from where
a new circulation round starts.
The oil volume in the rotating reservoir is
regulated by positioning the oil scoop at a certain
distance from the reservoir wall.
7.3.6 Shaft seal
The location of the shaft seal is shown at pos.(13) on Fig. 7.4. An example of some details of a
certain seal design
/1/
is shown on Fig. 7.9. This shaft seal is split in two halves and mounted on the
upper cover.
The seal surfaces are lined with babbit metal, and
depending on speed and size there are as small radial
clearances as 0.2 - 0.4 mm between the surfaces of
the shaft seal and the sleeve (B). The sleeve is made
of corrosion resistant material and fixed to the shaft.
With the special pumping ring system mentioned
above, the clearances in the seal box will run without
water when the turbine is running. This is why the
seal box can be given a design without contact
between the babbit lined labyrinth and the shaft
sleeve. A labyrinth seal of this type is suitable for
operation in sand laden water because no sand will
reach the seal while the turbine is running at normal
speed.
At stand still a submerged turbine with open draft
tube gate, is exposed to a downstream water pressure. A water leakage flow may then penetrate


Fig. 7.8 Radial bearing of a vertical Francis turbine
/1/




Fig.7.9 Shaft seal of a vertical Francis turbine /1/


Francis Turbines 7.8
through the upper labyrinths and the seal box. This leakage water is removed from the box by a
siphon pipe to the power house drainage pump sump.
For very deep submergence of the turbine an inflatable rubber seal ring (A) is installed in the
labyrinth seal box. This ring is inflated during stand still in order to prevent leakage. During
operation the air pressure inside the rubber seal is released and the rubber is not in contact with the
shaft.
By means of the inflatable rubber seal it is possible to perform the dismantling of the shaft seal
box without emptying the draft tube. At standstill the seal is activated by means of air pressure to
compress the seal against the rotating sleeve (B) for establishing a droptight seal.
At certain loads unstable flow may occur in the draft tube downstream of the runner. In some cases
this can be stabilised by air supply. This air may be supplied through a separate air supply pipe
connected to the shaft seal box.
Instead of the design described above, the shaft seal box may also be designed with carbon rings.
These are without clearance to the rotating parts and therefore subject to certain wear. Water
cooling is necessary to a carbon seal and it cannot run dry without damage.
7.3.7 Regulating mechanism
The regulating mechanism is located by pos. (15) in Fig. 7.4. The design of the mechanism
/1/
is
shown in more detail on fig. 7.10.










Fig. 7.10 Regulating mechanism of a Fig. 7.11 Guide vane regulating system of
Francis turbine /1/ a vertical Francis turbine /1/
The guide vane mechanism provides the regulation of the turbine output. Together with the
governor it is able to maintain a stable speed of the unit and the frequency in the electrical
distribution grid.
The turbine governor controls the servomotor which transfers its force through a rod to the
regulating ring. This ring transfers the movement to the guide vanes through a rod, lever and link
construction. A section through a part of the guide vane cascade, the stay vanes and the runner is
shown on Fig. 7.11. The guide vane exit area in flow direction is varied by an equal rotation of
each of the guide vanes.
Francis Turbines 7.9
The vane levers are mounted on the upper trunnion and fixed by a wedge, shear pins or pure
friction joint.
The guide vane lever and regulating ring are connected through links. These links are connected
through selflubricated spherical bearings on trunnions on the regulating ring and the lever
respectively.
The trunions are positioned on the guide vanes for achieving minimal regulating forces from the
hydraulic forces acting on them.
7.3.8 Draft tube
The draft tube (34) on Fig. 7.3, forms the water conduit from the runner to the draft tube outlet.
Fig. 7.12 shows a draft tube in more detail
/1/
. It consists of the draft tube cone and the draft tube
steel plate lining.
The aim of the draft tube is also to convert the main part of the kinetic energy at the runner outlet
to pressure energy at the draft tube outlet. This is achieved by increasing the cross section area of
the draft tube in the flow direction. In an intermediate part of the bend however, the draft tube
cross sections are decreased instead of increased in the flow direction to prevent separation and
loss of efficiency.







Fig. 7.12 Draft tube of a vertical Francis turbine /1/
The draft tube cone is a welded steel plate design and consists normally of two parts, the upper
and lower cone. The inlet part of the upper cone is made of stainless steel. It is normally provided
with two manholes for inspection of the runner from below. The lower part is designed as a
dismantling piece and is mounted to a flange on the draft tube bend top. This design is always used
for units where the runner is dismantled downwards.
For units being dismantled upwards the draft tube cone is made in one piece.
The draft tube lining is completely embedded in concrete.
7.4 Drainage and filling arrangements
A normal drainage and filling arrangement
/1/
is shown in Fig. 7.13.
The penstock cone and the scroll casing of a submerged turbine can be drained to a level
corresponding to the tail water level through the draft tube. The draft tube is normally filled tube
gate.

Francis Turbines 7.10
A turbine that is not submerged, the draft
tube and the scroll casing are filled from the
penstock.
7.5 Condition control
Routine inspections
Routine inspections means visual inspection
of the complete turbine:
- look for possible leakages
- inspect bolted connections
- drain pumps should be inspected
and level switches tested.

RPM shutdown curve
The activity is to record the RPM with 30 seconds intervals from the moment of closed guide vanes
to standstill of the unit. The RPM shutdown curve should be drawn from nominal RPM to
standstill.
Leakage control of guide vanes
The activity is to record the RPM with the spherical valve open and the guide vanes closed.
Shaft alignment
The activity is to record the shaft misalignment by means of a micrometer dial instrument against
the shaft at the turbine bearing top. The misalignment should be recorded at different loads on the
unit.

Labyrinth seal water flow
The assessment of wear and control of the labyrinth rings is possible by measuring the labyrinth
water flow.
Runner
Visual inspection of the runner is required to record possible cavitation and erosion damages as
well as cracks in vanes. The inspection of the inlet is done from the scroll casing. Three of the
guide vane arms should be dismantled and the guide vanes rotated by hand to open position. The
unit should be rotated manually to enable inspection of the complete runner circumference. The
outlet side of the runner should be inspected from the draft tube cone.







Fig. 7.13 Draining and filling system of a Francis
turbine /1/
Francis Turbines 7.11
Scroll casing and draft tube
The activity is to carry out inspection of painting for possible corrosion and ensure that all
manometer connection openings are open and that the manhole cover is drop tight after completed
inspection.
Guide vane mechanism
The guide surfaces of the covers should be inspected from the scroll casing and possible wear
recorded.
Visual inspection of the surfaces of the guide vanes. The clearances between the guide vanes and
the cover surfaces and the clearance between guide vanes should be checked.
Look for possible leakages in the guide vane bearings. Look for slacks in the bearings of the guide
vane arms and links.
Check the connection between regulating ring and the servomotor.
Shaft seal box
During operation water will normally not flow over the shaft seal box. It may however happen
during start and stop. If water runs into the upper cover it is removed by a drain pump.
Turbine bearing
The same activities as for Pelton turbines.
7.6 Monitoring instruments
The turbine is provided with instruments usually as presented in the following list:
• A manometer connected to the scroll casing
• A manometer connected to the penstock upstream of the main valve
• A pressure switch with two minimum settings connected to the penstock upstream
of the main valve
• A mano-vacuum meter directly mounted to the draft tube cone
• A manometer connected to the leakage pipe
• A limit switch for signal of stand still seal on
The bearing is provided with:
• A contact thermometer in for high and critical high temperature control
• A remote thermometer for oil temperature measurements in the bearing housing
• A level switch for high and low oil level warning. This hangs together with cooling water
leakage
7.7 Assembly and dismantling
The assembly and dismantling is important part of the design of the turbines and the arrangement
of the installation. The objective is to make those duties as convenient and easy as possible. Wear
will occur sooner or later in the guide vane mechanism as well as in the upper and lower runner
labyrinths depending on the water quality and the operating head.
Francis Turbines 7.12
Medium and high head Francis turbines with free access to the draft tube cone provide good
opportunities for fast dismantling and assembly of vital parts.
A widely used method is to dismantle the main parts downwards and then lift them up on the floor
in the machine hall by using the main crane in the power station. The parts in question are the
runner, lower cover and the labyrinth rings. Furthermore the turbine bearing should be easily
removable. Dismantling of the upper cover is seldom required. Possible damage to the surface
adjacent to the guide vanes is easily repaired on site.
Assembly or dismantling downwards requires a comparatively large opening below the scroll
casing. This may be difficult to achieve with low head turbines with large dimensions because the
load carrying concrete around the scroll casing occupies space needed for access. These turbines
however, are not so much exposed to wear in the labyrinths and other components. The draft tube
cone is often embedded in concrete, and the complete turbine must be dismantled upwards after
prior removal of the generator rotor.
References
1. Kværner Brug: COURSE III, Lecture Compendium, Oslo 1986
Bibliography
1. Brekke. H.: Hydro Machines, Lecture compendium at NTNU, Trondheim, 1992.
2. Kjølle, A.: Water Power Machines (in Norwegian), Universitetsforlaget , Oslo, Norway 1980.
3. Nechleba, M.: Hydraulic Turbines. Artia-Prague. Constable & Co. Ltd., London, England 1957
4. Raabe, J.: Hydraulische Maschinen und Anlagen. Zweite Auflage der Teile 1 bis 4 in einem
Band. VDI-Verlag GmbH 1989.
5. Wislicenus, G. F.: Fluid Mechanics of Turbomachinery, Volume 1 and 2, Dover Publication,
New york, USA, 1965.






Kaplan Turbines 8.1
Fig. 8.1 Vertical section of a Kaplan turbine plant (Courtesy of Escher
Wyss)
CHAPTER 8
Kaplan Turbines
Introduction
Kaplan turbines have been developed to be the most employed type of turbines for low heads and
comparatively large discharges when the speed number
*
Ω > 1.0. The Kaplan turbines are fairly
suitable for the purpose of three main reasons:
• relatively small dimensions combined with high rotational speed
• a favourable progress of the efficiency curve
• large overloading capacity
The runner has only a few blades radial oriented on the hub and without an outer rim. The water
flows axially through. The runner blades have a slight curvature and cause relatively low flow
losses. This allows for higher flow velocities without great loss of efficiency. Accordingly the
runner diameter becomes relatively small and the rotational speed more than two times higher than
for a Francis turbine for the corresponding head and discharge. In this way the generator dimensions
as well become comparatively smaller and cheaper. The comparatively high efficiencies at partial
loads and the ability of overloading is obtained by a co-ordinated regulation of the guide vanes and
the runner blades to obtain optimal efficiency for all operations.
8.1 Kaplan turbine construction
8.1.1 Arrangement
A vertical section through a
Kaplan unit is shown on Fig. 8.1.
From the upstream basin the
water flows into the scroll casing
(4). The water flows from the
scroll casing through the stay ring
(6), the guide apparatus (2), the
runner and the draft tube (13)
into the tail water basin.
The generator (7) is arranged
above the turbine, and in most
cases above the highest level of
the tail water. The axial thrust
bearing (8) is loaded with axial
Kaplan Turbines 8.2


Fig. 8.2 Vertical section of a Kaplan turbine unit (Courtesy of Escher Wyss)



forces from all the rotating parts. In many cases this bearing is arranged upon the upper turbine
cover, which then have to carry all the axial forces.
8.1.2 Kaplan turbine construction
A vertical section through a Kaplan turbine unit is shown on Fig. 8.2. The name of the main
components are
numbered and listed
beside and below the
figure.
1a. Runner vanes
1b. Crown
2. Guide vane cascade
3. Guide vanes
4. Scroll casing
6a. Upper ring
6b. Stay vanes
6c. Lower ring
7. Generator
8. Axial-thrust bearing
9. Turbine shaft
10. Generator shaft
11. Runner vane servo.
11a. Servomotor piston
12. Oil inlet
12a. and 12b. oil chambers
12c. Oil collector
13. Draft tube
14. Regulating ring for
runner vanes
15. Links from (14) to (15)
16. Lever spider for
force transfer from (17)
17. Rod for force
transfer from (11a)
19. Crown cover
20. Conveying of rod (17)
21. Rotating oil collector
22. and 23. Coaxial pipes
24. Turbine govrnor
25. Servomotor for guide
vane cascade
26. Cam
27. Reg. valve for high
pressure oil to runner
servomotor
28. Oil pump
29. Accumulator
30. Lining for for feed
back lever
31. Feed back lever
32. Turbine cover
33b. Outer cover
33c. Inner cover
Kaplan Turbines 8.3
33d. Base ring for bearin foot
35. Regulating ring
36. Shaft sealing box
37. Radial bearing
38. Outer shroud
39a. Horizontal supports
41. Guide vane lever
42. Stationary cover lining of
turbine shaft

8.2 Main components and their functions
The Kaplan turbines have the following main components:
- scroll casing and stay ring
- guide apparatus
- covers
- runner
- runner blade servomotor
- regulating mechanism of the runner blades
- co-operation of regulating the runner blades and guide vanes
- turbine shaft
- turbine bearing
- shaft sleeve and seal box
- runner chamber
- draft tube
8.2.1 Scroll casing
The scroll casings for lower heads 25 - 30 meters are made of concrete. To make these type of scroll
casings with the required accuracy, wooden models are used against which the concrete is poured.
The manufacturer of the turbine determines the shape and makes the drawings of these models. The
quality of a water tight and even surfaces of the scroll casings is required to be the same as for draft
tube bends of concrete.
For higher heads the hydraulic pressure
may be too high for the concrete to
withstand the load. In such cases scroll
casings of steel plates are designed in a
way analogous to that of Francis turbines
as shown on Fig. 8.3. The cross sections
of the scroll casing are normally of
circular shape, and the steel plate shells
are welded to the stay ring.
The vanes in the stay ring conduct the
water towards the guide vanes. In
addition the hydraulic forces are
transferred through the stay ring and the
stay vanes which are anchored to the
concrete with large prestressed stay
bolts. The stay vanes are normally made
of welded steel plates and filled with
concrete.
Fig. 8.4 shows a picture of the phase of


Fig. 8.3 Kaplan scroll casing of steel plates




Kaplan Turbines 8.4
installation of the stay ring. The lower part of the concrete scroll casing is completed.The upper stay
bolts are installed and will be embedded together with the rest of the scroll casing.
8.2.2 The guide vane cascade
The guide vane cascade of Kaplan turbines
are constructed in the same way as for Francis
turbines. In the sense of operation a regulating
ring rotates the guide vanes through the same
angles simultaneously when adjustments
follow changes of the turbine load. The vanes
are manufactured of steel plate material and
the trunnions are welded to them. The vane
design is purposely to obtain optimal
hydraulic flow conditions, and they are given
a smooth surface finish.
8.2.3 Covers
The Kaplan turbines are usually provided
with an inner cover in addition to an upper
and a lower cover. The inner cover is bolted
to the upper cover and forms a shield from
upper flow conducting surface and
downwards to the runner. Furthermore this
serves as a support for the guide vane
mechanism with the regulating ring, the
turbine bearing and the shaft seal box with
standstill seal.
The lower turbine cover is combined with the
runner chamber by a flanged connection.

8.2.4 Runner
The runner in a Kaplan turbine is a very challenging part to design. The details for adjusting the
blades can be designed in different ways. Increasing blade number for increasing head may create
problems because of lack of space and consequently high stresses in some details of the
construction. It is not however, only the head that determines the number of blades. The blade
length and shape as well as the specific blade loading and location in relation to the downstream
water level, are factors which must be considered. As a general guideline four blades can be used up
to heads of 25 - 30 meters, five blades up to 40 meters, six blades up to 50 meters and seven blades
up to heads of 60 - 70 meters. Kaplan turbines have also been designed with 8 blades for heads even
higher than 70 meters. This increases the hub diameter and the shape of the hub becomes more
complicated, and the efficiency may suffer.



Fig. 8.4 Erection of a stay ring /1/
Kaplan Turbines 8.5
The outside of the hub is spherically shaped
/1/
as
shown on Fig. 8.5. This is done to keep a small
clearance gap between the adjustable blade ends and
the hub for all operating conditions. With increasing
head the hub diameter is increasing from
approximately 40% to 65 - 70 % of the runner
diameter.
The torque of the runner is transferred to the turbine
shaft through either a pure friction joint connection
or through a combined shear bolt and friction joint.
The bolts joining the turbine shaft flange and the
runner are prestressed by means of heat for the
largest bolt dimensions.
8.2.5 Runner blade servomotor
The servomotor for the rotary motion of the runner
blades is either a construction part of the turbine
shaft or located inside the hub. An example of the
former type is shown schematically on Fig. 8.6,
which is a concept from Escher Wyss.
There are however, good reasons for localising the
servomotor inside the hub, and the details of a such
construction are dealt with in the chapter of bulb
turbines. This servomotor may consist of a moving
cylinder and a fixed piston integrated with the hub.
The conversion from axial piston movement to
rotating blade movement is carried out by a link and
lever construction.
The hub is completely filled with oil to provide reliable lubrication of moving parts. The oil
pressure inside the hub is kept higher than the outside water pressure to prevent water penetration
into the oil.
8.2.6 Regulating mechanism of the runner blades
An example of the regulating system of the runner blade slope is shown on Fig. 8.6. The slope of
the runner blades (1a) are adjusted by the rotary motion activated by the force from the piston (11a)
through the rod (17). The cylindrical extension of the upper end of the turbine shaft (9) serves as a
servomotor cylinder (11) whereas the lower flange of the generator shaft serves as cover. The rod
(17) moves in the two bearings (20).
The oil supply to the servomotor (11) is entered at the upper end of the generator shaft (10). The oil
is conveyed to the respective sides of the servomotor through two coaxial pipes (22 and 23) inside
the hollow generator shaft. The inner tube (22) conveys oil to and from the lower side of the piston
(11a), whereas the annular opening between the pipes (22) and (23) conveys oil to and from the
piston top side. The oil is supplied through the entrance arrangement (12) with the two chambers
(12a) and (12b) at the top of the unit.

Fig. 8.5 Rotating parts of a Kaplan turbine /1/


Kaplan Turbines 8.6

8.2.6 Cooperation of regulating the guide vanes and
the runner blades
The turbine governor operates directly on servomotor (25)
which executes the movement of the guide vanes (3) shown
on Fig. 8.6. The movement of the servomotor thriggs and
controls the slope adjustment of the runner vanes. This is
carried out by a rod and lever transfer from the servomotor
(25) to the cam (26) which is turned according to the
movement of the servomotor piston (25). In this way the
spool valve (27) is moved out of the neutral position and
the servomotor piston (11a) is then put to movement by the
oil pressure supply.
The spool valve (27) receives pressure oil either directly
from the oil pump or from the accumulator which is
energised by an oil pump.
8.2.8 Runner chamber
The clearance gap between the outer blade ends and the
chamber wall is essential to keep as small as possible for all
blade inclinations. Therefore the runner chamber is made spherical below the rotation centre line of
the blade trunnions.
Ideally the spherical shape should have been maintained above the blade rotation centre as well
However, on account of installation and dismantling aspects, this part is being made cylindrical as
shown on fig.8.7, which is a concept of Escher Wyss. The gap between the runner blade ends and
the runner chamber wall is approximately 0.1% of the runner diameter.
On fig. 8.7 the length of the runner chamber is
indicated by H. At the lower end this chamber
is welded to the draft tube via an extruded steel
profile.
Cavitation erosion on the runner chamber may occur
during the running time of the turbine. To reduce the
magnitude of such erosion attacks and to ease the
subsequent repair, the runner chamber is normally
made of cast or welded stainless chromium nickel
steel with higher cavitation resistance than carbon
steel. Existing erosions may then be repaired by
welding on site. The runner chamber is reinforced by
external ribs.
The runner chamber is normally completely or partly
embedded in concrete. The turbine shown on fig. 8.7
has an access tunnel around the complete
circumference, providing access to the lower guide


Fig. 8.6 Regulating mechanism

Fig. 8.7 Runner chamber



Kaplan Turbines 8.7
Fig. 8.8 Turbine bearing /1/
vane bearings. In combination with this tunnel there is a manhole access to the runner chamber for
inspection of the runner blades.
In the lower part of the runner chamber there is a tap for connection of a vacuum meter. In the lower
part holes are plugged by means of removable stainless steel plugs.
8.2.9 Turbine shaft
The turbine shaft Fig. 8.5, is made of Siemens Martin steel and is provided with integrally forged
flanges in both ends
/1/
.

In the area of the shaft seal box, a wear sleeve made of stainless material is clamped around the
shaft. The rotating oil reservoir is bolted to the turbine shaft.
8.2.10 Turbine bearing
The bearing design is shown on Fig. 8.8 and the function is described in the chapter of Francis
turbines
/1/
.
The only detail that deviates from
the normal Francis turbine bearing is
the back thrust slide ring A, which is
bolted to the bottom of the rotating
oil reservoir. By load rejections the
turbine is subject to a vertical force
acting upwards and this may cause a
lifting of the unit. The back thrust
ring then hit the underside of the
bearing pads which transfer the
vertical force to the base of the
bearing.
The back thrust ring is made of
bronze and is provided with lubrication grooves ensuring a good distribution of oil, and a load
carrying oil film is then attained.
Low head Kaplan turbines are more exposed to lifting than high head Kaplan turbines. These
turbines also have a comparatively higher speed increase at load rejections. With the guide vanes
closed, the runner is pumping the water against the downstream water pressure. In this way a
vertical upward force is created because the pressure above the runner becomes lower compared
with the pressure below it. This effect increases with increasing speed.
8.2.11 Shaft seal box
A commonly applied seal box for Kaplan turbines is the carbon ring box of a type as shown on Fig.
8.9. The seal elements against the turbine shaft consist of specially made split carbon rings which
are pressed against the shaft by means of spiral springs. The seal box is exposed to a fluctuating
pressure from the turbine waterside and the rings must be located with this in mind. The turbine
shaft is exposed to certain wear by the seal rings. The shaft which is passing through the seal box is
therefore provided with a wear sleeve of stainless steel.

Kaplan Turbines 8.8



Fig. 8.11 Draft tube erection /1/
















Fig. 8.9 Carbon ring seal box Fig. 8.10 Compound seal box /1/

A simpler seal box design
/1/
is shown on Fig. 8.10. This shaft seal is used for small and middle size
turbines with moderate circumferential shaft speed.
The shaft seal box is mounted on the inner turbine cover (6). It consists of the support ring (7), seal
housing (8), gland (4) and sealing compound (3). The sealing compound seals against a stainless
sleeve (2) which is clamped to the turbine shaft (1).
By means of a gland (4) the sealing compound may be compressed, and a good sealing effect is
obtained. Too hard compression may cause heating between the shaft sleeve and the sealing
compound. To monitor this a temperature sensor is mounted in the seal housing. The sensor is
connected to an alarm in the control room.
The inflatable rubber seal ring (5) which is used as a standstill seal, is described in the chapter of
Francis turbines.
Leakage from the seal box is collected in a sump in the inner cover and is pumped to the station
sump by float controlled pumps.
8.2.12 Draft tube
The draft tube consists of a draft tube
cone and a draft tube plate lining
through the bend.
The water has a relatively large
velocity when it leaves the runner.
This kinetic energy must be
converted to pressure energy in the
draft tube. To obtain this with a
minimum of losses, the outlet
velocity at the draft tube outlet should
be as uniform as possible. Because
the kinetic energy represents a high
fraction of the total energy, the shape
of the draft tube is of great
importance for the hydraulic

Kaplan Turbines 8.9
efficiency.
The draft tube of a Kaplan turbine has a somewhat special shape. The units have comparatively
large dimensions and the civil works are expensive. It is therefore a requirement to make the draft
tube as shallow as possible. The cone, the upper part and the inner curve surface are always lined
with steel plates. The rest is normally made of unlined concrete. The formwork and the pouring of
concrete are made as simple as possible by making the walls straight with single curved surfaces
only.
The draft tube shown on Fig. 8.11, is welded from steel plate through the bend.
8.3 Drainage and filling arrangement
A normal drainage and filling arrangement is shown in chapter 7 about Francis turbines. A similar
arrangement usually exists for a Kaplan turbine plant as well. Because of low head and large
dimensions, it is normally not a main inlet valve upstream of the turbine. Instead an intake gate is
installed at the top of the penstock. Drainage of inlet pipe and scroll casing is carried out by means
of a common drainage pipe after the intake gate is closed. The inlet pipe may however be drained
through the turbine down to draft tube level.
8.4 Condition control
The general principles for condition control are the same as for Francis turbines. Further
considerations are therefore connected only to a few specific details.

8.4.1 Runner
The runner should be inspected both from above and below. Particular attention should be given to
possible cavitation erosion and scratches on the blades as well as leaks around the blade flange
against the hub.

8.4.2 Runner chamber
The narrow gap between runner and the runner chamber should be checked if foreign objects may
have passed the gap and made scratches in the chamber.

8.4.3 Guide vane mechanism
For guide vane mechanism with individual vane servomotors on bulb turbines it should be checked
that the vanes have an identical movement.

8.4.4 Shaft seal box
For bulb turbines at standstill it should be checked that the water does not flow out of the box along
the shaft into the turbine bearing.
8.5 Monitoring instruments

The instrumentation consists mainly of the same components as for Francis turbines and is
described in Chapter 7.
Kaplan Turbines 8.10

8.6 Assembly and dismantling
The cone and the runner chamber of a Kaplan turbine are normally completely or partly embedded
in concrete. Therefore these parts can not be dismantled. Consequently all dismantling of the
turbine therefore must be done upwards through the stator of the generator after removal of the
generator rotor.
The parts in question for dismantling are first and foremost the inner cover and the runner. The
inner cover is bolted to the outer cover. The smallest diameter of the outer cover is dimensioned to
allow the runner to be lifted after dismantling of the inner cover.
Dismantling of the guide vanes may take place after the outer cover is lifted above the longest upper
trunnion of the guide vanes.
By assembly or dismantling the runner may hang either by means of the brackets bolted to the
runner chamber below the runner or by means of brackets bolted to the lower cover
/1/
as shown on
Fig. 8.12.

To replace a runner blade, it must be possible
to dismantle a part of the runner chamber.
This part is cut loose from the concrete and is
pulled back. The blade may then be
dismantled, pulled out and may be taken out
through the draft tube.
References
1. Kværner Brug: COURSE III, Lecture
Compendium, Oslo 1986
Bibliography
1. Brekke. H.: Hydro Machines, Lecture
compendium at NTNU, Trondheim, 1992.
2. Kjølle, A.: Water Power Machines (in
Norwegian), Universitetsforlaget , Oslo,
Norway 1980.
3. Nechleba, M.: Hydraulic Turbines. Artia-
Prague. Constable & Co. Ltd., London,
England 1957
4. Raabe, J.: Hydraulische Maschinen und
Anlagen. Zweite Auflage der Teile 1 bis 4
in einem Band. VDI-Verlag GmbH 1989.
5. Wislicenus, G. F.: Fluid Mechanics of Turbomachinery, Volume 1 and 2, Dover Publication,
New york, USA, 1965.



Fig. 8.12 Runner hanging device /1/

Bulb Turbines 9.1
CHAPTER 9
Bulb Turbines
Introduction
The Bulb turbine is a reaction turbine of Kaplan type which is used for the lowest heads. It is
characterised by having the essential turbine components as well as the generator inside a bulb,
from which the name is developed. A main difference from the Kaplan turbine is moreover that the
water flows with a mixed axial-radial direction into the guide vane cascade and not through a scroll
casing. The guide vane spindles are inclined (normally 60
o
) in relation to the turbine shaft.
Contrary to other turbine types this results in a conical guide vane cascade.
The Bulb turbine runner is of the same design as for the Kaplan turbine, and it may also have
different numbers of blades depending on the head and water flow.
9.1 General arrangement
A general arrangement of a Bulb turbine plant
/1/
is shown in Fig. 9.1 by a vertical section through
the unit. Fig. 9.2 shows the turbine design in more detail.
The water flows axially
towards the unit in the centre
of the water conduit and passes
the generator, the main stays,
the guide vanes, runner and
draft tube into tale race
channel.
9.2 Main components
The Bulb turbine consists of
the following main
components:
- stay cone
- runner chamber
- draft tube cone
- generator hatch
- stay shield
- rotating parts

Fig. 9.1 Bulb turbine. General arrangement /1/


Bulb Turbines 9.2
- turbine bearing
- shaft seal box
- guide vane mechanism
9.2.1 Stay cone
A longitudinal section through a stay cone
structure and draft tube
/1/
is shown in Fig.9.3.
There are one lower (1) and one upper (5) main
stay. An inner stay cone (3) and outer stay cone
(6) are welded to the main stays. To the
downstream end of the inner stay cone the inner
guide ring is bolted as shown on Fig. 9.2.
This outer stay cone forms a part of the outer
water conduit contour and is embedded in
concrete together with outer parts of the main
stays. The generator bulb is bolted to the upstream
end of the inner stay cone as indicated on Fig. 9.1.
These parts are located in the centre of the water
flow and forms the inner water conduit contour
together with the runner hub.
Two side stays (4) and (7) on Fig. 9.4, are located
on each side of the bulb upstream of the main
stays for stiffening the bulb and avoid resonant
vibrations.
The total weight and the hydraulic forces are
transferred to the surrounding
concrete through the stay cone
via the two main stay vane
structures. The dynamic as well
as the static forces from the
turbine and the generator are
transferred through the structure
to the building foundation.
9.2.2 Runner chamber and
draft tube cone
The runner chamber is the
connecting part between the
outer stay cone and the draft
tube cone, Fig. 9.2. The
downstream end of the outer
cone is provided with a flange
to which the runner chamber is
bolted.

Fig. 9.2 Bulb turbine (Courtesy of Kværner Brug)

















Fig. 9.3 Stay cone and draft tube. Vertical section(Courtesy of Kværner Brug)

Bulb Turbines 9.3

Fig. 9.4 Cross section of stay cone (Courtesy of
Kværner Brug)


Fig. 9.5 Bulb turbine rotating parts (Courtesy of Kværner Brug)
The draft tube cone consists of two or more
straight welded steel cones and is embedded in
concrete. The upstream end is connected to the
runner chamber through a flexible telescope
connection. This type of connection is
necessary to allow for a certain axial
movement of the runner chamber and the outer
guide ring because of elongation/contraction
due to temperature changes.
The length of the steel cone lining is
determined by requirements to maximum
water velocity at the exit and to avoid damage
to the concrete.
9.2.3 Generator hatch
The generator hatch (11) on Fig. 9.4 is
normally a part of the turbine delivery. It is
located above the generator and provides
access to the generator for assembly or
dismantling tasks.
The hatch consists of a perforated part which
forms the outer water conduit contour in the
hatch opening. A cylindrical steel mantel with
a flange on top is provided for the hatch cover and seal mounting. As the unit’s bulb part will rise
and lower with filling and draining of the turbine, the seal joint between mantel and hatch cover
must allow for a vertical movement of the mantel.
9.2.4 Stay shield
The stay shields are located between the generator access shaft and the turbine main stay. They
form an even wall for the water flow and the stay structure is streamlined at the upstream end to
prevent undesired vortex formation. The shields are bolted to the bulb and connected to each other
by screw stays for stiffness. They are freely supported against the access way and the main stay to
allow for axial movements.
The shields are provided with a
manhole for inspection and
possible maintenance of the
space between them.
9.2.5 Rotating parts
The rotating parts are shown on
Fig. 9.5 and consists of:
-runner
-turbine shaft

Bulb Turbines 9.4

- shaft seal cam, clampring, wear ring and oil thrower ring
- turbine bearing oil thrower ring
- feedback mechanism and oil piping
- oil transfer unit from rotating to stationary parts



Fig. 9.6 Runner hub (Courtesy of Kværner Brug)
9.2.5.1 The runner
The runner
/1/
is similar to a Kaplan runner and has normally three to five blades made of stainless
steel. The blades are designed with flanges and connected to trunnions and levers.
The servomotor for moving the blades is normally located inside the hub as shown on Fig. 9.6. The
servomotor consists of a fixed piston and an axially moving cylinder and link supports, links and
blade levers are located inside the hub.
A photo of a bulb turbine runner is shown on Fig. 9.7.
9.2.5.2 The turbine shaft
The turbine shaft is made of forged Siemens Martin steel and has flanges in both ends. One end is
connected to the runner hub and the other to the generator shaft. These joints are pure friction
joints.
9.2.6 Shaft seal box
Several types of shaft seal boxes are in use. One type as shown in Fig. 9.8 is however, especially
for the Bulb turbines
/1/
.
Bulb Turbines 9.5


Fig.9.7 Runner assembly in the workshop




Fig. 9.8 Shaft seal box (Courtesy of Kværner Brug)
This box has radial seal surfaces consisting of
a stainless hardened wear disk and two wear
rings made of teflon type fibres. The wear disk
is bolted to a cam fixed to the shaft. The wear
rings are glued to the seal ring.This is movable
and supported in the adjustment ring by means
of a membrane.
The membrane allows the seal ring to move
axially 5 - 6 mm. This is necessary for the
shaft movement in the downstream direction
when the unit is loaded. In addition allowance
must be made for wear of the seal surfaces.
The adjustment ring is bolted to the support
ring and may be axially adjusted by means of
double acting jacking screws. According to the
wear range of wear rings the adjustment range
of the seal box should be 8 - 10 mm.
The auxiliary seal is located in
the support ring. This may be
pushed against/pulled away
from the cam by means of
push/pull jacking screws. When
this ring is in contact with the
cam the wear seal rings may be
dismantled without draining the
unit.
Possible water leakage into the
seal box is drained through a
pipe to the pump sump.
A thrower ring is mounted on
the shaft to prevent water
leakage along the shaft. A
rubber ring is mounted on the
upstream end of the shaft and
seals against the seal box cover.
The seal box is provided with
four springs which are pressing
the wear seal rings against the
seal surface to prevent leakage
when the balance system is out
of operation, e.g.,when filling
the turbine.

Bulb Turbines 9.6
9.2.7 Turbine bearing
An example of a bearing design
/1/
is shown in Fig. 9.9. The bearing is sturdy and simple in
operation. Maintenance will normally consist of oil change only.
The bearing housing (1) is supported in the inner guide ring Fig.9.2, by means of two yokes and
two support stays and rests normally on six wedges. By moving these wedges axially the bearing
housing may be vertically adjusted. The bearing housing is split horizontally.

Fig. 9.9 Turbine bearing (Courtesy of Kværner Brug)
The bearing pad shell (2), Fig. 9.9, consists of an upper and a lower part. These are “floating” in
the bearing housing where a radial locking pin in the upper part prevents the shells from rotation.
The surface of the lower supporting shell and a surface in each end of the upper bearing shell are
lined with babbit metal.
The oil housing (3) is bolted to the upstream end of the bearing housing. The oil reservoir (4) is
fixed to the shaft. The oil scoop (5) and the box (6) are also located inside the oil housing. The float
box is provided with a window for observation of the oil circulation while the turbine is running.
An oil thrower ring (7) is fixed to the shaft to prevent oil from seeping out of the bearing along the
shaft in the downstream end.
The automatic start lubrication unit (8) is mounted on the top of the bearing housing. This consists
of a container which is filled with oil when the turbine is running. When the shaft stops the oil
content is kept in the container by a support device held by the shaft. As soon as the shaft resumes
Bulb Turbines 9.7
rotation the support is removed and the content is tilted. The oil in the container is then distributed
on the bearing surface.
When the shaft and oil reservoir starts to rotate, the reservoir draws oil from the lower half of the
oil housing. As soon as the oil layer is sufficiently thick, the oil scoop picks up oil and delivers it to
the float box, then to the oil tank and the bearing pad. The rotating shaft transports this oil further to
the bearing surface.
Normally more oil than required for lubrication is circulating through the oil tank. Therefore a
bypass is provided for taking the excess oil back to the oil housing top. This bypass flow is
controlled by a float switch inside the float box (6).
To increase the oil volume to more than the volume of the oil housing, an oil tank (12) is located
beside the bearing.
The sediment collector (9) is located below the bearing housing. All dirt particles which are trapped
in the oil during circulation in the bearing, shall be separated before the oil returns to the oil
housing.
The bearing is provided with miscellaneous filling openings, oil level indicators, level float and
temperature sensors as well.
9.2.8 The feedback mechanism and oil piping
The feedback mechanism and oil transfer piping are located in the shaft centre. The transfer piping
consists of an inner and an outer concentric oil pipe running through the whole shaft length. The
inner pipe continues through the oil transfer unit at the upstream end, and it is supported in the
outer pipe and connected to the runner servomotor cylinder via an yoke.
The inner pipe is axially movable and follows the servomotor movement. A pointer mounted to the
upstream end is moving along a measurement ruler showing mechanically the servomotor position
at any time. The outer oil pipe is mounted by means of flange connections to the runner hub,
turbine shaft and generator shaft respectively.
9.2.8.1 The oil transfer unit
The oil transfer unit is located at the upstream end of the generator shaft and has one fixed and one
rotating part consisting of a distribution sleeve and distribution trunnion respectively.
The distribution sleeve is fixed to the capsule around the generator shaft end and is provided with
pipe connections for oil supply and return as well as leakage oil. The distribution sleeve is provided
with a bracket having a measurement scale where the runner servomotor position may be read.
9.2.9 The guide vane mechanism
Two different systems have been used for operating the guide vanes. Kværner Brug has designed a
system where each particular vane has its own servomotor as shown in Fig. 9.10.
By means of a link ring a simultaneous movement of the pilot valves for the guide vane
servomotors is achieved. The movement is governed by the valves controlling the opening/closing
of the guide vanes.
How the servomotors are supplied with or drained for oil is shown in section A - A on Fig. 9.10.
Bulb Turbines 9.8
The high pressure hoses are connected to the oil pressure system of the unit.
The advantages of this system is that even if one guide vane is stuck, the remaining vanes can be
moved without any damage. The same will apply if a foreign object is caught and jammed between
two vanes during closing, the remaining vanes can be closed without any damage. If required,

Fig. 9.10 Guide vane mechanism with single servomotors (Courtesy of Kværner Brug)
single vanes may be operated separately and thus jammed object may easily be flushed out of the
guide vane system.
The disadvantages of this system are the assembly and extensive adjustment work. However, the
total price will approximately be the same as for the regulating ring system which is the other
method for moving the guide vanes.
The regulating ring system with links and levers is of the same type as for Francis turbines. A
regulating ring with three main servomotors is shown on Fig. 9.11. Due to the conical arrangement
of the guide vanes the lever link system must have spherical bearings with large angle movement.
The connection between the levers and the vanes is designed as friction joints. This is done to avoid
damage to parts if one or several vanes are stuck or if foreign objects are caught between vanes.
The friction joint makes it possible for the vane lever to move with the remaining parts of the guide
vanes connected to the regulating ring even if the adjacent vane is stuck.
A disadvantage may be that large weight of the regulating ring and possible slack in bearings can
make the governing inaccurate.
9.3 Condition control
The general principles for condition control are the same as for the Francis turbines. Further



Bulb Turbines 9.9
considerations are therefore connected
only to a few specific details.
9.3.1 Runner
The runner should be inspected both
from above and below. Particular
attention should be given to possible
cavitation erosion and scratches on the
blades as well as leaks around the
blade flange against the hub.
9.3.2 Runner chamber
The narrow gap between runner and
the runner chamber should be checked
if foreign objects may have passed the
gap and made scratches in the
chamber.
9.3.3 Guide vane mechanism
For guide vane mechanism with
individual vane servomotors on bulb
turbines it should be checked that the
vanes have an identical movement.
9.3.4 Shaft seal box
For Bulb turbines at standstill it should be checked that the water does not flow out of the box along
the shaft into the turbine bearing.
9.3.5 Generally for Bulb turbines
Special attention should be paid to changes in the sound when the unit is in operation.
9.4 Monitoring instruments
The turbine is normally equipped with the following instrumentation:
• A manometer connected to the upstream end of the generator bulb
• A vacuummeter connected to the runner chamber downstream of the runner
• A contact manometer for reading of the pressure in the shaft seal box water pressure
pipe, which triggers alarm or alternatively stop signal at too low pressure
• A contact manometer giving alarm:
Pressurised water in the shaft seal box upon start of the unit
• A float switch for alarm for high water level due to too large leak in the shaft seal box
• A contact thermometer for reading of oil temperature in the bearing housing. The
thermometer has two adjustable contacts, one for alarm at high temperature and one for
disconnection for the unit on further temperature rise


Fig. 9.11 Regulating ring /1/

Bulb Turbines 9.10
• A remote indication thermometer with two temperature sensors for reading of
temperature in lower bearing pad
• A level float for alarm on low oil level
9.5 Assembly and dismantling
Among the large main parts of the bulb turbine it is only the runner which is normally needed to
dismantle. The runner chamber is split axially horizontal in two halves. By removing the upper half
access to the runner is obtained.
The guide vanes cannot be dismantled without extensive work. Repairs of these and the guide
surfaces should be performed at the plant.
Bearing and seal box can easily be dismantled. By applying the overhaul seal the seal box may be
removed without draining the water canal. Then necessary stairs and floors around the guide vane
and the runner chamber may be erected.
The stay shields are adapted against bulb and outer water conduit contour. The shields are mounted
as soon as the generator bulb and penstock are completed.
Finally the generator hatch dome plate and cover are installed.
References
1. Kværner Brug: COURSE III, Lecture Compendium, Oslo 1986
Bibliography
1. Brekke. H.: Hydro Machines, Lecture compendium at NTNU, Trondheim, 1992.
1. Kjølle, A.: Water Power Machines (in Norwegian), Universitetsforlaget , Oslo, Norway 1980.
2. Nechleba, M.: Hydraulic Turbines. Artia-Prague. Constable & Co. Ltd., London, England 1957
3. Raabe, J.: Hydraulische Maschinen und Anlagen. Zweite Auflage der Teile 1 bis 4 in einem
Band. VDI-Verlag GmbH 1989.
4. Wislicenus, G. F.: Fluid Mechanics of Turbomachinery, Volume 1 and 2, Dover Publication,
New york, USA, 1965.

Governors 10.1
CHAPTER 10
Governors
10.1 Governor system structure
A complete turbine governor system may be divided in three main components:
- The controller. This is the unit for execution of control processes. The unit may be of
mechanical-hydraulic or electrohydraulic construction
- Servo system. The servo system is an amplifier that executes the admission changes
determined by the controller.
- The pressure oil supply system. The principal duty for this system is at any time to
supply sufficient quantities of pressure oil to the servo system.
A structure diagram of a representative turbine governor system is shown in Fig. 10.1.


Fig. 10.1 Schematic structure of a turbine governor system /1/
Controller units and servo systems are considered in the following sections while the oil pressure
supply system is dealt with in Chapter 12.
Governors 10.2
10.2 Electrohydraulic controllers
Standard Printed Circuit Boards (PCB) are normally used for electronics in the electrohydraulic
controllers. The PCB’s are housed in racks, which are mounted in a hinged frame. The power supply
and auxiliary equipment are placed inside the governor desk.
10.2.1 Analogous controller
A typical system structure of an PCB-based controller
/1/
is shown in the simplified block diagram on
Fig. 10.2. The electric system of the controller consists of the following main components:
- power supply
- frequency measurement circuit for frequency control
- PID-control unit
- servo amplifier
- position measurement of the pilot control actuator
- input/output signal for remote and local control
- sensors for signal transducers (man - machine communication)


Fig. 10.2 Analogous electrohydraulic controller /1/
The controller has PID functions. Each parameter can be adjusted within a wide range. The
adjustment of the amplification can be made without any influence on the time constants and vice
versa.
Two inductive sensors close to each other measure the frequency. The sensors are activated by
means of a segment disk attached to the turbine shaft. The pulses are received by a digital frequency
measurement circuit and transformed to an analogue voltage. The analogue signal is input to the PID
function block
The derivative function is influenced only by the frequency input and so giving a smooth
changeover between reference changes and the frequency output.
The load reference signal is fed through a ramp function, which limits the rate of change in the
reference value and thus the rate of change of the power output. The change will be linear and can
be adjusted between 20 and 150 seconds per 100% load change.


Governors 10.3
The load reference signal also bypasses the PID control unit and is a direct input to the electro
hydraulic actuator.
The feedback signal from the electrohydraulic actuator passes through the permanent speed droop
circuit and corrects the output according to the actual frequency-load characteristics.
The output signal from the PID control unit is input to the amplifier. The amplifier also receives the
feedback signal from the position transmitter on the electro hydraulic actuator.
The actuator will be regulated according to the output signal from the PID control unit. The actuator
is connected to the main distributing valve which controls the main servomotor and the turbine
admission.
In the “Manual” mode the mechanical-hydraulic load limiter controls the turbine power.
In “Manual” mode the supervision logic receives an alarm signal from the speed monitor at 100%
speed, which results in an external stop command from the controller. This signal trips a shut-down
function in the main control.
The governor parameters may be changed during operation with no system disturbances. It is also
possible to switch between two pre-set parameter values depending on the operation conditions.
This is done by means of a remote command.
The governor should be connected to a DC battery supply and 3-phase 50 or 60 Hz system. In
addition a separate single-phase input is available for emergency power supply.
10.2.2 Digital computer based controller
A controller based on digital technique is for example a Programmable High-Speed Controller. It is
designed to be used normally for all kinds and sizes of water turbines. It is completely autonomous,
and is designed with a high inherent flexibility to enable individual requirements to the greatest
possible extent.
A digital governor generally contains the following main parts:
- power supply
- frequency measurement
- controller, inclusive sequence control and monitoring
- servo interface
- automatic turbine admission control
- runner blade control
- options as water level control etc.
Two sensors reading a segment disc attached to the turbine shaft measure the frequency. The
measurement signals are transformed to a digital code by the frequency measurement circuit. A
linear relation exists between the measurement value and the cycle time of the unit frequency.
Alternatively the frequency measurement can be taken from a permanent magnet alternator. Except
for the measurement signal there is no difference compared with the analogous controller.
The controller is based on a processor system. The controller hardware is generally built of standard
components while the control functions are realised in a specific program.
The controller program includes the following functions:
- controller algorithm
Governors 10.4
- sequence control for start, stop, interlocking, etc.
- monitoring, process and self monitoring
Fig. 10.3 shows the block diagram
/1/
for a typical controller of a Francis turbine. The same block
diagram will also be the basic part of a controller for a Pelton and Kaplan/bulb turbine.
The controller has a PID function. Each parameter can be set within a wide range. Adjustment of
one parameter makes no influence on the others.
The servo interface is the joint between the electronic part and the hydraulic part of the governor.It
is a part of the electrohydraulic position control of the actuator. The loop is closed in the processor.
One or several position control loops are provided depending on the version. Each loop contains a
servo interface with a servo amplifier and a transducer for the actuator position measurement.

Fig.10.3 Turbine controller block diagram (Courtesy Kværner Brug as)
10.3 Servo system
10.3.1 Governor desk
The system structure in a turbine governor desk
/1/
is illustrated in Fig. 10.4.
The main components are:
- electrohydraulic actuator (servovalve and pilot control actuator)
- opening control valve
- rapid shut-down valve
- main control valve
- mechanical-hydraulic load limiter
- mechanical feedback
- control levers
- oil filters
Governors 10.5
- switches and sensors
- measuring device for the rotational speed


Fig. 10.4 Governor desk, hydraulic circuits /1/
The governor desk is an independent unit located near to the main servomotor. Thereby short pipe
lengths between the desk and the servomotors as well as plain feedback mechanisms are obtained.
The hydraulic components in the governor desk are fed from the oil supply system. The output is
pressure oil to the main servomotor which is mechanically connected with the feedback and the
control lever on the main control valve.
In some new turbine governors it is an electronic feedback signal for the servomotor position. The
load-limit function is carried out by the controller electronics and the servomotor is directly
governed by the servovalve.
In this way the main governing hydraulics is compressed to a structure containing the servovalve,
emergency shut down valves and the servomotor.
Governors 10.6
10.3.2 Main control servomotor
The main control servomotor consists of:
- cylinder
- piston and rod
- sealbox with bushing and sealbox ring
An ordinary design of the servomotor
/1/
is shown in Fig. 10.5
Cylinders are usually made of steel as casted or welded products.

Fig. 10.5 Typical design of a servomotor /1/
10.4 Specific turbine governing equipment
10.4.1 Dual control of Pelton turbines
The governing of Pelton turbines is normally carried out with a dual control, e.g., needles in the
nozzles and the deflectors. These components are described in Chapter 6.
By minor load changes the needle adjustment control is satisfying the control requirements alone.
By rapid load rejections however, the rotational speed rise is controlled and limited by activation of
the deflector. The servomotor gives the deflector a rotary movement which bends the water jet away
from the runner.
The sequence controlled nozzle follows the movement of the deflector servomotor by adjustment of
the needle position until the discharge corresponds to the new power/load equilibrium. In this
approach to equilibrium the deflector moves gradually out of the jet again to an idle position just
outside the periphery of the jet.
The deflector function is controlled from the governor desk via the main control valve. The
servomotor movement is transferred via bars, levers and links to the deflectors.
From the servomotor movement feedback signal is transferred to the control valve.
The sequence control of each needle is carried out via a cam disk which is driven by the deflector
servomotor. The cam shape accomplishes an input function to the needle control valve which opens
for adjusting the needle to correct position.
The feedback from the needle movement controls the valve openings until they reach neutral
position and the needle has reached the correct position according to the reference.
Governors 10.7
The cabinet for the needle control is located as near to the nozzles as possible to obtain a plain
feedback system from the needles and short oil pressure pipelines.
In some recent designs of Pelton governors electronics and separate electrohydraulic servosystems
carry out the controller functions of the deflectors and the needles. Electronics is also utilised in the
feedback systems. In this way the construction of the servomotors with mechanical levers and links
have become more simplified.
10.4.2 By-pass control for Francis turbines
10.4.2.1 Function and general arrangement
The regulation following load rejections in high head Francis turbine plants makes it necessary to
divert some parts of the instantaneous water flow to the turbine. In this way it is possible to obtain a
rapid closure of the turbine admission and to retard the main flow in the penstock to minimise the
pressure rise.
The diversion is normally branched off from the scroll casing
/1/
as shown schematically in Fig. 10.6.
In this branched off system the by-pass valve is installed and its admission is controlled by the
turbine governor. The guide vane movement controls the valve opening. This combined control of
the guide vane movement and the by-pass through the valve makes it possible to control both the
pressure rise and speed rise during load rejection.


Fig. 10.6 By-pass valve with regulating system /1/
The water flow through the valve is led into an energy dissipater and then into the turbine draft tube
as shown in Fig. 10.7.
A Norwegian turbine manufacturer has used this type of by-pass valve system for several years, and
a long experience in the use of this equipment has proved a simple and reliable system.
Governors 10.8

Fig. 10.7 Energy dissipater /1/
A vital point in the design of the control system has been to ensure full control of the pressure rise
even if the valve should fail to operate. In this case the closing speed of the guide vanes will
correspond to the speed given by the allowable pressure rise. The speed will then be higher than
normal, but this is regarded as less serious because the generator is designed to withstand short
lasting runaway speed of the unit.
10.4.2.2 The valve control system
A schematic diagram of the valve system and main servomotor control
/1/
is shown in Fig. 10.6. The
auxiliary servomotor AS, via the main valve MV controls the guide vane servomotor MS. The
double acting servomotor MS, moves the guide vane via the regulating ring. A pilot servomotor PS,
is connected to this ring and copies the position according to the movement of MS.
The servomotor PS is pressurised via the orifice d
1
from oil pressure supply p
o
. The by-pass valve
servomotor VS is hydraulically connected to PS. Under stationary conditions it moves to closed
position because of the difference between the two sides of the piston areas.
During a closing movement of MS the oil from PS passes through d
1
into the accumulator. If the
closing speed exceeds a certain value, the pressure on the opening area on VS increases because of
the orifice d
1
, and VS then opens.
To avoid restriction of the guide vanes a check valve CV, is connected in parallel to d
1
.
The size of the volume of VS relative to PS is given by the size of the opening of the by-pass valve
at total flow capacity.
In the diagram Fig. 10.8 the relative movement between the guide vane servomotor MS and the by-
pass valve BV are shown. Because of the close linearity between servomotor position and the water
flow, this diagram also indicates the water flow in the system.
From this diagram it is seen that the guide vanes start closing at maximum speed 1/T
c
. The by-pass
valve opens at a speed 1/T
o
given by the relative servomotor volumes.
Governors 10.9


Fig. 10.8 Relative movements and water flow between guide vane cascade and by-pass valve /1/
When the by-pass valve is fully open at t
1
, the closing speed of the guide vanes is reduced to a lower
value. In closed guide vane position at the time t
2
, the pilot servomotor PS stops and the pressure
becomes equal p
o
on both sides of the piston in valve servomotor VS. Then VS starts closing the by-
pass valve because of the piston area difference.
The closing speed of VS shown as 1/T
c total
in the diagram, is controlled by d
1
. The oil volume from
the opening side of VS is forced back to the accumulator.
The total water flow in the penstock is given by the sum of the flow through the guide vane cascade
and the flow through the by-pass valve. This controls the pressure rise in the system.
10.4.3 Dual control of Kaplan/Bulb turbines
Optimal efficiencies of Kaplan and bulb turbines are obtained by optimal combination of the
functions of the guide vane cascade control and the runner blade control. Examples of the
construction of these control systems are described in Chapters 8 and 9.
The combination of the two control functions may be carried out either by mechanical-hydraulic or
by electrohydraulic operation. The combination unit is usually located on the top or beside the top of
the turbine-generator unit.
A mechanical-hydraulic combination unit is integrated in the runner blade control system and
consists of:
- main valve
- feedback mechanism
- combination control function curve
- pipe connections to the oil supply unit
The combination control function is:
- distribute oil for operation of the runner blades via the main valve
Governors 10.10
- position the runner blades according to the control function curve disk which is governed
by the guide vane control
- feedback of the spool position in the main valve.
An electrohydraulic combination unit has an electrical feedback from the position of the guide vane
cascade and a combination control function in this case is produced electronically. The servomotor
is then operated by an electrohydraulic servovalve.
References
1. Kværner Brug: COURSE III, Lecture compendium, Oslo, 1986

Bibliography
1. Brekke, H.: Governing of Hydropower Machines, Lectures at NTNU, Trondheim 1997 (in
Norwegian).





Valves 11.1
CHAPTER 11
Valves
Introduction
The conduits in all water power plants except large low head plants, are ordinarily provided with
shut off devices. Generally these components are valves. They exist in different types and design
depending on function and requirements.
In any power plant valves for different purposes are usually needed. Normally it is a shut-off valve
just in front of the turbine. In this way the turbine may be emptied without emptying the shaft or
penstock. In addition the guide vane cascade is depresserised so that leakage flow is avoided.
With a long head race tunnel and surge chamber it is normal to have a shut off valve just
downstream of the surge chamber. In this way the shaft or penstock may be emptied without
emptying the tunnel.
To prevent large damage at an eventual rupture of the penstock, a pipe break valve is normally
installed in the pipe just downstream of the shut off valve. This valve closes automatically when the
water velocity exceeds a certain set value.
The most relevant types of valves are:
- spherical valves
- butterfly valves
- gate valves
- ring valves

11.1 Spherical valves

Spherical valves are applied mostly as shut off valves in front of high head water turbines. They are
however, used as pipe brake valves as well. Spherical valves are presently covering a pressure range
of 160 m to 1250 m water head.
The spherical valves consist of the valve housing with flanges, valve rotor, bearings and seals.
11.1.1 Valve housing and valve rotor
The valve housing has a spherical shape. It may either be axially split permanently in two halves
and bolted together with heavy flanges, or these two halves may be welded together after the rotor
has been installed.

Valves 11.2

Fig. 11.2 Valve rotor (Courtesy of Kværner Brug)

The rotor inside the valve housing is principally shaped spherically as well. The circular passage
through the rotor is equal to the size of the valve inlet and outlet. The length of the passage is
dimensioned to fit almost close to the inner end faces at inlet and outlet of the valve housing. In this
way the flow losses through the valve become about the same as in a corresponding pipe length.
Fig. 11.1 shows a picture of a complete
spherical valve in open position, and Fig.
11.2 shows a picture of a spherical valve
rotor.
11.1.2 Valve rotor trunnions and
bearings
The trunnions on the valve rotor are
horizontally supported in the valve
housing. The rotor is turning on these
trunnions by an angle 90
o
from open to
closed position.
The valve is normally designed to close
under the worst possible conditions. This
worst case is to close a valve upstream of
the turbine when the guide vane cascade
of the turbine is fully open.
The bearings are designed with bushings
made of lead-bronze. The bushing is
pressed into a bearing housing and
provided with two sealings as shown on
Fig. 11.3. The inner seal is an O-ring
primarily for keeping the bearing free
from sand and mud. If this seal after some
time is not leak tight, the outer seal is a
reserve. This seal is of U-seal type.
Lubrication grease to the bearings is
pressed through several borings into a
section of grooves in the bearing surface.
11.1.3 Seals for closed valve
Spherical valves
/2/
usually have a main
seal downstream and an auxiliary seal
upstream of the passage of the rotor. The
valve rotor is provided with two seal
rings, one downstream and one upstream.
These are made of stainless steel and fixed with screws to the rotor.




Fig. 11.1 Spherical valve in open position

Valves 11.3

Fig. 11.3 Spherical valve bearing /2/
In closed position the circular passage of the rotor is turned 90
o
from the open position and the seals
are then activated.
The main seal is shown on Fig. 11.4. This consists of a moveable rubber profile contained in a
stainless steel seal housing which is bolted to the intermediate ring. The auxiliary seal located on the
upstream side of the valve, is shown on Fig. 11.5.
This consists of a moveable seal ring made of
stainless steel and is operating as a differential
piston.
11.1.3.1 Main seal
The main seal activation is functioning as
follows. If water pressure is equal from all sides,
the rubber seal ring is resting in its groove as if
no pressure was applied. The seal is pressed
against the seat rings with a compression of 0.5 -
1 mm when external pressure on the seal is at
atmospheric level.
When the valve rotor is in closed position, the
rubber seal is pressed against the valve rotor seal
surface by applying water pressure to the rear
side “A” of the ring, shown on Fig. 11.4. If the downstream pipe in this case is empty and
depressurised to atmospheric pressure, the valve is droptight.
To open the valve the downstream pipe is pressurised again through a bypass filling pipe and the
rear side of the rubber seal is drained. Then the rubber ring profile is pushed back by the water
pressure inside the valve. Thereby a gap between the profile and the seal surfaces is attained, and
the valve rotor can rotate without touching the rubber seal profile.

Fig.11.4 Main seal /2/
Valves 11.4

Fig. 11.5 Auxiliary seal /2/





















Fig. 11.6 Ring servomotor (Courtesy Kværner Brug as)

Fig. 11.6 Ring servomotor /2/

11.1.3.2 Auxiliary seal
The auxiliary seal
/2/
is activated
by supplying water pressure to
chamber “B” in Fig. 11.5. The
seal ring is then moved against
the valve rotor seat ring.
Chamber “C” is always
connected to drain. The water
pressure in the penstock and the
spherical valve housing is
pushing the seal ring back when
chamber B is drained.
If the penstock has been drained
with the auxiliary seal activated,
the seal ring can be withdrawn
by supplying water pressure to
chamber C.
It is should be notified that the
auxiliary seal must be activated only when
the valve rotor is in closed position
11.1.4 Operation mechanism
The opening and closing operation of the
valve is carried out by one or two
servomotors. Fig.11.6 shows the design of a
ring servomotor
/2/
which is mounted solely on
the valve housing.
Since the valve is designed to close against
the flow at full turbine load, the valve rotor is
subject to a large torque. This torque is
transferred to the valve housing through the
foundation of the servomotor. Therefore the
total closing torque is absorbed by the pipe
and the valve.
This design of the valve operation facilitates
the foundation and dimensioning of flanges
and connecting pipes.
The described operation mechanism design is
the most applied in Norway.
Another type of the operation mechanism is
to use a linear servomotor connected to an arm which is wedged to the valve rotor trunnions as
shown on Fig. 11.7. In this case the servomotor and the valve housing have to be anchored to the
surrounding foundations.
Valves 11.5

Fig. 11.7 Spherical valve operated by a
With this arrangement the adjoining pipes have to be
dimensioned to withstand bending and torque forces in
addition to the forces from the closed valve.
During valve closing however, the valve rotor is subject
to a closing torque caused by the flow and a bearing
friction torque caused by the support forces acting in the
opposite direction. The sum of these torques will act
partly in the closing direction and partly in the opposite
direction. Therefore the servomotor must be operative
for action both as a brake and as a motor for the valve
rotor.
11.1.5 Control system
The control system is in principle built up
/2/
as shown on
Fig. 11.8. It is made up by a pilot control system located
in “Spherical Valve Control Desk” and a main control
system located in the “Control Cabinet”.
These two systems represent the automatic part of the
control system. In addition the control system is
provided with manually operated valves. By means of
these valves it is possible to lock a closed spherical


Fig. 11.8 Control system of a spherical valve /2/

Valves 11.6

Fig. 11.9 Butterfly valve (Courtesy Kvæner Brug)
valve and to shut off the automatic control system to operate the spherical valve manually.
The control system of a spherical valve is normally operated with the pressure water from the
penstock. The water is carefully filtered and only rustproof materials are used in control and shut-off
valves. This system of operation has proved to be convenient and reliable.
Alternatively the servomotor may be operated by means of oil hydraulics. This way of operation
however, will be more complicated and expensive.
11.2 Butterfly valves
Butterfly valves are normally applied in front of low and medium head water turbines, i.e. heads up
to 200 m. For high head power plants the butterfly valve is from time to time used as a closing
device in inlet tunnels and alternatively as emergency closure valves.
Butterfly valves consist of mainly of a ring shaped housing, the valve disc, operating mechanism
and counter weight.
11.2.1 Valve housing
The butterfly valve housing is a cylindrical ring with the same diameter as the connecting pipe. The
housing is either not split or split axially. The valve ring with end flanges is mostly a welded design.
In addition bosses for the disc trunnion supports are welded to both sides of the housing ring. Ribs
are normally welded to the outer side of the housing ring in order to improve its stiffness.
It is favourable to cone the valve ring housing to a smaller diameter from the upstream to the
downstream end. The effect of this cone is lower flow losses through the valve.
11.2.2 Valve disc
Inside the valve ring housing a revolving circular
disc with two trunnions, is supported in bearings in
the ring housing. This valve disc is a plane with a
packing around the cicumference. In the fully open
valve the disc plane is parallel to the water flow.
Fig. 11.9 shows a picture of a butterfly valve with
the disc in open position.
A plane disc plate would however, in most cases be
too weak to carry the load of the water pressure
when the valve is closed. The disc therefore is often
cast with a shape as a lens with internal ribs. For
the larger sizes of these valves the disc may be
made as a biplane structure to be sufficiently stiff
and cause low flow losses. An example of a such
design is shown in the butterfly valve on Fig. 11.10.
In this case the disc is usually welded from plates
with integrally welded boss with trunnions.
The trunnions are offset to the upstream side of the
valve disc (considered in the closed position). In
Valves 11.7
this way the seal between the disc and the valve housing ring may be a complete ring without joints
at the trunnions. This facilitates the achievement of complete tightness.


















Fig. 11.10 Butterfly valve with a biplane disc Fig.11.11 Butterfly valve bearing /2/
(Courtesy of Kvæner Brug)
The disc trunnions are also offset somewhat either below or above the valve ring centre. This is
called the butterfly valve’s eccentricity.
11.2.3 Bearing
The valve disc has a bending tendency when it is in the closed position. Spherical bearings
/2/
are
therefore normally used for the trunnions. They are rotating in a bronze bearing with spherical shape
as shown on Fig. 11.11.
The bronze bearing is supported in a bearing ring made of steel or cast iron with internal spherical
shape. The bronze bearing is lubricated by grease, and may also be designed on the base of self
lubricating material.
The seal around the trunnion is located in the bearing cover. The seal consists of an U-shaped rubber
profile and an O-ring located outside this profile. Replacement of the bearing seals requires draining
of the penstock.
11.2.4 Seal
The valve housing ring
/2/
contains a machined stainless seat. In a groove in the disc a rubber profile
is inserted and kept in position by a clamp ring as shown on Fig. 11.12. With the disc in the closed
position, the rubber is pressed outwards against the stainless seat by tightening the clamp ring
Valves 11.8
screws. In this way the butterfly valve will be
completely tight. If the seal should leak, this may be
stopped under full upstream water pressure, by
tightening the screws in the leaking part of the
circumference.
11.2.5 Operating mechanism
The butterfly valve shall be able to open and close
under equalised water pressure on the disc sides as
well as to close at full turbine discharge. In addition
emergency closure valves shall close automatically
in the case of penstock rupture.
The opening is done by means of one (or two)
servomotors. This may be mounted on the side of
the valve and is acting on the counterweight arm
which is bolted to the trunnion. The servomotor
may also be mounted on the top of the valve
housing ring, and in this case the piston rod is acting
directly on the valve disc.
The servomotor is operated by means of pressure oil from an external oil hydraulic unit.
The valve is kept in open position by oil pressure in the servomotor when the turbine is running. As
the closing function is more important than the opening function, the valves are designed for closing
at any conditions without supply oil pressure. The counterweight with the arm bolted to the
trunnion, closes the valve when the flow is zero. The servomotor is then acting as a brake and
ensures controlled closing.
11.4 Gate valves
Gate valves are also applied as shut off valves in front of turbines. The spherical valves however,
have come more and more in use instead. The reason is that the spherical valves need smaller space
and cause lower flow losses than the gate valves. Therefore the gate valves are produced merely
with diameters up to 750 mm. They are mostly produced with cast housing. For lower heads
however, some of these valves are produced with welded housings too.
An ordinary gate valve design with a double acting servocylinder is shown on Fig. 11.13. Common
for gate valves is linear operated gate along a perpendicular to the longitudinal axis.
When the valve is fully open the gate is pulled away from the water canal. The movement of the
gate is conducted by guides in the valve housing. When the valve is closed, the gate is pressed
against the downstream stainless seal surface. The seal surface on the gate is also made of stainless
material. In the closed position the water pressure acting on the gate is transferred directly to the
valve seal. Increasing water pressure therefore results in increasing seal pressure.
The seal surface is inclined in relation to the gate closing direction. By closing movement the gate
meets the seal surface just prior to fully closed position and slides against the seal surface the last
part of the movement. To avoid bending between piston rod and the gate, the gate is mounted to the
piston with a certain freedom of movement.


Fig. 11.12 Disc seal of the butterfly valve /2/
Valves 11.9
For opening and closing of the valve the
operating mechanism may be hydraulic,
electrical or manual. On larger valves it
is natural to use hydraulic control due to
the large forces involved. For the
hydraulic operation water pressure from
the penstock or oil pressure from a
hydraulic power unit is used.
If water pressure from the penstock is
used, the cylinder wall has an inner layer
of rustproof material. In this case the
piston normally has a leather gasket
against the cylinder wall. The water must
pass a filter and be carefully cleaned
before entering the cylinder. For smaller
remote controlled valves electrical
operation is an alternative.
11.5 Ring valves
Ring valves have been used in many
types of hydro power applications. In
pump storage plants they are the most
applied valve for closing the outlet of the
pumps. However, they are applied also
as pipe break valves, drain valves and
safety valves.
An example of the design of a ring
valve
/2/
is shown in Fig. 11.14. This has
a piston shaped closing device which is
moved axially when opening and
closing. The valve housing is partly
conical and partly cylindrical, and
together with the closing device it forms
a ring shaped flow cross section. The closing device is supported in the housing by ribs.
The closing device consists of a piston with piston rod connected to a cylindrical member. This
member has a seal ring fastened to the dowstream end of it. The seal ring is made of stainless steel
and designed to adapt to the housing seal ring in the closed position. The piston and piston rod are
centered by a bushing at each end.
The design shown on Fig. 11.14 is operated by water pressure from the penstock through the
connection A and B, and there is also a connection for emergency closing C. Some ring valves are
using oil as operating fluid. For this operation a hydraulic power unit is needed.



Fig. 11.13 Gate valve with double acting hydraulic cylinder

Valves 11.10

Fig. 11.14 Ring valve section /2/
Ring valves installed in drain conduits
/2/
are equipped with an auxiliary valve upstream and a
pressure reducing device downstream of the ring valve. The pressure reducing device is an energy
dissipator connected with the downstream end of the ring valve as shown in Fig. 11.15.
The energy dissipator consists of consentric plates with a large number of small axial holes. By this
arrangement the pressure drop at any point is kept below a level where cavitation may occur. For
lower heads than 75 meters ring valves are delivered without pressure reduction device.

Fig.11.15 Ring valve with energy dissipator /2/
11.6 The bypass valve
A bypass valve is the opening/closing device in a pipe connecting the upstream and downstream
side of the valve in the main conduit. The arrangement of a bypass valve is schematically shown in
Fig. 11.8. This bypass is used to equalize the pressure on the two sides of the main valve to relieve
Valves 11.11
the valve from large loads during normal opening and closing. The bypass is also used to fill the
scroll casing of Francis turbines and the distribution pipe of Pelton turbines

Fig. 11.16 Bypass needle valve /2/
An example of the design of a hydraulically operated bypass valve
/2/
is shown on Fig. 11.16. The
valve needle is operated by a double acting servomotor. Opening and closing times are determined
by orifices in the supply pipes to the servomotor.
11.7 Guidelines for inspection of valves
On valves and the connecting pipe ends the usual damages to be found are:
- normal wear
- mechanical damages
The valve housing and the closing body as well must be inspected. The access to the upstream side
may be difficult to achive, and the time interval between inspections must be determined on the base
of the choice of materials, shape, probability of cavitation, vibrations or mechanical wear from sand
and so on.
Spherical valves, butterfly valves and gate valves have different properties and patterns of damages.
They consist however, of the same main components: valve housing, closing body and operating
mechanism. The operating mechanism is normally a hydraulic servomotor operated either by water
pressure or oil pressure.






Valves 11.12
References
1. Kjølle, A.: Water Power Machines (in Norwegian), Universitetsforlaget, Oslo 1980. ISBN 82-
00-27780-1.
2. Kvæner Brug: COURSE III, Lecture compendium, Oslo, 1986
Bibliography
Raabe, J.: Hydraulische Maschinen und Anlagen, VDI-Verlag, Düsseldorf, 1989. ISBN 3-18-
400801-0.

Auxiliary Equipment 12.1


Fig.12.1 Oil pressure system, 40 bar design pressure
of the air/oil pressure accumulator /2/

CHAPTER 12
Auxiliary Equipment
Introduction
The auxiliary equipment for the mechanical systems in water power plants comprises
- oil pressure system
- air pressure supply system
12.1 Oil pressure system
The oil pressure system has to supply pressurised oil energy for the turbine governor system
/1/,/2/
.
Different types and sizes of these systems are in use and they exist for pressures between 25 and 40
bar. The pressure tank which is designated accumulator, is of the oil-air type for pressures of these
levels.
Some small governor systems have been designed
also for operation at oil pressures as high as 100
bar. In this case the oil and air in the accumulator
must be separated. The usual applications then are
off the shelf bladder or piston accumulators. The
limitation in the design of these higher oil
pressure systems is not only the accumulator size
but also the availability of big size control valves.
Oil pressure systems for operation of the shut off
valves in main water conduits to the turbines are
also found as optional installations in some power
stations. These are however, simple power packs
which are individually dimensioned and installed
for the respective valves. Such power packs are
not further described in this book.
An oil pressure system for 40 bar
/2/
which is
common and up to date for medium and big size
turbine governors, is described in the following
section. Fig. 12.1 gives an overlook of a such oil
pressure system.

Auxiliary Equipment 12.2
12.1.1 System construction
A general function diagram of the oil pressure system
/2/
is shown in Fig. 12.2. The corresponding
hydraulic circuit diagram is shown in Fig. 12.3.
The main components can be summarised as follows:
- oil sump tank - check valves
- switches and indicators - main oil valve
- accumulator, e.g., oil pressure tank - relief valve
- oil pump units - oil cooler
- unloader valve
























Fig. 12.2 Oil pressure system. Function diagram /2/

General
Auxiliary Equipment 12.3
The accumulator is filled with oil and air under pressure. This energy storage allows a short time
high oil consumption which is much higher than the capacity of the oil pumps.
The energy storage is also sufficient for the oil consumption during a stop sequence of the turbine
unit without the oil pumps in operation

Fig. 12.3 Oil pressure system. Hydraulic circuit diagram /2/
The system is designed for a maximum working pressure of 40 bar.
An oil cooler may be connected to the oil return line.
The system is designed for complete remote control with necessary indicators and signal
transmitters for safe operation.
Auxiliary Equipment 12.4
Oil sump tank
The oil sump tank is designed with a volume sufficient for the amount of oil in the system. The tank
has inspection openings to give access for service and routine inspections.
The oil sump tank contains a special arrangement with strainers to ensure deaeration of the oil. The
separation of air entrapped in the oil prevents rapid oxidation and ensures long service life of the oil
and also of the components in the system.
Accumulator
The accumulator is mounted on the top of the oil sump tank. A man hole gives access for inspection
and service.
The oil level in the tank is controlled by refilling of compressed air. Correct oil level is important to
obtain necessary energy storage and necessary amount of oil. Refilling of air is necessary because
that pressurised oil absorbs air linearly dependent on the pressure. The absorbed air releases from
the oil during the passage of the oil sump tank.
Oil pump unit
The oil pressure system is equipped with two equal oil pump units.
Each pump unit consists of a screw pump, flexible shaft coupling, distance piece, tube/fittings and
an electric motor. It can be removed as a separate unit for overhaul. One pump unit may even be
dismantled for service and overhaul when the turbine is operating.
The pump is of the self priming positive displacement type. The main parts in the pump are the
three rotating screws, e.g., one power rotor and two idler rotors. The power rotor is the only driven
element and the idler rotors turn due to the action of the driven rotor. Their thread surfaces are
shaped to form a tight seal both in relation to each other and the surrounding rotor housing. The
fluid is transported axially and quite uniformly according to the screw rotation.
The pump units are equipped with a fluid trap on the suction side to ensure that the pump remains
filled with oil in the stand by mode. This fluid trap shall be filled with oil before the pump is started
after overhaul.
The oil pump units are driven by alternating current (AC) motors.
An oil pressure system with two pump units has one pump running continuously while the other
pump is in stand by. The stand by pump will start automatically at low pressure in the accumulator.
The control of the oil pump units permits the selection of either pump as the preferred unit.
As an option a direct current (DC) motor driven oil pump can be supplied.
A DC motor driven pump is operating only if the AC supply fails. The pump will then start and stop
via a pressure switch control which keeps the pressure below but close to the normal oil pressure.
Due to the pump start and stop automatic control the DC motor driven pump unit has no unloader
valve system.
Unloader valve
The unloader valve is installed to prevent a fast degradation of the oil quality. A relatively fast
Auxiliary Equipment 12.5
degradation will happen if the relief valve (11), Fig. 12.3, is in continuous operation and thereby
cause unwanted oxidation and cavitation.
The unloader valve pos. (6) on Fig. 12.3, is installed in the pipeline between the oil pump unit and
the inlet check valve of the accumulator.
The design of an unloader valve is
shown on Fig. 12.4. This valve is
operated when the solenoid valve (7) is
being activated by a pressure switch.
At low pressure in the accumulator, the
oil is fed from the pump to the
accumulator. As soon as the oil pressure
has reached the upper set point, the
pressure switch activates the unloader
valve. The pressure on the top of the
unloader valve piston is then decreased,
the piston moves upwards and the oil
flow is led to the oil sump tank.
In this mode the pressure in the
accumulator will decrease due to the oil
consumption in the governor system and
no oil supply from the pump. When the
pressure reaches the lower setting level,
the solenoid valve closes. The pressure
on each side of the valve piston
equalises and the unloader valve closes
due to the force from the spring in the
valve piston.
The unloader valve works only when the
oil pump is running.
Energy is saved as long as the unloader
valve delivers the oil directly to the oil
sump tank. The unloader valve also
reduce the demand for cooling of the oil.
The unloader valve may also be operated as a pilot controlled pressure relief valve.
Check valves
Between each oil pump unit and the accumulator a check valve is installed as shown on Fig. 12.3.
These valves prevent pressure oil to flow back to the oil sump tank through the oil pump.
The valve piston is spring loaded to ensure that the valve is closed during pressurising the oil
pressure system. The oil pump unit, the oil pipe and other equipment between the pump and check
valve may be dismantled without depressurising the accumulator.


Fig. 12.4 Unloader valve /2/
Auxiliary Equipment 12.6


Fig. 12.5 Main valve with pilot valve (schematically drawn) /2/



Main oil valve
The main valve (12) on Fig. 12.3, is
the shut off valve between the
accumulator and the main oil piping
system.
The design of the main oil valve is
shown on Fig. 12.5. The closing/
opening member is a differential
piston. For equal hydraulic pressure
on the two sides of the piston, the
valve therefore remains in closed
position. Also at zero pressure on the
piston sides the valve is kept closed
due to the spring force.
Opening and closing of the main oil
valve is controlled by the pilot valve.
This valve drains or pressurises
respectively the piston chamber.
This opening and closing sequence
can be done by remotely controlled
solenoid valves.
The main valve will be closed
automatically at critical low oil level
in the accumulator to prevent air from
entering the main piping system. This
process occurs independent of the
manual or automatic sequence control
Manually operated valves are
supplied for the by-pass function (6)
on Fig. 12.5, and for the opening and
closing sequence.
Relief valve
The relief valve (11) on Fig. 12.3, protects the accumulator against unintended high pressure. The
design of the valve is shown in Fig. 12.6.
The relief valve shall not open before the pressure in the accumulator exceeds normal working
pressure.
The oil begins to flow through the valve when the oil pressure on the lower side of the valve piston
balances against the spring pressure.
The design of the valve with a long coil spring and a large valve piston gives a very accurate flow -
pressure characteristic. The valve is adjusted by turning the top cover.
Auxiliary Equipment 12.7


Fig. 12.6 Relief valve /2/


If the oil pressure system has no unloader
valves or if the valves are out of function, the
relief valve can work as a pressure control
valve.
Oil cooler
The hydraulic circuit diagram Fig. 12.3 shows
the cooling principle for the oil pressure
system. The cooling is being done in the
return line. Some oil pressure systems do not
need oil cooling when the temperature
conditions are favourable.
Cleaning of the internal cooler surfaces which
are in contact with water, can easily be done
by removing the end covers. This may be done
during normal operation of the system.
Oil temperature control is accomplished by a
thermostatic valve. An automatic control as
well is applied. It is based on the oil
temperature being sensed in the sump tank to
control the water flow through the oil cooler in
accordance with the adjustable temperature
setting on the valve.
12.1.2 System operation
Opening sequence
The main valve shall not be opened without a preceding careful pressurising and deaeration of the
main piping system
/2/
. The pilot valve has this function. When the solenoid valve for opening is
activated, the spool in the pilot valve moves to the first stage and oil passes through the by-pass line
(3) to the main piping system.
As soon as the system pressure feedback in the main piping system is high enough, the spool in the
pilot valve moves to the second stage, the piston chamber in the main oil valve is then drained and
the main oil valve opens. In open position the piston chamber will remain drained through the bore
in the piston rod. The control voltage to the solenoid valve is switched off and the spool in the pilot
valve will move back to the neutral position.
The limit switch on the main oil valve indicates open and closed position.
Closing sequence
When the solenoid valve for closing is activated, the spool in the pilot valve moves to the closed
position. Pressure oil flows to the piston chamber in the main oil valve. Together with the inlet oil
through pipe (4) the necessary pressure is being built up to close the valve. In closed position the
Auxiliary Equipment 12.8
outlet from the valve chamber will be closed and the control voltage to the solenoid is switched off.
The spool in the pilot valve moves back to neutral position.
Automatic emergency closing
The orifices in the inlet pipe (4) and outlet pipe (12) in Fig. 12.5, respectively are adjusted so that
the main oil valve closes if the oil level in the accumulator becomes extremely low.
Emergency closing
By closing the manually operated valves (1) and (2) in Fig. 12.5, respectively, the outlet from the
piston chamber is being closed, the oil pressure increases and the main oil valve closes.
Instrumentation
The oil pressure system is designed for complete remote control with necessary indicators and
signal transmitters for safe operation according to up to date standards.
The function diagram Fig. 12.2 shows all in and out going signals and power supply.
The hydraulic circuit diagram Fig. 12.3 shows the instrumentation and the control functions.
Precautions to be taken by start at zero pressure
The oil level in the sump tank has to be checked.
Manual valves for pressure gauge, pressure switches, air supply and pressure to closing side of the
main valve piston are to be opened.
Manual valves for air draining, oil draining, pressure to actuator and manual by-pass are to be
closed.
One oil pump unit has to be started and run until the oil level can be seen at the lower end of the
level indicator.
Air pressure is to be supplied until approximately 2/3 of nominal pressure p
o
is reached. It must be
checked that the level in the oil sump tank is not too low. One oil pump unit is then started and run
until correct level in the accumulator is reached.
Nominal pressure is obtained by filling or draining of air.
Before switching to automatic operation the relief valve, the unloader valves and the
instrumentation have to be checked and adjusted if necessary.
12.2 Air supply system
The air pressure system serves to refill the accumulator in the oil pressure system with air.
The air in the accumulator is in direct contact with the oil. With pressurised accumulator, the oil
absorbs air linearly with the pressure. In the sump tank the absorbed air releases again during the
pressure relief to atmospheric pressure. This process however, takes some seconds to be fulfilled,
but the passage time for the oil flow through the sump tank is longer than for the air release process
A function diagram of a typical air pressure system
/2/
is shown in fig. 12.7. The corresponding
pneumatic circuit diagram is shown in fig. 12.8. The system shown is designed with two
Auxiliary Equipment 12.9
compressors. However, systems with
only one compressor are common as
well.
The main components are:
- one or two AC powered high
pressure air compressors with inlet
filter
- relief valve mounted on the
compressor
- air cooled aftercooler with
condensate trap
- valves
The start and stop of the refilling cycle
is controlled by a level switch on the
accumulator.
To avoid short cycles for start and stop
of the compressor, the stop command is
normally delayed to obtain a minimum
of working time. This logic is a part of
the main control system.
The compressor utilised for the air
supply system is an air cooled two stage
compressor. Fig. 12.9 shows the
compressor with motor assembled on a
subbase.
The condensate trap on the compressor
is equipped with a manual or automatic
drain valve for drainage of condensate.
An air-cooled aftercooler is normally
installed on the tube between the
compressor and the accumulator
equipped with a manual or automatic
drain valve.
A relief valve on the compressor is a
system protection and is adjusted below the maximum allowable pressure of the system.
Air pressure systems with two compressors are equipped with two level switches on the
accumulator. The level switch for compressor 1 is placed at normal oil level and the one for
compressor 2 is placed 50 to 150 mm above the normal oil level making compressor 2 to start only
if the system for compressor 1 is failing.



Fig. 12.7 Function diagram /2/
Auxiliary Equipment 12.10


Fig 12.8 Pneumatic circuit diagram /2/



Fig. 12.9 Compressor /2/

References
1. Condition Control of Hydropower in Norway: Handbook – Governor (in Norwegian).
2. Kværner Brug: COURSE III, Lecture compendium, Oslo, 1986.





Forces transferred to the foundations 13.1
CHAPTER 13
Forces transferred to the foundations
Introduction
In water power stations the forces to be transferred to the foundations from the installed units are:
- resulting hydraulic forces from the inlet side of the turbines
- reaction and action forces from jets and jet deflectors respectively
- reaction forces from energy dissipaters
- torque forces from the generator stators
- axial forces from runners and generators via thrust bearings
For Francis and Kaplan turbines with steel scroll casing the main forces are transferred through the
scroll casing to the concrete foundation. For vertical Pelton turbines the forces are correspondingly
transferred through the distributor.
The transfer and magnitude of these forces are different for horizontal and vertical turbines.

13.1 Horizontal turbines
For horizontal Pelton and Francis turbines normally all the hydraulic forces from the inlet penstock
are transferred to and carried by the flange at the inlet end of the penstock via a rigid connection
through the inlet shut off valve.
In Pelton turbines the minor reaction forces from the jets and the action forces from the deflectors
during rejections, are transferred through the housing to the concrete foundation. The resultant of
the jet forces on the runner and the runner weight are transferred to the radial bearings which are
bolted to the concrete foundation. The torque forces are transferred to the generator stator
foundation.
For a bulb turbine the forces are transferred to the foundation in the river ground through the
concrete in which they are embedded. The dominating horizontal hydraulic force is transferred via
the outer cone and the main struts. The struts transfer the axial and radial hydraulic forces from the
turbine. The torque from the generator is transferred through the generator foundation and partly
through the turbine structure. The turbine structure is dimensioned for the total axial force with
closed guide vanes.
In addition to the axial forces the outer cone and plate cylinder in bulb turbines are exposed to radial
expansion. This effect requires a heavy reinforcement of the concrete in the area around the struts.

Forces transferred to the foundations 13.2

13.2 Vertical turbines
The vertical Pelton turbines installed in cavern power houses normally transfer the axial forces from
the distributor through the concrete to the rock wall on the downstream side of the power house.
The maximum magnitude of this force is
F gH
D
c
= ρ
π
max
2
4
(13.1)
where D
c
is the outer diameter of the dismantling pipe (of telescopic type with seal ring) located
downstream of the inlet shut off valve. The reaction forces from the jets are negligible compared
with the static hydraulic forces on the distributor. This is easily stated by calculation of the
maximum reaction force of each jet
F g
d
j
j
= 2
4
2
ρ
π
(13.2)
where d
j
is the maximum jet diameter.
However, to transfer the large axial forces to the power house an extension of the inlet flange of the
distributor must be welded to the inlet flange. This extension which is indicated by (E) on fig. 13.1,
must be introduced to reduce the specific pressure on the concrete and avoid crushing and cracking.
This purpose comprises also the necessary reinforcement bars which are laid in to avoid cracking of
the concrete during pressurising of the distributor.




Fig. 13.1 Reinforcement collar for transfer of axial forces on a Pelton distributor.

Forces transferred to the foundations 13.3


An extension of the same type and an installation analogous to that for the Pelton turbine is applied
for high head Francis turbines as well.
For high head plants the hydraulic forces carried by the tangential stresses in Pelton turbine
distributors or scroll casings of Francis turbines are so large that only a negligible part of the
hydraulic load is to be carried by the concrete. The reinforcement bars are laid in only to avoid
cracking. Moreover, five millimetres soft material are also put in on the steel plates where the
deformation is large in axial direction.
The spherical inlet shut off valve is normally free to slide horizontally on its foundation plate on the
top of the concrete foundation. Vertically however, the valve is anchored to avoid vibration during
closure with open needles.
For high head Francis turbines the hydraulic forces transferred to the concrete foundation are similar
to the forces from a vertical Pelton turbine.
However, reinforcing bars which are located at each bifurcation in a distributor will not be used for
a Francis scroll casing.
It should however, be emphasised that no welding is allowed of reinforcement bars to the high
tensile strength steel plates in the stress carrying parts of high head Francis and Pelton turbines.
The reason is that dangerous hardening and cracks may occur.
The vertical forces on the foundation, i.e., in the axial direction of the turbine shaft, are the weights
of the turbine and the generator stator and the axial forces from the thrust bearing. In addition on
Francis turbines there is a by-pass from the scroll casing through an energy dissipater. During
rejections the valve in the by-pass opens according to the governor regulation. The corresponding
reaction flow force is transferred vertically as well. In the rotational direction the torque of the unit
transfers twisting forces to the foundations.
The twisting force and all the vertical forces which are of minor magnitude compared with the
horizontal hydraulic force from the inlet conduit, are transferred through the reinforced concrete
structures to the rock wall and bottom of the cavern.
The forces transferred to the power house from vertical turbines described so far, are valid only for
cavern power plants with solid rock on the downstream side.
For vertical turbines in open air power houses the horizontal axial forces must be transferred to the
penstock flange by a rigid connection through the inlet valve as described for the horizontal
turbines.
For Kaplan turbines with scroll casing there is normally no inlet valve. The inlet of the scroll casing
is then welded to the oulet of the conduit and also in this case the axial forces are transferred to the
penstock.
On account of large dimensions and flexible design the vertical forces from the scroll casing will
partly be transferred to the concrete foundation by utilising the weight of the generator.
Especially for Kaplan turbines with unlined concrete scroll casings a large support from the
generator weight may be utilised in addition to the anchoring of the stay ring.
Forces transferred to the foundations 13.4
The trust bearing is often located in the turbine pit below the generator. In this way the weight of the
rotating parts are transferred via the upper turbine cover to the stay ring.


References
Brekke, H.: Forces transferred to the foundations of water turbines in underground power stations.
NTNU, Trondheim 1997.
Kværner Brug: COURSE III, Lecture compendium, Oslo 1986

Causes to damages 14.1
CHAPTER 14
Causes to damages
Introduction
Damages concerning water turbines are caused mainly by cavitation problems, sand erosion,
material defects and fatigue. Damage problems occur primarily in turbines for higher heads than
about 250 m. These problems are consequences essentially of high pressures, pressure variations
and high water velocities which to some extent depend on the ever prevailing search for a
minimising of the costs of the investments.
To cope with these problems, studies and research of the phenomena as well as the properties of
materials have been carried out and are going on. Precautions to be taken to avoid or minimise
damages have been recommended, criteria for choice of materials and methods for estimation of
durability of stressed components have been developed.
In the following section a survey of aspects of the main damage problems and how to reduce or
avoid these, are considered.
14.1 Cavitation
The turbine parts exposed to cavitation are the runners and draft tube cones for the Francis, Kaplan
and bulb turbines and the needles, nozzles and the runner buckets of the Pelton turbines.
Measures for combating erosion and damage under cavitational conditions are improvements in
hydraulic design and production of components, search for erosion resistant materials and
arrangement of the turbines for operations within the good range of acceptable cavitation conditions.
The further considerations are focused merely on the search for materials with high resistance
against erosion from cavitation.
Through the three last decenniums extended research is done on developing new alloy steel
qualities. Successively those materials which have performed the best properties, have been tested in
relevant applications. As a conclusion it has been an extensive and successful advance in the
development of materials with properties as high strength, wear resistance, corrosion resistance,
weldability and reduction of defects and brittleness in heat affected zones. This development of
material properties is in further progress.
In harmony with these attainments certain types and qualities of materials are chosen according to
the prevailing conditions for the different components exposed to cavitation. At present guide vanes
and runners exposed to high flow velocities with danger of cavitation or turbulence corrosion are
made of stainless steel 13% Cr 4% Ni and 16% Cr 5% Ni respectively. The 16% Cr 5% Ni is used in
the runner due to good weldability without preheating.
Causes to damages 14.2
The upper part of the draft tube cone is also made of stainless steel 16% Cr 5% Ni. The surface of
the covers against the guide vane end faces are normally clad welded with stainless steel 16% Cr 5%
Ni with hardness of about 300 Brinell. This hardness is about 70 Brinell different from the hardness
of the guide vanes and that is chosen to prevent tearing of the surface when the guide vanes are
moved.
The parts exposed to high flow velocities such as needle tips and nozzles are made of hardened
stainless steel of 13% Cr 4% Ni or 16% Cr 5% Ni.
14.2 Sand erosion
Sand erosion problems in Norwegian water power plants are generally limited to plants at net heads
above 200 - 300 m. That implies experiences limited to Francis and Pelton turbines.
Sand erosion is designated as abrasive wear. This type of wear will brake down the oxide layer on
the flow guiding surfaces and partly make the surfaces uneven which may be origin also for
cavitation erosion. Sand erosion therefore may be both a releasing and contributing cause for
damages which are observed in power plants with a large transport of wearing contaminants in the
water flow.
The erosion damages are to some extent different for Pelton and Francis turbines.
On Pelton turbines it is the needle tip, the seal rings in the nozzles and the runner buckets which are
most exposed to sand erosion. The wear on needle tips occurs as streaks and indentations forward to
the tip. On the buckets the sand contaminants in the water flow is wearing the bucket gap
backwards. That causes a delayed contact with the jet and makes an erroneous splitter. The bucket
edge is usually exposed to an even wear and tear and becomes wider, and extended indentations
may occur just behind the edge.
It should be emphasised that sand erosion even from silt with grain size less than 60 µm have made
severe damage on needles and nozzles of a Pelton turbine at 800 m head in Norway while the runner
buckets have had negligible damage. This phenomena may be caused by the strong turbulence in the
high jet velocity bringing the grain particles to oscillate and rotate in circles causing collisions with
the steel surface.
If coarse sand is present, the Pelton buckets are also severely eroded while the damage of the
nozzles may be less serious. The reason may be explained by the extreme acceleration of a particle
passing the Pelton bucket. A flow analysis shows that an acceleration of 100 000 m/sec
2
may occur
for small buckets in a high head turbine.
In Francis turbines the guide vane cascade and the labyrinth rings are the major parts which are
exposed to wear. In some serious cases also the surfaces of the covers against the guide vane end
faces and the runner blades have been damaged. Usually the wear of the guide vane cascade and the
labyrinth rings have the most significant influence on the efficiency of the turbine.


Materials resistant to sand erosion
The real mean to minimise sand erosion in the turbines is to apply the most suitable material with
properties that match the highest possible resistance against erosion, and contemporary satisfy
Causes to damages 14.3
manufacturing and operating conditions. Against sand erosion stainless steel does not really show
acceptable resistance. The materials stellite and titanium show better resistance, but only by a factor
of two to three. However, promising work in developing coating processes of ceramic material as
wolfram carbides is going on.
At present however, the materials with the best properties against cavitation erosion are also used
even if sand erosion is expected. That means guide vanes and runners are made of stainless steel
types as 13% Cr 4% Ni or 16% Cr 5% Ni. These same materials are used also in the rotating seal
rings on Francis runners, while the static labyrinth seals in the covers are made of Ni-Al bronze
which has a hardness different from that of the rotating ring.
For needle tips and nozzles in Pelton turbines which are exposed to high flow velocities, hardened
stainless steel of 13% Cr 4% Ni or 16% Cr 5% Ni is recommended. If however, severe sand erosion
is expected, a ceramic coating on the needle tip and the nozzle ring has been used successfully.
So far ceramic coating of Pelton runners is not commercialised with sufficient success, but
improvements are made in recent years. Coating of facing plates of Francis turbines is under
development as well, while the guide vanes may be treated in the same way as the needles and
nozzles of a Pelton turbine.
A general problem with the surface coating is however, that it will be more rough than a polished
steel surface. This means a decreased efficiency of the turbine. Grinding of the coating is also
regarded as a problem because the coating may be too thin or even penetrated.
14.3 Material defects
For high head turbines the stress carrying parts are made of fine grain high tensile strength carbon
steel. The base for the dimensioning criterias of these parts is the maximum stress and the number of
pressure pulsations cycles. To allow for acceptable material and weld defects within realistic values
for production, materials with a yield point value above 460 MPa are not recommended.
For large vertical Pelton turbines the development of high tensile steel has allowed for increasing
size of turbines for high heads in the range of 800 to 2000 m. With basis in fracture mechanics it is
essential to design a turbine to fulfil the requirement that unstable fracture from a crack shall not
occur until the crack has penetrated the whole plate thickness. This condition is designated Leakage
Before Rupture (LBR). The reason is that a crack through the thickness will be easy to detect by the
leakage. As long as a crack has not penetrated the whole plate thickness an unstable rupture will be
prevented. This requirement limits the maximum size of the turbine depending on the toughness of
thick materials.
On the basis of the above mentioned requirements the maximum main stress must be limited to
about 200 MPa for any material quality developed untill now.
The most important requirement for the manufacture is the weldability to avoid defects and
brittleness in the heat affected zones of the material. To fulfil this requirement limitations in the
chemical composition is made. These limits are:
Carbon C < 0,13%, Sulphur S < 0.01% and Vanadium V < 0.09%
Welding defects
Causes to damages 14.4
Defects will always occur in a weld. Cracks and lack of fusion are the most serious defects because
they are two dimensional. Three dimensional defects such as slag and gas cavities are not so
dangerous except if sharp edges of slag is connected to a lack of fusion or a crack.. Gas cavities may
also indicate hydrogen which is very dangerous due to micro cracks.
The most dangerous defect is a propagating crack with a very sharp edge, e.g., a two dimensional
defect or a flaw.
Crack propagation based on fracture mechanics
As defects always occur in a weld or in the heat affected zones in the base material, it is therefore
essential to have acceptance criterias for defects which will not grow to rupture under the
operational conditions for the regarded structure.
An acceptance criterion for material defects may be based on the theory of fracture mechanics. An
applied criterion is briefly described as follows.
The stress in front of a crack tip in a complete elastic material is expressed by
σ
π
=
K
r 2
(14.1)
where σ is the mean stress which cause the crack to propagate
K is the stress intensity factor
r is the distance to crack tip
By means of this theory one will find that the stress at the crack tip will reach an infinite value. This
indicates that the crack should propagate even for low average stress values σ in the surrounding of
any small crack with depth a in a complete elastic material with no ductility.
However, all materials suitable for structural design will undergo a plastic deformation at a certain
stress level which limits the stress peak value. If the load or stress level and crack depth are within
certain limits the crack will stop in the plastic zone. The material will have a certain crack arresting
ability depending on the ratio between the elastic energy and the elastic energy stored in front of the
crack tip.
As a conclusion:
A crack will propagate only if the loss of elastic energy is equal or greater than the energy needed
to form new fracture surface.
The critical elastic energy at the crack tip is expressed by the stress intensity factor K found in the
following way.
If the average stress in the uncracked material is σ, the stress intensity factor becomes
K= σ π φ af ( ) (14.2)
where a is the crack depth
f(φ) is a factor which is a function of crack length and geometry of the material
surrounding the crack
Causes to damages 14.5
An unstable crack propagation will occur if K ≥ K
C
. The constant K
C
is a material constant
determined by testing of the respective material quality or welding joint. Unstable crack propagation
may occur as a brittle fracture with sound speed.
However, if the material cross section is thick another value K
IC
instead of K
C
is valid. But for
ductile materials K
IC
values are not valid.
Materials for turbines are of the ductile type. Depending on the strength of the material and the level
of the working stress the material includes both elastic and plastic deformation in front of the crack
tip before propagation.
Therefore, another method than to find a critical stress intensity factor must be used to find the crack
arresting ability and the critical size of a ductile material. This method is called Crack Tip Opening
Displacement (CTOD).
For any material there will be a critical crack size which leads to unstable fractures. This crack size
may be based on the CTOD determined experimentally for the base materials and welds.
It is proven however, by small scale CTOD-tests that high tensile strength steel with high working
stress level allows for a smaller crack size than a low tensile strength steel with a lower stress level.
A critical crack size may be calculated, but this is not further considered here.
14.4 Fatigue
Defects of critical size rarely occur in a new turbine. Such defects will in any case be detected by a
leakage or rupture during the pressure test which is a very important type of tests at the end of the
manufacture. Smaller defects in a new turbine may however, grow to critical size during life time
due to fatigue propagation caused by a certain number of load cycles.
Basically the stress carrying parts in a Francis turbine are statically loaded. A turbine in typical
peaking operation however, may be stopped and started, i.e., loaded and unloaded three times or
more a day. For a life time of 50 years that leads totally to about 50 000 cycles. In modern fracture
mechanics theory this is in the low cycle fatigue domain. In addition minor stress amplitudes caused
by pressure oscillations from the turbine regulation will be superimposed.
On the base of this conditions the stresses must be limited to avoid small fabricated cracks and other
material defects to grow to critical size. Safety margin to yield stress or ultimate stress is not
sufficient as safety criterion if high tensile strength steel is used.
Unfortunately the fatigue crack propagation speed has not decreased by the development of high
tensile strength steel even if the toughness and strength have increased. On the contrary some
research works have indicated a slight improvement of fatigue lifetime of high cycle fatigue in
materials with low yield stress. On the other hand the crack propagation speeds in brittle materials
and tougher materials show only negligible differences.



From these experiences the following conclusions are drawn:
Causes to damages 14.6
• For turbine parts exposed to a number of loading cycles above 20 000 in the lifetime it is
not reasonable to increase the maximum working stresses above 200 MPa because
acceptable defects then will be too small to be detected.
• In heat affected high tensile strength steels hardening effect and residual stresses may
occur. For all thick plates therefore, welds should be heat treated after the welding.
Otherwise after a number of years in operation, crack growth may lead to unstable
fracture starting from cracks which do not penetrate the whole plate thickness.
Critical area in scroll casings is the joint between the shell and the stay ring where both the stress
and wall thickness have the maximum value. For Pelton turbine distributors the bend joint on the
inside is the critical point.
Parts exposed to high cycle fatigue and erosion
Runners and guide vanes especially in reversible pump turbines, will be exposed to high cycle
fatigue up to the range of 10
10
- 10
11
cycles with relatively low stress amplitudes. Pelton runners are
normally casted of 13% Cr 4% Ni alloy steel. The same material is used also in Francis runners.
However, for Francis runners also the 16% Cr 5% Ni has been used. This steel shows a somewhat
better cavitation resistance. Moreover, it may be welded with no preheating except for a moderate
temperature of 50
o
C to keep the material well above the dew point during welding. The fatigue
threshold limit for a number of cycles higher than 10
11
indicates infinite lifetime for stress
amplitudes ∆σ < 45 MPa and a surface crack less than one mm in depth and two mm in length.
References
Brekke, H.: Choice of materials for water turbines and the influences this has on the design
manufacture, testing and operation. General Doctoral Lecture NTH, Trondheim 1984.
Kværner Brug: COURSE III, Lecture compendium, Oslo 1986


Condition Control 15.1
CHAPTER 15
Condition Control
Introduction
Condition control of water turbines and additional mechanical equipment is the primary basis for
organizing and carrying out
- preventive maintenance - a continous process which is taking place with certain time
intervals and at planned dates.
- overhauls - being performed to improve the operation conditions, rectify wear and
leakages on the plant according to plans adapting to the plant operation.
If an accident occurs or preventive maintenance and overhauls are not carried out properly,
situations requiring repairs may arise. A repair is here defined as an unplanned overhaul.
Continous monitoring and condition control is of great importance to all types of turbines. The
content of the condition control activities are however, somewhat different from one type to another
of the turbines. Therefore, condition control is briefly described specifically for the respective
turbine types.
15.1 Activities for Pelton turbines
Turbine guide bearing
The first oil change should be done after 3 - 6 months of operation. The later oil changes are to be
done as required by evaluating oil sample tests.
To empty the bearing for oil it has to be done at standstill by pumping through the oil level pipe in
the bearing housing.
If babbit metal particles are found in oil samples, the bearing should immediately be dismantled for
inspection.
Runner
The runner should be regularly inspected to record possible damages from foreign objects in the
water. The time interval between each inspection is dependent on sand content in the water.
The runner inspection is done visually by means of magnaflux and/or dye penetrant. Particular
attention should be paid to the area between the buckets.

Condition Control 15.2
If minor cracks or defects have been formed, these should be removed by grinding and polishing
according to advices from the manufacturer.
The special shape of the runner buckets makes it difficult to detect material defects just below the
surface. These defects may penetrate to the surface during the first operation time period. To prevent
an extensive crack propagation they must be rectified as soon as possible.
Main injector with needle servo motor
The needle tip and the nozzle should be inspected with respect to cavitation damages and damages
from foreign objects. If the water contains fine silt or sand, the needle tips may loose their original
shape.
It is of great importance that the nozzle is inspected from the inside.
The needle servomotor should be run to neutral mid position and the oil pressure taken off for safety
reasons. The leakage indicators should be regularly inspected.
Seal ring in deflector bearing
Leakage in this seal do not require immediate replacement of the seal ring, but replacement should
be done as soon as possible to avoid bearing corrosion. The seal ring must be provided with a spring
of stainless material.
Filter
Filter for breaking system control water supply should be checked and cleaned if necessary. It may
be cleaned after closing of the valves for this water supply system from the penstock.
15.2 Activities for Francis turbines
Routine inspections
Routine inspections means visual inspection of the complete turbine:
- look for possible leakages
- inspect bolted connections
- drain pumps should be inspected and level switches tested.
RPM shutdown curve
The activity is to record the RPM with 30 seconds intervals from the moment of closed guide vanes
to standstill of the unit. The RPM shutdown curve should be drawn from nominal RPM to standstill.
Leakage control of guide vanes
The activity is to record the RPM with the spherical valve open and the guide vanes closed.
Shaft alignment
The activity is to record the shaft misalignment by means of a micrometer dial instrument against
the shaft at the turbine bearing top. The misalignment should be recorded at different loads on the
unit.
Condition Control 15.3

Labyrinth seal water flow
The assessment of wear and control of the labyrinth rings is possible by measuring the labyrinth
water flow.
Runner
Visual inspection of the runner is required to record possible cavitation and erosion damages as well
as cracks in vanes. The inspection of the inlet is done from the scroll casing. Three of the guide vane
arms should be dismantled and the guide vanes rotated by hand to open position. The unit should be
rotated manually to enable inspection of the complete runner circumference. The outlet side of the
runner should be inspected from the draft tube cone.
Scroll casing and draft tube
The activity is to carry out inspection of painting for possible corrosion and ensure that all
manometer connection openings are open and that the manhole cover is drop tight after completed
inspection.
Guide vane mechanism
The guide surfaces of the covers should be inspected from the scroll casing and possible wear
recorded.
Visual inspection of the surfaces of the guide vanes. The clearances between the guide vanes and the
cover surfaces and the clearance between guide vanes should be checked.
Look for possible leakages in the guide vane bearings. Look for slacks in the bearings of the guide
vane arms and links.
Check the connection between regulating ring and the servomotor.
Shaft seal box
During operation water will normally not flow over the the shaft seal box. It may however happen
during start and stop. If water runs into the upper cover it is removed by a drain pump.
Turbine bearing
The same activities as for Pelton turbines.
15.3 Activities for Kaplan and Bulb turbines
The general principles for condition control are the same as for the Francis turbines. Further
considerations are therefore connected only to a few specific details of Kaplan and Bulb turbines.
Runner
The runner should be inspected both from above and below. Particular attention should be given to
possible cavitation erosion and scratches on the blades as well as leaks around the blade flange
against the hub.
Condition Control 15.4

Runner chamber
The narrow gap between runner and the runner chamber should be checked if foreign objects may
have passed the gap and made scratches in the chamber.
Guide vane mechanism
For guide vane mechanism with individual vane servomotors on Bulb turbines it should be checked
that the vanes have an identical movement.
Shaft seal box
For Bulb turbines at standstill it should be checked that the water does not flow out of the box along
the shaft into the turbine bearing.
Generally for Bulb turbines
Special attention should be paid to changes in the sound when the unit is in operation.
References
Kværner Brug: COURSE III, Lecture compendium, Oslo 1986
Quality Assurance 16.1
CHAPTER 16
Quality Assurance (QA)

The organisation for building a hydropower plant performs a quantity of specifications, expectations
and goals for the project with respect to economy, time and quality. The requirements for carrying
out the project are that it is equally important that all sub suppliers are capable of delivering their
supply in accordance with demands as those performed by the project organisation.
There are several ways to ensure the requirements above. The most common however, is to apply
and follow an international quality standard. The most applied standard in Europe is EN ISO 9001
which specifies requirements aimed primarily at preventing nonconformity at all stages from design
through servicing.
The requirements may be divided in two parts. The one part is aimed at organisational matters and
the other specifically at the project.
Examples of organisational requirements are:
• Policy, objectives and commitment to quality shall be documented by the management.
• Responsibility, authority and interrelation of all personnel who manage, perform and verify
work affecting quality shall be defined.
• A management representative shall, irrespective of other responsibilities, have defined
authority and responsibility for the Quality System and its maintenance.
• Quality audits shall be carried out to verify whether quality activities comply with planned
arrangements and to determine the effectiveness of the quality system.
The requirements through a project life are shown in the flow-chart defining period, activities and
end results of different QA - activities.
One may say that the picture differs depending on whether You are a customer or a supplier.
However, whatever role an organisation have in a hydropower project, there is always a customer of
Your services. The Operational Organisation will be customer of the Project Organisation as the
consumers will be customers of the Operational Organisation.
Hence, the need for a Quality system in order to avoid nonconformity is equally important to
everybody involved in a hydropower plant.




Quality Assurance 16.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE ROUTINES



PERIOD




OFFER















ORDER










TAKING OVER




GUARANTEE
PERIOD



DELIVERY
FINALIZATION

ACTIVITY

GUARANTEE INSPECTION
ASSESSMENT OF
PRODUCT QUALITY
COMMISSIONING
ERECTION
PRODUCTION FOLLOW UP
SUB-CONTRACTOR
CONTROL
DESIGN REVIEW
CONTRACT REVIEW
OFFER REVIEW
STARTING UP MEETING





RESULT


WORK DISTRIBUTION
OFFER SCHEDULE







PROJECT
ORGANIZATION
SCHEDULE


DESIGN
VERIFICATION QUALITY
PLAN



VERIFICATION





VERIFICATION



TEST RESULT
COMMISIONING
REPORT



DELIVERY ASSESSMENT




REPORT
Quality Assurance 16.3




References
Kværner Brug: COURSE III, Lecture compendium, Oslo 1986





















I

CONTENTS
Preface Page VIII

CHAPTER

1
Page 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.7

Hydropower Machinery Introduction 1.1 Brief review of hydropower machines 1.1.1 The eldest hydropower machines 1.1.2 Turbines 1.2 Arrangement of hydropower plants References

CHAPTER

2
Page 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.3 2.6 2.12 2.13 2.16 2.17 2.17

Energy Conversion Introduction 2.1 Fundamentals and definitions 2.2 Transforming hydraulic energy into mechanical energy 2.2.1 General considerations 2.2.2 Impulse turbine - Pelton 2.2.3 Reaction turbines 2.2.4 The main equation of turbines 2.3 A brief outline of the hydraulic design of turbines 2.4 Efficiency References Bibliography

CHAPTER

3
Page 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.8 3.9 3.9 3.10 3.10 3.11 3.11 3.11 3.13 3.14 3.14

Classification of Turbines - Main Characteristics Introduction 3.1 Fundamental similarity considerations 3.1.1 Similarity relations 3.1.2 Speed number 3.1.3 Classification of turbines 3.1.4 Performance characteristics 3.1.5 Cavitation and suction head 3.2 Pelton turbines 3.2.1 Main hydraulic dimensions 3.2.2 Pelton bucket dimensions 3.2.3 Performance diagram 3.3 Francis turbines 3.3.1 Main hydraulic dimensions 3.3.2 Performance diagrams 3.3.3 Cavitation, suction head and reaction ratio 3.4 Kaplan turbines 3.4.1 Main hydraulic dimensions

II

Classification of turbines - Main Characteristics (Cont.) 3.4.2 Performance diagram 3.4.3 Cavitation, suction head and reaction ratio 3.5 Choice of turbine 3.5.1 Choice between Pelton and Francis turbines 3.5.2 Choice between Francis and Kaplan turbines References Bibliography

Page 3.15 3.16 3.16 3.16 3.20 3.20 3.21

CHAPTER

4
Page 4.1 4.2 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.8 4.13 4.13 4.14 4.15 4.15

Governing Principles Introduction 4.1 Feedback control system 4.2 Governor adjustment facilities 4.2.1 Proporsjonal-integral-derivative funtions (PID) 4.2.2 Permanent speed droop 4.3 Turbine governing demands 4.3.1 Frequency and load regulation 4.3.2 Start and stop sequence control 4.3.3 Disconnection, load rejection 4.3.4 Load limiting 4.4 Regulation requirements of water power plants 4.4.1 Mass oscillation 4.4.2 Water hammer pressure rise versus closure time and speed 4.5 Governing stability 4.5.1 Modes of operation 4.5.2 Rules of thumb References Bibliography

CHAPTER

5
Page 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.7 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.11

Performance Tests Introduction 5.1 Tests on prototype 5.1.1 Principles for test 5.1.2 Measurement of the turbine power 5.1.3 Methods for determination of discharge 5.1.3.1 Current meter method 5.1.3.2 Pitot tube gauging 5.1.3.3 The pressure-time method (Gibson method) 5.1.3.4 Tracer methods 5.1.3.5 Ultrasonic method 5.1.3.6 Weirs 5.1.3.7 Standardised differential pressure devices 5.1.3.8 Volumetric gauging method 5.1.3.9 Relative discharge measurement

2 Runner 6.1 Turbine guide bearing 6.2.2.17 5.4.12 6.5 Dynamic properties of the turbines 5.2 Vertical Francis turbine 7.2.16 5.16 5.4 7.3 Main injector with needle servomotor 6.21 5.11 6.2 Model tests 5.18 5.16 5.1.Rejection tests 5.1.1 Horizontal Pelton turbine arrangement 6.12 5.3 Turbine radial bearing 6.22 Page 6.3.14 5.1 Horizontal Francis turbine 7.2 Model tests and scale effect of effiency from model to prototype 5.2 The turbine shaft 6.8 6.1 Laboratory qualifications 5.12 5.2 Efficiency and specific energies 5.4 Bend and distributor 6.) 5.4 6.1 6.9 6.5 Assembly and dismantling Reference Bibliography CHAPTER 7 Francis Turbines Introduction 7.1.2.11 6.7 6.2.5 Filter 6.3 Condition control 6.2.11 6.4.20 5.12 Page 7.7 Turbine housing 6.1 Measurement of power losses 5.3 Scale effect on efficiency from model to prototype References Bibliography Page 5.10 6.3 Main components and their functions 7.1.3.5 Straight flow injector 6.1 Scroll casing .4 Seal ring in deflector bearing 6.3.4.4 Monitoring instruments 6.4 Thermodynamic measurement of flow losses 5.4 Corrections for leakage and friction 5.11 6.3 Main components and their functions 6.1.1 Runner 6.3.6 6.2 Vertical Pelton turbine arrangement 6.3.2 7.10 6.3.2 6.1 6.4 CHAPTER 6 Pelton Turbines Introduction 6.2.10 6.1.3 Measuring technique 5.2.17 5.1 7.1.4.11 6.17 5.1 7.6 6.6 Cavitation behaviour of prototype 5.3.2.13 5.III Performance Tests (Cont.7 Governor test .1.4 6.12 6.6 Deflector mechanism 6.

12 7.4 Condition control 8.2 Kaplan turbine construction 8.8 7.3.12 Draft tube 8.7 Regulating mechanism 7.7 8.8 Draft tube 7.2.6 Regulating mechanism of the runner blades 8.9 8.9 7.2 The guide vane cascade 8.8 8.3.2.9 8.2.10 8.12 Page 8.5 7.2.11 7.6 8.2.5 8.3 Covers 8.4 Shaft seal box 8.6 7.5 7.4.1 Runner 8.9 8.2.2 8.9 7.4.1 Arrangement 8.4 8.9 8.3 8.9 Turbine shaft 8.6 8.11 7.2.2 Main components and their functions 8.10 CHAPTER 8 Kaplan Turbines Introduction 8.5 Turbine shaft and bearing 7.) 7.2.10 7.7 7.4 Runner 8.2.1 Kaplan turbine construction 8.2 Guide vane cascade 7.9 8.7 Assembly and dismantling References Bibliography Page 7.4 8.5 Monitoring instruments 8.7 Cooperation of the regulation of the guide vanes and the runner blades 8.4 8.5 Runner blade servomotor 8.6 Assembly and dismantling References Bibliography .3.4 Drainage and filling system 7.2.3.5 8.6 Shaft seal 7.1 8.5 Contition control 7.7 8.3 Drainage and filling arrangement 8.1 8.3 8.2.1.8 Runner chamber 8.2 Runner chamber 8.4.6 Monitoring instruments 7.IV Francis Turbines (Cont.3.3.10 8.3.9 8.2.4 7.1.1 8.4 Runner 7.7 8.9 8.1 Scroll casing 8.11 Shaft seal box 8.4.10 Turbine bearing 8.3 Guide vane mechanism 8.3 Turbine covers 7.

4.1 Stay cone 9.2.1 Governor desk 10.3 Dual control of Kaplan/Bulb turbines References Bibliography .4.10 Page 10.4.7 10.4 10.2 By-pass control for Francis turbines 10.2 Digital computer based controller 10.1 Governor system structure 10.3 9.9 9.2 9.6 Shaft seal box 9.4 9.2 Main components 9.2 Runner chamber and draft tube cone 9.5.9 9.6 10.9 9.2.4 Stay shield 9.2.6 10.2 The valve control system 10.1 Function and general arrangement 10.9 10.4 Shaft seal box 9.1 10.3.4 10.7 Turbine shaft bearing 9.2.1 Runner 9.3.4.10 9.3.2 9.9 9.4 9.6 9.7 9.2.2 Electrohydraulic controllers 10.6 10.3.9 The guide vane mechanism 9.V CHAPTER 9 Bulb Turbines Introduction 9.3 Guide vane mechanism 9.2.1 9.3 9.10 10.2.8 The feedback mechanism and oil piping 9.4 9.8.10 9.7 10.5.1 Dual control of Pelton turbines 10.2.9 9.4.2.2.3 Condition control 9.5 Rotating parts 9.7 9.3.2 The turbine shaft 9.8 9.9 9.7 9.2.5 Assembly and dismantling References Bibliography Page 9.2.3 10.3.3 Servo system 10.2 Main control servomoter 10.2.3 Generator hatch 9.10 CHAPTER 10 Governors 10.1 The oil transfer unit 9.2 Runner chamber 9.4 Monitoring instruments 9.2 10.1 General arrangement 9.2.5 Generally for Bulb turbines 9.1 The runner 9.8 10.3 9.2 10.1 9.2.1 9.3.4 Specific turbine governing equipement 10.1 Analogous controller 10.2.

1 11.2 Air supply system References CHAPTER 13 Forces transferred to the foundations Introduction 13.12 11.1 Valve housing and valve rotor 11.1 Horizontal turbines 13.1.3 Gate valves 11.5 Operating mechanism 11.1.6 11.2 11.9 11.7 12.7 Guidelines for inspection of valves References Bibliography Page 11.2.6 11.1.1.2 Auxilliary seal 11.1 11.3.2 12.1 Oil pressure system 12.6 11.3 Seals for closed valve 11.2.6 The bypass valve 11.3 Bearing 11.4 11.2.4 Operation mechanism 11.1.2 Vertical turbines References .8 12.2 Valve disc 11.3.1 Main seal 11.11 11.1 13.2 System operation 12.8 11.1 13.VI CHAPTER 11 Valves Introduction 11.5 Control system 11.10 Page 13.1 Spherical valves 11.1 System construction 12.4 11.1.7 11.7 11.1 12.1.1.1 Valve housing 11.12 Page 12.1 12.2.2 13.3 11.1.1 11.2 Valve rotor trunnions and bearings 11.2 Butterfly valves 11.10 11.2.4 Seal 11.2 11.8 11.5 11.4 CHAPTER 12 Auxilliary Equipment Introduction 12.5 Ring valves 11.

6 Page 15.1 16.2 14.3 Activities for Kaplan and Bulb turbines References CHAPTER 16 Quality Assurance (QA) Quality assurance References .3 Material defects 14.3 14.1 15.2 Sand erosion 14.1 14.3 CHAPTER 15 Condition Control Introduction 15.2 15.2 Activities for Francis turbines 15.1 14.4 Fatigue References Page 14.1 Activities for Pelton turbine 15.1 15.3 15.VII CHAPTER 14 Causes to damages Introduction 14.4 Page 16.1 Cavitation 14.5 14.

Therefore it was preferred to edit this book separatly with the intention that it may partly serve as a supplementary textbook for students on hydro power machinery. evaluated to be a more suitable presentation of the material for a textbook than for the above mentioned series of books. For the skillful scanning in of the figures. theory and description of methods for tests of models and prototypes of turbines. December 2001 Arne Kjølle . condition control and quality assurance is given. Further descriptions are given of the design structure of all actual turbines. Trondheim. The preparation of this book has been effected through comparisons and reflections on the material in the references. theory for the dynamics in water conduits and governing of turbines. I have adopted from his manus quite a lot of the material about the design of the modern turbines and turbine governing. in a series of books that in total describe the THE DEVELOPMENT OF HYDRO POWER IN NORWAY. my colleague Professor Dr. I thank head clerk Rundi Aukan.VIII Preface This book was originally aimed to constitute a section called Mechanical Equipment. was however. For this important support. Hermod Brekke. are simply mentioned to inform about their function and position in the system structure. which are listet at the end of each chapter. governors and auxilliary equipment. For the the mechanical equipment it is given basic theory for the hydraulic design of turbines. In fact much of the literary work during the preparation of this book. However. Those parts of the plant which are not specifically of the mechanical equipment category. I thank Professor Brekke. valves. With allowance from him.techn. In addition a touch on forces transferred to the foundations. causes to damages on the machines. The subjects being mentioned comprise all main components of a hydro power plant from the upstream end with the basin for water intake to the downstream end of the water flow outlet. has earlier prepared a manuscript of a book which is containing much of the same subjects as in this case.

efficiency (1. the alternating heads and flow discharges in the plant. The conduits are normally made with flow cross sections according to optimal design criteria.Hydropower Machinery 1. This power conversion involves losses that arise partly in the machine itself and partly in the water conduits to and from the machine.2) . water head and rotational speed. In practise this is carried out by regulation of the flow discharge. Similar consequenzies are resulting from increasing lengths of the conduits. The fact is that the machine performs the optimal efficiency for only one single combination of flow discharge. According to the regulation means another quantity is defined as the admission κ and expressed as κ= operating discharge discharge at max. The utilization of the power in the waterfall is evaluated by the so-called power plant efficency ηa. The plant efficiency ηa is a variabel quantity that depends on the design of the water conduits to and from the hydropower machine and the operating conditions.1) where net input power means the gross hydraulic power of the power plant minus power losses in the conduits to and from the hydropower machine. the higher the losses become. which is the ratio between the mechanical power output from the machine shaft and the gross hydraulic power of the power plant. the smaller the cross sections are. In practise that means conduit cross section areas are as small as possible to get low investment costs. Both these effects means a correspondingly lower plant efficiency ηa. which is denoted as the efficiency of the machine and generally expressed by η= mechanical output power net input power (1. This means a characteristic. However. These circumstances means that the hydropower machines necessarily are equipped with facilities for regulation of the power input and output. The input power to the hydropower machine is however. not efficiently similar utilized at all operating conditions. The hydropower machine may be operated with different flow rates Q from time to time according to the variable grid load.1 CHAPTER 1 Hydropower Machinery Introduction Hydropower machine is the designation used for a machine that directly convert the hydraulic power in a water fall to mechanical power on the machine shaft.

the plant efficiency ηa is chosen fairly low. The river water was flowing into the buckets on the underside of the wheel.3) 1.1.4 Overshot wheel /1! .2 An example of the efficiency characteristic of a hydropower turbine as a function of the admission.1.2 Efficiency of two different tubine types A similar difference may also be found for the same turbine type dependent on the design of the turbine. Fig.1 Efficiency of a hydroturbine Fig. With this type of water wheels rather low powers were obtained because of low efficiency and the effective flow discharges were small. water head H [m]. As being discribed in the following chapters.5 QH [kW] (1.1. the efficiency charateristic may be rather different from one turbine type to the other as shown in the example Fig. With discharge Q [m3/s]. 1.3 Undershot wheel /1/ F ig. By preliminary and approximate evaluations of the output power of hydromachines.1 Brief review of hydropower machines The eldest hydropower machines The eldest and most primitive type of machines for utilizing water power are the water wheels. 1. The eldest type of these were the undershot wheels. 1.1 1.Hydropower Machinery 1. for example ηa = 0. Fig.765 at full load.3. which in this way was revolved by the velocity energy in the river flow. They were in use in China and Egypt several tousand years ago. water density of ρ = 1000 kg/m3 and the indicated value of ηa the mechanical power output from the machine becomes P = 7. which were arranged in the river channel with horizontal shaft. Fig. 1. 1.1.2. is shown on Fig.

These were the so-called overshot wheels.6 Radial turbine of Fournevron /4/ . These wheels were revolved by the Fig. Fig. Because the water flow has a radial direction through the turbine runner.developed about 1840. century the need for more energy was increasing so much that the water wheels no longer got hold of sufficient energy supply. and for the best designs of the wheels an efficiency up to 85 % was obtained at water heads higher than three meter. which is valid today too.2 Turbines The industrial development throughout the 18. whereas on the breast wheel the water was guided into the buckets somewhere about the height of the wheel shaft. which has got its name after him. Fig. A principle sketch axially through the guide vane cascade G and the runner R of Fourneyron’s turbine is shown on Fig. 1.3 Later on the water wheels were installed in artificial falls that were erected by building a canal to guide the water into the wheel. and the efficiency might be lower than 50 %.6.4.5. a Figur 1. New energy sources like wapour power was adopted. And this power transfer went on with relatively great losses especially for the plane blades. This runner utilized the impulse force from a water jet and was the forerunner of the turbines.1. 1. it may be designated as radial turbine.. Segner invented a reaction runner. Just after this the mathematician Leonard Euler developed the turbine theory. 1. the so-called Kvernkallen (the Old mill-man) was the most widespred hydro machine. The runner was equipped with radial tilted blades to which the water was flowing along a steep open canal. 1. On the overshot wheel the water was guided into the buckets on the top side of the wheel. However. and 19.1. In 1750 the physicist J. This had a vertical shaft to which the runner was fixed. A. and breast wheels. two other turbine designers Henschel and Jonval.Hydropower Machinery 1. independent of each other. At that time this machine was a kind of a revolution with the unusual great power output of 20 – 30 kW and a runner diameter of 500 mm. but further development toke place also on utilization of water power. In Norway on the other hand. Depending on the available water head two other wheel types in addition came up to be used. which also were arranged with horizontal shaft. Next step was made by engineer Fourneyron when he designed and put to operation the first real turbine in 1827.5 Breast wheel /1/ weight of the water filling in the buckets. Turbine is a designation that was introdused in 1824 in a dissertation of the French engineer Burdin. In this way the Kvernkallen utilized only the velocity energy of the flowing water. The water wheels were employed mostly in Middle Europe throughout the Middle Ages.

He developed and made a turbin in 1849. and was developed for utilizing the lowest water heads. one can summerize that the only machine types that have been developed to be dominant in Fig. In the region of low pressure turbines a great step forward was made when professor Kaplan designed his propeller turbine. was developed by the American engineer Pelton. In addition they were the first ones to apply draft tube and in that way to utilize the water head between runner outlet and tail water level. 1. In this way the impulse force from the deflection is transferred to the runner.4 turbine each with axial water flow through it. In the year 1870 professor Fink introdused an important improvement by making the guide vanes turning on a pivot in order to regulate the flow discharge.Hydropower Machinery 1. 1. By the invention of the Pelton turbine a machine type was developed for utilization of the highest water heads in the nature. A turbine design principally different from these. 1.8 Principle of Pelton turbine /2/ After the brief review above of the hydropower machines. Fig. In the time interval until 1850 several designers improved the machines. Fig. Not very long after making the propeller turbine. Kaplan further developed his turbine by making the runner blades revolving. and Fig.7. which was patented in 1913. were operating at relatively low heads compared with turbines nowadays.9 Kaplan turbine /2/ . This was an important improvement for an economic and efficient governing of the turbine output. The water flows radially through the guide vane cascade G towards the runner R and further out in the axial direction.8 shows that the water in this case flows as a jet from a nozzle through atmospheric air into the runner buckets. which has got its name after him. which are deflected almost 180o before they leave the buket. 1. Addionally the water was flowing into the turbine runner with a certain pressure above the atmospheric through a guide vane cascade comprising the whole periphery of the runner. 1. 1. An axial section through the guide vane cascade and the runner of this turbine is shown on Fig. but most serious was the work by the English engineer Francis.7 Axial section of Francis turbine /4/ The turbines mentioned above. This turbine looked fairly similar to that one Euler had foreseen. Figur. The buckets are designed to split the jet in two halves.9 shows an axial section through a Kaplan turbine. He made his first runner in 1890. This turbine had fixed runner blades.

1.11 shows in principle /3/ the water conduits of a traditional Norwegian power plant with a high head Francis turbine.10 Arrangement of a hydropower plant /2/ Fig. Fig. 1. turbine.1. branches. 1. A brief review of the main details in a hydropower plant is given in the following sections. Water intake The water intake is normally constructed in connection with an accumulation dam (1) Fig. surge shaft.2 Arrangement of hydropower plants The discharge operating a water turbine. Francis and Kaplan turbines. From the turbine the discharge is conducted through a so-called tail rase canal to a downstream river course. spherical valve. An intake gate (2) is arranged to . The shallow water intake is equipped with a coarse trash rack (3) which prevents trees. As a basic rule one can say that Pelton turbines are used for relatively high heads and small water discharges. draft tube. Downstream from the upstream reservoir the coarse trash rack. Fig. head race tunnel. penstock isolating valve with air valve. outlet surge shaft and tale race tunnel.5 modern times are Pelton. intake gate. 1. Kaplan turbines for the lowest heads and the largest water discharges and Francis turbines for the region between the other two turbine types.Hydropower Machinery 1. fine trash rack.10 shows schematically an example of a plant arrangement with indication of the localisation of the details to be mentioned. draft tube gate. debris and stones from entering the conduit system to the turbine. in the river course. pressure shaft. sand trap. is conveyed from a river or a water course through an intake and a conduit to the turbine.10. The reason is that these three types supplement each other in an excellent way.

It also traps stones sliding into the reservoir close to the intake. An intake gate is installed with the same function as described for the shallow water intake. There is a sump below the intake. and consequently the head loss is significantly smaller for the same cross section. In high head power plants it is normally a so-called head race tunnel between the water intake and the pressure shaft. At the end of the head race tunnel there is a sand trap. A deep water intake takes the water directly from the reservoir. Its main function is to collect blasting stones from the piercing of the the head race tunnel into the reservoir. It has no trash rack.6 Fig. The latter method leaves a much smoother wall surface than the first one. Open canals are usually digged in the ground. penstock or pressure shaft or a combination of these. Conduit system From the water intake to the turbine it is a conduit system constructed as open canal. In addition a small gate (4) may be arranged for drainage of the leakage through the main gate. At the downstream end of the head race tunnel there is also a surge chamber system.Hydropower Machinery 1. Beside the sump in the tunnel floor the cross section of the tunnel is gradually increased to reduce the water velocity and allow for a better sedimentation of suspended particles. 1. The function of the surge chamber is briefly to reduce water hammer pressure variations and keep the mass . tunnel.11 Sketch showing in principle the water conduits of a traditional Norwegian high head power plant /3/ shut off the water delivery when the conduit system has to be emptied. blasted in rock or built up as a chute of wood or concrete. It may either be drilled and blasted or bored with a tunnel boring machine (TBM). Deep water intakes allows for very strong regulation of the reservoirs.

with reference to Fig. Where the rock is of sufficiently high quality the shafts are normally unlined. This valve closes automatically if a pipe rupture should occur. 1780 – 1930. At the end of long head race tunnels it is also normally istalled a gate. The pressure shaft may either be lined or unlined. gate valve or a spherical valve.10. Between these anchoring blocks the penstocks are equipped with expansion stuffing boxes (7) in Fig. 1. 1. for inspection and maintenance without emptying the head race tunnel.7 oscillations. The excavation of the rock masses may be done either by drilling and blasting or by boring with TBM-machines.: A History of Industrial Power in the United States. is installed also at the outlet from the draft tube. ISBN 0-8139-0782-9 (v.10. caused by load changes. caused by the water pressure and impulses from the flow. The draft tube (11) conducts the water flow from the turbine outlet into the tale race canal. butterfly valve. is installed. The scroll case (10) conducts the water flow to the guide vane cascade.1). and the weight of the rotating parts. 1979.Hydropower Machinery 1. Inside the rock the penstock is embedded in a concrete plug. It is the last protection of the valve and the turbine against floating debris or smaller stones if the sand trap is full or omitted. normally a gate. usually adjustable. By submerged turbines a closing device. 1. 1.10. Depending on water head and capasity it may be a gate. This makes it possible to empty the pressure shaft and penstock upstream of the turbine. Hunter. gives the water flow the velocity and the direction required for the inlet to the runner where the hydraulic power is transferred to mechanical power on the turbine shaft (9) to which the runner is fixed. . Penstocks above ground are mounted on foundation concrete blocks where the penstock may slide according to thermal expansion. Penstocks are normally welded pipe constructions of steel plates. A steel penstock connects the shaft with the valve in the machine hall.10. Shafts in lower quality rock is being lined either by concrete or by steel plate lining embedded in concrete. References 1. Turbine The main parts of the turbine. Before the water enters the pressure shaft it passes a fine trash rack. Louis C. The turbine shaft is guided in a radial bearing and an axial bearing that is loaded with the axial force from the runner. In certain positions the penstocks are fixed in reinforced concrete anchoring blocks (8) on Fig. Lining of the shafts reduces the losses but increases the costs. are: the guide vane cascade. At the upstream end of a penstock an automatic isolating valve is normally installed. within acceptable limits and decrease the oscillations to stable operation as soon as possible. A flange connects the penstock with the valve. The University Press of Virginia. Closing valve Upstream of the turbine a closing device (12) on Fig.

G. Trondheim .: Abstract of Lectures on Water Power Machines (in Norwegian) at NTH 1937. Oslo. 4. Oslo 1986.38.8 2. A. Kværner Brug: COURSE III Lecture compendium. 1980. Universitetsforlaget. ISBN 8200-27780-1.Hydropower Machinery 1.: Water Power Machines (in Norwegian). Kjølle. 3. Sundby.

5) Fundamentals and definitions (2.Energy Conversion 2.1 CHAPTER 2 Energy Conversion Introduction A water flow from an upper level to a lower level represents a hydraulic power potential. In a hydro power plant as outlined on Fig. The expression of the specific energy is Nm/kg or J/kg and is designated as [m2/s2]. (2. In this chapter a brief description is given of the power conversion in the turbines that are common in hydro power stations. 2. This specific energy is defined as net specific energy and is expressed by En = gHn and the net head of the turbine Hn = (2.ztw The corresponding gross specific hydraulic energy Egr = gH gr where g is the acceleration of gravity.1 Specific energy The specific energy of a hydro power plant is the quantity of potential and kinetic energy which 1 kilogram of the water delivers when passing through the plant from an upper to a lower reservoir. 2.3) When a water discharge Q [m3/s] passes through the plant.1.1) (2.1 the specific hydraulic energy between the Sections (1) and (3) is available for the turbine.2) . the delivered power is Pgr = ρQgHgr where Pgr is the gross power of the plant ρ is the density of the water Q is the discharge To look further on the hydropower system in Fig. 2. the difference between the level of the upper reservoir zres and the level of the tail water ztw is defined as the gross head Hgr = zres . However. some fractions of the power potential are lost partly in the plant’s conduits and partly in the turbines. This power flow can be utilised in a water power plant by conversion to mechanical power on the shafts of turbines.4) En g (2.

1 there are two ways of expressing the evaluation of the net head.2 2. 2. In addition to the specifications of relevant levels this standard take into account the influences of: Compressibility and temperature effects of the water.4) should be mentioned. The name of it is International Standard IEC 41..2.1 Hydro power plant.2 As shown on Fig. the weight of the air column difference between the reservoir and the tail water. For efficiency tests of hydro turbines a relatively high exactness of the determination of the specific energy is required. in Equation (2. The one way Hn = hp + c2/2g And the other way EL = Hgr . The discharge and the net head for turbines differ in wide ranges from one power plant to another. Therefore Fig. i. Therefore the hydraulic considerations of calculation and design in the following sections are based on constant values of the acceleration of gravity and the density of water. 2.Energy Conversion 2.4) respectively. This means that these influences are essentially smaller than the tolerance accuracy of the hydraulic dimensioning of the turbomachines.2) and (2. c2/2g is the velocity head in section (1) and EL/g is specific hydraulic energy loss between reservoir and section (1) converted to head loss HL. Hn = Hgr Note. .HL g where hp is the piezometric head above tailwater level measured in section (1). 2.1.e. totally of the order 1% in extreme cases. Definition of gross head Hgr an international standard exists for and net head Hn the measurements and evaluations of such tests. the difference of specific kinetic energy between defined sections of the system and at last that the acceleration of gravity depends on the altitude and latitude. the mentioned influences are relatively small. The specific energy expressed by putting Hgr corresponding to Fig.2) and Hn in Equation (2.1 Transforming hydraulic energy into mechanical energy General considerations Ordinary turbines. This indicates that not only different types of turbines but also a very large register of sizes of turbines are needed. However. 2. no influence of temperature and the weight of the air column. Some comments to the specific energy definitions according to Equations (2. is consequently approximations according to this standard.

Energy Conversion

2.3

The ordinary turbine types in water power plants are distinguished in two main groups: - impulse turbines - reaction turbines This distinction is based on the difference between the two cases of energy conversion in these turbines. Briefly these two ways of energy conversion may be pronounced as follows.
• Basically the flow energy to the impulse turbines is completely converted to kinetic energy before transformation in the runner. This means that the flow passes the runner buckets with no pressure difference between inlet and outlet. Therefore only the impulse forces being transferred by the direction changes of the flow velocity vectors when passing the buckets create the energy converted to mechanical energy on the turbine shaft. The flow enters the runner at nearly atmospheric pressure in the form of one or more jets regularly spaced around the rim of the runners. This means that each jet hits momentarily only a fraction or part of the circumference of the runner. For that reason the impulse turbines are also denoted partial turbines. • In the reaction turbines two effects cause the energy transfer from the flow to mechanical energy on the turbine shaft. Firstly it follows from a drop in pressure from inlet to outlet of the runner. This is denoted the reaction part of the energy conversion. Secondly changes in the directions of the velocity vectors of the flow through the canals between the runner blades transfer impulse forces. This is denoted the impulse part of the energy conversion. The pressure drop from inlet to outlet of the runners is obtained because the runners are completely filled with water. Therefore this group of turbines also have been denoted as full turbines.

The most commonly used turbines today are: - impulse type: Pelton turbines - reaction type: Francis turbines Kaplan turbines Bulb turbines In the following sections the hydraulic energy transfer in Pelton turbines as well as the reaction turbines is described in more detail /1/,/3/,/4/.
2.2.2 Impulse turbine - Pelton

A section through a Pelton runner is shown in Fig. 2.2. The water jet from the nozzle hit the buckets that are spaced equidistant around the runner disc. In the left lower corner of the figure a look into a bucket in the same direction as the incoming jet is shown. To the right of the figure a section through two neighbouring buckets are shown for the indicated section line A - A. In this section is shown how the jet flow is split symmetrically at the bucket edge and passing over the bucket. The jet deflection is nearly up to 180o, but limited to a little smaller angle because the leaving jets have to run clear of the subsequent bucket behind. For a net head Hn the theoretical velocity of the water jet out of the nozzle is found according to Bernoulli´s equation
c 1 = 2gH n

(2.6)

However, an energy loss occurs in the nozzle. This influence is corrected for by a friction coefficient ϕ, and the velocity then becomes

Energy Conversion

2.4

c 1 = ϕ 2gH n

(2.7)

A value of the friction coefficient based on experience may be ϕ = 0.98.

Fig. 2.2 The water jet flow into a Pelton runner. Velocity diagrams at inlet and outlet of the buckets /3/

The runner is assumed to rotate with a constant angular speed ω. One water particle is considered, for example the particle in the centre of the jet just at the splitting edge of the bucket and marked as position (1) on the Fig. 2.2. This bucket is drawn for a position corresponding just to the moment that the full jet is entering the bucket. The absolute

Energy Conversion

2.5

velocity c1 is known from Equation (2.7). The peripheral velocity of the runner u1 = r1ω corresponds to radius r1 in position (1). The direction of this velocity vector is the same as the tangent in position (1) of the circle with radius r1. When the absolute velocity c1 of the water particle and the peripheral velocity u1 in position (1) are known, the velocity v1 of the water particle relative to the bucket in position (1) can be found. The absolute velocity c1 is the geometric sum of the peripheral velocity u1 and the relative velocity v1. Therefore one has to draw the three velocity vectors from point (1) so that c1 is the diagonal in the parallelogram with u1 and v1 as sides. This parallelogram is called the velocity diagram of the water particle at the inlet of the bucket. The water particle moves over the bucket and changes its direction gradually until it leaves the bucket at position (2) as shown in section A - A on Fig. 2.2. During this movement the particle transfers its impulse force corresponding to the change from the direction of the relative velocity vector v1 to the relative velocity vector v2. The magnitude of v2 depends on energy losses during 2 the passage of the bucket. These losses can be expressed as ζ 2 v22 where ζ2 is defined as loss coefficient. From experience an estimated value of ζ2 = 0.06. The relation between v1 and v2 is found according to Bernoulli’s equation:
2 v1 v2 v2 2 = h2 + + ς2 2 h1 + 2g 2g 2g

(2.8)

In this case h1 = h2, and therefore
2 v 2 v1 2 (1 + ς 2 ) = 2g 2g

(2.9)

and

v2 =

v1 1+ ς2

(2.10)

The magnitude of velocity v2 is nearly as great as v1 and has a direction as shown in position (2), section A - A on Fig. 2.2. The peripheral velocity u2 is assumed the same as u1 because in an approximate approach it is supposed that the water particle enters and leaves the runner bucket at the same radius of the runner. Therefore the velocity diagram may be drawn from position (2) with u2 and v2 as the parallelogram sides and the absolute velocity c2 as the diagonal. This velocity diagram shows that the magnitude of c2 is much smaller than of c1, which is just the main intention to obtain, because c22/2 is a direct measure for the loss at outlet of the turbine. The passage of the water particle from position (1) to position (2) lasts a certain time interval, and during this time the runner rotates a corresponding angle. If the corresponding positions of the bucket and the absolute flow path under this passage over the bucket are drawn, one get an absolute flow path which ends up with the velocity vector c2 as shown in section A - A on Fig. 2.2. The absolute velocity vector is therefore tangent to this path all the way of the passage. The description of the movement over the bucket of one water particle is valid also for all the other particles of the full jet. These particles will however trace different paths, but even so, in practise it is assumed that the impulse force and the corresponding torque transfer to the runner is the same from all water particles in the jet. When the runner is rotating and the bucket starts splitting the jet, it gradually takes up more and more of the full jet area until it cut the jet completely. But immediately after this cut the

is covered.11) As previously mentioned the peripheral velocity u1 = u2 for the Pelton turbine.e. In the case u1 = 0.2 it is found that cu2 varies when ω is varied.2.6 succeeding bucket starts splitting the jet and repeats the same behaviour as the preceding bucket. At the same time it is observed that the power PR increases when u1 increases from zero. . is interpreted as follows. A closer examination shows that the transferred power PR to the runner has its maximum value when cu2 is close to zero and accordingly u1 approximately like c1/2. When the runner is rotating. For constant angular speed the regulations really cause minor or no changes of the velocity diagrams. the velocity component cu2 decreases as the rotational speed increases and it approximates to zero when u1 increases towards c1/2. Regulation of the power means to regulate the discharge Q by adjustment of the needle position to larger or smaller openings of the nozzles. 2. Therefore the spacing between the buckets is made as big as possible.12) How this power varies if the rotational speed is changed. The total deflection of the jet may be made greater for a relatively large spacing between the buckets compared with a smaller one. 2. i. Kaplan and Bulb turbines are the reaction turbines normally applied.2. the power PR = 0 and cu2 ≈ . but not larger than to secure that all water particles will hit the bucket. In this case the power again approaches towards zero. the velocity diagrams for the inlet and outlet respectively for one of the water particles is valid for all the water particles of the jet. cu2 also increases and approaches to cu1 so that (cu1 . The discharge Q is constant while the angular velocity ω is varied. the hydraulic design of Francis turbines differ so much from that of Kaplan and Bulb turbines that an interpretation of the energy transfer will be given for each of these two groups. From Fig.cu1.Energy Conversion 2. If u1 increases towards cu1. With the same torque transfer to the runner from all water particles in the jet.3 Reaction turbines Francis. The transfer of hydraulic energy into mechanical energy is principally similar in these turbines. The rotating speed u1 = r1ω. Moreover it is suggested to insert the peripheral velocity corresponding to the runner diameter to which the centre line of the jet is tangent. the runner is at standstill.. However. The power equation then becomes: PR = ρQu 1 (c u1 − c u 2 ) (2. This case corresponds to the run away speed. 2. As basis is ascertained that the absolute velocity c1 is constant and therefore cu1 is constant. In the time interval between the first water particle enters and the last one leaves a bucket at a distance as indicated on Fig.cu2) advances towards zero. The general expression for the transferred power PR is therefore PR = ρQ( u 1c u1 − u 2 c u 2 ) where Q u1 u2 cu1 cu2 is discharge is the peripheral velocity of the runner where the jet hit the bucket is the peripheral velocity of the runner at jet outlet of the runner is the component of the absolute velocity c1 in the direction of u1 is the component of the absolute velocity c2 in the direction of u2 (2.

a section across the guide . The runner is fastened to the turbine shaft (S). To observe the movement of this particle through the turbine.b). 2.Energy Conversion 2. Velocity diagrams at inlet and outlet of the runner /3/ The energy transfer will be considered on the basis of the movement of one water particle along the coaxial stream surface of revolution having a contour (a .3 shows an axial section through a Francis turbine with the guide vane cascade (G) and the runner (R).7 Francis turbines Fig. 2.3 Axial section through a Francis turbine. in the axial section through the turbine. Fig.

The guide vane direction angle αo is assumed constant and the runner is rotating with a certain angular speed ω and the water is filling all the runner canals completely. That means rcu is constant.e. i. The guide vanes are designed so that the movement of the particle is changed from the radial direction at inlet to leave the outlet edge of the canal with a rather large velocity component in the peripheral direction. Therefore the surface cannot be unfolded unless by a transformation from the real surface to a single curved surface.3.8 vanes and runner blades perpendicular to the paper plane in Fig. 2. These three velocity vectors are drawn in Fig.3 is needed.Energy Conversion 2. The direction of co is supposed to coincide with the direction of the vanes at the outlet of the guide vane cascade. is assumed to represent a conform transformation onto a conical surface tangential to the contour (1 .b). the stream surface (a . The relative velocity v1 is then found as one side in the parallelogram where the peripheral velocity vector u1 is the other side and the absolute velocity vector c1 is the diagonal. However. It is assumed that the water particle passes without friction through the ring chamber between the guide vane outlet and the inlet of the runner. The outlet edge of the guide vanes is indicated with the index (o)..2).b) in Fig. It is assumed that the turbine is installed at the bottom of an open reservoir filled with water up to a certain level above the guide vane cascade. Now the absolute velocity c1 and the peripheral velocity u1 are determined. 2.3. and the absolute velocity of the water particle at this edge is accordingly denoted co. This should be made along the contour (a . At the outlet edge of the canal on this streamline the relative velocity is denoted v2. 2.3 and form the velocity diagram of the water particle at the inlet of the runner canal.2.3 has a double curvature. The figure shows that the relative velocity v2 has got a rather large peripheral component in the opposite direction of the rotation. The magnitude of v2 can be found by means of the continuity equation v2a2 = v1a1 (2. along (a . During the movement through the runner canal the particle changes its direction again as shown on the figure.o) through the guide vane cascade and along (1 – 2) through the runner cascade.14) . In practise this can be done by using conform transformation method because the angles of geometry then are kept unchanged from the real surface to the transformed surface.2. The consideration is assumed to start with a water particle at the inlet edge of the guide vane cascade. The section through the runner cascade shown to the right on Fig. The relative streamline through the runner canal is also drawn in the Fig. Through the guide vane canal the water particle is assumed to follow the streamline in the middle of the canal width as shown on the figure. Therefore it will keep an unchanged vortex momentum. By this deflection an impulse force is transferred by giving the runner a torque in the rotational direction.13) r1 where ro r1 is the radius to the guide vane outlet marked (o) is the radius to the inlet of the runner marked (1) The peripheral velocity of the runner corresponding to radius r1 is found by u1 = r1ω. and the relation between the rotational components cuo and cu1 of the absolute velocities co and c1 respectively become r c u1 = c uo o (2.

u1 and cu1 nearly have the same magnitude. An increase of Q means to adjust the guide vanes to a larger angle αo and a decrease of Q means an adjustment in the opposite direction. ω < ωnormal and ω > ωnormal.3. discharge Q and net head Hn for which the optimal efficiency is wanted. The power transfer PR to the runner from the water flow is then PR = ρQ(u1c u1 . By drawing corresponding positions of the runner canal in the rotational direction and the position of the particle in the canal for some intermediate time intervals.u 2 c u 2 ) (2.9 where a1 and a2 are the areas of the runner blade canal taken perpendicular to the streamline at inlet and outlet of the canal respectively. while u1 is approximately half of cu1 for the Pelton turbine. is obtained for the operating condition when the relative velocity v1 coincide with blade angle β1 at the runner inlet and simultaneously the rotational component cu2 ≈ 0. Examples are drawn in Fig. be remarked that when the power is near maximum. A discussion of Equation (2. The peripheral velocity u2 = r2ω where r2 is the radius to the marked point (2) at the runner outlet. Moreover the difference (u1cu1 . 2. The direction of v2 is the same as the outlet direction of the runner blades. Therefore the hydraulic lay out of all reaction turbine runners are based on the data of rotational speed n. The velocity diagram for the water particle at the outlet edge of the runner canal can be determined by drawing the parallelogram with the sides u2 and v2 from point (2) and thereafter the diagonal which is the resultant c2 drawn from the same point.Energy Conversion 2. A such path is drawn on Fig. The relative velocity v2 varies accordingly in magnitude with the regulation of Q. Both the variation of the angular velocity ω and the regulation of the discharge Q involve changes in the direction and magnitude of the relative velocity v1. but a flow friction loss occurs also in the draft tube which again means a slight reduction of the the recovered energy. the absolute path of the water particle is found. In a corresponding way the same impulse and torque is supposed to be transferred to the runner from all water particles.15) may be carried out in the same way as done for the Pelton turbine. during the passage of the draft tube a fraction of this energy is recovered by retardation of the flow velocity. is entirely dependent of these changes. For regulating the discharge Q of the turbine the width of the guide vane canals must be varied. The absolute as well as the relative movement of all particles in the water flow through the turbine will behave in the same way as described for the considered water particle. . This regulation causes corresponding changes in the direction of the absolute velocity c1. Accordingly the velocity diagrams will change. needs a certain time interval for this movement. The passage of the water particle from point (1) to point (2) in the runner canal. and simultaneously the runner rotates a certain angle.15) As mentioned for the impulse turbine. The most efficient power transfer however.3 of the velocity diagrams at inlet and outlet of the runner respectively for three angular velocities. and the absolute velocity vector is everywhere tangent to the absolute flow path. ω = ωnormal. c22/2 represents the energy at outlet. 2. A difference should however.u2c2) and thereby also the power transfer. However.

Energy Conversion

2.10

Kaplan and Bulb turbines

The hydraulic design of Kaplan and Bulb turbine runners is quite similar while the flow direction through the guide vane cascades is radial in Kaplan turbines and approximately axial in Bulb turbines. This means no significant difference for an interpretation of the flow through these turbines. Therefore an illustration of the flow through a Kaplan is valid also for a Bulb turbine. Fig. 2.4 shows an axial section through a Kaplan turbine with the guide vane cascade (G), runner (R) and the shaft (S). In the same way as for Francis turbines the consideration of the flow through the Kaplan turbine is based on the movement of one water particle along the flow surface with the contour (a - b) as shown on Fig. 2.4. This particle is given a flow direction in the guide vane canal before it enters the runner canal. The particle movement through the guide vane canal and runner canal is shown to the right in the figure. The canal section across guide vane cascade is radial (perpendicular to the plane) along contour (a - o) and across the runner blades the section is cylindrical along the contour (1 - 2). The considerations are further based on a constant guide vane direction angle αo and constant angular velocity ω. The particle flow through the turbine is quite analogous to that described for the Francis turbine. Therefore the description is focused mainly on the velocity diagrams. The fluid flow in the axisymmetrical hollow space between outlet of the guide vane canal marked (o), and the inlet of the runner marked (1), is denoted as free vortex. The flow is again assumed free of losses along the flow path. The relation between the rotational component cuo of the absolute velocity co and the rotational component cu1 of the absolute velocity c1 then becomes r u c u1 = c uo o or c u1 = c uo o (2.16) r1 u1 The peripheral velocities are u1 = r1ω and u2 = r2ω. By the given angle αo at the outlet of the guide vane canal and the angle β2 at the outlet of the runner canal all data are now prepared for drawing of the velocity diagrams at inlet and outlet of the runner. The drawing of these diagrams is as described for Francis turbines, and in Fig. 2.4 examples are shown for three different angular speeds, ω = ωnormal, ω <ωnormal and ω >ωnormal. The designation ω = ωnormal means again the rotational speed for which the turbine obtain the lowest energy loss at outlet represented mainly by c22/2. This is also the operating condition for which the turbine obtain the highest hydraulic efficiency for the given angle αo of the guide vane canal. The movement that is considered for a single water particle through the turbine, is an illustration also for all the other particles in the total water flow. As mentioned for Francis turbines that is an assumption for Kaplan and Bulb turbines as well that all particles transfer the same impulse and torque to the runner. The power transfer from the flow is therefore generally expressed by Equation (2.15) PR = ρQ(u1c u1 - u 2 c u 2 ) A look at Fig. 2.4 indicate also that the peripheral velocity u2 = u1. The power equation then becomes

Energy Conversion

2.11

PR = ρQu1(cu1 - cu2)

(2.17)

Fig. 2.4 Axial section through a Kaplan turbine. Velocity diagrams at inlet and outlet /3/

An interpretation of power regulation by changing the discharge Q with adjustment of the openings of the guide vane cascade follows the same reasoning as for Francis turbines. However,

Energy Conversion

2.12

in Kaplan and Bulb turbines the direction of the runner blades can also be varied. This property will be further interpreted in Chapter 3.
2.2.4 The main equation of turbines

Losses along a flow path

The flow through turbines is exposed to energy losses. In reaction turbines the flow friction and change of flow directions in the guide vane cascade, the runner and the draft tube mainly cause these losses. According to the turbulent flow conditions these energy losses are defined /4/ by c2 ς1 1 is the energy losses in the guide vane cascade 2 v2 ς2 2 is the energy losses in the runner 2 c2 (1+ ς 3 ) 3 is the energy losses in the draft tube 2 The coefficients ζ1, ζ2 and ζ3 are assumed as constants /4/, but their values depend on the operating conditions of the turbine. In general this dependence behaves so that ζ1 and ζ2 have a smaller variation than ζ3 when operating conditions changes. Values of general validity of these coefficients cannot be given. However, at favourable operating conditions for a reaction turbine one can estimate values of ζ1 and ζ2 in the region 0.06 - 0.15 and of ζ3 = 0.1 - 0. 3. In addition to the losses by friction and changed directions, so-called impact losses can occur at the inlet of the runner. These losses which are designated by EI2, are introduced when the relative velocity vector of the flow enters the runner with another direction than the inlet direction of the blade. The total sum of the losses along the flow path is hL =

1 2 ς 1c 1 + ς 2 v 2 + (1 + ς 3 )c 2 + E I2 2 3 2

[

]

(2.18)

The available net head for the turbine is designated Hn. The specific energy head transferred to the runner is then hR = Hn - hL
Note

(2.19)

When the operating conditions by regulations deviate quite a lot from the design operating conditions, the same assumptions of the magnitude of the loss coefficients along the flow paths do not hold completely.
The main equation of turbines

The total available power of a plant is Pn = ρQgH n (2.20) The net head Hn is defined at the inlet of the turbine referred to the level of the tail water of reaction turbines or the outlet of the nozzle of a jet turbine.

through the turbine over the whole width of the flow space. For Pelton turbines however. One of the first steps in the design is to form the contours of the axial section of the turbine. i. these terms do not occur in the energy conversion analysis for these turbines.3.23 . The following rearrangement of Equation (2.21) PR 1 = (u1c u1 − u 2c u 2 ) Pn gH n (2.25) where cz is the meridional component of the absolute velocity n is the length parameter of the width perpendicular to the flow surface R is the radius of the curvature of the flow path contour When the velocity profile is determined according to equation (2. has to be done by use of the continuity .24) This last version expresses the total sum of the energy transfer in the runner and the head losses in the guide vane cascade.3 A brief outline of the hydraulic design of turbines The axial flow out of reaction turbines By the considerations of the flow along the stream surface of revolution having a contour given in Fig.Energy Conversion 2. It may start with a trial of the form and thereafter a computational verification of the distribution of the meridional flow velocity through the axial section.b.22) which is defined as hydraulic efficiency.2.. it should be remarked that the two last terms in equation (2. 2. the main obtained result was the main turbine equation which is expressed in several equations (2.e.22) is called the main turbine equation ηh H n = 1 ( u1c u1 − u 2c u 2 ) g (2. The determination of the meridional velocity profile is based on the law of irrotational flow dc z c =− z dn R (2.24) are omitted. the runner and the draft tube as equal to the net head Hn. Principally this will be about the hydraulic designing.. the major objective of the design is to obtain the same hydraulic efficiency for any flow surface of similar properties as the surface with the contour a . To deal with this design process in detail is not the aim in this text.23) Another version of the main turbine equation is obtained by substituting for u1cu1 and u2cu2 from the velocity triangles respectively H n = (1 + ς1 ) 2 c2 E 2 v2 v2 u 2 u 2 c1 c 2 − 2 + (1 + ς 2 ) 2 − 1 + 1 − 2 + (1 + ς3 ) 3 + I 2g 2g 2g 2g 2g 2g 2g 2g (2.24). For the conditions being the design basis of a turbine.13 The power transfer from the fluid to the turbine runner is PR = ρQ( u 1c u1 − u 2 c u 2 ) The ratio between these powers ηh = (2. Therefore only a brief description of it will be given.25) a control of how far this is correct. 2.

gives examples of blade forms and canals. But there are also some general requirements that have to be satisfied.14 dQ = 2πrc z dn (2.5. The examination of a correct flow distribution may be done in the following way. 2. Furthermore this streamline was assumed to represent the average velocity in the corresponding cross-sections along the canals. In some of these canals a streamline is drawn. where the number of subsections is four. This streamline served as basis for the considerations being carried out on the kinematics of the hydraulic energy transfer in reaction turbines. Further the designers have to give the blades a shape based on control procedures so that the energy conversion in the runner for the whole flow path is satisfied.25) are tested and corrected by use of equation (2. 2. This process is again a combination of theoretical computations. At first a glance back on Figs. Each of these subsections shall represent a fraction of the total discharge Q.5 Axial section of a Francis runner divided in four subsections by five numbered paths /3/ be divided in a certain number of coaxial subsections through the turbine as shown on Fig. For example the smallest openings between blades must be large enough to let expected firm contamination in the flow run freely through. As one of the first steps an estimation of the number of blades has to be done. Runner canals and blade forms The shaping of the blades and the runner canals is a topic task for skilled designers. Now a look in more detail on the flow conditions through the runner canals will show velocity . To obtain this the velocity profiles of cz from equation (2. 2. The axial flow section is thought to Fig.26) until the discharge is the same in all the subsections. To have an idea of some details in this type of design work.Energy Conversion 2. Further it is important to check that the shape of the axial section performs an even or smooth meridional velocity cz so that it does not increase or decrease disorderly in magnitude along the flow path.26) equation where r is the radius to the actual position on the flow surface. experiences. The turbine manufacturers have normally specific criteria of their own for this choice.4.3 or 2. it may be beneficial to have a look at a section through a few pairs of blades and the canals they constitute. that means one quart of Q. certain criteria and rules.

2. Long canals are exposed to larger viscous friction losses than the short ones. To determine the velocity profile in the respective cross-sections of the canals. This may often hit upon opposing requirements that lead to judgements and compromises between blades of short length and sharp curvature on one side and long blades with a smooth curvature on the other. Pelton buckets The design of buckets of Pelton runners /2/ involves preliminary drafts of the hydraulic form of the buckets followed by computational and experimental examination and adjustment of the draft /2/ .27) Fig.27) have again to be examined by means of the equation of continuity. the following differential equation may be used dv v = − − 2ω cos δ R dn where v is the relative velocity in the runner canal R is the curvature radius of the relative streamline ω is the angular speed of the turbine δ is the angle between the turbine axis and the perpendicular to the cone surface in which the section through the runner blade canal are depicted n is the length parameter of the width of the canal perpendicular to the streamlines. while short canals are exposed to larger impulse and impact losses.6. The following equations are used to find the accelerations and traces: . The estimations of the velocity profiles according to equation (2. (2. Fig. It is considered as ideal to give the blades a smooth form between the inlet and the outlet of the canals. The traces of fluid particles can then be found as shown on the figure. An example of the skew velocity profile In general one can say that the blades should never be formed with particular sharp curvature.6 Section through runner blades.15 distributions over the cross-sections as indicated on Fig. To have an idea of how the hydraulic modelling of the buckets may be done. 2. The best solution is to be found somewhere in between these extreme limits. In such cases skilled designers are of course the right experts to do the job.Energy Conversion 2. 2. This analysis is based on the fact that the accelerations of the fluid particles must be perpendicular to the surface of the water flow in the bucket at any moment.7 shows a calculated flow picture over a Pelton bucket at a certain moment.

. ejectors and cooling of bearings and the governor oil.22).28) where cosφ = x/R and R = runner radius d2y + ω 2 R sin φ + 2ωu x 2 dt d2z az = 2 dt ay = (2.4 ηh = PR Pn Efficiency The equation of hydraulic efficiency. tapping water for sealing boxes.30) Fig. viscous friction from the fluid between the outside of the runner and the covers of the reaction turbines and ventilation or air friction losses of the runner in impulse turbines.Energy Conversion 2. Through the space between the covers and the outside of the runner a leakage flow also passes according to the clearances of the labyrinth seals. (2. expresses The power transfer to the runner is further exposed to additional losses before the resulting power P is transferred to the generator shaft. Some energy is also required for operation of the turbine governor.29) (2. 2.7 Flow traces over a Pelton bucket at a certain moment (calculated) /2/ 2. These losses are composed of mechanical friction in the bearings and stuffing boxes. from the inlet rim to the suction side of the runner.16 ax = d2x dt 2 + ω 2 R cos φ + 2ωu y (2. Eq.

is reaching values of say η = 0.95 to 0. Corresponding values estimated for the hydraulic efficiency η h = 0. New York.92 References 1. 3. Wislicenus. Production with a special description of the Pelton turbines. abstracts from lectures at NTNU 1938 (in Norwegian). Trondheim. Oslo.: Hydraulische Maschinen und Anlagen. Alming.: Hydraulics.17 On account of all these losses the turbine efficiency is always lower than the hydraulic efficiency. Vannkraftlaboratoriet NTNU. Presented in Bogota. For the best Pelton turbines η max reaches values about 0. the turbine efficiency is η= P P = Pn ρQgH n (2. Norway.November 1978. Kjølle. A. Bibliography 1. G. 4.97. Universitetsforlaget. basic course lectures at NTNU 1953 (in Norwegian). Raabe. Columbia. Trondheim. Sundby. VDI-Verlag GmbH 1989. Brekke.Energy Conversion 2. 2. Volume 1 and 2. Therefore. Norway 1980. F. H. 7. Vannkraftlaboratoriet NTNU. J.: Water Power Machines (in Norwegian). USA.95 of the larger and best reaction turbines. K.93 to 0. Zweite Auflage der Teile 1 bis 4 in einem Band. 2. . Norway. 1965. Dover Publication. at the discharge Q and the power P transferred from the turbine shaft to generator shaft.31) Usually the maximum efficiency point which is represented by the best operating conditions.: Water Power Machines. G.: Fluid mechanics of Turbomachinery.: A brief presentation of the KVAERNER Water Turbine.

as they are limited to cases in which not only the fluid passages but also the flow inside these passages can be considered geometrically similar.1 Reduced parameters Fundamental similarity considerations Similarity relations Principally every turbine is designed according to the available discharge Q. In the following it is therefore. it is convenient to define c c= as reduced absolute velocity − 2gH n u= − u 2gH n as reduced peripheral velocity .1 CHAPTER 3 Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics Introduction This chapter takes into account similarity properties of hydrodynamic machines. 3.Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.1) are expressions of velocity heads. differ over wide ranges from one site to the other. or it may be the same machine with somewhat modified operating conditions such as a change of speed. Such comparisons are simple and reliable.24) is rearranged by dividing it through by the net head Hn 1 = (1 + ς 1 ) 2 c1 c2 v2 v2 u2 u2 c2 E2 2 I − 2 + (1 + ς 2 ) 2 − 1 + 1 − + (1 + ς 3 ) 3 + 2gH n 2gH n 2gH n 2gH n 2gH n 2gH n 2gH n 2gH n (3. The main turbine Equation (2.1 3. These parameters however. Since all components on the right hand side of Equation (3.1. introduced some ratio parameters which are designated as reduced quantities/7/ transferred from corresponding dimensional quantities. For this variability it is very useful to have similarity relations at hand for comparison means.1) In this way all components of the equation have become dimensionless and all energy quantities are expressed as fractions of the total net energy. That means to describe the performance of a given machine by comparison with the experimentally known performance of another machine. This other machine may be a model with geometrically similar fluid passages. net head Hn and a chosen optimal rotational speed n.

for the reduced angular velocity the product ω D is constant − (3.for the reduced discharge the ratio − D2 is constant By combining these two equations for elimination of D. For similar operating conditions the following relations are then valid: . If reduced velocities however. is obtained . these diagrams keep a similar shape.2 v= − v 2gH n as reduced relative velocity Velocity diagrams based on dimensional values of the velocities are valid for only one single value of the net head Hn.2) ω Hn is constant (3. Moreover. The velocity diagrams based on reduced velocities are therefore beneficial because these diagrams are valid for any value of Hn.4) is constant Geometrically similar.Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3. Additional useful reduced quantities are: h= − hp Hn is reduced piezometric head Q is reduced discharge is reduced angular velocity Q= − 2gH n ω 2gH n ω= − Insertion of the reduced parameters in the version (2. This statement is based on the assumption that the coefficients of losses are independent of the net head Hn.u2cu2) A turbine operating at different heads Similar flow conditions through a turbine for all values of the net head is prevailing when all reduced velocities are constant. but different size of the turbines Similar flow conditions in geometrically similar turbines create common reduced velocity diagrams for corresponding positions in the turbines.3) (3. present the corresponding velocity diagrams.the angular velocity .5) (3.23) of the main turbine equation gives η = 2(u1cu1 .6) Q . for similar flow conditions the following relations are fullfilled . This is valid if the magnitude of Hn does not become extremely large and the pressure in the turbine and the draft tube does not fall below vapour pressure. Taking the ratio between corresponding dimensions may compare the size of geometrically similar turbines.the discharge Q Hn (3.

e. for Q = *Q and ω = *ω.0 for the best operating point. .1. i. To get a criterion for the shape the similarity relations must be applied. and it is dimensionless. According to the similarity relations Equations (3. *Q. Admission The admission or capacity ratio is defined as κ= Q − * Q − at the angular reduced speed *ω of the best operating point. is dependent of the guide vane openings and the angular velocity. This maximum discharge is designated •Q. The corresponding value of the admission •κ = •Q/*Q for ω = *ω. (3. The corresponding unit turbine for the similar conditions has a reduced discharge QU and reduced angular velocity Ω. and gives a direct measure of the size of the turbine.7) In these considerations the efficiency of the turbines has been assumed the same..2 Speed number The reduced discharge Q has the dimension of an area. The capacity is as stated only a measure of the size of the turbine and does not give any basis for the shape of the axial section of the runner.. but deviation between model turbines and the large prototypes are corrected for by upscaling formulas. *c. By a given set of operating conditions the considered turbine has a reduced discharge Q and a reduced angular velocity ω. Therefore it is reasonable to choose the reduced discharge at the best operating conditions. Its value is κ = 1.3 and 3. other parameters too are marked in the same way so as *ω. This unit means that a capacity equal to 1 is unit area.3 ω Q is constant − − (3. maximum efficiency point.9) The admission is a quantity proportional to the opening of the guide vane cascade of turbines. i. To designate the best efficiency point accordingly. A turbine with capacity *Q and diameter D has a geometrically similar unit turbine with a corresponding diameter DU and capacity 1. That means the turbine can operate with a maximum discharge larger than *Q. *v etc. The reduced discharge however.4): Q Ω D − = = − DU Q ω − U − At the best efficiency point where the capacity of the unit turbine is 1.e. of the turbine as its capacity/7/.. 3. Some turbines are designed to operate with overload. The capacity is designated with a star as *Q.8) which is denoted the speed number/7/.Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3. The speed number is dimensionless and all geometrically similar turbines have the same speed number. Further the notation unit of turbine size is introduced. This is an approximation. the unit turbine has the reduced angular velocity * Ω= ω − − * * Q − (3.

3. .11) is the rotational speed is discharge at the best efficiency point is the net head at the best efficiency point is the maximum turbine power These two expressions of specific speed are not dimensionless.1 Water turbines classified by speed number *Ω A main purpose for turbine design is to obtain an optimal adaptation to the plant conditions. That is the specific speed defined in two ways nq = where n Q Hn • P n Q H 3/ 4 n or n s = n •P H 5/ 4 n (3. When the discharge Q and net head Hn are known. Hn and *n directly * Ω= − π* n * Q 304 (2gH n )3 (3. The ordinary turbines cover ranges as specifically marked on a speed number scale as shown in Fig. which is the fact for the speed number. The relations between these specific speeds and the speed number are nq = 89*Ω where 3.10) Another classification parameter than the speed number is also in use.1. 3. This means that the different types of turbines group themselves in certain ranges of speed numbers.3 • and ns = 379 • η• κ Ω * − (3.1. this involve choice of the rotational speed n.Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.12) η is the efficiency at maximum turbine power • κ is the admission at maximum turbine power Classification of turbines The speed number is a parameter for classification of the turbines. Fig.4 Note The speed number may also be expressed by the application of the parameters *Q.

Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics

3.5

The criterion then is to choose n equal to the maximum synchronous speed for which the turbine-generator unit becomes economically optimal. According to such guidelines Pelton turbines are built for speed numbers *Ω < 0.22, that means for plants with relatively low discharge Q and the largest net heads Hn. Qualitatively spoken Francis turbines are applied when the discharge Q is larger and the net head Hn lower than suitable for Pelton turbines. The range of Francis turbines 0.2 < *Ω < 1.25. The lower part of the speed numbers represents the so-called radial runners, which have a limit range 2.0 < D1/Ds < 2.5. For increasing discharge Q related to decreasing net head Hn the speed number increases. Then the relation D1/b1 between diameter D1 and the width b1 decreases and the outlet edge of the blades is positioned farther downstream in the runner. For speed numbers *Ω > 1.0 the discharge Q is as large and the net head Hn as low that the choice has to be Kaplan or Bulb turbines. However, the region 1.0 < *Ω < 1.25 may be characterised as choosing zone of either Francis or Kaplan turbine.
3.1.4 Performance characteristics

Introduction

By theoretical analysis and available methods for computation it is not possible, even by advanced approaches, to obtain exact results of the real flow state and the performance of turbomachines. The accuracy will be poor or unreliable especially for operating conditions far from the design point. Therefore experimental research is necessary to carry out in laboratories on models of the prototype turbines. Results from these model tests are valid for the prototype through the similarity relations and certain upscaling formula for the efficiency, provided that the model size is larger than certain minimum international standardised values. A model turbine has to be geometric similar to the prototype in all hydraulic passages from the turbine inlet to the outlet of the draft tube. A standard for model testing of water turbines is the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Recommendation, Publication 193. In general the code applies to any type of reaction or impulse turbine tested under prescribed laboratory conditions and may accordingly be used for acceptance tests of the prototype turbines as well.
Determination of performance characteristics

Parameters to be measured are those determining the power Pn delivered to the turbine and the power P transferred to the turbine shaft. These powers determine the efficiency, which is expressed in Chapter 2, Equation (2.31):

η=

P Pn

where Pn = ρQgHn is the hydraulic power supplied to the turbine P = Tω is the power out of the turbine shaft Q is the discharge Hn is the net head T is the torque

Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics

3.6

ω ρ g

is the angular velocity is the density of water is the acceleration of gravity

For the determination of η the hydraulic parameters Q and Hn, and the mechanical parameters T and ω have to be measured in each test point. For the density it is usually sufficient to ascertain the value according to the measured fluid temperature and pressure. The acceleration of gravity g is ascertained according to latitude and altitude. According to the regulation facilities of the turbines there are also some turbine parameters to be measured. These are the opening of the guide vane canals and in addition the slope of the runner blades on Kaplan and Bulb turbines. The testing procedure is to carry out these efficiency measurements for certain points within an estimated range of operation of the turbine by stepwise changes of the rotational speed and the turbine parameters.
The measured data has to be treated for presentation of the turbine performance curves in a two-dimensional diagram. The efficiency is calculated for each test point directly from the measured data. The measured discharge Q, rotational speed n and power P are recalculated to conditions for net head Hn as constant according to the similarity relations. The resulting data are then ready to be set up in diagrams.

One principle for setting up diagrams is shown in Fig. 3.2. There are two diagrams, with ηcurves in the upper one and Q-curves in the lower one, both with the rotational speed n as abscissa. Each of the curves in both diagrams is marked with a corresponding value of the admission κ = Q/*Q. For this illustration of the treating procedure only four κ-values are indicated. The optimal point on each η-curve is marked. The ηmax.-point may be determined by drawing a side projection of the η-optimal-points as shown to the right on Fig.3.2. This point is marked by projection into the Q - n-diagram, and the best operating point of the turbine is then found by the indicated values *Q and *n. In normal practise the presentation of one diagram for η and one for Q as functions of n is further worked out in one single diagram. This is done by converting the efficiency curves in the upper diagram of Fig. 3.2, into corresponding curves where η is constant in the Q - ndiagram as shown. The result obtained is a hill chart of efficiencies of the turbine, and this presentation is designated performance diagram.
Performance diagrams based on reduced parameters

The results from the efficiency measurements of a model turbine can be converted to the geometric unit turbine on the basis of the similarity relations. First may be determined: turbine capacity
*

Q=

*

Q

2gH n
*

(3.13)

reduced angular speed ω =

*

ω

2gH n

(3.14)

Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics

3.7

Fig. 3.2 Sketched drawing of the performance diagram of a turbine /5/

speed number

*

Ω=* ω

*

Q

(3.15)

where *Ω also represents the angular speed of the geometric similar unit turbine at the best efficiency point. Considering now an arbitrary point of operation of the test turbine, the reduced discharge through the unit turbine corresponding to this point is Q =
− U

Q

*

Q

(3.16)

For the performance diagram it is reasonable to introduce Q/*Q instead of Q for the ordinate. For the abscissa it is adequate to introduce the ratio between the unit turbine angular speed Ω and the speed number *Ω so that

− *


=

ω
− *

ω

(3.17)

bubbles filled with air and vapour.1. the cavity bubbles will again collapse when coming into regions of higher pressure. Suction head The conception of suction head is described in the IEC Publication 41.18) Fig. draft tube wall and so on. may damage the surfaces by a more or less terrific erodation.Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.5 Cavitation and suction head Cavitation When the pressure in a liquid is lowered down to vapour pressure. 3. But by application of the Bernoulli’s equation the pressure head system can be expressed as follows c2 H A = h v + h s + (1 − ς s ) s + ∆h 2g (3.. However. In practise that means to estimate maximum suction head. The whole range of turbine operation should therefore be free of cavitation.3 for different arrangements of the turbine axis. runner discs.e. This may occur in the low-pressure regions of the turbines. The suction head hs is defined as positive when measured upwards and as negative downwards from the tail water level. These collapses produce a strong characteristic noise. This suction head however.3 Specification of suction head hs of reaction turbines /5/ where hv HA hs cs ςs ∆h is the vapour pressure head is the atmospheric pressure head is the suction head is the mean velocity in the narrowest cross section area of the draft tube is the coefficient of the total head loss in the draft tube is the resulting pressure head above the head of the vapour pressure . 3. does not alone determine the pressure and the cavitation conditions. 3. and bubbles collapsing on surfaces of runner blades. especially at the outlet of runners and inlet of the draft tube in reaction turbines. i.8 By this presentation of the performance diagram is obtained an efficiency hill chart which is valid for all turbines geometric similar to the unit turbine. cavities are created in the liquid.This publication presents definitions and specifications of the net positive suction energy NPSE and the net positive suction head NPSH For normal calculations it is sufficient to evaluate the suction head as schematically shown in the Fig.

20) which is valid for similar cavitating conditions in turbines and pumps.9 The pressure head ∆h is just the pressure which is defined as net positive suction head NPSH. the relations of hydraulic similar flow. According to Equation (3. i. Q and P start decreasing and the limit value of NPSH is then reached. Similarity relations to include cavitation Provided that similar hydraulic cavitating flow remain unchanged relative to the flow canals.4). then the reduced discharge becomes Q = (π/4)d2c1.3) and (3. the following methods of detecting cavitation may be mentioned: • • • By the change of the hydraulic performance of the machine as expressed by head. Testing of cavitation in a turbine has to be carried out on a model in a laboratory. it is also recognised that a change in the hydraulic performance is not a sufficient reliable indication of cavitation.2.18) this is NPSH = H A − h v − h s − (1 − ς s ) c2 s 2g (3. The law of Thoma is introduced σ= NPSH is constant H (3. can be experimentally investigated in several ways.3) and (3. The reduced angular velocity of a Pelton turbine is ω = 2u1/D1. Equations (3.Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3. The reason is that appreciable noise and other indications of cavitation have at times been observed without accompanying changes in any of the performance characteristics. If the turbine has one single jet with a reduced velocity c1 and a jet diameter d.19) Cavitation limits The performance of a turbine under operating conditions with cavitation. As long as the efficiency η. Conditions with cavitation occur as soon as η. capacity or efficieny. The net head Hn in the Equations (3. power. measurements of the noise and vibration accompanying the operation of the machine. On the other hand. Depending on the physical phenomenon as basis for the investigation.2 3. 3. if possible. Of these methods only the first one has so far given proper reliable results of practical value. The NPSH of the turbine is gradually reduced under otherwise constant operating conditions.4) may then be replaced by NPSH. By observation and.1 Main hydraulic dimensions Pelton turbines Pelton turbines represent the lowest region of speed numbers and may extend a tiny overlap in the lower end of the Francis turbine range.e. are valid also for flow including cavitation. the discharge Q and the power P of the turbine remain at constant values. no cavitation occurs. By visual or photographic observation of the vapour pockets or bubbles on the runner blades. Correspondingly the speed number with one jet .

085⋅√6 = 0. B = 2.21) Intended values of the reduced velocities are c1 = 0. This high value is not recommended because maximum jet diameter •d has to be kept •d/D < 0.4.1.2. 3.4 and •d/D = 0.1.2 Pelton bucket dimensions To indicate intended values as a guide to the bucket dimensions a specifying concept/7/ is given on Fig.10 * Ω= ω − − * * Q= − 2* u D −1 π* 2 d c −1 4 (3. 3.1 to 1.3 Performance diagram Fig.2.21 Pelton turbines can be applied up to heads around 2000 m.8 to 3.Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.04.4⋅•d L = 2. 3. An example shows that at maximum admission •κ = 1.1. .0 to 1.3 to 2. one jet makes a speed number •Ω = 0.4 Pelton turbine. however with decreased speed number because that is favourable in regard to avoid high stresses and fatigue problems and cavitation damage.1⋅•d y = 1. The efficiency is represented by relative efficiency curves η = η/ηmax.485 The largest speed number with one jet is in practise limited to *Ω = 0. The maximum number of jets is considered as six. indication of main dimensions and the bucket form /5/ 3. In this case the speed number becomes • Ω = 0.6⋅•d z = 1. That means a one jet turbine and this diagram is valid for all geometric similar Pelton turbines with the same speed number.3 to 1.98 and *u1 = 0.7⋅•d x = 1. 3.5 shows an example of a performance diagram for a unit Pelton turbine with speed number *Ω = 0.085.2⋅•d Bucket section longitudinal of the jet View perpendicular to the jet Velocity triangles at the inlet and outlet of the bucket Fig. According to the specifications on this figure the following values should be acceptable.

are given as functions of the speed number in the diagram Fig. 3.2 < *Ω < 1. The reason is that runners of low speed numbers perform a more even efficiency curve than runners of high-speed numbers. this parameter decreases as the speed number increases. 3.75*n. Fig. Reduced peripheral velocity *u1 corresponds to the largest diameter D1 of the runner cascade.Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3. It is then observed a rather steep progress from a relative efficiency η = 0 at Q ≈ 0 up to η = 0.25*Q.5 Performance diagram/5/ of a Pelton turbine.25. Further it increases to η = 0.0 for the interval 0. Reduced meridional velocity *cs corresponds to the smallest cross section of the runner outlet and reduced meridional velocity *coz corresponds to the diameter of the outlet edge of the guide vanes. As shown in the diagram. and 0. The shape of the hill chart is naturally dependent on the speed number.11 In the performance diagram it is of major interest to examine the efficiency η as a function of the discharge Q along the ordinate for ω/*ω =1.2.8 show two examples of performance diagrams of unit Francis turbines.3 3.5*Q < Q < 1. and turbines of the highest speed numbers may be built for any low head of some few meters.0. Another important characteristic is the runaway speed.3.0. Intended values. This dependency however.9 at Q ≈ 0. 3.1 Main hydraulic dimensions Francis turbines Francis turbines are located in the region of speed numbers 0. The admission κ can be read along the ordinate of ω/*ω = 1.5*Q.1 and 1.95 < η < 1. which means a runaway speed n = 1.04 3. The range of speed numbers for Francis turbines indicates that they may be applied for heads within a wide range.75. which may be applied as a guide of the reduced velocities.7 and 3. and these curves are lines parallel to the abscissa axis and therefore independent of the runner speed. *Ω = 0. does appear only with relatively small changes.3. In the diagram it is shown a curve of the admission • κ .2 Performance diagrams The Figures 3.95 at Q ≈ 0. This can be read in the diagram for η = 0 at Q/*Q = 1. This is always the case in Pelton turbines because the jet passes through the free open air from the nozzle to the bucket.6.5 there are indicated three κ-curves.5*Q. 3. The read value ω/*ω ≈ 1. Hydraulic design of these turbines is based on reduced quantities. For the extreme high-speed numbers of Francis turbines • κ approaches values between 1. In diagram Fig. . which indicate values of the opening of the guide vane cascade for the admission at maximum discharge and maximum turbine output power. Turbines of the lowest speed numbers are today built for heads up to 700 m.0.

The shapes of the hill chart of these two diagrams indicate considerable differences.7 with a speed number *Ω = 0.12 Fig.Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3. Both the “copiousness” and “width” on the top of the hill chart decrease all the way from the low speed Pelton turbines to the most high-speed Francis turbines.75. 3. 3.8 Performance diagram/5/ of a Francis turbine *Ω = 0.3. Fig.25 Fig.8 with a speed number*Ω = 0. 3.25 and the other on Fig.7 Performance diagram/5/ of a Francis turbine *Ω = 0.6 Hydraulic design data for Francis turbines (intended values as a guide) /4/ the one on Fig.75 . 3.

The runaway speed increases also with increasing speed number.95 about Q/*Q = 0. cu2 = 0 in Equation (2.23) where 1 < a < 1.3 Cavitation.1 for *Ω = 0.0.5 cavitation and suction head was considered and Thoma coefficient σ introduced. is not so steep for Francis turbines as for the Pelton turbine on Fig. blade number and blade geometry.9 about Q/*Q = 0.u2cu2) = h1 + c12 .23).9 about Q/*Q = 0. The peripheral velocity u2 at the outlet of the runner is a significant parameter for estimation of the tendency of cavitation and finally the setting of the turbine /2/.82.23) a given setting of a Francis turbine (and also for a Kaplan turbine) appoints a limit both for the speed number *Ω and the peripheral velocity u2 at the rim of the outlet of the runner due to tendency of cavitation. For the blade loading and cavitation occurrence the reaction ratio is also a very important parameter.c2 (3.2 and 0. to determine the NPSH. For the speed number *Ω = 0. According to Equation (3. Therefore the speed number and the NPSH are converted to expressions with a dependency of the velocity u2. i.5.24) .62. This is here supplemented by a method being used by a turbine manufacturer. •κ is the admission of maximum discharge.7 and 3. The speed number expressed by the reduced velocity u2 and blade angle β2 at the runner outlet is * Ω = u 3/ 2 π tan( π − β 2 ) − −2 (3.3. The reaction ratio is describing the pressure drop from the runner inlet to the outlet at best efficiency flow.125 for *Ω = 0. As seen from the diagrams the reduced idle running discharge has the value Q/*Q = 0.22) or (2.25 and κ = 1.0 the running speed is about n =1.8*n.e. Another quality to notice is the different courses of the admission κ-curves in the performance diagrams on the Figures 3.75.h2 . 3.22) An equation for NPSH is established as follows NPSH = H n u a • κ 2 tan 2 ( π − β 2 ) + b = 2 −2 [ ] u2 • 2 2 a κ tan 2 ( π − β 2 ) + b 2g [ ] (3. suction head and reaction ratio In Section 3. 3.75 and κ = 1.1. For the speed number *Ω = 0.5 depending on the speed number.24) are neglected.55 and further to η = 0.13 The relative efficiency η as a function of reduced discharge Q along the ordinate through ω/*ω = 1.05 < b < 0.1 up to η = 0. this equation becomes 2(u1cu1 . It is important also to notice that the idle running discharge increases with an increasing speed number. For *Ω = 0.75 the efficiency increases from η = 0 at Q/*Q = 0.95 about Q/*Q = 0.8 respectively.62 and further to η = 0.5*n.25 the efficiency η increases from η = 0 at Q/*Q = 0. and for *Ω = 0.125 up to η = 0. If the losses in Equation (2.Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.25 and Q/*Q = 0.0 the runaway speed is about n = 1. As a conclusion it may be pronounced that the efficiency characteristics of hydro turbines become more and more pointed with increasing speed number.

97 is assumed. By introducing these transformations into Equation (3.cu2) Decreased <----------Reaction ratio -------------> (3. 3. For increasing speed numbers.10.1 Main hydraulic dimensions Kaplan and Bulb turbines belong to the same grope of turbines.25) Increased Fig. According to this • convention the Kaplan and Bulb turbines are located in the region of speed numbers 1.766 The reaction ratio is consequently increasing with increasing speed number. *u1 = 1.9 Blade cascades for different reaction ratios with cu2 = 0. Because of the excellent regulating possibilities of the Kaplan and Bulb turbines .6) amounts a reaction ratio h1 . The speed number •Ω does not represent the best efficiency point of the turbine operating conditions. /2/ . 3.0.72 (from Fig.14 Now c12 = cu12 + c1z2 and c22 = cu22 + c2z2.075 « « amounts a reaction ratio h1 .e. From the diagram Fig. 3.9 is illustrating qualitatively different magnitudes of cu1 depending on the different inlet directions of the blades. For the best efficiency point of two turbines a hydraulic efficiency ηh = 0. Cavitation at the inlet of the blade cascade in low head turbines.516 Francis turbine: *Ω = 1. In the diagram Fig. the runners approach those of Kaplan/Bulb turbines with the highest reaction ratios. and consequently different reaction ratios. For the lower end of the speed number range the reaction ratio is approaching that of the Pelton turbine when u1/c1x --> 0. Francis and Kaplan/Bulb turbines.cu22 = cu1(2u1cu1 .6 intended values of the peripheral velocity *u1 may be read.4. curves are given for average values of the reduced velocities *u1.5 and (h1 .Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3. •cs and •coz corresponding to the locations given in the diagram as functions of the speed number.5.24). 3. i. Francis turbine: *Ω = 0. 3.h2) --> 0. 3.h2 = 0.35.h2 = 0.5 < Ω − < 3. is significantly linked with blade loading. Fig. and consequently expressed by • Ω= ω − − • • Q − indicating maximum discharge and maximum output power from the turbine. however with a minor overlap in the Francis range. Further is assumed c1z = c2z. *u1 = 0. They represent the extension of speed numbers above the range of Francis turbines. The reaction ratios for different Francis turbines may be clarified by an example. the reaction ratio is h1 -h2 = 2u1cu1 .4 Kaplan turbines 3.

8.11.4. Analogous series of measurements are further carried out for as many ϕ-values as being prescribed. 3.2 Performance diagram An example of the performance diagram of a unit Kaplan/Bulb turbine is shown on Fig. proper model performance tests have to be carried out. .70⋅•Q.10 Hydraulic design data for Kaplan turbines (intended values as a guide) /4/ To determine the overall optimal operating conditions of a Kaplan/Bulb turbine. This diagram is rather different from those shown for the Pelton turbine Fig.65⋅•Q to 0. The regulation of the opening of the guide vane cascade and the regulation of the runner blade angle is interconnected in such a way that the turbine operates with optimal efficiency in every case of operation.Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3. The reason is the regulation parameter for the slope of the runner blade angle ϕ.15 they perform a relatively even efficiency curve. 3.7 and 3. In practise therefore it seems favourable to design the turbine for the best operating conditions about a capacity *Q = 0. 3. Fig. The basis for the test procedure is three free variable parameters: n = the rotational speed [RPM] α = direction angle defining opening of the guide vane cascade[o] ϕ = angle defining the direction of the runner blades [o] With a chosen blade angle ϕ. Then the blade angle ϕ is changed to another position and a new series of η-curves and Q-curves are measured in the same way as in the first case. efficiency η and discharge Q are measured for chosen values of the guide vane angle α as functions of the rotational speed.5 and the Francis turbines in Figs. 3. 3.

suction head and reaction ratio The remarks about cavitation. 3.5. 3.Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3. In that way they are ideally supplementing each other. The runaway speed of a Kaplan/Bulb turbine is strongly dependent of the combination of the guide vane angle α and the blade angle ϕ and may differ from say 1. 3. 3. suction head and reaction ratio in section 3. The prices of the turbines of the same type become cheaper the higher the rotational speed.5*n to 3.4. Furthermore the operating conditions play a principal role.1 Choice between Pelton and Francis turbines The costs of Pelton and Francis turbines are compared in the diagram Fig.0*n.13 again shows the limit price curve between Pelton and Francis fields in a (Q .16 The succeeding treatment of the data is to work out diagrams from which the combinations of parameter values can be determined corresponding to optimal performance for any point of operation. where the abscissa divides the diagram in one upper field where the Pelton are the cheapest turbines and one lower field where the Francis are the cheapest ones. 3. which also has curves of constant power output and constant rotational speed for Pelton and Francis turbines respectively. Fig.3 on Francis turbines.5 Choice of turbine The four types of turbines Pelton.3 Cavitation.9 and 3. . Therefore. Francis and Kaplan and Bulb turbines mainly have each their own region of speed numbers. On the other hand there are many questions to deal with before relevant values of speed numbers are estimated. *Ω =1.3 3. are valid also for Kaplan/Bulb turbines. when the actual speed number is estimated. 3. That means a decreasing price with increasing speed number. 3. Finally the results of this working procedure can be presented in a performance diagram as in Fig. Main problems are connected with evaluation of the costs of the plant and the trends in the development of the design of turbines.7.12.10.0 is steeper than of the Francis turbines Figs. Fig. In this performance diagram the relative efficiency η as a function of reduced discharge Q along the ordinate through ω/*ω = 1. but not so steep as of the Pelton turbine Fig.H)-diagram.11 Performance diagram/5/ of a Kaplan turbine.11. 3. the determination of the turbine type is normally done as well.

Generally the Pelton and Kaplan turbines perform the wellrounded efficiency curves. 3. The Figures 3./2/.12 and 3.17 Fig. to compare the economy of the turbines the efficiency characteristics must be compared as well. while the Francis turbines and also the propeller without any . Fig. /1/.12 Comparison of price index between Pelton and Francis turbines. Fig. /1/. 3. Efficiency characteristics However.13 Diagram indicating decreasing prices versus increasing speed number of turbines.13 show that Francis turbines can be the cheapest choice for heads up to 700 meters and even higher for large units.Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3.14 shows average qualitative efficiency curves of four types of turbines as functions of capacity ratio. 3. But for higher heads than this limit the Pelton turbines are ruling the domain.

18 adjusting control of the runner blades. At best efficiency point the Francis turbine is the best choice for operation from 50 % load up to full load. Fig. 3.15 which confirms the statement mentioned above. The losses in Francis and Pelton turbines at best efficiency point versus capacity and the head as parameter are compared in the diagram Fig. if a typical peaking operation is wanted at very low load.16 for a Francis turbine and a Pelton turbine. This is due to a reduction of frictional losses. 3. 3./2/. the Pelton turbine will be the best choice especially if an automatic selection of operating jets is chosen. each of 50 MW at 470 m head. However. /1/. The losses in power production due to the variation of turbine efficiency versus power output is compared in Fig.14 Efficiency characteristics of different types of turbines as functions of capacity ratio /4/ For the best efficiency point it can be noticed a slight increase in the optimal efficiency value of Francis turbines with increased speed number.Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3. But the character of this tendency depends also on the design and the finish of the guide vanes and the runner. 3. perform more pointed efficiency curves the higher the speed number. A valuation by integration of the output loss over the whole output range of the turbines makes clear that the Pelton turbine is the best choice if the time in operation is equally distributed .15 Losses in Pelton and Francis turbines as function of capacity and . Fig.

The zigzag illustrates the different kinds of operations as follows: Zigzag for peaking operation from 0 to 100 % load (the lowest curve). However. On Fig. for 25 % . 3. With sand laden water Fig. A similar comparison between Pelton and Francis turbines may be made for different sizes and different heads of the turbines.Guide vanes and guide vane facing plates .Runner inlet and outlet .17 boundary selection curves may be drawn as shown for different operations. This is illustrated in Fig.Runner buckets . 3.Needles .16 Comparison of losses in a F rancis turbine and Pelton turbine of 50 MW at H = 470 m Fig. if any operation below 25 % load is avoided or the loads are higher than 25%. Such parts are: In Pelton turbines: . Time out of operation The time out of operation for repair is a significant criterion for the choice between Francis and Pelton turbines/1/.17 Boundary curves between Pelton and Francis turbines based on different kinds of operation repair may be necessary every year to keep the loss of power production at minimum. The parts most exposed to sand erosion are those with the surfaces where the water velocity and the acceleration is high. This appears by a lower erosion in .19 from zero load to full load. If the water is clean a well-designed turbine will be in operation at least 10 years without any repair. The cases of repair are normally related to sand erosion.Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3. for 50 % .100 % load variation and finally best efficiency point operation + 10 % load variation (the uppermost curve).Nozzles .Labyrinth seals In Francis Turbines: The behaviour of the erosion from sand laden water in high head Francis turbines occurs slightly different and depends on the design of runners. the Francis turbine will be the best choise.100 % load variation.16. 3. 3.

A Kaplan turbine offers also an advantage with its smaller dimensions for a certain capacity than the corresponding Francis turbine. But Kaplan turbines have been built for higher heads as well even up to 60 m. this again depends rather strongly on the plant’s operation schedule. USA.Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3. 2. Colorado State University Fort Collins. But the parameters are somewhat different. H. June 12. 1979. – 14. 3. In this case one big high-speed unit allowing for a cheaper powerhouse than the alternative with more than one Francis turbine or one big Francis turbine which can handle such capacity. References 1. The Bulb turbine will however. Joint Symposium on Design and Operation of Fluid Machinery. At the outlet of the runner where the velocity is high.75 m have been planned for this turbine type as well. The upper economic and practical limit for the Kaplan turbine head is in the range of 60 m. but even so the velocity distribution is fairly uniform in this region.20 m head for this turbine type. Colorado. – 30. These favourable flow conditions have the effect that the runner diameter of a Bulb turbine may be made 15 % smaller than for a Kaplan turbine under otherwise equal conditions.500 m3/sec are wanted the Kaplan turbine is chosen. because the double number of blades in the low velocity region at the runner inlet make the flow more uniform. 3. Lima. Brekke. Thus the pressure will be limited to 15 .: A Discussion of Pelton Turbines versus Francis Turbines for high Head Plants. The Bulb turbine is still more favourable if only one unit shall be built because the scroll casing of a Kaplan turbine makes the power station much wider. The Bulb turbine offers more favourable inlet flow conditions to the runner than a Kaplan turbine.2 Choice between Francis and Kaplan turbines The choice between Francis and Kaplan turbines may be made in a similar way as for Francis and Pelton turbines. Brekke.5. Peru. If one or more turbines are stopped for a long period of for example two months a year. Francis turbines may be chosen even if the water has a high sand content because there will be enough time for an annual repair. In general the Kaplan turbines are chosen for heads below 30 m. CONFERENCIA LATINOAMERCANA DE ELECTRIFICATION RURAL. The flow conditions will also reduce the cavitation risk for the Bulb turbine. Especially for large machines where capacities of 200 . the number of blades is lower than in an ordinary runner. However. H. reach an upper limit design head because of the concentrated hydraulic load on the concrete foundation through the ribs. Dismantling and assembly of the sand eroded parts takes shorter time for Pelton than for Francis turbines.: The Layout of Power Plants and Choices of Turbine Types for Electricity Production on Isolated Load. For low heads Bulb turbines will be an alternative to the Kaplan turbines. November 26.14). . which means a less submergence is needed than for the Kaplan turbine. 1978. The reason is to a large extent given by the more wellrounded efficiency curve compared with a low head Francis turbine (see Fig. The head limit is caused by mechanical strength problems in hub and blades. though extreme cases of 70 . Therefore Pelton turbines will normally be preferred where much sand erosion is expected.20 runners with splitter blades than in ordinary runners.

– 04. Norway 1980. M. 3.: Hydraulic Measurements (in Norwegian). China. Dover Publication. Christie. Bibliography 1.1983. Raabe. Nechleba. Oslo.: WATER TURBINES: Hydraulic Design Base and Turbine Design and Manufacture.: Features from the Design of Francis Turbines in Norway (in Norwegian).21 3. Artia-Prague. England 1957. 1965. Teknisk Ukeblad no. Changsha . 1971. New York. Constable & Co. Oslo. J.: Water Power Machines (in Norwegian). A. G: WaterPower Machines. 2. lectures at NTNU. Ltd. 5. Water Power Laboratory. VDI-Verlag GmbH 1989. Trondheim. 1064. London.: Hydraulische Maschinen und Anlagen. Sundby.: Fluid Mechanics of Turbomachinery. Wislicenus. Volume 1 and 2. 03. Lecture 2 and 3 at Central-South Institute of Mining and Metallurgy. 7. 10.11. Universitetsforlaget. Norway. 4.. Hunan.Classification of Turbines – Main Characteristics 3. Kjølle. A. 6. Zweite Auflage der Teile 1 bis 4 in einem Band. NTNU. F. Kjølle. Norway. H. Kjølle. G. A.11. . Trondheim. Notes from Lectures at NTH 1938 (in Norwegian).: Hydraulic Turbines. USA. . Norway.

To set the closing rate of the guide vane opening to a value. For the pressure rise in the water conduit the condition is opposite./6/ have to comply with two major purposes: 1. To keep the rise of the rotational speed below a prescribed limit at load rejections. Alterations of the grid load cause deviations between turbine power output and the load. the closing rate of the admission must be equal to or lower than a certain value to keep the pressure rise as low as prescribed. To keep the rotational speed stable and constant of the turbine-generator unit at any grid load and prevailing conditions in the water conduit./4/. For Francis turbines the principle is: . one for controlling the rotational speed rise and the other for controlling the pressure rise. The turbine governors/3/. which satisfies the rotational speed. e. This is normal for governors of high head Pelton and Francis turbines. For a load decrease the excess power accelerates the rotating masses of the unit according to a higher rotational speed. For power plants where these two demands are not fulfilled by one single control.To set the closing rate of the needle control of the nozzles to a value which satisfies the prescribed pressure rise .g.1 CHAPTER 4 Governing Principles Introduction Turbine governors are equipment for the control and adjustment of the turbine power output and evening out deviations between power and the grid load as fast as possible. 2. the governors are provided with dual control functions. For Pelton turbines the principle is: . the admissionclosing rate must be equal to or higher than a certain value. rise limits .To bend the jet flow temporarily away from the runner by a deflector so the speed rise does not exceed the accepted level. The following governor reduction of the turbine admission means deceleration of the water masses in the conduit and a corresponding pressure rise.Governing Principles 4./5/.. At load rejections or emergency stops the turbine admission have to be closed down according to acceptable limits of the rotational speed rise of the unit and the pressure rise in the water conduit.

4.1 Block diagram of a turbine closed loop system /6/ Fig.2 . By a momentary change in the load a deviation between the generator power output and the load occurs. 4. The output of this process is the speed. 4. The input reference signal is compared with the speed feedback signal. which again is compared with the reference.1 Feedback control system The governor function for a turbine with water conduit is shown in the block diagram on Fig.2 A hydraulic governor with a direct acting pendulum /6/ .To divert as much of the discharge through a controlled by-pass valve that the pressure rise in the conduit is kept below the prescribed level.Governing Principles 4. Fig.1. 4. This deviation causes the unit inertia masses either to accelerate or to decelerate.

In this condition the control valve is closed by the spool.g.3 Time response of power output and rotational speed after a load reduction step At this moment however. 4.2 has a one-stage amplifier. The governors in use are of various designs.2. Consequently the speed decreases and the pendulum sleeve and the spool are moving downwards again.. Fig. the spool valve is still open. When a decrease in the grid load occurs. A governor of a type as shown in Fig. The lever moves the spool accordingly upward out of the neutral position and opens the hydraulic conduits to the servomotor. When the piston moves in the closing direction.2. As Fig. Design of governors and governor systems are described in Chapter 10. The piston moves downwards and reduces the gate opening and the turbine power. During this movement the spool valve passes the neutral position and opens then for high-pressure oil flow to the opposite side of the piston. as mechanical-hydraulic and electro-hydraulic products. This is a governor with a belt driven centrifugal pendulum. The piston movement is thereby returned and the power output increasing.3 A simple but classic example of a turbine governor is shown schematically in Fig. 4. At the moment when the power is equal to the load. 4. High-pressure oil flows to the piston topside. 4.3 indicates. e. the floating lever moves the spool accordingly in the same direction towards the neutral position. 4.Governing Principles 4. which is in the neutral position. the rotational speed culminates as indicated on Fig. For explaining the governor actions it is chosen to start at a moment of stable equilibrium between power and load.4. the swings are strongly damped because of the feedback system.3. Next time the rotational speed culminates the power again is equal to the load and therefore a succeeding swing in the speed and power output take place as previously described. . The piston movement continues and the power output decreases even more. In this way a stable control process is obtained. Water turbine governors have normally several stages of amplifiers. This feedback is arranged by a linkage connection between the servomotor rod and the end of the floating lever that is opposite to the sleeve as shown on the Fig. the rotational speed starts increasing and the pendulum sleeve and the connected end of the floating lever moves upwards.

Governing Principles 4. 4. That means higher rotational speed at zero loads than at max. It may be utilised for improvement of the phase angle of the frequency response for the governor system. 4. load and this dependency are linear. which is defined as Strength of Regulation = − ∆P ∆F where ∆P is power change ∆F is frequency change .2 Permanent speed droop A special and major property of a turbine governor is the permanent droop. Governors with PID-functions have large ranges for adjustment of each of the PID function parameters. That is the strength of regulation/4/. For units delivering the power to a grid system the frequency has to be constant at any load. Groups of governors are provided also with a derivative function in addition to the above functions.4 4.2 4. It is defined as the percentage change in the frequency for a 100 % change of the power output from the unit.2 the rotational speed is dependent on the load for power/load equilibrium conditions.4. This type of governor function is designated as derivative control and denoted by the label D.6 %. This type of governor function is designated as proportional control and denoted by the label P.1 Governor adjustment facilities Proportional-integral-derivative functions (PID) In governor systems as shown in Fig. Governors for these units therefore have adjustment means also for automatically recovering of the speed according to the grid frequency during regulation processes.4 Permanent droop and strength of regulation The permanent droop is adjustable and in practice it is chosen in the range 0 .2. In connection with the permanent droop another notion also plays a certain role. This type of governor function is designated as integral control and denoted by the label I. Fig. Mechanical hydraulic governors are provided with PI-functions only while electro-hydraulic governors are designed with PID functions. For example a unit with a set value of the permanent droop at 5 % will respond with 40 % power increase for a change in frequency from 50 Hz to 49 Hz.2.

A special mode of operation is the manual mode where the guide vane openings are controlled manually by means of a mechanical hydraulic load limiter.5 as illustrated in Fig. the shut down signal will be given simultaneously to different stages in the governor. The governor controls the load to the desired value.Governing Principles 4. Fig.5 Load distribution for different permanent droop of two units connected to the same grid /4/ 4. 4. A start can be carried out both manually and automatically. closing of the load limiter or the emergency operated shut down valve.3. The admission must be opened only when permitted by all overriding start conditions. e. 4. In Fig.1 Turbine governing demands Frequency and load regulation The governor shall be able to maintain stability of the generating unit when running on an isolated grid. The variation of the load as function of the change in frequency is dependent on the permanent droop setting. The load distribution between turbine-generator units connected to the same grid is dependent on the permanent droop setting of these units.4.3 4. Each unit has little influence on the grid system frequency.5 two units with different permanent droop are shown where the load distribution for a given frequency change is indicated. .g. 4. Generally the units are designed for stable operation up to full load. In this mode of operation the governor shall keep the frequency within certain limits of deviation. The stop command can be given both manually and automatically. In this mode only the load can be controlled.2 Start and stop sequence control During the period of start the unit shall be run up to nominal speed as quickly and smoothly as possible. In shut down mode the admission shall be closed as quickly as possible but limited by the magnitude of the pressure rise in the tunnel and pressure shaft system. Due to safety reasons.3. Load regulation on a rigid system is the most common operation mode. The shut down valve is also functioning if the ordinary voltage supply has failed. 4.

This criterion which is based on the equation of continuity. /9/. 4. 4. An ideal turbine governor is assumed to be able to keep the product of discharge and pressure as constant.3.1 Mass oscillations The mass oscillation stability problem is treated according to the criterion for the minimum critical Thoma cross section area of the surge shaft. The mass oscillation problem for the tunnels and surge shafts both on the pressure side and the suction side. for obtaining stable mass oscillations. Basic theory and principles for these examinations are surveyed in the following.4.6 The layout of a high head Hydro Electric Power Plant /6/ In such a power plant the pressure rise and regulating stability may be divided in two parts: 1. load rejection Disconnection means to open the generator main circuit switch. 4. An example of the layout of a traditional high head power plant is shown in Fig.6 4.Governing Principles 4. The load limiter device may be operated both manually and automatically. is well described in the literature. this statement is not fulfilled if the tunnel is short with short surging time .3.3 Disconnection.4 Load limiting Load limiting must be possible according to external conditions. 2. However. 4. the equilibrium of forces and the assumption of an ideal turbine governor. The function of the governor is then to shut down the turbine not faster than the caused pressure rise is kept below the guaranteed level. Fig. ref.6.4 Regulation requirements of water power plants The governing of water turbines requires limitations of speed rise and pressure rise as well as fulfilment of regulating stability demands. The generator is thereby separated from grid and the turbine power output results in a speed rise of the unit. 4. The water hammer problem of the conduit between the turbine and the water level in the surge shafts both on pressure side and suction side. To guarantee these requirements the adaptation of the dynamic behaviour of the conduit system and the generator inertia mass have to be examined carefully.

3) for h o < 1 Ho 3 (4.4) When substituting for head loss ho and Ho .1) where As h = Ho ./8/ the three equations give the following critical cross section area A scr = 2 LQ o 2gh o ( H o − h o )A (4.7 because the turbine governor then will be too slow to obtain constant output of the turbine.ho = Hn which is the net head.Governing Principles 4. For short tunnels the margin to the critical Thoma cross section area of the surge shaft must be increased accordingly.2) The equation of discharge and pressure control of the turbine (with an idealised turbine governor) q ( H o − h) = Q o ( H o − h o ) According to ref.7 Tunnel and surge shaft with values used in the simple Thoma criterion /6/ With reference to Fig.H q Q is the cross section area of the surge shaft is the head difference between reservoir level and surge shaft level is the turbine flow is the flow in the tunnel The equilibrium of forces  L dQ Q  = g h − h o ( ) 2  A dt Qo   where A is the cross section area of the tunnel g is the acceleration of gravity is the head loss in the tunnel ho = (f/Rh)LQo2/(2g A2) f is the Darcy-Weissback friction factor L is the length of the tunnel is the steady state flow before disturbance or mean flow Qo is the hydraulic radius of the tunnel cross section area Rh (4. 4. Fig.7 the equation of continuity is (4. . 4.

it has been proven that for smooth full profile driven tunnels a larger margin should be used because of a smaller difference between steady state flow friction and friction of flow oscillations. the area Aeq is calculated for the compression of the air and surging of the level. Special stability theory for power plants with influence of the frictional damping of oscillations in rough and smooth tunnels as well as the influence from the turbine characteristics is presented in ref. The general equations With reference to Fig. The water hammer transient problems causing pressure rises that affects the stresses in penstocks and stress carrying parts of the turbine.1.5. By the equation of polytrophic changes of the air volume.3) for short tunnels on account of the shorter surging time of the pressure. General solutions of governing stability problems and transients are based on ref. The governing stability problems caused by pressure oscillations in the conduit system.Governing Principles 4./2/ the equation for Aeq is 1 A eq = (4. According to ref. 4. /8/.3 H' 1 Normally << κ o so that the formula may be simplified to Aw Vo A eq = Vo κH 'o (4.7) Then the critical air volume can be found by the simplified equation Vocr ≈ κH 'o A scr (4./2/ however. According to ref. For short tunnels an even larger margin is required than for long tunnels because a real turbine governor cannot satisfy Equation (4. The water hammer problems may be divided in to main areas: The treatment of water hammer problems are based on ref.8 A scr = AR h fH n (4.2 Water hammer pressure rise versus closure time and speed 1.3 .8 parameters additional to those being used previously are: . 4.8) Normally a safety factor to the critical cross section area should be 1.5) For a tunnel with an air cushion surge chamber the cross section area of the surge shaft As could be substituted for an equivalent cross section area Aeq. /2/. /1/.4.6) ' Ho 1 +κ Aw Vo is the water level area in the air cushion surge chamber where Aw ' H o = Ho + 10 is the absolute air pressure head [m] in the air cushion surge chamber is the air volume in the air cushion surge chamber Vo κ is the polytropic exponent normally κ ≈ 1. 2.

the inertia of the rotating masses of the unit and the length L of the water conduit. The length L is defined as the distance between the turbine and the surge chamber or the distance between the turbine and the reservoir if there is no surge chamber.Hn H Hn πDτ K= ρQ o q L ∆Q qL = Qo ∆Q ρ τ is relative pressure variation is the pressure head variation is the instantaneous pressure at the turbine inlet is the net head is the head loss friction factor. ref. /2/ is the relative flow variation is the change of the flow is the density of the fluid is the friction shear force per unit length of the pipe (4.10) where h L = ∆H Ho ∆H = H . some important compound parameters are created: 2 2 Ta = π n I 2 (30 ) P n is the acceleration time of the rotating masses of the unit [sec] .Governing Principles 4. 4.9) Equilibrium of forces (4.9 A is the cross section area of the pipe D is the diameter of the pipe l is the parameter of the pipe length from the pipe outlet L is the length of the pipe The most commonly used dynamic equations of water hammer problems yields: Fig.10) and (4. According to the dependency of these parameters. /2/ and /7/.8 Serction of pipe with diameter D The equation of continuity ∂q L AH o g ∂h L = 2 ∂l a Q o ∂t (4.11) may be solved according to methods described in refs. Important parameters The stability of the governing process of a hydro turbine-generator unit is dependent on the velocity c of the water in the conduit.11) These basic Equations (4. (4.9).

are valid for linear closure with constant speed. causes a high pressure rise in the penstock and the speed rise has influence on the flow through reaction turbines. see Chapt. then the closing time for linear closing from 100% opening TCL = Tw 2 1− z (4. 10.12) (4. A fast closure however.14) Note: TCL is negative for ∆Η > 0 • Opening time TO: .13) hw = where a g Hn T ac m = w 2gH n Ta is the propagation speed of the water hammer wave is the acceleration of gravity is the nominal head A c=Qn A Qn cm = is the water velocity in the conduit is the cross section area of the water conduit is the nominal flow ∑ Lc ∑L 2∑ L a is the mean water velocity is the rotational speed is the inertia of the rotating masses is the nominal power of the unit is the penstock reflection time n I Pn Tr = Simplified analysis of pressure rise from water hammer During shut down of the unit a fast closure of the guide vanes (or needles of Pelton turbines) is required to avoid high speed rise. • Closing time TCL: For elastic water and a long elastic penstock 2hw < (1 + √z). For Pelton turbines the speed rise problem is normally solved by jet deflectors which deflect the jets quickly away from the runner and thus allowing for a slow closure of the needles.Governing Principles 4. Frictional damping is neglected and the relative pressure z = H/Hn is introduced.10 Tw = ∑ Lc gH n is the inertia time constant of the water masses in the conduit [sec] is the water hammer number (4. The corresponding solution of the speed rise problem of Francis turbines is to bypass the discharge through an energy dissipater with a valve controlled by the governor. These formulas/3/ which are presented in the following. For keeping speed rise and pressure rise within specified limits. some simple formulas are used for determination of closing and opening times of a gate at the downstream end of a penstock.

17) The simplified formulas may be used also for complex high pressure systems. According to the 2. If the closure from a certain opening to zero takes the time 2L/a. Tw = L∆c/(gHo) and TCL = 2L/a in formula (9. If an air cushion surge chamber is used. the nearest water level will be in the air cushion chamber where full reflection of pressure waves occurs.11 For elastic water and elastic penstock TO = Tw 2 z 1− z (4. The air cushion surge chamber will be located within a relatively short distance from the turbine. that means 100% closure during the time TCL. the maximum pressure rise becomes ∆Η = a∆ c g (4.15) Note: TO is positive and ∆Η < 1.14). Speed rise of turbine and generator The speed rise of the turbine may also be calculated in a simplified way. Closing time TCL = Tw z 1− z (4. In such cases the length of the penstock should be regarded as the length from the turbine to the nearest water level in the surge shaft. and thereby excellent regulating conditions will be obtained.16) z 1− z Opening time TO = Tw In this case maximum pressure occurs from large openings. By substituting for z = 1 + ∆H/Ho .Governing Principles 4. then the reduction in velocity will be ∆c = co(2L/a)/TCL. Note The maximum value z is obtained with the maximum closing speed. law of Newton the maximum rotational speed n is found by the formula: P − PG n n d( ) = dt nn nn Ta where n is rotational speed of the turbine nn is the nominal rotational speed of the turbine PG is the generator load P is the turbine power output Pn is the nominal turbine power output .0 • For inelastic water and inelastic penstock: Inelastic water and inelastic penstock means a short penstock 2hw < 1 +√z.

4. 4.19) is the closing time TC L (P .PG)|t=0 is the difference between turbine power and generator power at t = 0 Y is a numerical value dependent on the net head Hn Y = 0.Governing Principles 4. The effect of this may be accounted for by simply to evaluate ε‘ in equation (4.18) satisfactorily by the following equation (1 − Y)( P − PG ) t = 0 A n 1 TCL = 2 Ta Ta where ε' = Fig. 4. is based on a simplified consideration of the effect of the zero efficiency point. TCL P − PG A 1 n2 − n2 n ε' = ( )= ∫ ( )dt = n (4. where z = H/Hn is the relative pressure.9.20 Y = 0. and n = nn + ∆n nn then .20) Ta Further the maximum speed can be calculated according to Equation (4.30 Y = 0.12 Ta = I t πnI 30Pn is the acceleration time of the rotating masses of the unit is the moment of inertia of the rotating masses of the unit is the time By introducing the speed rise parameter ε‘ and integrating one get the area An as indicated in Fig.9 Illustration of the integration of the accelerating torque versus time /3/ (4.20) n2 − n2 n n 2ε ' = = ( )2 − 1 2 nn nn From this n = 1 + 2ε ' .18) 2 Ta Ta 2 nn 0 The presentation of the integrated torque as like the shaded area An in fig.15 Values of Y are: High head turbines Hn > 300 m Medium head turbines 150 m < Hn < 300 m Low head turbines Hn < 150 m The pressure rise may also be accounted for by multiplying the expression of ε‘ by z3/2. Then the speed rise becomes A 3 ε' = n z 2 (4. The zero efficiency point occurs just before closure of the guide vane cascade.9.

When the generator is connected to a large grid with constant frequency. Steady state operations when the unit is operating at constant load. The total system is subject to changes. surge chamber. However. some power plants have a rather complex tunnel and conduit system which makes it necessary to work out stability analysis of the complete water way system. head and command input. penstock with a 45o slope and a tailrace tunnel.4.5 4.10. The stability guarantees are always referred to this mode.10 System with surge chamber /6/ In Norway high pressure tunnels have been excavated for increasing pressure levels. Fig. As an example a conventional high or medium high head system with inlet tunnel.13 ∆n = 1 + 2ε ' − 1 n (4. Tw and hw35/. a load rejection will occur. 3.1 Modes of operation Governing stability Regarding governing conditions there are three different modes of operation on isolated loads: 1. which is resulting in speed limits. Therefore a relatively large part of travelling water . This is the situation during load rejections when the main servomotors are operating at maximum closing speed. As a consequence the surge shaft length has increased.21 4. If the generator is being disconnected.5. In this mode none of the governor elements will reach the limit of closing or opening speed. is sketched in Fig. For stability analysis of operation on isolated grid it will often be sufficient to consider the system on the basis of the three compound parameters Ta.Governing Principles 4. The total system is subject to small changes caused by fluctuations in load or command input. which means that the system is in mode 3. closing and opening movements of parts of the governor system. the function of the governor is only to change the generator output. Concerning stability analysis the constants Tw and hw are calculated from the length of the penstock between the water level in the surge chamber and the nearest free surface level in the tail water. 2. 4.

4.7 Ta/Tw ≥ 4. /2/.Governing Principles 4. These rules are: 2 < hw Ta/Tw ≥ 2.9) and (4. In turn this leads to unstable turbine governing. An improvement of the conditions has been made by the introduction of an air cushion surge chamber schematically shown in Fig. Note Modern governors with pressure feed back signal systems have additionally improved the stability of the governing systems.5 Ta/Tw ≥ 4.11 System with air cushion surge chamber /6/ For the stability analysis the Equations (4. ref.3 < hw < 0. and an excellent governing stability is thereby obtained.5 < hw < 0. By means of such surge chambers the distance from the turbine to the nearest water level becomes short as well. 4.0 0.5 0.0 0.14 hammer waves in the conduit passes the surge shaft because of the increased inertia mass of water in the surge shaft.10) have been Laplace transformed and the frictional shear force has been found to be a function of the flow oscillations and the frequency of the oscillations. .5 An efficient test for proving the governing stability is the frequency response test. it is most correctly estimated by this test.5 1 < hw < 2 Ta/Tw ≥ 3. These waves are more or less reflected from every free water level in all branches of the tunnel and conduit system. Fig.11.2 Rules of thumb Some rules of thumb/3/ may be established to make a brief judgement of the governing stability based on the water hammer number hw and the relation between the time constants Ta and Tw. Because the frictional damping of oscillatory flow is of great importance to know.4.5.7 < hw < 1 Ta/Tw ≥ 3. In addition a short closing time of the turbine governor can be obtained with low speed rise without a high-pressure rise. It should be emphasised that the influence from the turbine characteristics must be included to find the correct stability margins.

Victor L. Ervik. 1999. Benjamin: Hydraulic Transients. L: Theory of Water Hammer. Germany. H. dissertation. 1986. Trondheim. 5. IRCHBM Symposium.: Governing of hydro power machines. Beijing. Xin Xin and Brekke. Oldenburg. E. Lecture compendium at NTNU. Riccardo Garoni. H. Thoma. Kværner Brug: COURSE III. Li.Governing Principles 4.: A stability study on hydro power plant governing including the influence from a quasi non-linear damping of oscillatory from the turbine characteristics. H. .15 References 1. and Wylie. techn. Lecture compendium Oslo. Oslo. Rom. München. Universitetsforlaget. 8. Brekke. M: Governors for Hydro Turbines (in Norwegian). 9. Allievi.: Surge tank stability as influenced by governing characteristics. McGraw-Hill Book Company. D: Zur Theorie des Wasserschlosses bei Selbsstätig Geregelten Turbinenanlagen. Condition Control of Hydropower in Norway: Handbook – Governor (in Norwegian). 1925. 6. 7. (In Norwegian) 4. Dr. NTNU. 1989. 3. Brekke. 1910. Streeter. China. 1971. 2. 1984. 1993.

2 ∆Ploss Pn (5. The turbine power output must fulfil the guarantee as a function of the net head as well.2) Measurement of the turbine power . The operation in the given range of head shall also be without damage such as cavitation pittings and fatigue problems. Therefore efficiency tests of a turbine may come into question several times.1 Principles for test Tests on prototype The efficiency of hydro turbines may be determined according to two different principles: 1. Measurement of the total power losses ∆Ploss in the turbine and the suction pipe and determine the efficiency η = 1− 5. This is a claim by model tests as well if the prototype is a low head turbine and performance tests on the prototype is difficult to carry out with acceptable tolerances. 5. A turbine must in general meet a guarantee of the efficiency within a certain range of output and head variation. In the course of the running time wear occur on vital parts of the turbine and the efficiency decreases accordingly.Performance Tests 5. on the turbine during the guarantee period. Measuring the output P and the available power Pn at the turbine inlet and calculate the efficiency η= P Pn (5.1 5. Detailed guidelines for field acceptance tests are given in the International standard IEC 41/9/ and for model tests in IEC 193/10/. The tests of hydro turbines should be made in accordance with the IEC recommendations.1) 2.1 CHAPTER 5 Performance Tests Introduction Performance tests of hydro turbines are part of the commissioning and acceptance of the delivery of electro-hydraulic equipment.1. Shuts down tests of inlet valves are also often a part of the acceptance tests when required.1.

1. The main methods for the determination of the discharge in hydro power plants are described in the following section. 6. Through the knowledge of the efficiency ηG of the electrical generator the turbine power output P is calculated. For the acceleration of gravity g = 9. 3. For the velocity head it is usual to evaluate this directly as the average velocity head cm2/(2g) = Q2/(2gA2).2 Power output P For a prototype turbine the electrical power output from the generator PG is measured. 5. 7. The generator efficiency as function of cosφ and the load can always be obtained from the generator manufacturer or measured on site as part of the generator performance tests.3. Current meter method Pitot tube gauging Pressure-time method (Gibson method) Tracer methods Ultrasonic method Weirs Standardised differential pressure devices Volumetric gauging method Relative discharge measurement Weirs. Net head Hn is composed of the hydraulic pressure head and the velocity head in the pipe cross section area A just in front of the turbine. venturimeters. and above average level of the inlet of the jets in the buckets of a Pelton turbine. 4.1 Current meter method The current meter method requires a number of propeller-type current meters. nozzles and volumetric meters are used especially for the measurements of discharge of smaller turbines.3 Methods for determination of discharge Measuring methods being used for the determination of the discharge in water power plants are: 1. The density ρ = 1000 kg/m3 is generally used in the calculations if the contract of the measurements do not involve requirements of an exact check.1. These are located at specified points in a suitable cross section of an open channel or closed conduit. economy and accuracy.3) The discharge Q and the net head Hn are to be measured. The available power Pn Pn = ρQgHn (5. 5. 2. The net head Hn is evaluated above tail water level just at the outlet of the suction pipe of a full turbine. 8. 9. .Performance Tests 5.82 m/sec2. Not all of these methods are generally applicable. Simultaneous measurements of local mean velocity with the meters are integrated over the gauging section to estimate the discharge. and which of them are to be used in the respective power plants is a matter of choice based on main aspects as compatibility. 5.

c = kn + b Fig.Performance Tests 5.in open channels with rectangular section .in closed conduits .2 Pitot tube gauging + 1 to + 1.2 to + 2 % + 1. 5. To achieve accurate results.1. the estimated uncertainties/9/ should be about: . 5. The current meter is put in the flow with the propeller axis parallel to the flow direction and the propeller peak against the flow. channels. choice of measuring section and the computation of the discharge and its .1 Current meter /3/ (5.2.4 to + 2. If the flow cross section is divided in n elements.5) Depending on the conditions on site the arrangement of current meter measurements may be carried out by a number of current meters installed in a kind of structure being built across the flow section. Current meter measurements may be applied in open drains. a careful reflection of the gauge point distribution and the method of discharge calculation. 5. the discharge ∆Qi = ciAi through this element. rivers as well as in closed pipes. Pitot tubes are found in a great variety of designs. Standardised pitot tubes are reported in ISO 3966/13/.in open channels with trapezoidal section 5.4) where k and b are constants of the respective current meter and has to be determined by calibration tests.3 shows an example of a frequently applied type called Prandtl tube. Fig. The rotational speed of the current meter is detected by an electric contact giving a pulse frequency signal proportional to rotational speed. Fig.1 shows an example of a current meter design with a two-blade propeller. it is however important that the flow through the cross section of the measurements is regular and as rectilinear as possible. which covers the design. With good measuring techniques and flow conditions. the total flow discharge is found by Fig. The flow velocity is recorded in the centre of gravity of each grid element of the cross section area as shown on Fig. The rotational speed n of the propeller is a linear function of the flow velocity c in the measuring point.3 % The pitot tube gauging means to measure the stagnation pressure of the flow velocity directed into the tube end opening. installation and use of these tubes.2 Flow cross section /3/ Q = ∑ ciA i i =1 n (5. the quality of measurements. The accuracy by current meter gauging of the discharge depends essentially on factors related to the flow.3 Current meters are instruments designed as propellers with 2 or 3 blades. By considering an arbitrary element with area Ai where the recorded velocity is ci.3. 5.5 % + 1. 5. This standard also gives guidelines for the selection and installation of pitot static tubes.

5 to 2.3 The pressure-time method (Gibson method) The pressure-time method/1/ for discharge determination is based on the pressure rise when a flow regulating device in a closed conduit reduces the water flow. The pressure rise on the upstream side of the regulation device depends on the closing speed.6) where ∆pi is the difference between the total stagnation pressure and the static pressure measured with the pitot tube located at point “i”. The equilibrium of the retarded water flow mass for an element of the cross section in the considered pipe length L may be expressed by: . 5. When the turbine admission has a closing movement. Pitot tubes are applied in the same way as described for current meter measurements.4 Measurement of differential pressure in a pipeline /3/ Fig. On Fig. and the distance between the upstream and downstream tappings is called L. 5.5 %.3. ISO 3966 shall be used only with the standardised Pitot tubes that are described therein and equipped with a single total pressure tap and one or more static pressure taps. This pressure head differential-time-diagram is a measure of the total flow. A differential manometer is connected to the pipe through pressure tappings in the pipe wall. 5. The local velocity vi is given by: v i = 2 ∆p i / ρ (5. the net head and the flow velocity in the conduit at the start of the closing operation. for gauging the flow velocity in chosen points of a flow cross section. as shown on the diagram Fig. The total discharge Q is also determined analogous to the scheme described for current meters. Such tubes may be used uncalibrated and the flow coefficient assumed to be unity.1. 5.Performance Tests 5. With good measuring techniques and flow conditions the estimated uncertainty should be about 1. a pressure head difference ∆h as function of time may be recorded on the differential manometer. 5.5. Fig. 5.3 Prandtl tube /3/ Pitot tubes are not well fit for velocity measurements in liquids when the flow velocity is lower than 1 m/s.4 is schematically shown a turbine connected with a pipeline. Fig.4 uncertainty.5 Pressure differential-time-diagram /3/ the conduit length.

Performance Tests 5.8) t=0 ∫ (∆h + ∆h loss ) dt + Ac t l (5. This leakage must be determined separately with the machine running. However. 5. Indications are that applying the pressure-time method in conduits less than 1 meter in diameter leads to overestimating the discharge. then: gA l A ∫ dc = − ( ∆h + ∆h loss ) dt L t ∫0 t=0 = The discharge Q before the closure operation begins. 5.6 shows schematically an arrangement/6/ for the application of this method. gives the true value of the discharge: Fig. an adequate dose of salt dilution is forced into the pipeline through the spring loaded valve C. As soon as the rapid operating valve B opens. The pressure-time method is applicable on flow in closed pipes only.5 ρg∆hdA = −ρLdA dc dt (5. Moreover the measuring length L must be 9 meter or two times the pipe diameter if this product is greater than 9 meter. A dilution of common salt is kept in the container A. Under favourable conditions an overall uncertainty of about + 1. This dilution is pressurised to a certain level.9) The discharge q = Act1 is the leakage flow past the gate after shut off. the transit time of this dose between two electrodes in the conduit can be traced electrically. The injected dose is transported along the pipeline with the same velocity as the main flow.7) If tl is the time during which the velocity changes. By injecting a salt dilution dose in a water flow conduit. 5. . it will be rapidly diluted and its extension in the flow direction is durably increasing due to the larger flow velocity in the central part than in the neighbourhood of the wall of the pipe cross section.5 % to + 2 % may be expected. and if ∆hloss is the pressure head loss due to friction between the two pipe sections.3. The pressure-time method requires especially good instrumentation/1/ and a highly qualified staff of specialists to carry out the tests.2.10) Fig.6 Allen salt velocity method /6/ Q= V t mean (5. The conduit volume V between these two electrodes divided by the average transit time tmean of the passage of this salt dose. is then: Q = Ac o = gA L t=to t=tl t=t (5.4 Tracer methods Allen salt velocity method A salt in water dilution increases the electric conductivity of the water.

samples are taken out from several positions in the cross section. two cross sections (I) and (II) with a certain mutual distance. several methods have been applied for the calculation of the time interval of the passage of the salt cloud between the respective Fig.7 Record of a salt cloud passing the electrode stations in a electrode stations.6 In cross sections of the chosen lengths of the pipe. pipeline /6/ these methods do not differ from each other so much that not any of them is recommended as the most preferable. By means of Mohr’s titration method and application of silver nitrate and . it is generally accepted that the discharge may be determined to an accuracy around + 1 % to + 1.8 Dilution method /5/ magnitude of the injected flow of salt solution.7. electrodes are installed as shown schematically on the figure. It incorporates Mohr’s procedure for titration of chlorides by means of silver nitrate. The results being obtained has shown a development of accuracy that has led to application of this method for efficiency determination of water turbines. With good measuring techniques and flow conditions. The method has been used for the measurements of the discharge in mountain rivers/5/. Therefore this is a matter of choice for the experts. 5. For the evaluation of the discharge. In cross section (II). When an electric voltage E and an electric recorder F is connected in series with the electrodes. the recorder will record an electric current dependent on the conductivity of the water analogous to the diagram shown on Fig. are chosen.5 % by the use of the Allen salt velocity method. Salt dilution method This method is apt to be called the chemical method. The salt dilution method is principally different from the Allen salt velocity method. In cross section (I) a steady continuous flow of a homogeneous and relatively strong concentrated solution of sodium dichromate is injected into the main water flow in points evenly distributed over the cross section. For the application of this method expert knowledge of a number of details in the experimental equipment is needed. 5. The flow downstream in the channel becomes a dilution with a concentration depending on the relation between the magnitude of the main water flow and the Fig.8. However.Performance Tests 5. 5. In a flow through pipes or open channels as shown on Fig. 5. which is a distance far enough downstream to ensure thorough mixing.

provided the recommendations and procedures described in Parts 1. With good measuring techniques and flow conditions. is applied to a crystal and causing it to vibrate. The vibratory motion produces an electric current signal in proportion according to the action of piezoelectric displacement transducers. Since the discharge is related to fluid velocity.11) is the discharge to be measured is the discharge of the salt solution injected is the initial concentration of the salt in natural water is the concentration of salt in the injected salt solution is the concentration of the salt dilution at the sampling station For the application of this method the flow must be perfectly turbulent. the obtained accuracy of the discharge determined by the dilution method should be about + 1 % to + 1. Also the concentration of salt in the natural water must be constant and not exceed 15 % of the concentration at the sampling point during injection of the salt solution. Instead of the salt solution being described above. If the crystal is in contact with the fluid. the absolute velocity of the pressure disturbance propagation is the algebraic sum of the two./4/ of application of the above phenomenon all depend on the existence of transmitters and receivers of acoustic energy. The various methods!2/. A common approach is to utilise piezoelectric crystal transducers for both functions.Performance Tests 5. If the fluid also has a velocity. otherwise the mixture of the salt solution and the main water flow will be uneven. the salt solution must be injected in points positioned relatively close to each other over the cross section. this effect may be used in several ways as the operating principle of ultrasonic flow metering.5 Ultrasonic method Small-magnitude pressure disturbances are propagated through a fluid at velocity which is the sound velocity relative to the fluid.5 %.3. the vibration will be communicated to the fluid and propagated through it. but it is essential to ensure that reverse or side currents do not exist which could abort some of the injected solution. .7 potassium chromate an accurate gauging of the concentration of the dilution may be obtained in these samples. 5. In a transmitter electrical energy in the form of a short burst of high-frequency voltage. The discharge Q can be determined from: Q=q where Q q Co C1 C2 C1 − C 2 C 2 − Co (5. The samples in the cross section downstream as well must be taken in points correspondingly close distributed. The concentration of the injected salt solution may be one part by weight of salt to four parts by weight of water.1. Moreover. The term ultrasonic refers to the fact that the pressure disturbances usually are short bursts of sine waves whose frequency is above the range audible to human hearing. It is not necessary to know the geometric characteristics of the pipe. other radioactive and non-radioactive tracers can be used. The receiver crystal is exposed to these pressure fluctuations and responds by vibrating. 6 and 7 of ISO 2975/12/ are applied.

Also. then Fig.15) This ∆t is twice as large as before and is also a time increment that may be directly measured. (5.. if a and L are known.10a may be preferable. With zero flow velocity the transit time to of pulses from the transmitter to the receivers is given by to = L a The velocity a is the acoustic (sound) velocity in the fluid If the fluid is moving at a velocity c. a varies both with temperature and pressure and may cause significant error because of its appearance as a2. the transit time becomes t=  1 c c2  L L = L − 2 + 3 −. The pulse repetition frequency in the forward propagating loop is 1/t1 while in the backward loop is 1/t2. while L may be taken as constant. the dependence on a2 is still a drawback. However. 5.9 Principle of ultrasonic signalling /2/ ∆t ≈ Lc a2 (5.8 Fig. The frequency difference ∆f . ∆t is quite small since c is a small fraction of a.14) Thus.. Fig.Performance Tests 5. Since it is not directly provided for measurement of to in this arrangement. ≈  1 − a+c a a  a a c  a (5.9 shows the most direct application/2/ of these principles. the modification of Fig.10b Two self-excited oscillated systems /2/ In Fig. 5.t.10b two self-excited oscillating systems are created by using the received pulses to trigger the transmitted pulses in a feedback arrangement. 5.. 5. measurement of ∆t allows calculation of c. then it is obtained ∆t = t 2 − t 1 = 2 Lc 2 Lc ≈ 2 2 a −c a 2 (5.13) and defining ∆t = to ..12) where L is the distance between transmitter and receiver. 5. However. 5.10a Sound signal sent with and against the flow direction /2/ Fig. If t1 is the transit time with the flow and t2 is the transit time against the flow.

In order to have the best known relationship.16) which is independent of a and thus not subject to errors due to changes in a.6 Weirs The measurement principle is to measure the discharge by interposing a thin plate weir in a free surface flow and observe the head over the weir. flat and smooth surface perpendicular to the upstream face of the plate. 5. For actual profiles c can be replaced by cmean as long as the profiles are symmetrical about the pipe centre line. The basic formula for calculating the discharge is due to Poleni and can be written as/9/: Q= where Q C b g h 2 Cb 2 gh 3 3 (5.18) is the discharge is the discharge coefficient is the length of the weir crest (perpendicular to the flow) is the acceleration of gravity is the measured upstream head over the weir The weir plate shall be smooth and plain.17) where D is the diameter of the pipe in the intersecting acoustic plane Wi are weighting coefficients depending on the number of paths and the applied integration technique n is the number of acoustic paths in one plane k is correction coefficient which accounts for the error introduced by the integration technique αi defines the angular location of the end path relative to D Experience with the acoustic methods of discharge measurement is limited and obtained accuracy is about + 2 %. with complete crest contraction and free overflow shall be used. It shall preferably be made of metal which can resist erosion and corrosion. watertight and perpendicular to the walls and to the bottom of the channel. then ∆f = 2c cos θ L (5. and shall remain unaltered for the whole duration of measurements. 5. The above analysis assumes a square velocity profile which does not occur in practice.1. particularly on the upstream face.3. Fig.c cosθ). Since t1 = L/(a + c cosθ) and t2 = L/(a . Its .9 = 1/t1 .Performance Tests 5.1/t2 can be measured by multiplying the two signals together to get a beat frequency. The surface of the weir crest shall be a horizontal. A unique functional relationship between the discharge and the head over the weir is employed. It shall be rigid.11 shows a sketch of a rectangular weir. the discharge can be obtained from the equation for a circular section: Q=k D n ∑ Wi c meani D sin α i 2 i =1 (5. only rectangular weirs without side contraction sharp crested. If certain mathematical conditions such as continuity and differentiability are met by the velocity distribution.

7 % to + 3 %.Performance Tests 5.005). nozzle and venturi tube. Whenever possible to satisfy the requirements of the ISO standards. . These standards give all the necessary directions concerning the design and the setting of the primary element. The method of discharge measurement by differential pressure devices is the subject of ISO 5167/14/ supplemented by ISO 2186/11/.5 % for orifice plate. Aeration of the free efflux from the weir shall be secured with a ventilation sufficient to keep the air underneath the free efflux at approximately atmos-pheric pressure. All data necessary to estimate the total uncertainty in discharge measurement are given in ISO 5167.7 Standardised differential pressure devices Discharge determination by pressure differential is based on installing a device creating a constricted cross section in the conduit and gauging the pressure difference generated by this constriction. nozzles and venturi tubes. The width e of the edge. the downstream edge shall be chamfered at a 45o angle. be far Fig. 5.10 intersection with the upstream face shall be straight and form sharp edges free from burrs or scratches.1.3hmax downstream of the plane of the weir. perpendicular to the upstream face. the choice of the section of measurement. The approach channel shall be straight and of a uniform cross section and with smooth walls for a length of at least 10 times the length of the weir crest b. shall be 1 to 2 mm. The weir is commonly located on the low pressure side of the turbine. If the weir plate is thicker than the allowable crest width. the computation of discharge and its uncertainty. With this location it shall moreover.3. With good measuring techniques and flow conditions. 5. and care shall be taken to ensure that smooth flow exists in the approach channel. estimated obtainable accuracy should be about + 1. These standards apply only in the range of the pipe diameter D and Reynolds number ReD specified in ISO 5167. The sides of the channel above the level of the crest of the weir shall extend without discontinuity at least 0. Along this length the bottom slope must be very small (< 0. Such devices are orifice plates. With good measuring techniques and flow conditions. it is unnecessary to calibrate the apparatus as the flow coefficients indicated in the standards may be used provided their resulting accuracy is considered sufficient. concerning pressure signal transmission. obtainable accuracy is estimated to + 1% to + 1. the value of the flow coefficient.11 Sketch of a sharp-crested rectangular weir enough from the turbine or the discharge conduit outlet to enable the water to release the air bubbles before reaching the weir.

with increasing size the ponds are generally provided with inclined concrete walls. These ponds are particularly suitable for volumetric measurements if the slope of the walls remains constant over the whole measuring range.11.8 %.Performance Tests 5.1.9 Relative discharge measurement Relative discharge measurement/9/ can be done by measurement of the pressure difference between suitably taps on the scroll case of a turbine as shown on Fig.1. It consists in determining the variation of the water volume stored in the headwater or tailwater pond on the basis of the variation of the water level.5 (5. a variant of this method can be adopted for large scale discharge measurements/9/. Nevertheless.19) . provision shall be made for isolating the pond to ensure that there shall be no inflow to or no outflow from it during the measuring time.3.11 5. If necessary.12 Winter-Kennedy measurement Q = khn where h is the reading of a differential manometer connected between the taps n is theoretically equal to 0.8 Volumetric gauging method The conventional volumetric gauging method is confined to low discharges. Artificial ponds best suited for volumetric measurements are concrete basins with vertical walls. This is the Winter-Kennedy method and the discharge is usually well represented by Fig.5 % to + 0. 5. it is unlikely to be applied to discharge measurement in the field. The shape of a basin and the slope of the walls should be considered carefully in the planning stage of the plant if the basin is to be used for volumetric measurements. 5. Approximate values of the uncertainty of the volume determination of concrete ponds with vertical walls should be + 0. 5.0 %. because of the limitation caused by the size of the tanks or reservoirs required.3. and for concrete pond with sloping banks + 0.7 % to + 1. Therefore.

However. calorimeter through which water is drawn off from the turbine.2 Efficiency and specific energies The hydraulic efficiency of a turbine is. 5.13. The inner tap 2 shall be located outside the stay vanes on a flow line passing midway between the two adjacent stay vanes.1 Measurement of power losses The energy flow losses through a hydro turbine. 5. The outer tap 1 is located at the outer side of the scroll case. On this basis the thermodynamic method/17/ for determination of turbine efficiency is established.12 As a general rule this method is applicable to turbines only.1. the energy loss in the turbine corresponds to 10 % of Hn. An usual principle for measurements of temperatures is to connect two platina resistance thermometers S1 and S2 in a Wheatsones bridge together with two constant resisters R1 and R2 as schematically shown on Fig.5. and this pressure may be measured through a branched off pipe from the chamber. The pressure in chamber M is regulated to any desired level by the valve R. In practice. 5. Thus the temperature in the discharge increases through the passage. Drawing off water through a calorimeter at the turbine inlet is in principle shown on Fig. is converted to heat energy in the water flow. a turbine with net head Hn = 427 m and an efficiency η = 90 %.22: ηh = PR E R = Pn E n (5. For example. 5. the range of application of this method is therefore limited to heads above 100 meter.20) where ER is the specific mechanical energy at the runner En is the available specific hydraulic energy at the turbine inlet . Precision measurement of pressure is shown to the right on Fig. as expressed in Equation 2. Measuring equipment The instrument for the application of the thermodynamic method consists of: elements for temperature measurements.13. The nominal resistance of the thermometers S1 and S2 is about 100 Ω.4 Thermodynamic measurement of flow losses 5.4. A hollow probe is mounted radially through a bore in the wall of the conduit. the relatively small temperature changes in the water flow cause applicability limits for the method.1. These thermometers have relatively high temperature sensitivity and linear temperature dependence. which in this example means a temperature increase about 0. In installations with a steel scroll case it requires taps/9/ located in the same radial section of the scroll case. limitations of measuring equipment and relatively high magnitude of corrective terms.Performance Tests 5.1. and precision manometer for pressure measurements.13. It is recommended that a second pair of taps be located in another radial section. by lack of uniformity in measured values. The drawn off flow is conducted through the probe via the regulating valve R into the chamber M for measurement of temperature and pressure.1 oC.4.

pos. pos. 2 [K] . 1 is the average flow velocity at the turbine outlet. pos.13 Arrangement of thermodynamic measurements on a turbine /3/ These specific energies are now to be expressed from calculations based on the first and second laws of thermodynamics together with empirical data for some physical and thermodynamic properties of the fluid in use. pos.22) is the isothermal factor of water [m3/kg] is the specific heat capacity of water [J/kg/K] is the temperature of the water at the turbine inlet [K (Kelvin degrees)] is the temperature of the tail race water. level z1 is the absolute at turbine outlet. level z2 is the average flow velocity at the turbine inlet. pos.Performance Tests 5. 5. On this basis and with reference to Fig. 2 2 c1 − c 2 2 + g( z 1 − z 2 ) 2 The specific mechanical energy at the runner E R = a ( p abs1 − p abs2 ) + c p (θ 1 − θ 2 ) + where a cp θ1 θ2 (5. 2 is the acceleration of gravity is the level of the turbine inlet. cubic expansion or JouleThomsen coefficient. 5. and specific heat at constant pressure. 1 is the level of the tail race water. The properties include compressibility.13: The specific available hydraulic energy of the turbine may be determined by 2 c1 − c 2 2 + g( z 1 − z 2 ) 2 E n = p abs1 − p abs2 + where pabs1 pabs2 c1 c2 g z1 z2 (5.13 Fig.21) is the absolute static pressure at the turbine inlet.

which means two measuring procedures for each point to be tested of the turbine efficiency. is used.8790 at temperature 40 oC and absolute pressure p = 150 bar .1. to a = 0. 5.13. To illustrate the measuring technique an ordinary arrangement of the thermodynamic measurements on a Francis turbine as shown on Fig.14 From first and second laws of thermodynamics and differentiation of the enthalpy h. is known: dh = dq + or dp dp = θds + ρ ρ  ∂s  dp  ∂s  dh = θ  dθ + θ  dp +  ∂θ  p ρ  ∂p  θ where h q s ρ is the enthalpy is the heat flow is the entropy is the density of the water (5.23) From the thermodynamics  ∂s   ∂ (1 / ρ)     = −  ∂θ  p  ∂p  θ and the specific heat at constant pressure  ∂s  c p = θ   ∂θ  p Therefore the differential of the enthalpy can be converted in (5.22).3 Measuring technique The measurements to be carried out with the equipment described in Section 5.the isothermal factor a [m3/kg] with total range from a = 1.25) In the International Standard IEC 41/9/ tables are given of the properties of water for: .the specific heat cp [J/kg/K] with total range from cp = 4207 at temperature 0 oC and absolute pressure p = 1 bar.0184 at temperature 0 oC and absolute pressure p = 1 bar. to cp = 4145 at temperature 40 oC and absolute pressure p = 150 bar 5. are to determine the quantities in the Equations (5.1. .Performance Tests 5.24) 1  ∂(1 / ρ)   dh = c p dθ +  − θ  dp  ∂θ  p    ρ and the isothermal factor of water is then: a= 1  ∂ (1 / ρ)  − θ   ∂θ  p ρ (5.21) and (5.4.2.4.

man include 1 stagnation pressure c12/2. The isothermal factor a and the specific heat capacity cp are to be taken from tables (f.z' ) + cp (θ1 − θ2 ) − 1 2 c2 ' 2 + g(z1 − z '2 ) 2 and the corresponding head utilised by the runner is HR = ER/g. However.ex.man − p abs2 − and the net head Hn = En/g.15 Determination of the specific available hydraulic energy En The probe is a kind of a pitot tube.z2’). By these measurements and observations the specific mechanical energy becomes E R = a(pabs. With the opening directed against the flow velocity in the conduit. the temperature sensor S2 has to be positioned in the tail water downstream of the turbine runner outlet at a distance which is longer .z' + p abs. The temperature θ2 is measured by sensor S2 in the position of level z2’ in the outlet of the suction pipe. The velocity c2 is a relatively small quantity and c22/2 may be neglected as a first approximation.Performance Tests 5.man + g( z man − z1 ) where pabs. the velocity c2 can be calculated as c2 = PG/(ηGηhA2) where A2 is the cross section area of the outlet of the suction pipe. the drawn off flow is shut off.z' is the sum of the barometric pressure pabs2 at 2 level z2 and the difference of gravity g(z2 . The total pressure in this case at the ' level z1’ of the temperature sensor S1 is p abs.z' = p abs. Therefore the measured temperature has to be corrected for the corresponding temperature change. IEC 41) and evaluated for the average pressure ( p abs. This is done by measuring the temperature and pressure for a series of different magnitudes of the drawn off flow by regulating the valve R. The measuring technique as illustrated for the measurements of a Francis turbine. On the base of these measurements and observations of zman and z2 the specific available hydraulic energy is E n = p abs.man = pabs1 + c12/2 is measured by the dead weight manometer at the reference level zman.z' − pabs. and the total pressure pabs. The corresponding pressure p abs. the hydraulic efficiency ηh and the generator output PG are determined. is valid also for the measurements of a Pelton turbine. But after the net head Hn = En/g. The velocity c2 is the same as in the determination of En. The pressure pabs2 is the barometric at the tail water level z2. can be measured. and the temperature is θ1. the total pressure that is the sum of the static pressure and the stagnation pressure in the conduit. By closing the valve V downstream of the orifice D. Determination of the specific mechanical energy ER c2 2 + g( z man − z 2 ) 2 The drawn off flow is exposed to heat exchange with the surroundings by the flow through the apparatus. On the base of these temperature and pressure observations the pressure and temperature corresponding to zero heat exchange can be determined.z' ) 2 and the average temperature 1 2 (θ1+θ2)/2.

Cavitation damage deeper than 0. the efficiency of a turbine determined by the thermodynamic method. Further information about these details are given in the Standard IEC 41. is in general obtained with an accuracy around + 1. For shaft vibrations a new IEC code somewhat similar to the ISO norms for pumps.27) With good measuring techniques and flow conditions. the level of the tail water is usually lower than the average level of the nozzles. Moreover.5 x deepest point multiplied by the eroded surface deeper than 0.26) where the turbine discharge is Q= PG η G ρE n Finally the turbine efficiency becomes η = ηmηh (5.5 mm according to norms. and this level difference has to be corrected for in the temperature measurements.6 Cavitation behaviour of prototype During commissioning cavitation may be observed by abnormal noise.5 mm is normally defined as eroded surface.5 Dynamic properties of the turbines During comissioning.1. 5. The eroded volume is than calculated to be 0. In the future hydrophones seem to be a tool for indicating severe cavitation at an early stage. is not the only method the different practitioners of the thermodynamic method are applying. In addition to the energy losses by the flow through the turbine there are some other losses also to be taken into account.0% for the higher heads and ± 1.4. for satisfactory operation no material pitting should occur and this is the goal for the owner and producer of a turbine. Noise level is often recorded.4.16 or equal to a minimum length defined in the Standard IEC 41. prefer to convert these quantities into heights. With certain adaptation and arrangement of measuring equipment these losses too are measured.1. However.1. In addition a great many of them instead of evaluating the specific energy quantities.2. top and bottom cover and the draft tube may be recorded if the dynamic properties are regarded to be unfavourable. . the leakage flow and its friction losses outside the runner shrouds.Performance Tests 5.4 Corrections for leakage and friction The hydraulic efficiency ηh = ER/En is determined on the basis of the measurements described in Subsection 5. is under progress. but a mutual agreement must be made to include noise level in the guarantee. In practise that is mainly losses in the bearing.5 % for the lower heads. The corresponding power is denoted PL and the mechanical efficiency ηm = 1 − PL PL = 1− PR ρQE R (5. shaft vibrations and vibrations of the guide vanes. The practise of measurements described above. 5. 5.1.

a rejection test must also be made at the guaranteed overload. The laboratory must be equipped with facilities for calibration and checking control of the metering devices to required accuracies for all these parameters.2. Model tests may also be used to compare models from several manufacturers. During the rejection test the maximum pressure should be recorded by fast pressure transducers with short connecting pipes in order to record the real pressure peaks with minimum damping. and special attention should be paid to this if the draft tube is relatively long. The parameters to measure on the models are: pressure p and/or head H. But the turbine characteristic has also an influence on speed and pressure and this test is therefore normally combined with the turbine performance tests. The recorded data may further be fed into a computer.17 5. Normally the indications from the metering devices (transducers) of the respective parameters.1. angular velocity ω and density ρ of the water. 50 %. . which is programmed for evaluation of the resulting efficiency and other relevant data. It should be emphasised that for a high head power plant with more than one unit.155 [m] and Q: 0.05 .5 [m3/sec] V = 650 [m3] The flow system in which the model test turbines are installed.Performance Tests 5. During the shut down test also the minimum pressure in the draft tube should be recorded. If overload has been guaranteed.7 Governor test – Rejection tests Rejection of a turbine generator unit is actually a governor test/15/. must have an upstream inflow and a downstream outflow system with dimensions and designs satisfying certain standard rules. 5. 5. and the control system must be prepared to keep any operation point in this range constant within required limits.2 Model tests and scale effect of efficiency from model to prototype Performance tests of prototype turbines by means of model tests may be used to prove guarantees given by the manufacturer.1 Laboratory qualifications The laboratories qualified for performance tests of turbines by means of model tests.1. Such tests have to be carried out in neutral laboratories. are converted to electric signals which are transmitted to recording devices in a central control room. 75 % and 100 % load. have technical data around the following values/7/: Pump capacity: Dynamometer: Traceable calibration range: Water reservoir: Hmax = 160 [m] and Qmax = 1. torque T. discharge Q. The supply pump must be continuously adjustable in head and capacity within the calibration range. The surging of the water level in the draft tube surge shaft should be carefully observed because in some cases a quick unloading after a full rejection followed by a new repeated rejection may cause overflow and drowning of a cavern power station. Besides the maximum pressure peak. simultaneous part load rejection with all units normally gives higher pressure rise than full load rejection. The governor system and turbine performance however. will always be tested in a shut down test of each unit normally at 25 %.5 [m3/sec] P = 350 [kW] and nmax = 1500 [RPM] H: 0 . A device for metering and control of the air content in the water is also needed. the maximum speed of the unit should be recorded.

Likewise such components as bends. are necessary for control of the environmental conditions in the laboratory.for Pelton turbines where Ds B H ν is the diameter of the runner at the outlet of Francis and Kaplan turbines is the width of a Pelton bucket is the head of the model turbine is the kinematic viscosity of the water Kaplan model turbine Francis model turbine 2.5⋅106 Bmin 80 mm 40 m Re min Ds min Hmin 2⋅106 250 mm 1m Besides the lower limits of the model size. some other instruments as a precision barometer.Performance Tests 5.18 In addition to the facilities for calibration and measurements of the parameters of the model tests. In practise this means to establish a lower limit of the Reynolds number. it is required that all hydraulic details from inlet to outlet of the model turbine are geometric similar to the prototype. . Tests have however shown that synonymous critical values of the Reynolds number may be established.2. However. the Reynolds number creates the criterion for the sizing of the models. for which reliable test results must be obtained for the succeeding evaluation of the corresponding prototype turbine. This will generally depend on Reynolds number of the tests and the roughness of the surfaces being in contact with the flow. The basis for the evaluation of this limit is the distribution of the laminar and turbulent flow layers on the runner vanes. which is representing the skin friction losses.2 Model tests Required size and surface roughness of the models A major point by the model tests is the minimal size of a model. provided that the models are manufactured with hydraulic smooth surfaces. In the Standard IEC 193/10/ the values in the following table are adopted for the minimum Reynolds number Re min of the models of Kaplan/propeller. This means inclusion of the scroll case and the suction pipe in the similarity requirements as well. The definitions of the Reynolds numbers are: for Francis and Kaplan/propeller turbines R e = Ds Re = B 2gH υ 2gH υ . The flow leading surfaces of the model shall have the same relative smoothness as the prototype.5⋅106 250 mm 2m Pelton model turbine 3. Francis and Pelton turbines. branch pipes and valves at the turbine inlet may be included in these requirements. 5. In addition this distribution is also influencing the stability conditions and the flow direction out of propeller runners . thermometer and a hygrometer.

∆ηT = ± 0. to obtain lower errors of the measured quantities than the following values: ∆ηH = ± 0. Methods for testing and determination of cavitation limits on models are indicated there as well. is reported in Subsection 3. and the majority of laboratories have no nuclei injection systems.2 %.1 %. In practise it is difficult however.255 %. However. On the base of the measured σ value the critical setting Hs of the prototype can be calculated.25 %. the content of nucleis and air in the water has a great influence on the value of σ measured in a model.1 %. However.1. Accuracy of model tests The probable errors of the measurements of an operating point on the turbine/8/. suction head and similarity relations including cavitation are dealt with in Subsection 3. ∆ηω = ± 0. may be estimated statistically by introducing the error of each of the measured quantities. According to these outlines the Thoma parameter for the model:  NPSH  σ=   H  mod el (5. ∆ηρ = ± 0. even with the best measuring methods.Performance Tests 5. because degassed water gives a lower value of σ and a lesser margin for the prototype if plant σ is based on model test.05 %. For safety reasons it has been recommended to use degassed water and inject nucleis (micro bubbles of air) until the highest σ value is obtained. These errors may be summed up. Cavitation tests on model Cavitation. as an example in the following way 2 2 2 ∆η = ∆η 2 + ∆η Q + ∆η T + ∆η ω + ∆η 2 H ρ (5. Further the content of silt in the water at site for the prototype also has some influence.05 % With these values the probable error of the efficiency becomes ∆η = 0. The lowest value of σ will be obtained in the laboratory by degassed water.29) can be calculated from the measured pressure referred to the reference height according to Standard IEC 41 for NPSH.5. so far the experts on cavitation have not agreed upon a standard which includes nuclei injection.28) where ∆ηH ∆ηQ ∆ηT ∆ηω ∆ηρ is the error of the efficiency caused by the error of the head is the error of the efficiency caused by the error of the discharge is the error of the efficiency caused by the error of the torque is the error of the efficiency caused by the error of the angular speed is the error of the efficiency caused by the error of the density of the water It may be required in model tests that the probable error of the efficiency shall be ∆η ≤ 0. . ∆ηQ = ± 0. So far natural water saturated with air has been regarded to be the best alternative by many laboratories for model tests.1.19 Testing procedure The testing procedure for determination of performance characteristics of the model turbine/8/.4.

: Some problems related to and experiences gained from the use of the Gibson method. The reason is less friction due to higher Reynolds number Re = U2D2/ν where U2 and D2 is the circumferential speed and the diameter respectively of the runner at outlet and ν is the water viscosity. that the runaway speed normally increases with low values of the Thoma parameter σ. vol. The formula for upscaling the efficiency from the model to the prototype for Francis turbines according to IEC code/10/ yields:   R α ∆η = (1 − η m ) V 1 −  em     R ep       (5. Alming. Norway 1971. New York. estimated α = 0. Runaway test on prototypes should be avoided at site due to the consequences if the generator cannot withstand the centrifugal forces. 5. In the discussions of the performance diagrams of Pelton. Francis and Kaplan turbines in the Sections 3. However.3 and 3. the runaway speed differs essentially from one type of turbines to another. E. 2.20 Runaway test It is a question of safety for the dimensioning and design of the rotating parts of the turbine and generator unit to know the runaway speed. On the base of these facts the runaway test with zero torque should be carried out during the normal model performance tests. Inst. K. With reference to these diagrams. Kjølle. At best efficiency point the increase in efficiency is normally very small and at full load a decreased efficiency is normally observed for multinozzle turbines. O.4 respectively. the σ value for the prototype is regarded to be the same as for the model. Proc. A. but with a different value of V. 2. ISBN 0-07-017336-2. However. Doeblin. A scale effect of the Thoma cavitation parameter σ has not yet been proved. it is proven that V = f(*Ω) is exponent. It should be noted however.2. References 1. 3. 1976. For this reason the runaway tests should be run at the plant σ.3 Scale effect on efficiency from model to prototype The efficiency of a prototype will normally be higher than for the model. For Pelton turbines a minor scale up effect at part load has been proven.2. 3. V≈ 0. lectures at NTNU. Application and Design.: Hydraulic Measurements (in Norwegian). Trondheim.7 according to IEC code/10/.16 For Kaplan turbines a similar formula as for Francis turbines is established.: Measurement Systems. the runaway speed of these turbines has been mentioned.30) where ∆η ηm Rem Rep V α is the difference in efficiency of the prototype and the model is the efficiency of the model turbine is the Reynolds number of the model is the Reynolds number of the prototype is the scaleable part of the losses. Mc Graw-Hill Book Company. NEL 1960. .Performance Tests 5.

15. 2. East Kilbride.: Dischage measurements by the Allen salt velocity method. 10. T. Hermant. 7. 1959. Fluid in Closed Conduits – Connections for Pressure Signal Transmissions Between Primary and Secondary Elements. A basic Guide and Source-Book for Users. International Standard Organisation. 1965. 1977. Sonderdruck aus dem Bulletin des Schweizerischen Electrotechnisches Vereins. ISO 2186. Hoshikawa. 9. P. Inst. . Proc. International Standard Organisation.: Fluid Mechanics of Turbomachinery. Fluid Mechanics Division. Bibliography 1. ISO 2975. E. Whillm. Kværner Brug: Course III. First Edition.: The National Engineering Laboratory. 1991. Hutton. 2. T. La Huille Blanche 1959. 17. Suzuki... R. Nakabori. International Standard Organisation. S. Publication 193. 14. and Satake. Nr. Vol. 1986. NEL 1960. First Edition. The Macmillan Press Ltd. Proc. J. 1979. P.2. Scotland. First Edition. Lecture compendium. Wislicenus. 1970. L. Hayward.: Measurement of liquid flow by ultrasonics. 1963. and Campmas.: Ultrasonic method of flow measurement in an open channel. A.: Mesure du rendement des turbines hydraulique par la méthode termometrique Poirson. New York 1965. Hutton. 5. T. P. June 1959. May/June. Amendment 1 – 1998. Nozzles and Venturi Tubes.21 4. 13. Paper E . C: Application of flow measurements by the comparative salt dilution method to the determination of turbine efficiency. G. IEC 41: International code for field tests of hydraulic turbines.. 10 und 13. H.: Über die Voraussage des Verhaltens von Wasserturbinen auf Grund von Modell-Versuchen. ISO 5167. 2. Inserted in circular Conduits Running Full. Measurement of Water Flow in Closed Conduits – Tracer Methods – Part I – VII.:FLOWMETERS. 6. 12. G. Dover Publications. Inst. Fischbacher. IEC 193: International code for model acceptance test of hydraulic turbines. Measurement of Fluid Flow in Closed Conduits – Velocity Area Method Using Pitot Static Tubes. Measurement of Fluid Flow by Means of Pressure Differential Devices – Part i: Orifice Plates. ISO 3966. 1998. 11. Water Power. Publication 41. 1973. J. Hooper. International Standards Organisation. Water Power. 8. 16. Vol. ISBN 0-333-21920-1.. S. F. H. NEL 1960.Performance Tests 5.

2.Pelton Turbines 6.1 Horizontal Pelton turbine arrangement Fig. been built with four jets as well. and an evaluation of the speed number according to Equation (3.1 CHAPTER 6 Pelton Turbines Introduction The specified data of water flow rate.6. it is a serious demand that the jets enter the buckets so far from each other that no mutual disturbances can occur.The number of jets depends on the speed number and stepping up values of the speed number means to step up in number of jets.8) will show that speed numbers of Pelton turbines ranges below *Ω = 0. For a certain plant that means often a matter of choise between numbers of jets for the turbine.1 Horizontal Pelton turbine with one jet (To the left: Radiell section. Pelton turbines can be arranged either by a horizontal or a vertical shaft. to the right: Longitudinal section) (Courtesy of Escher Wyss) . In general a horizontal arrangement is found only in the medium and smaller sized turbines with one or two jets. If for example the design should be either four or five jets of the turbine. then the cost of the generator for a five jet turbine will be correspondingly lower than the alternative of a four jet turbine. However. In practise this means that six jets represent the upper limit of their number. 6. Some horizontal Pelton turbines have however. head and rotational speed determine the Pelton turbine designs.

Fig. 12. 6. Turbine shaft 40a.2 shows another example of a horizontal Pelton turbine with two runners and two jets on each runner. 4. The jets are symmetrically distributed around the runner to balance the jet forces.2 Cross sections through a horizontal Pelton turbine with two runners and two jets to each runner. Cam for axial bearing 42. 5. Solenoid valve for the control of needle servomotor 25. 6.2 Main details: 1. 6. . From the outlet of the buckets the water falls through the pit down into the tail water canal (6). 6.3. 18. Screen for guiding water from runner outlet to tail water 32b. Feed back rod 22. Coupling The flow passes through the inlet bend (12). The Fig. Fig. 8. 6. Steering wheel for needle movement 31 and 32. Servomotor piston for needle movement 23. the nozzle outlet (1) where it flows out as a compact jet through atmospheric air into the wheel buckets (4). Steel lining 40. 17. The outer turbine bearing 43. (Courtesy of Atelier des Charmilles) 6. Turbine housing 32a.2 Vertical Pelton turbine arrangement Large Pelton turbines with many jets are normally arranged with vertical shaft.2 and Fig.3 show as an example of the vertical and horizontal section respectively of the arrangement of a six jet vertical Pelton turbine. Nozzle Jet Runner Runner bucket Needle head Tail water level Runner disc Inlet bend Needle rod Lower bend Emptying pipe Deflector 21.Pelton Turbines 6. 13. 3. 20. Further comments to some of the details are given in Section 6. 2. Drain canals for for guiding spray water away from shaft 34. Closing spring for needle 24.

horizontal section (Courtesy of Kværner Brug) . 2.3a Vertical multinozzle Pelton turbine. 7. 6. 3. Pipes for efficiency tests Distributor pipe Deflector mechanism Turbine shaft Deflector servomotor Wheel pit cover Guide bearing Turbine housing Main injector with needle servomotor 10. Runner cart rails 12. Runner 11.3 Fig. 4. 6. 9. vertical section (Courtesy of Kværner Brug) Fig. 6.3b Vertical multinozzle Pelton turbine. 5. Inspection platform 6. 8.Pelton Turbines 1. Runner cart 13.

3b: .5 show how some manufacturers in addition to bolts (9) also use pins (10) or wedges (11) between the buckets. Runners working under such conditions are normally casted of 13%Cr4%Ni alloy steel. The method first mentioned is preferred and common for the Pelton turbines in modern power plants where the the turbine units are of the high power and bigger sizes. For the large high head turbines the main strain factors are cavitation. 6. i.straight flow injector .deflector . and Fig.3Main components and their functions The examples of Pelton turbines shown in the Figures 6. content of sand in the water and other strain factors.3b.3a and 6. Naturally some of these do not exist in every manufactured Pelton turbine. . 6. 3.1. monocast. 6. cast steel or casted of high quality alloy steel. In addition to the strength qualities the material must be adequately weldable. 6. needle servomotor Needle Bifurcation Distributor 8. 6.4 Numbered details in Fig. The reason for this is that. wedges (11) can be used as shown to the right on Fig.runner . The material of the runner and buckets are chosen according to the head. This matter of fact imply that the constructions appear different from one manufacturer to the other or from a small to a bigger size of the turbine. To take care of these bolts conical pins (10) may be fitted into corresponding holes and driven in to a certain degree of prestressing between the buckets and the disc. the buckets run in and out of the jets with a frequency according to the rotating speed and the number of jets.bend and distributor . be dedicated to main components which are vital in all turbines.5. and may be cast iron. For these reasons our considerations will mainly according to ref.2.4 shows a photograph of a runner of monocast type. Runner Deflector Inspection platform Main injector with 5.3. If such pins are too weak. During this process they are exposed to shocks occurring with the same frequency. 9. 6.3b: 1. Fig.6. 6.e. /1/. Of these components further attention will be paid to the folloving parts referred to Figs.1. or the disc and each of the buckets are casted in separate pieces. 4. Some details of such buckets on Fig.3a 6. sand erosion and cycle fatigue.5 shows a runner with buckets having ears through which they are bolted to the disc.oil reservoir . 6. 7. 2. while the runner is rotating.Pelton Turbines 6.1 Runner The Pelton runners may be designed either for casting of the disc and buckets in one piece.shaft and bearings . 6.guide bearing . In the same way the bolts (9) are strained. stresses. indicate that the turbine constructions consist of a rather great number of components. Expansion/dismantling joint Runner cart rail 6.turbine housing 6.

6. This type of Fig. The surfaces. over which the water jet flows are milled.6.5 Pelton runner with bolted buckets The shape of the buckets is decisive for the efficiency of the turbines. The runner disc is fastened to the shaft by bolts and nuts/1/ as shown on Fig. 6. in these works are that bucket shape always will be a compromise between a hydraulically ideal and a structural optimum design. The correctness is checked with templates.6 Rotating parts of a vertical Pelton turbine /1/ . 6. This connection establishes a pure frictional joint by a corresponding prestressing of the bolts by means of heat or a special oil hydraulic tool.5 Fig. ground and polished to the correct shape. Surfaces close to jet flow out of the downstream neighbour bucket. For keeping and improving high efficiency characteristics great efforts of theoretical analysis and model tests follow the runner design. 6. are ground and polished as well. Limitations however. and places where fatigue cracks may occur.Pelton Turbines 6.4 A monocast Pelton runner Fig. The bolts are screwn in threaded holes in the shaft flange and protrude through holes in the disc and have tightening nuts screwn on the other end.

The stagnation velocity pressure at the scoop opening causes an oil flow from the lower reservoir through the oil cooler to the upper reservoir. Bearing house. 6.6. Temperature sensor. From the cooler a pipe returns to the upper oil reservoir of (3). The rotating oil reservoir encloses the bearing shell. 4. Level switch 8. 6. Scoop 5. Bearing shell 6.6 joint enables a simple dismantling and replacement of the runner.6.2. . Oil pockets between the four fixed bearing pads create the entrance of cooled lubricating oil to the bearing pads. At standstill the total oil quantity is staying in the rotating reservoir (6). A shield to reduce windage losses caused by air and droplet circulation protects the nuts. 6. Two semicircular segments bolted together are 1. The oil rotates together with the reservoir as a layer on the wall.7 Turbine guide bearing (Courtesy of Kværner Brug) forming the bearing shell (5) as a rigid cylinder.Pelton Turbines 6. Bearing cover 2. A hole is drilled centrally through the whole length of the shaft.2 The turbine shaft The turbine shaft of vertical Pelton turbines is made of forged Siemens-Martin steel with an integral flange at both ends as shown on Fig. bearing shell Fig. which is mounted to the lower side of the bearing house (3). The scoop is fastened to the bearing house (3) with a pipe connected to an external oil cooler. 6. 6.7. They ensure a proper centring of the turbine shaft. These segments are provided with four fixed babbit bearing pads. A stationary scoop (4) is installed with one end against the rotational speed of the oil in reservoir (6). Oil temperature sensorl 3.3 Turbine radial bearing The details of a turbine bearing shown on fig. The bearing house (3) consists of two halves bolted together and mounted to a flange on the runner pit cover. is a radial guide bearing/1/. 6. An oil reservoir is a rotating member bolted to the shaft flange/1/ as shown on Fig.2. The surface of the shaft is machined in a lathe to a final appropriate tolerance and even surface. Lower rotating oil reservoir 7.

Pelton Turbines 6. The distributor is joined to the main spherical valve via a joint. However. and remains closed as long as the distributor is pressurised. The bifurcation is reinforced with external and internal ribs. to transfer the large axial forces to the power house an extension must be welded to the inlet flange. The bearing shell (5) is provided with a throttling edge at the lower end.3b. This is done for reducing the specific pressure on the concrete to avoid crushing and cracking. Air-cooling may however be insufficient especially if the shaft rotational speed relative to the guide bearings is in the high-speed range. which is installed for dismantling purposes. During the stationary circulation the oil flow exists as a continuous thin film along the wall of the rotating reservoir. The distributor is completely embedded in concrete when installed in the power house. From this a bifurcation (6) is made to each of the injectors (4). The main injectors are joined to the bifurcation by means of rigid flange connections. This system consists of one automatically operated needle valve connected to one or two brake jet nozzles. The distributor is provided with a manhole with cover as access for internal inspection and maintenance. Therefore an external cooler is normally provided. The distributor pipe is a welded plate design manufactured completely from fine grain high tensile steel. and one of these with a larger distance from the wall than the other. enters the bearing segments and establishes the load carrying coolant film in the bearing pads. 6. The maximum main stress for this material must be limited to about 200 MPa.2. An automatic relief valve is normally installed on the top of either the distributor entrance section or the dismantling joint. welding of the distributor must be performed with a specified heat treatment. This design is advantages by contributing to keep a uniform velocity profile of the flow. The cooled oil flows downwards along the shaft as it is distributed to the four pockets between the bearing pads. An air stream outside the wall of the rotating reservoir mainly cools the oil layer. two scoops are normally installed. For emergency stop a water jet braking system is provided to obtain a fast reduction of the rotational speed of the runner after the nozzles are closed. This is advantageous under start while the oil layer in the rotating reservoir is thick enough for both scoops to deliver oil from the lower to the upper reservoir. This valve closes automatically when most of the air in the distributor is let out during water filling. This is furnished with a telescope flange connection to the distributor entrance.4 Bend and distributor The distributor pipe (7) for a multijet Pelton turbine/1/ is shown on Fig. Thus the time needed to establish the stationary oil circulation is decreased.7 To keep a certain oil quantity in the rotating reservoir the scoop is set at a predetermined distance from the wall. This valve should be operated only when the main spherical valve upstream of the distributor is closed. The oil film follows the shaft rotation. Because of the steel quality. The distributor is designed to provoke an acceleration of the water flow through the bifurcation towards each of the main injectors. For large turbines however. 6. which are fed via pipes directly from the . A manually operated drain valve is installed underneath close to the inlet flange of the distributor. The slightly conical shape of the wall of the rotating reservoir is ideal for this cooling. The throttling edge controls the oil circulation in the bearing and ensures that the oil pockets in the shell are always filled with oil during operation.

Another Useal ring in the guidance piece seals against the oil pressure in the servomotor.Pelton Turbines 6.2.8 penstock. 8.5 Straight flow injector The straight flow injector with needle servomotor is shown on Fig. A U-seal ring in the needle head seals against the water pressure outside the guiding piece. . The guidance for the needle is the guidance piece (11). For emptying the penstock upstream of the spherical valve a draining system is provided. Elbow lever 10. The inner body contains: the needle. The outflow pipe has its outlet above the water surface in the turbine pit to prevent cavitation during drainage of the penstock. Main injector 15. 7. disc spring column (8) and feedback mechanism. Lid 13. The braking valve is controlled by a solenoid valve operated by an emergency control system actuated by the water pressure from the penstock. Piston rod 16. The beak is provided with two external brackets with self-lubricating bushings for the deflector (7) support. the head (13) and the tip (16). This consists of five parts: a pipe installed just upstream of the spherical valve. 6. Guiding piece 12. Piston 19. servomotor with needle rod (15). Arm Arm with split boss Beak Cap Carrier Cover Deflector Disk spring 9. 4. Nozzle 18. the beak (3) and the nozzle ring (17). Inside the injector two fins to the main body fix the inner cylindrical body (23). a manually operated gate valve with a bypass valve. Spring retainer 23. The injector/1/ consists of three outer parts bolted together. 6. Shield for beak 20. Spring plate 22. Guide 11. 6. 1. one manually operated needle valve in series downstream of the gate valve and an outflow pipe. The seal ring is protected against sand by a synthetic rubber scraper ring. Spindle 21. the main body (14).8 Straight flow injector (Courtesy of Kværner Brug) The needle consists of two parts. 2. Inner injector body 24. Oil box Fig. 6. 3. Needle tip 17. 5.8. Needle head 14.

The piston (18) is made of cast iron. The feedback shaft (20) is passing through one of the structure ribs into the external oil box (24). 6. the needle head (13) and the end of the guiding piece (11) has a volume varying with the piston movement. Fig. Moreover it protects the jet against exit water spray from the runner. A replaceable cast steel shield (19) mounted on the beak protects the jet against exit water from the runner during normal operation. The beak is also lined with stainless steel.9.9 Deflector mechanism (Courtesy of Kværner Brug) The deflector mechanism is shown on Fig. The deflector support frame is connected to the deflector shaft (4). 6. During operation with load alteration and corresponding regulation the feedback system will move the control valve in the control cubicle back to neutral position when the needle has reached correct position. When the servomotor is out of operation and no pressure either from oil or water exists.2. The servomotor cylinder is lined inside with a cast iron bushing which cover the stroke length of the piston. the needle will be in the middle position and the spring discs relieved. the needle head (13). 6. This chamber is vented to the atmosphere through a hole drilled along the guiding piece (11) and corresponding to a drilled hole in the wall of the inner injector body (23) and finally through the structure rib. If the oil pressure should be decreasing towards zero the water pressure will move the needle servomotor towards closed position and the turbine brought to stop if the generator is disconnected from the grid. The deflector shaft (4) is . The governor feedback mechanism is located inside the upstream cap (4). The chamber bounded by the piston rod (15). Disc spring elements and the water pressure from the penstock balance the needle. Due to the high exposure of sand erosion and cavitation the nozzle ring (17). On the upstream side the piston rod is supported in the servomotor cover with a bushing and a U-seal ring against the oil pressure. With this spring design the servomotor will work even though the oil pressure should fall to about 25% of the normal level. The disc spring column (8) will function satisfactorily also when one of the discs is broken. At the end of the shaft the arm (1) is fastened and further connected via a mechanical linkage system to a control cubicle on the turbine floor. The deflector pivot (3) is supported in the beak on water lubricated bearings.6 Deflector mechanism The deflector/1/ has the function to bend the jet away from the runner at load rejections to avoid too high speed increase.Pelton Turbines 6.9 The needle servomotor is double acting and operated with oil pressure from the governor oil system through a control valve. the guiding piece (11) and piston rod (15) with the nut are made of corrosion resistant steel normally 13% Cr 4% Ni. The deflector arc (1) is bolted to the deflector support structure frame (2).

6. The governor deflector servomotor controls the deflectors through rods. pos. Together these parts form a rigid unit with passages for needle servomotor piping and feedback mechanisms and the deflector shafts through the pit cover up to the turbine floor. pos. If babbit metal particles are found in oil samples. (6) on Fig. The wheel pit cover is welded to the upper and lower plate on the turbine housing and forms a rigid support for the turbine guide bearing.3. Moreover. This consists of an upper turbine housing and a lower pit lining. 6.Pelton Turbines 6. Both parts are made of steel plates welded together at site during construction.1 Turbine guide bearing Condition control The first oil change should be done after 3 .3. (7).2 Runner .6 months of operation/1/. The pit lining is cylindrical and the upper turbine housing is externally reinforced by ribs and anchor bolts. pos. In addition a dead band-eliminating servomotor is mounted in the deflector mechanism to prevent play in the governor lever system. To empty the bearing for oil it has to be done at standstill by pumping through the oil level pipe in the bearing housing. cylindrical connections for the distributor inlet flanges are welded to the pit lining. The later oil changes have to be done as required by evaluating oil sample tests. 6.7 Turbine housing The housing of a vertical Pelton turbine/1/ is shown in Fig. Transport rails are mounted on the inspection platform.3 Condition control.3a is conical.6.3a. is designed to carry the weight of the runner and the main injectors during assembly and dismantling. The wheel pit cover pos. (13) on Fig 6. 6. turnbuckle forks and lever (6) which is fastened to the deflector shaft (4). A plane top plate is provided with a flange for support of the turbine guide bearing. the bearing should immediately be dismantled for inspection.2. A seal ring around the deflector shaft bearing housing prevents water and moisture from penetrating into the bearing.3 6. 6.3. The deflector arc (1) is made of stainless corrosion resistant cast steel 13% Cr 4% Ni. The entire housing is embedded in reinforced concrete. The shape of the wetted side of the wheel pit cover is important for leading the exit water effectively away from the runner. The control valve of the needle servomotors is joined by a link connection to feed forward mechanism connected to the deflector servomotor. and a runner cart is provided for the transport of heavy parts in and out of the turbine pit.10 supported in a self-lubricating spherical bearing located in the bearing housing (5) on the top plate floor. (8). The wheel pit cover is filled with concrete except for the canals of embedded pipes leading air from the tail race tunnel to the runner disc. An inspection platform below the runner.

The needle servomotor should be run to neutral mid position and the oil pressure shut off for safety reasons. but replacement should be done as soon as possible to avoid bearing corrosion. The runner inspection is done visually by means of magnaflux and/or dyes penetrant. • A contact thermometer for measuring the temperature of the turbine bearing. The reading instrument is mounted on the wall close to the governor control desk.4 Seal ring in deflector bearing Leakage in this seal does not require immediate replacement of the seal ring. The manometer transmits signals either to the control room or to the operation control centre if the pressure exceeds or falls below certain pre-set values. The seal ring must be provided with a spring of stainless material. The time interval between each inspection is dependent on sand content in the water. 6. The temperature sensor is located in one of the pads of babbit metal. 6. If minor cracks or defects have been formed.3 Main injector with needle servo motor The needle tip and the nozzle should be inspected/1/ with respect to cavitation damage and damage from foreign objects. If the water contains fine silt or sand. To prevent an extensive crack propagation they must be rectified as soon as possible.3.11 The runner should be regularly inspected/1/ to record possible damages from foreign objects in the water. The thermometer is provided with a contact that gives an alarm signal to the control room at a temperature which is normally 5 oC above the highest stable set temperature of the bearing. the needle tips may loose their original shape. If the temperature should rise a further 3 oC. It may be cleaned after closing of the valves for this water supply system from the penstock. these should be removed by grinding and polishing according to advises from the manufacturer.Pelton Turbines 6. 6. By symmetric . 6. The leakage indicators should be regularly inspected. These defects may penetrate up to the surface during the first operation time period. • A manometer for reading the pressure in the distributor. The stable set temperature will vary from one bearing to another. The special shape of the runner buckets makes it difficult to detect material defects just below the surface.3.3. Particular attention should be paid to the area between the buckets. another contact will give automatic emergency shut down. It is of great importance that the nozzle is inspected from the inside.4 Monitoring instruments The turbines are normally equipped with the following instruments: • A contact manometer for reading of penstock pressure just upstream of the spherical valve.5 Filter Filter for breaking system control water supply should be checked and cleaned if necessary.

12 operation (i. Universitetsforlaget. balanced jet forces on the runner) the temperature will however. Moreover the generator assembly cannot start before the turbine shaft alignment is completed. J. Kværner Brug: COURSE III.: Hydraulic Turbines. Brekke. . At first this has to do with the reliability of operation. Another sensor for direct transmission of the temperature reading to the control room is normally also installed in one of the bearing pads. • A resistance thermometer is mounted in the upper oil reservoir with remote display in the control room for reading of the bearing oil temperature. In this case an overflow may occur with oil pollution in the environment. By unsymmetrical operation with a reduced number of jets in action. Kjølle. Nechleba. Bibliography 1. or defects in the oil scoops that may lead to spraying oil so that an oil evaporation occurs. Lecture compendium at NTNU. Ltd. 4.. The civil works. ISBN 82-00-27780-1. the unbalanced jet force must be carried by the turbine bearing. This is again dependent on the completed embedding of the turbine and the completion of cleaning operations. Constable & Co. M.Pelton Turbines 6. England 1957. 1992. A. edition.: Hydraulische Maschinen und Anlagen. • Two oil level switches are installed to give warning signals at high and low oil levels in the bearing.e. the further maintenance and the hydraulic efficiency.: Hydro Machines. Raabe. The dismantling is almost without exception performed in the opposite sequence of assembly. Zweite Auflage der Teile 1 bis 4 in einem Band. 3. Reference 1. 2. The use of the crane in the machine hall as well must be co-ordinated between the parties involved. In this case an increase in the temperature of 5 . be approximately 75 oC. Trondheim. The turbine must in general be ready for embedding in concrete prior to the commencement of the formwork. Low oil level may be caused by oil leakage in the oil reservoir. The great advantage of the Pelton turbine compared with the Francis turbine is its simple maintenance and dismantling. H. VDI-Verlag GmbH 1899. Lecture compendium. Cooling water leakage into the bearing normally causes a too high oil level. Artia-Prague.5 Assembly and dismantling The assembly operation is of great importance to the completed turbine quality.7 oC will occur. 6.: Water Power Machines (in Norwegian). This is also a warning against filling too much oil in the bearing. 1980. 2. as it is essential for ensuring commissioning at the right time. Oslo 1986. the turbine and generator assembly is often directly interdependent and must therefore be carefully co-ordinated. London. Furthermore the progress of the assembly should be carefully planned.

the guide vane cascade (28). the draft tube (34) and into the .Francis Turbines 7. This wide range imply that the hydraulic design of the runner in these turbines differ rather much from the lowest to the highest speed numbers.1 Horizontal Francis turbine Fig. 7. and the Francis turbines are in the range 0. 7. the runner (4). The water flow fills up all canals completely in the guide vane cascade and the runner respectively.1. Therefore the water is under pressure when it enters the runner.1 CHAPTER 7 Francis Turbines Introduction In Chapter 3 the hydro turbines are classified by speed numbers.2 < *Ω < 1. In practise it is normal that turbines with comparatively small dimensions are arranged with horizontal shaft. The Francis turbines may be divided in two groups. In general the Francis turbines have a guide vane cascade encompassing the whole circumference of the runner. which is an axial section through the turbine. the one group with horizontal and the other with vertical shaft. 7. for regulation of the discharge and flow direction before entering the runner. while larger turbines have vertical shaft. The vertical arrangement is normally used also for small dimensions if the tail race water level is above the turbine centre.5.1 Horizontal Francis Turbine A design example of a horizontal Francis turbine is shown in Fig. Adjustable vanes in the cascade create the canals which are equal in shape and size. The water from the supply penstock flows through the scroll casing (26).

Replaceable wear and labyrinth rings 22. Servomotor 14. Runner 4. Stay vanes 9. Draft tube 7. The runner cone 9.Upper bearing for guide vane 26. Bearing cover 22. Rotating oil cylinder 29. Turbine cover 24. The numbered details on Fig. Oil scoop fastened to (14a) and (14) with the opening against the rotating oil in rotating oil cylinder (28) Fig. Guide bearing 14a.2 tail race canal. Bearing pad 20. 7. Draft tube cone 8. 7.1 are: 4.2 Perspective of an axial section through a Francis turbine . Link 23. Servomotor rod 10. Link 33. Shaft sealing box 23. Lever 24. Guide vane stem 30. Bearing for the regulating ring 27. Regulating ring 17.2 Vertical Francis turbine An illustration of a vertical Francis turbine is shown in Fig. Runner seal ring 25. Guide vane lever 32. To obtain an even. 7. Upper cover 13.2. The scroll casing 3. This figure represents a 1. it is of great importance that any sharp edges or any sharp bends in the flow path should never exist. Lower cover 21. Scroll case 28.Bracket for the bearing(14) 15. Guide vanes 12. Runner 7.Francis Turbines 7. Sealing box 14. Stay vane 26. Floor 28. Turbine shaft 16. Lower bearing for guide vane 25. Shaft 5. Regulating ring 34. Guide vane 29. quite undisturbed water flow without thrust losses through the turbine.

3. Staircase and conveying pit 44. Vertical drain pumps 42. where the units are built up in an underground cavern. draft tube cone (5). Governor housing with servomotor and accumulator 36. The other position numbers are listed below. The water flow enters the turbine through the pipe (32). bend (5a) out in the tail race tunnel. The position numbers point to details that are named in the list underneath.3 Power plant with vertical Francis turbines . An illustration of a vertical Francis turbine arrangement is given in Fig.Francis Turbines 7. Auxiliary turbine 40. Pilot control of the governor 37. Valve in the bypass pipe for pressurising the scroll casing before opening the gate valve 35. A vertical section through a unit is shown to the left and a horizontal section across all units in the cavern is shown to the right at the bottom of the figure. Generator (above highest level of the tail water) 45. 7. Emptying the penstock 46. Relief valve and energy dissipation chamber 31. Emptying pipe from the draft tube Fig 7. Tail race pipe from the auxiliary turbine 41. Penstock for auxiliary turbine 39. the gate valve (33). Vertical section Horizontal section 30. scroll casing (1) and further through the guide apparatus and runner. Outlet from energy dissipation chamber 34. Motors for water cooling pumps 43. Ejector pipes 38.3 perspective of an axial section through the turbine.

axial section (Courtesy of example of this type is shown on Fig. The scroll casing is provided with taps for pressure measurements.1 to 7.Francis Turbines 7.4. Many of these components are tailor made. Analogous to Fig. Kværner Brug) 7.1 Scroll casing The water from the penstock is conducted through the scroll casing and distributed around the stay ring and the complete circumference of the guide vane cascade. The openings of the guide vanes are . The stay ring as shown on Fig. 7. The stay vanes are given a favourable hydraulic shape to conduct the water towards the guide vanes with minimal losses. An Fig. scroll casings are also made as a combination of cast steel and steel plates in a welded construction.4 Vertical Francis turbine.2 Guide vane cascade The guide vane cascade is represented by pos. consists of an upper and a lower ring to which the stay vanes (8) are welded. However. The constructions are to some extent time dependent and the different manufacturers construct some details different. 7. drain. These components are: Scroll casing Guide vane cascade Turbine covers Runner Shaft Bearing Shaft seal Regulating mechanism Draft tube 7.4 7.3. air vent outlets and a manhole. and not all of them are found in every turbine. 7. 7. show that these turbine constructions consist of a great number of components.3 the scroll casings are partly or completely embedded in reinforced concrete. 7.4. (9) on Fig. The stay vanes also carry the axial forces inside the scroll casing.3.4. Moreover the turbine constructions depend on the turbine size.7.4.3 Main components and their functions The examples of the building up of Francis turbines in Figs. This type is made for heights of 600 m to 700 m. medium as well as high heads. The scroll casings are normally welded steel plate constructions for turbines at low. In the following considerations only main components/1/ which are vital are dealt with.

Therefore it is common to weld layers of wear resistant stainless steel on the exposed surfaces.3. For high head turbines with sand in the water flow an intense wear is expected. As examples of runners Fig. The vanes are shaped according to hydraulic design specifications and given a smooth surface finish. the turbine bearing and the shaft seal box. 7. the labyrinth ring. This may either be fastened to the covers with screws or clad welded.Francis Turbines 7. 7. Fig. 7. Between the runner and the covers the clearance is also made as small as possible.5 adjustable by the regulating ring (15). (12 and 17) on Fig. For large turbines the labyrinth rings are replaceable for the runners as well. The bearings of the guide vane shafts are lubricated with oil or grease.4. These covers are bolted to the stay ring of the scroll casing.4 Turbine runner The turbine runner pos. the links (22) and levers (23).6 High head Francis turbine . The upper cover supports also the regulating ring bearing.6 shows a photograph of a high head turbine. and they are replaceable. 7. The stationary labyrinth rings fixed to the covers are usually made of Ni-Al bronze. may either be of cast steel or a welded construction where hot pressed plate blades are welded to the cast hub and ring. In most cases the runner is made of stainless steel. 7. They are designed for high stiffness to keep the deformations caused by the water pressure at a minimum.5 Low head Francis turbine Fig. (3) on Fig. The rings for the runners are usually made of stainless steel 13 % Cr 4 % Ni. 7.4.5 shows a photograph of a low head turbine and Fig. The upper and lower cover facings adjacent to the guide vanes are normally lined with high tension stainless steel. This is of great importance for achieving a minimal clearance gap between the guide vane ends and the facing plates of the covers. The lower cover supports the lower labyrinth ring and the draft tube cone. 7.3. The covers are supporting the guide vane trunnion bearings.3 Turbine covers The covers are represented by pos. 7.

7. The pad support ring has four babbit metal bearing surfaces with correctly . However. 7. Low head turbines cannot be provided with a similar pumping device because of low rotational speed. Sand laden water causes a fast seal wear. transformers and bearings. The bolts are made from high tensile strength steel and provided with a centre bore for measurements of elongation during prestressing. is split in two halves and mounted on the upper flange of the upper cover. An oil reservoir is bolted to the turbine shaft as shown on Fig. The bearing house (1) Fig. This bearing is a rather simple and commonly used design and has a simple way of working and a minimal requirement of maintenance. Fig 7. 7.5% has occurred after a relatively short running time. On Fig. The turbine and generator shafts are connected by a flanged joint. the leakage increases and the turbine efficiency decreases. Instead the seal water normally runs through holes in the hub and directly into the draft tube.7. This ring is pumping sufficient power for the cooling water system and prevents water to reach the labyrinth shaft seal. Through outlets in the upper cover filtered water is then provided. 7. This joint may be a bolted reamed or friction coupling where the torque is transferred by means of shear or friction. is manufactured from Siemens Martin steel and has forged flanges in both ends/1/. In a new turbine the seal clearances are small and the leakage flow losses lower than 0. The runner torque is transferred to the turbine shaft through a bolted friction joint or a combined friction and shear joint as shown on Fig.5 Turbine shaft and bearing The turbine shaft Fig. may be different from one manufacturer to the other and depends on the size and speed number.7 Rotating parts of a Francis turbine /1/ The bearing pad support ring (3) consists of two segments bolted together and mounted to the under side of the bearing house. during turbine operation the seals are worn.6 The manufacture however.Francis Turbines 7.8 this oil reservoir (2) is shown together with the construction of the bearing system. 7.7. For large dimensions the bolts of this joint are prestressed by means of heat. This flow is depending on the seal clearances. The runner is provided with a pump ring which is indicated on Fig.7. 7. and for high head turbines an increase of leakage losses of 2 . 7.8. On high head turbines the leakage water is normally utilised as cooling water for the generator.5 %.3. The water flow through the labyrinth seals is a leakage flow and is not utilised by the runner.7.

The seal surfaces are lined with babbit metal. Fig. A riser pipe connected to an oil scoop passes through the bottom of the stationary bearing house and bearing pad support ring.8 Radial bearing of a vertical Francis turbine /1/ The oil volume in the rotating reservoir is regulated by positioning the oil scoop at a certain distance from the reservoir wall.7 shaped leading ramps ensuring stable centring of the turbine shaft. The extension prevents the oil in the housing from rotating with the shaft. The cover is provided with a cylindrical extension sleeve around the shaft reaching to the bottom of the housing.0. A labyrinth seal of this type is suitable for operation in sand laden water because no sand will reach the seal while the turbine is running at normal speed. 7. Finally the oil comes back to the rotating reservoir from where a new circulation round starts.3. The upper part of the housing has a cover (5) split in two halves with inspection openings. This shaft seal is split in two halves and mounted on the upper cover. The bearing pad support ring is surrounded by the oil reservoir. The stagnation pressure from the rotating oil at the inlet end of the scoop. 7.6 Shaft seal The location of the shaft seal is shown at pos.9 Shaft seal of a vertical Francis turbine /1/ At stand still a submerged turbine with open draft tube gate.9.4 mm between the surfaces of the shaft seal and the sleeve (B).Francis Turbines 7. In the pad support ring there are also four oil pockets. enters the bearing segments and establishes the load carrying film in the bearing pads. An example of some details of a certain seal design/1/ is shown on Fig. From the upper reservoir cooled oil flows to the pockets in the pad support ring. forces oil through the riser and cooler to the stationary upper oil reservoir. but leaving a slit for the oil to access the bearing pads.(13) on Fig. Fig. 7. Under rotation the centrifugal forces keep the oil as a layer along the vertical cylindrical wall of the reservoir.7. The sleeve is made of corrosion resistant material and fixed to the shaft. is exposed to a downstream water pressure.4. From these pockets the oil film follows the shaft rotation. and depending on speed and size there are as small radial clearances as 0. the clearances in the seal box will run without water when the turbine is running. 7. With the special pumping ring system mentioned above. This is why the seal box can be given a design without contact between the babbit lined labyrinth and the shaft sleeve.2 . A water leakage flow may then penetrate .

lever and link construction. For very deep submergence of the turbine an inflatable rubber seal ring (A) is installed in the labyrinth seal box. These are without clearance to the rotating parts and therefore subject to certain wear. This leakage water is removed from the box by a siphon pipe to the power house drainage pump sump. This ring transfers the movement to the guide vanes through a rod.10 Regulating mechanism of a Francis turbine /1/ Fig. In some cases this can be stabilised by air supply. Together with the governor it is able to maintain a stable speed of the unit and the frequency in the electrical distribution grid. 7. Water cooling is necessary to a carbon seal and it cannot run dry without damage. The design of the mechanism/1/ is shown in more detail on fig.11 Guide vane regulating system of a vertical Francis turbine /1/ The guide vane mechanism provides the regulation of the turbine output. 7. (15) in Fig. By means of the inflatable rubber seal it is possible to perform the dismantling of the shaft seal box without emptying the draft tube. . 7. 7. A section through a part of the guide vane cascade. This ring is inflated during stand still in order to prevent leakage. the stay vanes and the runner is shown on Fig.3. During operation the air pressure inside the rubber seal is released and the rubber is not in contact with the shaft. At standstill the seal is activated by means of air pressure to compress the seal against the rotating sleeve (B) for establishing a droptight seal.4.11. At certain loads unstable flow may occur in the draft tube downstream of the runner. Instead of the design described above.Francis Turbines 7. 7. 7. This air may be supplied through a separate air supply pipe connected to the shaft seal box.10.8 through the upper labyrinths and the seal box. The turbine governor controls the servomotor which transfers its force through a rod to the regulating ring. the shaft seal box may also be designed with carbon rings.7 Regulating mechanism The regulating mechanism is located by pos. Fig. The guide vane exit area in flow direction is varied by an equal rotation of each of the guide vanes.

7. 7.3. The guide vane lever and regulating ring are connected through links.Francis Turbines 7. The penstock cone and the scroll casing of a submerged turbine can be drained to a level corresponding to the tail water level through the draft tube. For units being dismantled upwards the draft tube cone is made in one piece. The lower part is designed as a dismantling piece and is mounted to a flange on the draft tube bend top. The aim of the draft tube is also to convert the main part of the kinetic energy at the runner outlet to pressure energy at the draft tube outlet. The trunions are positioned on the guide vanes for achieving minimal regulating forces from the hydraulic forces acting on them. 7.4 Drainage and filling arrangements A normal drainage and filling arrangement/1/ is shown in Fig.9 The vane levers are mounted on the upper trunnion and fixed by a wedge. 7. Fig. The inlet part of the upper cone is made of stainless steel. It consists of the draft tube cone and the draft tube steel plate lining. shear pins or pure friction joint.12 shows a draft tube in more detail/1/. 7. 7.13. the upper and lower cone. This design is always used for units where the runner is dismantled downwards. forms the water conduit from the runner to the draft tube outlet. The draft tube lining is completely embedded in concrete. In an intermediate part of the bend however. .8 Draft tube The draft tube (34) on Fig. The draft tube is normally filled tube gate. the draft tube cross sections are decreased instead of increased in the flow direction to prevent separation and loss of efficiency. Fig. This is achieved by increasing the cross section area of the draft tube in the flow direction. These links are connected through selflubricated spherical bearings on trunnions on the regulating ring and the lever respectively.3.12 Draft tube of a vertical Francis turbine /1/ The draft tube cone is a welded steel plate design and consists normally of two parts. It is normally provided with two manholes for inspection of the runner from below.

The unit should be rotated manually to enable inspection of the complete runner circumference. . Labyrinth seal water flow The assessment of wear and control of the labyrinth rings is possible by measuring the labyrinth water flow. RPM shutdown curve The activity is to record the RPM with 30 seconds intervals from the moment of closed guide vanes to standstill of the unit. The misalignment should be recorded at different loads on the unit. The RPM shutdown curve should be drawn from nominal RPM to standstill. 7. Three of the guide vane arms should be dismantled and the guide vanes rotated by hand to open position. The inspection of the inlet is done from the scroll casing.Francis Turbines 7.10 A turbine that is not submerged. The outlet side of the runner should be inspected from the draft tube cone. the draft tube and the scroll casing are filled from the penstock. Shaft alignment The activity is to record the shaft misalignment by means of a micrometer dial instrument against the shaft at the turbine bearing top.5 Condition control Routine inspections Routine inspections means visual inspection of the complete turbine: Fig. 7. Runner Visual inspection of the runner is required to record possible cavitation and erosion damages as well as cracks in vanes. Leakage control of guide vanes The activity is to record the RPM with the spherical valve open and the guide vanes closed.13 Draining and filling system of a Francis turbine /1/ look for possible leakages inspect bolted connections drain pumps should be inspected and level switches tested.

It may however happen during start and stop. 7. The objective is to make those duties as convenient and easy as possible. .6 • • • • • • • • • Monitoring instruments The turbine is provided with instruments usually as presented in the following list: A manometer connected to the scroll casing A manometer connected to the penstock upstream of the main valve A pressure switch with two minimum settings connected to the penstock upstream of the main valve A mano-vacuum meter directly mounted to the draft tube cone A manometer connected to the leakage pipe A limit switch for signal of stand still seal on A contact thermometer in for high and critical high temperature control A remote thermometer for oil temperature measurements in the bearing housing A level switch for high and low oil level warning. If water runs into the upper cover it is removed by a drain pump.11 Scroll casing and draft tube The activity is to carry out inspection of painting for possible corrosion and ensure that all manometer connection openings are open and that the manhole cover is drop tight after completed inspection. Guide vane mechanism The guide surfaces of the covers should be inspected from the scroll casing and possible wear recorded. Look for possible leakages in the guide vane bearings. This hangs together with cooling water leakage The bearing is provided with: 7.7 Assembly and dismantling The assembly and dismantling is important part of the design of the turbines and the arrangement of the installation. Wear will occur sooner or later in the guide vane mechanism as well as in the upper and lower runner labyrinths depending on the water quality and the operating head. Turbine bearing The same activities as for Pelton turbines.Francis Turbines 7. Visual inspection of the surfaces of the guide vanes. Check the connection between regulating ring and the servomotor. Shaft seal box During operation water will normally not flow over the shaft seal box. Look for slacks in the bearings of the guide vane arms and links. The clearances between the guide vanes and the cover surfaces and the clearance between guide vanes should be checked.

Universitetsforlaget . Trondheim. London. Ltd. Assembly or dismantling downwards requires a comparatively large opening below the scroll casing. 1992. Volume 1 and 2. A. . These turbines however. Oslo. G. Lecture Compendium. 3.: Hydraulic Turbines. A widely used method is to dismantle the main parts downwards and then lift them up on the floor in the machine hall by using the main crane in the power station. 5. Dismantling of the upper cover is seldom required. Kjølle. Artia-Prague. Raabe.: Fluid Mechanics of Turbomachinery. Nechleba. Dover Publication. Furthermore the turbine bearing should be easily removable.. 1965. H. are not so much exposed to wear in the labyrinths and other components. J. This may be difficult to achieve with low head turbines with large dimensions because the load carrying concrete around the scroll casing occupies space needed for access. and the complete turbine must be dismantled upwards after prior removal of the generator rotor. Lecture compendium at NTNU. Brekke.Francis Turbines 7. The draft tube cone is often embedded in concrete. USA. Constable & Co.: Hydro Machines. Possible damage to the surface adjacent to the guide vanes is easily repaired on site. VDI-Verlag GmbH 1989.: Hydraulische Maschinen und Anlagen. 2. M. Oslo 1986 Bibliography 1. Norway 1980. F. The parts in question are the runner. England 1957 4. Zweite Auflage der Teile 1 bis 4 in einem Band.: Water Power Machines (in Norwegian).12 Medium and high head Francis turbines with free access to the draft tube cone provide good opportunities for fast dismantling and assembly of vital parts. Kværner Brug: COURSE III. lower cover and the labyrinth rings. New york. References 1. Wislicenus.

Kaplan Turbines 8.1 Arrangement A vertical section through a Kaplan unit is shown on Fig. The generator (7) is arranged above the turbine.1. 8. the guide apparatus (2). In this way the generator dimensions as well become comparatively smaller and cheaper.1 Vertical section of a Kaplan turbine plant (Courtesy of Escher Wyss) . The comparatively high efficiencies at partial loads and the ability of overloading is obtained by a co-ordinated regulation of the guide vanes and the runner blades to obtain optimal efficiency for all operations. Accordingly the runner diameter becomes relatively small and the rotational speed more than two times higher than for a Francis turbine for the corresponding head and discharge.0. and in most cases above the highest level of the tail water. 8. The water flows from the scroll casing through the stay ring (6).1 Kaplan turbine construction 8. The Kaplan turbines are fairly suitable for the purpose of three main reasons: • relatively small dimensions combined with high rotational speed • a favourable progress of the efficiency curve • large overloading capacity The runner has only a few blades radial oriented on the hub and without an outer rim. the runner and the draft tube (13) into the tail water basin. The axial thrust bearing (8) is loaded with axial Fig. From the upstream basin the water flows into the scroll casing (4).1. The water flows axially through. This allows for higher flow velocities without great loss of efficiency. 8. The runner blades have a slight curvature and cause relatively low flow losses.1 CHAPTER 8 Kaplan Turbines Introduction Kaplan turbines have been developed to be the most employed type of turbines for low heads and comparatively large discharges when the speed number *Ω > 1.

Scroll casing 6a. Upper ring 6b. which then have to carry all the axial forces. Generator shaft 11. Cam 27. Turbine shaft 10. and 12b. Rod for force transfer from (11a) 19.1. 8. Turbine govrnor 25. Oil collector 13. In many cases this bearing is arranged upon the upper turbine cover. The name of the main components are numbered and listed beside and below the figure. Coaxial pipes 24. Draft tube 14.2 forces from all the rotating parts. Lever spider for force transfer from (17) 17.2 Vertical section of a Kaplan turbine unit (Courtesy of Escher Wyss) . Feed back lever 32. valve for high pressure oil to runner servomotor 28. Stay vanes 6c. 11a. Crown 2. Runner vane servo. Reg.2 Kaplan turbine construction A vertical section through a Kaplan turbine unit is shown on Fig. Oil inlet 12a.2. 1a. Outer cover 33c. Lower ring 7. Servomotor piston 12. Guide vanes 4. Axial-thrust bearing 9. Generator 8. Links from (14) to (15) 16. Crown cover 20. oil chambers 12c. Servomotor for guide vane cascade 26. Runner vanes 1b. Inner cover Fig. Regulating ring for runner vanes 15. Accumulator 30. Guide vane cascade 3. Rotating oil collector 22. 8. Lining for for feed back lever 31. Conveying of rod (17) 21. Oil pump 29. Turbine cover 33b.Kaplan Turbines 8. 8. and 23.

Kaplan Turbines 33d. Shaft sealing box 37.3 Guide vane lever Stationary cover lining of turbine shaft 8.2 Main components and their functions The Kaplan turbines have the following main components: .scroll casing and stay ring .co-operation of regulating the runner blades and guide vanes . The manufacturer of the turbine determines the shape and makes the drawings of these models.regulating mechanism of the runner blades . wooden models are used against which the concrete is poured.covers . 42. For higher heads the hydraulic pressure may be too high for the concrete to withstand the load. Outer shroud 39a.runner . 8. and the steel plate shells are welded to the stay ring.guide apparatus .3.draft tube 8.4 shows a picture of the phase of Fig.runner chamber . Regulating ring 36. In addition the hydraulic forces are transferred through the stay ring and the stay vanes which are anchored to the concrete with large prestressed stay bolts. The stay vanes are normally made of welded steel plates and filled with concrete.3 Kaplan scroll casing of steel plates . The cross sections of the scroll casing are normally of circular shape. 8. The quality of a water tight and even surfaces of the scroll casings is required to be the same as for draft tube bends of concrete. Radial bearing 38. 8.30 meters are made of concrete. In such cases scroll casings of steel plates are designed in a way analogous to that of Francis turbines as shown on Fig.runner blade servomotor .turbine bearing . Fig.2. To make these type of scroll casings with the required accuracy.1 Scroll casing The scroll casings for lower heads 25 . The vanes in the stay ring conduct the water towards the guide vanes.shaft sleeve and seal box . Horizontal supports 41. Base ring for bearin foot 35.turbine shaft . 8.

Kaplan Turbines 8.3 Covers The Kaplan turbines are usually provided with an inner cover in addition to an upper and a lower cover.2 The guide vane cascade The guide vane cascade of Kaplan turbines are constructed in the same way as for Francis turbines.2. are factors which must be considered. The lower part of the concrete scroll casing is completed. As a general guideline four blades can be used up to heads of 25 . Fig. The inner cover is bolted to the upper cover and forms a shield from upper flow conducting surface and downwards to the runner.4 Erection of a stay ring /1/ The lower turbine cover is combined with the runner chamber by a flanged connection. This increases the hub diameter and the shape of the hub becomes more complicated. Kaplan turbines have also been designed with 8 blades for heads even higher than 70 meters. 8.The upper stay bolts are installed and will be embedded together with the rest of the scroll casing. It is not however. The details for adjusting the blades can be designed in different ways.4 installation of the stay ring. The blade length and shape as well as the specific blade loading and location in relation to the downstream water level. six blades up to 50 meters and seven blades up to heads of 60 . 8.30 meters. 8. . The vanes are manufactured of steel plate material and the trunnions are welded to them. and they are given a smooth surface finish.4 Runner The runner in a Kaplan turbine is a very challenging part to design. Furthermore this serves as a support for the guide vane mechanism with the regulating ring. only the head that determines the number of blades.2. 8. and the efficiency may suffer.70 meters. the turbine bearing and the shaft seal box with standstill seal. The vane design is purposely to obtain optimal hydraulic flow conditions. five blades up to 40 meters. Increasing blade number for increasing head may create problems because of lack of space and consequently high stresses in some details of the construction. In the sense of operation a regulating ring rotates the guide vanes through the same angles simultaneously when adjustments follow changes of the turbine load.2.

The slope of the runner blades (1a) are adjusted by the rotary motion activated by the force from the piston (11a) through the rod (17). whereas the annular opening between the pipes (22) and (23) conveys oil to and from the piston top side. good reasons for localising the servomotor inside the hub.5. The oil pressure inside the hub is kept higher than the outside water pressure to prevent water penetration into the oil. 8. and the details of a such construction are dealt with in the chapter of bulb turbines. The inner tube (22) conveys oil to and from the lower side of the piston (11a).2. This is done to keep a small clearance gap between the adjustable blade ends and the hub for all operating conditions. An example of the former type is shown schematically on Fig. . 8.2. The bolts joining the turbine shaft flange and the runner are prestressed by means of heat for the largest bolt dimensions.5 Runner blade servomotor The servomotor for the rotary motion of the runner blades is either a construction part of the turbine shaft or located inside the hub.6 Regulating mechanism of the runner blades An example of the regulating system of the runner blade slope is shown on Fig. The torque of the runner is transferred to the turbine shaft through either a pure friction joint connection or through a combined shear bolt and friction joint. which is a concept from Escher Wyss. The oil supply to the servomotor (11) is entered at the upper end of the generator shaft (10).6. This servomotor may consist of a moving cylinder and a fixed piston integrated with the hub.6.70 % of the runner diameter. The cylindrical extension of the upper end of the turbine shaft (9) serves as a servomotor cylinder (11) whereas the lower flange of the generator shaft serves as cover. With increasing head the hub diameter is increasing from approximately 40% to 65 . The oil is conveyed to the respective sides of the servomotor through two coaxial pipes (22 and 23) inside the hollow generator shaft. There are however. The rod (17) moves in the two bearings (20). 8. 8.5 The outside of the hub is spherically shaped/1/ as shown on Fig. Fig.5 Rotating parts of a Kaplan turbine /1/ The hub is completely filled with oil to provide reliable lubrication of moving parts.Kaplan Turbines 8. The conversion from axial piston movement to rotating blade movement is carried out by a link and lever construction. The oil is supplied through the entrance arrangement (12) with the two chambers (12a) and (12b) at the top of the unit. 8. 8.

providing access to the lower guide . 8. To reduce the magnitude of such erosion attacks and to ease the subsequent repair. The gap between the runner blade ends and the runner chamber wall is approximately 0. Fig.8 Runner chamber The clearance gap between the outer blade ends and the chamber wall is essential to keep as small as possible for all blade inclinations.2. on account of installation and dismantling aspects.8.Kaplan Turbines 8.1% of the runner diameter.7 has an access tunnel around the complete circumference. This is carried out by a rod and lever transfer from the servomotor (25) to the cam (26) which is turned according to the movement of the servomotor piston (25). Fig. Therefore the runner chamber is made spherical below the rotation centre line of the blade trunnions.6 Cooperation of regulating the guide vanes and the runner blades The turbine governor operates directly on servomotor (25) which executes the movement of the guide vanes (3) shown on Fig.6 Regulating mechanism Ideally the spherical shape should have been maintained above the blade rotation centre as well However. 8. On fig. this part is being made cylindrical as shown on fig.6 8. The spool valve (27) receives pressure oil either directly from the oil pump or from the accumulator which is energised by an oil pump. Existing erosions may then be repaired by welding on site.6. At the lower end this chamber is welded to the draft tube via an extruded steel profile. 8. The runner chamber is reinforced by external ribs. The turbine shown on fig. the runner chamber is normally made of cast or welded stainless chromium nickel steel with higher cavitation resistance than carbon steel. Cavitation erosion on the runner chamber may occur during the running time of the turbine. The movement of the servomotor thriggs and controls the slope adjustment of the runner vanes.7 Runner chamber The runner chamber is normally completely or partly embedded in concrete. 8. In this way the spool valve (27) is moved out of the neutral position and the servomotor piston (11a) is then put to movement by the oil pressure supply.7. 8.7 the length of the runner chamber is indicated by H. which is a concept of Escher Wyss.2. 8.

9. 8. is made of Siemens Martin steel and is provided with integrally forged flanges in both ends/1/. 8. In the lower part of the runner chamber there is a tap for connection of a vacuum meter. The only detail that deviates from the normal Francis turbine bearing is the back thrust slide ring A. This effect increases with increasing speed.8 Turbine bearing /1/ . The seal elements against the turbine shaft consist of specially made split carbon rings which are pressed against the shaft by means of spiral springs.2. In combination with this tunnel there is a manhole access to the runner chamber for inspection of the runner blades. The shaft which is passing through the seal box is therefore provided with a wear sleeve of stainless steel. The back thrust ring is made of bronze and is provided with lubrication grooves ensuring a good distribution of oil.9 Turbine shaft The turbine shaft Fig.11 Shaft seal box A commonly applied seal box for Kaplan turbines is the carbon ring box of a type as shown on Fig. the runner is pumping the water against the downstream water pressure.Kaplan Turbines 8. In the lower part holes are plugged by means of removable stainless steel plugs. With the guide vanes closed. By load rejections the turbine is subject to a vertical force acting upwards and this may cause a lifting of the unit. 8.8 and the function is described in the chapter of Francis turbines/1/. The seal box is exposed to a fluctuating pressure from the turbine waterside and the rings must be located with this in mind. Low head Kaplan turbines are more exposed to lifting than high head Kaplan turbines. Fig. 8. In this way a vertical upward force is created because the pressure above the runner becomes lower compared with the pressure below it. These turbines also have a comparatively higher speed increase at load rejections. The rotating oil reservoir is bolted to the turbine shaft. and a load carrying oil film is then attained. a wear sleeve made of stainless material is clamped around the shaft.7 vane bearings.10 Turbine bearing The bearing design is shown on Fig. 8. The back thrust ring then hit the underside of the bearing pads which transfer the vertical force to the base of the bearing. 8. The turbine shaft is exposed to certain wear by the seal rings.2.2. In the area of the shaft seal box. 8.5. which is bolted to the bottom of the rotating oil reservoir.

The sensor is connected to an alarm in the control room.9 Carbon ring seal box Fig.8 Fig.Kaplan Turbines 8. 8. This shaft seal is used for small and middle size turbines with moderate circumferential shaft speed. The water has a relatively large velocity when it leaves the runner. and a good sealing effect is obtained. the outlet velocity at the draft tube outlet should be as uniform as possible. Because the kinetic energy represents a high fraction of the total energy. To obtain this with a minimum of losses. The sealing compound seals against a stainless sleeve (2) which is clamped to the turbine shaft (1). It consists of the support ring (7). seal housing (8).12 Draft tube The draft tube consists of a draft tube cone and a draft tube plate lining through the bend. is described in the chapter of Francis turbines.10.2. The inflatable rubber seal ring (5) which is used as a standstill seal. 8. gland (4) and sealing compound (3). Leakage from the seal box is collected in a sump in the inner cover and is pumped to the station sump by float controlled pumps. The shaft seal box is mounted on the inner turbine cover (6). 8. This kinetic energy must be converted to pressure energy in the draft tube. By means of a gland (4) the sealing compound may be compressed. the shape of the draft tube is of great importance for the hydraulic Fig. 8.11 Draft tube erection /1/ . Too hard compression may cause heating between the shaft sleeve and the sealing compound.10 Compound seal box /1/ A simpler seal box design/1/ is shown on Fig. 8. To monitor this a temperature sensor is mounted in the seal housing.

Instead an intake gate is installed at the top of the penstock. the upper part and the inner curve surface are always lined with steel plates. Drainage of inlet pipe and scroll casing is carried out by means of a common drainage pipe after the intake gate is closed.9 efficiency.4 Condition control The general principles for condition control are the same as for Francis turbines. . 8. 8. Particular attention should be given to possible cavitation erosion and scratches on the blades as well as leaks around the blade flange against the hub. it is normally not a main inlet valve upstream of the turbine. A similar arrangement usually exists for a Kaplan turbine plant as well.2 Runner chamber The narrow gap between runner and the runner chamber should be checked if foreign objects may have passed the gap and made scratches in the chamber.4 Shaft seal box For bulb turbines at standstill it should be checked that the water does not flow out of the box along the shaft into the turbine bearing. 8.Kaplan Turbines 8. Because of low head and large dimensions.11. It is therefore a requirement to make the draft tube as shallow as possible. Further considerations are therefore connected only to a few specific details. The formwork and the pouring of concrete are made as simple as possible by making the walls straight with single curved surfaces only. The cone.3 Guide vane mechanism For guide vane mechanism with individual vane servomotors on bulb turbines it should be checked that the vanes have an identical movement. is welded from steel plate through the bend. 8.5 Monitoring instruments The instrumentation consists mainly of the same components as for Francis turbines and is described in Chapter 7. 8.4. The inlet pipe may however be drained through the turbine down to draft tube level. 8. The draft tube shown on Fig. The rest is normally made of unlined concrete. The draft tube of a Kaplan turbine has a somewhat special shape. 8.1 Runner The runner should be inspected both from above and below.4.4.3 Drainage and filling arrangement A normal drainage and filling arrangement is shown in chapter 7 about Francis turbines. The units have comparatively large dimensions and the civil works are expensive.4. 8.

Ltd. The inner cover is bolted to the outer cover. This part is cut loose from the concrete and is pulled back. Dover Publication. Zweite Auflage der Teile 1 bis 4 in einem Band. 1992. it must be possible to dismantle a part of the runner chamber. Brekke.12 Runner hanging device /1/ 4.: Fluid Mechanics of Turbomachinery. Constable & Co. Lecture compendium at NTNU. 3. England 1957 Fig. London. Oslo 1986 Bibliography 1. Kjølle.: Hydraulic Turbines.Kaplan Turbines 8. J. 2. M.. New york. Nechleba. Therefore these parts can not be dismantled.: Water Power Machines (in Norwegian). Wislicenus.6 Assembly and dismantling The cone and the runner chamber of a Kaplan turbine are normally completely or partly embedded in concrete.10 8. Dismantling of the guide vanes may take place after the outer cover is lifted above the longest upper trunnion of the guide vanes. A. H. 1965. F. VDI-Verlag GmbH 1989. The parts in question for dismantling are first and foremost the inner cover and the runner. The smallest diameter of the outer cover is dimensioned to allow the runner to be lifted after dismantling of the inner cover. 5.: Hydraulische Maschinen und Anlagen. G. Universitetsforlaget . Norway 1980. Lecture Compendium.12. Volume 1 and 2. Trondheim. By assembly or dismantling the runner may hang either by means of the brackets bolted to the runner chamber below the runner or by means of brackets bolted to the lower cover/1/ as shown on Fig. . References 1. The blade may then be dismantled. pulled out and may be taken out through the draft tube. Raabe. USA. 8. 8. Kværner Brug: COURSE III. ArtiaPrague. To replace a runner blade.: Hydro Machines. Oslo. Consequently all dismantling of the turbine therefore must be done upwards through the stator of the generator after removal of the generator rotor.

9. The water flows axially towards the unit in the centre of the water conduit and passes the generator. the guide vanes. 9. A main difference from the Kaplan turbine is moreover that the water flows with a mixed axial-radial direction into the guide vane cascade and not through a scroll casing. Contrary to other turbine types this results in a conical guide vane cascade.1 Bulb turbine.Bulb Turbines 9.generator hatch .draft tube cone . The guide vane spindles are inclined (normally 60o) in relation to the turbine shaft. Fig.2 Main components The Bulb turbine consists of the following main components: .rotating parts Fig. It is characterised by having the essential turbine components as well as the generator inside a bulb. runner and draft tube into tale race channel.1 by a vertical section through the unit. 9.1 CHAPTER Bulb Turbines 9 Introduction The Bulb turbine is a reaction turbine of Kaplan type which is used for the lowest heads. and it may also have different numbers of blades depending on the head and water flow.stay shield . the main stays. The Bulb turbine runner is of the same design as for the Kaplan turbine. 9. 9.2 shows the turbine design in more detail. from which the name is developed.runner chamber .stay cone .1 General arrangement A general arrangement of a Bulb turbine plant/1/ is shown in Fig. General arrangement /1/ .

2. 9.2 Bulb turbine (Courtesy of Kværner Brug) The total weight and the hydraulic forces are transferred to the surrounding concrete through the stay cone via the two main stay vane structures. These parts are located in the centre of the water flow and forms the inner water conduit contour together with the runner hub. To the downstream end of the inner stay cone the inner guide ring is bolted as shown on Fig.2.9. An inner stay cone (3) and outer stay cone (6) are welded to the main stays.2. Fig. Fig.Bulb Turbines 9.1.2 Runner chamber and draft tube cone The runner chamber is the connecting part between the outer stay cone and the draft tube cone. The downstream end of the outer cone is provided with a flange Fig. Vertical section(Courtesy of Kværner Brug) to which the runner chamber is bolted. 9. There are one lower (1) and one upper (5) main stay. Two side stays (4) and (7) on Fig. 9. The dynamic as well as the static forces from the turbine and the generator are transferred through the structure to the building foundation. 9.4.2.3.2 - turbine bearing shaft seal box guide vane mechanism 9.3 Stay cone and draft tube. This outer stay cone forms a part of the outer water conduit contour and is embedded in concrete together with outer parts of the main stays. 9. 9. 9.1 Stay cone A longitudinal section through a stay cone structure and draft tube/1/ is shown in Fig. are located on each side of the bulb upstream of the main stays for stiffening the bulb and avoid resonant vibrations. The generator bulb is bolted to the upstream end of the inner stay cone as indicated on Fig. .

The shields are provided with a manhole for inspection and possible maintenance of the space between them.3 Generator hatch The generator hatch (11) on Fig.4 Stay shield Fig. 9. 9. The shields are bolted to the bulb and connected to each other by screw stays for stiffness. This type of connection is necessary to allow for a certain axial movement of the runner chamber and the outer guide ring because of elongation/contraction due to temperature changes. The length of the steel cone lining is determined by requirements to maximum water velocity at the exit and to avoid damage to the concrete. 9. They form an even wall for the water flow and the stay structure is streamlined at the upstream end to prevent undesired vortex formation.2. A cylindrical steel mantel with a flange on top is provided for the hatch cover and seal mounting.5 Rotating parts The rotating parts are shown on Fig.4 is normally a part of the turbine delivery.5 and consists of: -runner -turbine shaft Fig.Bulb Turbines 9. The hatch consists of a perforated part which forms the outer water conduit contour in the hatch opening. It is located above the generator and provides access to the generator for assembly or dismantling tasks. 9. As the unit’s bulb part will rise and lower with filling and draining of the turbine.4 Cross section of stay cone (Courtesy of Kværner Brug) The stay shields are located between the generator access shaft and the turbine main stay. 9.3 The draft tube cone consists of two or more straight welded steel cones and is embedded in concrete. The upstream end is connected to the runner chamber through a flexible telescope connection.2. the seal joint between mantel and hatch cover must allow for a vertical movement of the mantel. 9.5 Bulb turbine rotating parts (Courtesy of Kværner Brug) . They are freely supported against the access way and the main stay to allow for axial movements.2. 9.

The servomotor consists of a fixed piston and an axially moving cylinder and link supports. One end is connected to the runner hub and the other to the generator shaft.feedback mechanism and oil piping . clampring.2 The turbine shaft The turbine shaft is made of forged Siemens Martin steel and has flanges in both ends. The blades are designed with flanges and connected to trunnions and levers. 9. . A photo of a bulb turbine runner is shown on Fig. The servomotor for moving the blades is normally located inside the hub as shown on Fig. One type as shown in Fig. 9. These joints are pure friction joints.1 The runner The runner/1/ is similar to a Kaplan runner and has normally three to five blades made of stainless steel.2.8 is however. links and blade levers are located inside the hub.7.2.Bulb Turbines 9. 9.6.5.5. especially for the Bulb turbines/1/. 9.6 Shaft seal box Several types of shaft seal boxes are in use. 9. 9.oil transfer unit from rotating to stationary parts Fig.shaft seal cam.4 . wear ring and oil thrower ring .2.turbine bearing oil thrower ring .6 Runner hub (Courtesy of Kværner Brug) 9.

A rubber ring is mounted on the upstream end of the shaft and seals against the seal box cover. The wear rings are glued to the seal ring. Possible water leakage into the seal box is drained through a pipe to the pump sump.This is movable and supported in the adjustment ring by means of a membrane. A thrower ring is mounted on the shaft to prevent water leakage along the shaft.8 Shaft seal box (Courtesy of Kværner Brug) . In addition allowance must be made for wear of the seal surfaces. Fig. According to the wear range of wear rings the adjustment range of the seal box should be 8 .5 This box has radial seal surfaces consisting of a stainless hardened wear disk and two wear rings made of teflon type fibres.. The seal box is provided with four springs which are pressing the wear seal rings against the seal surface to prevent leakage when the balance system is out of operation.when filling the turbine. This may be pushed against/pulled away from the cam by means of push/pull jacking screws. The auxiliary seal is located in the support ring. e. 9. Fig.g.Bulb Turbines 9. This is necessary for the shaft movement in the downstream direction when the unit is loaded.7 Runner assembly in the workshop The adjustment ring is bolted to the support ring and may be axially adjusted by means of double acting jacking screws.6 mm.10 mm. The membrane allows the seal ring to move axially 5 .9. When this ring is in contact with the cam the wear seal rings may be dismantled without draining the unit. The wear disk is bolted to a cam fixed to the shaft.

This consists of a container which is filled with oil when the turbine is running. 9. 9. As soon as the shaft resumes . The bearing housing (1) is supported in the inner guide ring Fig. The float box is provided with a window for observation of the oil circulation while the turbine is running. The oil housing (3) is bolted to the upstream end of the bearing housing.6 9.9. The automatic start lubrication unit (8) is mounted on the top of the bearing housing.9. The oil scoop (5) and the box (6) are also located inside the oil housing.Bulb Turbines 9. The bearing is sturdy and simple in operation. By moving these wedges axially the bearing housing may be vertically adjusted. by means of two yokes and two support stays and rests normally on six wedges. Fig. When the shaft stops the oil content is kept in the container by a support device held by the shaft.9 Turbine bearing (Courtesy of Kværner Brug) The bearing pad shell (2).9. The oil reservoir (4) is fixed to the shaft. consists of an upper and a lower part. The bearing housing is split horizontally.2. These are “floating” in the bearing housing where a radial locking pin in the upper part prevents the shells from rotation. An oil thrower ring (7) is fixed to the shaft to prevent oil from seeping out of the bearing along the shaft in the downstream end. Fig. The surface of the lower supporting shell and a surface in each end of the upper bearing shell are lined with babbit metal. 9.2. Maintenance will normally consist of oil change only.7 Turbine bearing An example of a bearing design/1/ is shown in Fig.

the reservoir draws oil from the lower half of the oil housing. The distribution sleeve is fixed to the capsule around the generator shaft end and is provided with pipe connections for oil supply and return as well as leakage oil.9 The guide vane mechanism Two different systems have been used for operating the guide vanes. By means of a link ring a simultaneous movement of the pilot valves for the guide vane servomotors is achieved.10.8 The feedback mechanism and oil piping The feedback mechanism and oil transfer piping are located in the shaft centre. 9.7 rotation the support is removed and the content is tilted. Therefore a bypass is provided for taking the excess oil back to the oil housing top.1 The oil transfer unit The oil transfer unit is located at the upstream end of the generator shaft and has one fixed and one rotating part consisting of a distribution sleeve and distribution trunnion respectively. 9.2. level float and temperature sensors as well. How the servomotors are supplied with or drained for oil is shown in section A . The bearing is provided with miscellaneous filling openings. This bypass flow is controlled by a float switch inside the float box (6).Bulb Turbines 9. The sediment collector (9) is located below the bearing housing. The oil in the container is then distributed on the bearing surface. an oil tank (12) is located beside the bearing. Normally more oil than required for lubrication is circulating through the oil tank. oil level indicators.10. turbine shaft and generator shaft respectively. To increase the oil volume to more than the volume of the oil housing.A on Fig. As soon as the oil layer is sufficiently thick. . The inner pipe is axially movable and follows the servomotor movement. When the shaft and oil reservoir starts to rotate. 9. the oil scoop picks up oil and delivers it to the float box. 9. Kværner Brug has designed a system where each particular vane has its own servomotor as shown in Fig.8. The transfer piping consists of an inner and an outer concentric oil pipe running through the whole shaft length. The inner pipe continues through the oil transfer unit at the upstream end. The movement is governed by the valves controlling the opening/closing of the guide vanes.2. The outer oil pipe is mounted by means of flange connections to the runner hub. then to the oil tank and the bearing pad. and it is supported in the outer pipe and connected to the runner servomotor cylinder via an yoke. 9. The distribution sleeve is provided with a bracket having a measurement scale where the runner servomotor position may be read. shall be separated before the oil returns to the oil housing.2. All dirt particles which are trapped in the oil during circulation in the bearing. A pointer mounted to the upstream end is moving along a measurement ruler showing mechanically the servomotor position at any time. The rotating shaft transports this oil further to the bearing surface.

A regulating ring with three main servomotors is shown on Fig. 9. 9. Due to the conical arrangement of the guide vanes the lever link system must have spherical bearings with large angle movement.3 Condition control The general principles for condition control are the same as for the Francis turbines.Bulb Turbines 9.8 The high pressure hoses are connected to the oil pressure system of the unit.10 Guide vane mechanism with single servomotors (Courtesy of Kværner Brug) single vanes may be operated separately and thus jammed object may easily be flushed out of the guide vane system. the remaining vanes can be closed without any damage. The connection between the levers and the vanes is designed as friction joints. the total price will approximately be the same as for the regulating ring system which is the other method for moving the guide vanes. This is done to avoid damage to parts if one or several vanes are stuck or if foreign objects are caught between vanes. The disadvantages of this system are the assembly and extensive adjustment work. The advantages of this system is that even if one guide vane is stuck. The same will apply if a foreign object is caught and jammed between two vanes during closing. However. The regulating ring system with links and levers is of the same type as for Francis turbines. If required. A disadvantage may be that large weight of the regulating ring and possible slack in bearings can make the governing inaccurate. the remaining vanes can be moved without any damage. 9.11. Fig. Further . The friction joint makes it possible for the vane lever to move with the remaining parts of the guide vanes connected to the regulating ring even if the adjacent vane is stuck.

which triggers alarm or alternatively stop signal at too low pressure A contact manometer giving alarm: Pressurised water in the shaft seal box upon start of the unit A float switch for alarm for high water level due to too large leak in the shaft seal box A contact thermometer for reading of oil temperature in the bearing housing.1 Runner The runner should be inspected both from above and below. one for alarm at high temperature and one for disconnection for the unit on further temperature rise . 9.3.9 considerations are therefore connected only to a few specific details.3.Bulb Turbines 9.3 Guide vane mechanism Fig.4 • • • • • • Monitoring instruments The turbine is normally equipped with the following instrumentation: A manometer connected to the upstream end of the generator bulb A vacuummeter connected to the runner chamber downstream of the runner A contact manometer for reading of the pressure in the shaft seal box water pressure pipe. Particular attention should be given to possible cavitation erosion and scratches on the blades as well as leaks around the blade flange against the hub. 9. The thermometer has two adjustable contacts.3. 9. 9.4 Shaft seal box For Bulb turbines at standstill it should be checked that the water does not flow out of the box along the shaft into the turbine bearing.2 Runner chamber The narrow gap between runner and the runner chamber should be checked if foreign objects may have passed the gap and made scratches in the chamber.3. 9. 9.5 Generally for Bulb turbines Special attention should be paid to changes in the sound when the unit is in operation.3. 9.11 Regulating ring /1/ For guide vane mechanism with individual vane servomotors on bulb turbines it should be checked that the vanes have an identical movement.

By removing the upper half access to the runner is obtained. Then necessary stairs and floors around the guide vane and the runner chamber may be erected. Volume 1 and 2.: Hydro Machines.: Fluid Mechanics of Turbomachinery. Brekke. F. Artia-Prague. Oslo 1986 Bibliography 1.5 Assembly and dismantling Among the large main parts of the bulb turbine it is only the runner which is normally needed to dismantle. Lecture Compendium. The stay shields are adapted against bulb and outer water conduit contour. Lecture compendium at NTNU. London. Dover Publication. The runner chamber is split axially horizontal in two halves.. Kjølle. Finally the generator hatch dome plate and cover are installed. Kværner Brug: COURSE III. New york. The shields are mounted as soon as the generator bulb and penstock are completed. References 1. Bearing and seal box can easily be dismantled. A. Norway 1980. 1. Nechleba.Bulb Turbines 9. 1992. 4. Constable & Co. 1965. G. England 1957 3. Zweite Auflage der Teile 1 bis 4 in einem Band. Raabe. 2. VDI-Verlag GmbH 1989. USA.: Hydraulische Maschinen und Anlagen. The guide vanes cannot be dismantled without extensive work. Ltd. H. M. Oslo. Repairs of these and the guide surfaces should be performed at the plant. . Wislicenus.: Water Power Machines (in Norwegian).10 • • A remote indication thermometer with two temperature sensors for reading of temperature in lower bearing pad A level float for alarm on low oil level 9.: Hydraulic Turbines. Trondheim. Universitetsforlaget . J. By applying the overhaul seal the seal box may be removed without draining the water canal.

This is the unit for execution of control processes.1 Schematic structure of a turbine governor system /1/ Controller units and servo systems are considered in the following sections while the oil pressure supply system is dealt with in Chapter 12. 10. . The pressure oil supply system.1.Governors 10. The servo system is an amplifier that executes the admission changes determined by the controller. The principal duty for this system is at any time to supply sufficient quantities of pressure oil to the servo system. A structure diagram of a representative turbine governor system is shown in Fig. Fig. The unit may be of mechanical-hydraulic or electrohydraulic construction Servo system.1 Governor system structure A complete turbine governor system may be divided in three main components: The controller.1 CHAPTER Governors 10 10. 10.

machine communication) Fig.input/output signal for remote and local control .frequency measurement circuit for frequency control . The pulses are received by a digital frequency measurement circuit and transformed to an analogue voltage.power supply . The electric system of the controller consists of the following main components: .sensors for signal transducers (man . The adjustment of the amplification can be made without any influence on the time constants and vice versa.2. The power supply and auxiliary equipment are placed inside the governor desk.2 Electrohydraulic controllers Standard Printed Circuit Boards (PCB) are normally used for electronics in the electrohydraulic controllers.1 Analogous controller A typical system structure of an PCB-based controller/1/ is shown in the simplified block diagram on Fig. 10. . which are mounted in a hinged frame. The analogue signal is input to the PID function block The derivative function is influenced only by the frequency input and so giving a smooth changeover between reference changes and the frequency output. Each parameter can be adjusted within a wide range.2 10.position measurement of the pilot control actuator . 10. The change will be linear and can be adjusted between 20 and 150 seconds per 100% load change. The PCB’s are housed in racks. Two inductive sensors close to each other measure the frequency. 10. which limits the rate of change in the reference value and thus the rate of change of the power output.Governors 10.2 Analogous electrohydraulic controller /1/ The controller has PID functions. The sensors are activated by means of a segment disk attached to the turbine shaft.PID-control unit .2.servo amplifier . The load reference signal is fed through a ramp function.

A digital governor generally contains the following main parts: . The governor parameters may be changed during operation with no system disturbances. The actuator will be regulated according to the output signal from the PID control unit. The measurement signals are transformed to a digital code by the frequency measurement circuit. The controller hardware is generally built of standard components while the control functions are realised in a specific program. and is designed with a high inherent flexibility to enable individual requirements to the greatest possible extent. This is done by means of a remote command. 10. Except for the measurement signal there is no difference compared with the analogous controller.power supply .2. The feedback signal from the electrohydraulic actuator passes through the permanent speed droop circuit and corrects the output according to the actual frequency-load characteristics. The governor should be connected to a DC battery supply and 3-phase 50 or 60 Hz system. In the “Manual” mode the mechanical-hydraulic load limiter controls the turbine power. It is completely autonomous.options as water level control etc. Alternatively the frequency measurement can be taken from a permanent magnet alternator.controller.frequency measurement . It is designed to be used normally for all kinds and sizes of water turbines.3 The load reference signal also bypasses the PID control unit and is a direct input to the electro hydraulic actuator. The output signal from the PID control unit is input to the amplifier.runner blade control .Governors 10. A linear relation exists between the measurement value and the cycle time of the unit frequency. The amplifier also receives the feedback signal from the position transmitter on the electro hydraulic actuator. Two sensors reading a segment disc attached to the turbine shaft measure the frequency.automatic turbine admission control . which results in an external stop command from the controller.controller algorithm . The actuator is connected to the main distributing valve which controls the main servomotor and the turbine admission. In “Manual” mode the supervision logic receives an alarm signal from the speed monitor at 100% speed.servo interface . This signal trips a shut-down function in the main control. It is also possible to switch between two pre-set parameter values depending on the operation conditions. The controller is based on a processor system.2 Digital computer based controller A controller based on digital technique is for example a Programmable High-Speed Controller. The controller program includes the following functions: . inclusive sequence control and monitoring . In addition a separate single-phase input is available for emergency power supply.

It is a part of the electrohydraulic position control of the actuator.4.mechanical feedback . 10. The servo interface is the joint between the electronic part and the hydraulic part of the governor. The controller has a PID function. The main components are: . 10.3 shows the block diagram/1/ for a typical controller of a Francis turbine. Fig.mechanical-hydraulic load limiter .3. . interlocking.rapid shut-down valve .4 .oil filters .opening control valve . The loop is closed in the processor.3 Servo system 10.control levers . etc. stop. Each parameter can be set within a wide range. Adjustment of one parameter makes no influence on the others. One or several position control loops are provided depending on the version.Governors 10.1 Governor desk The system structure in a turbine governor desk/1/ is illustrated in Fig. process and self monitoring Fig. Each loop contains a servo interface with a servo amplifier and a transducer for the actuator position measurement.10.monitoring.sequence control for start.3 Turbine controller block diagram (Courtesy Kværner Brug as) 10.main control valve .electrohydraulic actuator (servovalve and pilot control actuator) . The same block diagram will also be the basic part of a controller for a Pelton and Kaplan/bulb turbine.

hydraulic circuits /1/ The governor desk is an independent unit located near to the main servomotor. .measuring device for the rotational speed Fig. The load-limit function is carried out by the controller electronics and the servomotor is directly governed by the servovalve.4 Governor desk.switches and sensors . The output is pressure oil to the main servomotor which is mechanically connected with the feedback and the control lever on the main control valve. In some new turbine governors it is an electronic feedback signal for the servomotor position. Thereby short pipe lengths between the desk and the servomotors as well as plain feedback mechanisms are obtained.Governors 10. The hydraulic components in the governor desk are fed from the oil supply system. 10.5 . In this way the main governing hydraulics is compressed to a structure containing the servovalve. emergency shut down valves and the servomotor.

4.Governors 10.6 10. 10.. The servomotor movement is transferred via bars. e. The servomotor gives the deflector a rotary movement which bends the water jet away from the runner. Fig.1 Dual control of Pelton turbines The governing of Pelton turbines is normally carried out with a dual control. The deflector function is controlled from the governor desk via the main control valve. By rapid load rejections however. 10.3.g. . The feedback from the needle movement controls the valve openings until they reach neutral position and the needle has reached the correct position according to the reference.4 Specific turbine governing equipment 10.5 Cylinders are usually made of steel as casted or welded products.5 Typical design of a servomotor /1/ 10. the rotational speed rise is controlled and limited by activation of the deflector. needles in the nozzles and the deflectors.piston and rod . These components are described in Chapter 6. The sequence controlled nozzle follows the movement of the deflector servomotor by adjustment of the needle position until the discharge corresponds to the new power/load equilibrium. By minor load changes the needle adjustment control is satisfying the control requirements alone. The cam shape accomplishes an input function to the needle control valve which opens for adjusting the needle to correct position. levers and links to the deflectors.cylinder .2 Main control servomotor The main control servomotor consists of: .sealbox with bushing and sealbox ring An ordinary design of the servomotor/1/ is shown in Fig. The sequence control of each needle is carried out via a cam disk which is driven by the deflector servomotor. In this approach to equilibrium the deflector moves gradually out of the jet again to an idle position just outside the periphery of the jet. From the servomotor movement feedback signal is transferred to the control valve.

Fig. A Norwegian turbine manufacturer has used this type of by-pass valve system for several years. 10.2. 10. In this branched off system the by-pass valve is installed and its admission is controlled by the turbine governor. 10. The diversion is normally branched off from the scroll casing/1/ as shown schematically in Fig.2 By-pass control for Francis turbines 10.1 Function and general arrangement The regulation following load rejections in high head Francis turbine plants makes it necessary to divert some parts of the instantaneous water flow to the turbine.4.4. . The guide vane movement controls the valve opening.Governors 10. In this way the construction of the servomotors with mechanical levers and links have become more simplified.6 By-pass valve with regulating system /1/ The water flow through the valve is led into an energy dissipater and then into the turbine draft tube as shown in Fig. In this way it is possible to obtain a rapid closure of the turbine admission and to retard the main flow in the penstock to minimise the pressure rise.6. Electronics is also utilised in the feedback systems. and a long experience in the use of this equipment has proved a simple and reliable system.7. 10. This combined control of the guide vane movement and the by-pass through the valve makes it possible to control both the pressure rise and speed rise during load rejection. In some recent designs of Pelton governors electronics and separate electrohydraulic servosystems carry out the controller functions of the deflectors and the needles.7 The cabinet for the needle control is located as near to the nozzles as possible to obtain a plain feedback system from the needles and short oil pressure pipelines.

A pilot servomotor PS.2 The valve control system A schematic diagram of the valve system and main servomotor control/1/ is shown in Fig. the pressure on the opening area on VS increases because of the orifice d1. During a closing movement of MS the oil from PS passes through d1 into the accumulator. Because of the close linearity between servomotor position and the water flow. The size of the volume of VS relative to PS is given by the size of the opening of the by-pass valve at total flow capacity.8 the relative movement between the guide vane servomotor MS and the bypass valve BV are shown. The speed will then be higher than normal. The servomotor PS is pressurised via the orifice d1 from oil pressure supply po. In this case the closing speed of the guide vanes will correspond to the speed given by the allowable pressure rise.Governors 10. 10. 10. . Under stationary conditions it moves to closed position because of the difference between the two sides of the piston areas.4. The auxiliary servomotor AS. If the closing speed exceeds a certain value. is connected to this ring and copies the position according to the movement of MS. The double acting servomotor MS.2. The by-pass valve opens at a speed 1/To given by the relative servomotor volumes.7 Energy dissipater /1/ A vital point in the design of the control system has been to ensure full control of the pressure rise even if the valve should fail to operate. From this diagram it is seen that the guide vanes start closing at maximum speed 1/Tc. 10. In the diagram Fig. but this is regarded as less serious because the generator is designed to withstand short lasting runaway speed of the unit. The by-pass valve servomotor VS is hydraulically connected to PS.8 Fig. moves the guide vane via the regulating ring. this diagram also indicates the water flow in the system. To avoid restriction of the guide vanes a check valve CV. is connected in parallel to d1.6. and VS then opens. 10. via the main valve MV controls the guide vane servomotor MS.

A mechanical-hydraulic combination unit is integrated in the runner blade control system and consists of: .distribute oil for operation of the runner blades via the main valve . The closing speed of VS shown as 1/Tc total in the diagram.feedback mechanism . The oil volume from the opening side of VS is forced back to the accumulator.Governors 10. is controlled by d1. In closed guide vane position at the time t2. the pilot servomotor PS stops and the pressure becomes equal po on both sides of the piston in valve servomotor VS.9 Fig. 10.4. This controls the pressure rise in the system. the closing speed of the guide vanes is reduced to a lower value.combination control function curve .main valve .3 Dual control of Kaplan/Bulb turbines Optimal efficiencies of Kaplan and bulb turbines are obtained by optimal combination of the functions of the guide vane cascade control and the runner blade control. The total water flow in the penstock is given by the sum of the flow through the guide vane cascade and the flow through the by-pass valve. The combination unit is usually located on the top or beside the top of the turbine-generator unit. Then VS starts closing the bypass valve because of the piston area difference. 10.pipe connections to the oil supply unit The combination control function is: . The combination of the two control functions may be carried out either by mechanical-hydraulic or by electrohydraulic operation. Examples of the construction of these control systems are described in Chapters 8 and 9.8 Relative movements and water flow between guide vane cascade and by-pass valve /1/ When the by-pass valve is fully open at t1.

: Governing of Hydropower Machines. The servomotor is then operated by an electrohydraulic servovalve.Governors 10.10 . Lectures at NTNU. An electrohydraulic combination unit has an electrical feedback from the position of the guide vane cascade and a combination control function in this case is produced electronically. References 1.position the runner blades according to the control function curve disk which is governed by the guide vane control . Lecture compendium. Kværner Brug: COURSE III. Oslo. Trondheim 1997 (in Norwegian). 1986 Bibliography 1.feedback of the spool position in the main valve. . H. Brekke.

To prevent large damage at an eventual rupture of the penstock. Spherical valves are presently covering a pressure range of 160 m to 1250 m water head. They exist in different types and design depending on function and requirements.Valves 11.1 Valve housing and valve rotor The valve housing has a spherical shape. 11. or these two halves may be welded together after the rotor has been installed. In this way the turbine may be emptied without emptying the shaft or penstock.1.1 CHAPTER Valves 11 Introduction The conduits in all water power plants except large low head plants. In this way the shaft or penstock may be emptied without emptying the tunnel.butterfly valves . Generally these components are valves. The most relevant types of valves are: . a pipe break valve is normally installed in the pipe just downstream of the shut off valve.1 Spherical valves Spherical valves are applied mostly as shut off valves in front of high head water turbines. Normally it is a shut-off valve just in front of the turbine. This valve closes automatically when the water velocity exceeds a certain set value. It may either be axially split permanently in two halves and bolted together with heavy flanges.gate valves . In any power plant valves for different purposes are usually needed. In addition the guide vane cascade is depresserised so that leakage flow is avoided.spherical valves . bearings and seals. .ring valves 11. They are however. valve rotor. The spherical valves consist of the valve housing with flanges. With a long head race tunnel and surge chamber it is normal to have a shut off valve just downstream of the surge chamber. are ordinarily provided with shut off devices. used as pipe brake valves as well.

the outer seal is a reserve.3 Seals for closed valve Spherical valves/2/ usually have a main seal downstream and an auxiliary seal Fig. This worst case is to close a valve upstream of the turbine when the guide vane cascade of the turbine is fully open. Fig. 11. Fig. The inner seal is an O-ring primarily for keeping the bearing free from sand and mud. 11. Lubrication grease to the bearings is pressed through several borings into a section of grooves in the bearing surface. The rotor is turning on these trunnions by an angle 90o from open to closed position. one downstream and one upstream.3. 11. These are made of stainless steel and fixed with screws to the rotor. This seal is of U-seal type. The valve rotor is provided with two seal rings. The valve is normally designed to close under the worst possible conditions. The length of the passage is dimensioned to fit almost close to the inner end faces at inlet and outlet of the valve housing.2 The rotor inside the valve housing is principally shaped spherically as well. The bearings are designed with bushings made of lead-bronze.1 Spherical valve in open position . 11. In this way the flow losses through the valve become about the same as in a corresponding pipe length.1 shows a picture of a complete spherical valve in open position.1. and Fig.2 Valve rotor (Courtesy of Kværner Brug) upstream of the passage of the rotor. The circular passage through the rotor is equal to the size of the valve inlet and outlet. 11.1.2 shows a picture of a spherical valve rotor. The bushing is pressed into a bearing housing and provided with two sealings as shown on Fig. If this seal after some time is not leak tight. 11. 11.2 Valve rotor trunnions and bearings The trunnions on the valve rotor are horizontally supported in the valve housing.Valves 11.

1 Main seal The main seal activation is functioning as follows. If water pressure is equal from all sides. 11. Fig.4 Main seal /2/ To open the valve the downstream pipe is pressurised again through a bypass filling pipe and the rear side of the rubber seal is drained.5 1 mm when external pressure on the seal is at atmospheric level. Thereby a gap between the profile and the seal surfaces is attained.4.3 Spherical valve bearing /2/ In closed position the circular passage of the rotor is turned 90o from the open position and the seals are then activated.1. The seal is pressed against the seat rings with a compression of 0. 11. Then the rubber ring profile is pushed back by the water pressure inside the valve.4. 11. This consists of a moveable rubber profile contained in a stainless steel seal housing which is bolted to the intermediate ring. the rubber seal is pressed against the valve rotor seal surface by applying water pressure to the rear side “A” of the ring. the valve is droptight. When the valve rotor is in closed position. This consists of a moveable seal ring made of stainless steel and is operating as a differential piston.11.Valves 11. shown on Fig. 11.3 Fig. the rubber seal ring is resting in its groove as if no pressure was applied. The main seal is shown on Fig.5.3. The auxiliary seal located on the upstream side of the valve. and the valve rotor can rotate without touching the rubber seal profile. . is shown on Fig. 11. If the downstream pipe in this case is empty and depressurised to atmospheric pressure.

11.4 Operation mechanism The opening and closing operation of the valve is carried out by one or two servomotors.1. the seal ring can be withdrawn by supplying water pressure to chamber C.7. the valve rotor is subject to a large torque.6 Ring servomotor /2/ Another type of the operation mechanism is to use a linear servomotor connected to an arm which is wedged to the valve rotor trunnions as shown on Fig. Fig. Therefore the total closing torque is absorbed by the pipe and the valve. If the penstock has been drained with the auxiliary seal activated. Fig.Valves 11. Chamber “C” is always connected to drain.4 11.3.6 shows the design of a ring servomotor/2/ which is mounted solely on the valve housing. This torque is transferred to the valve housing through the foundation of the servomotor. 11. This design of the valve operation facilitates the foundation and dimensioning of flanges and connecting pipes. Since the valve is designed to close against the flow at full turbine load. It is should be notified that the auxiliary seal must be activated only when the valve rotor is in closed position 11. 11. 11. 11. In this case the servomotor and the valve housing have to be anchored to the surrounding foundations.2 Auxiliary seal The auxiliary seal/2/ is activated by supplying water pressure to chamber “B” in Fig. .5 Auxiliary seal /2/ Fig. The described operation mechanism design is the most applied in Norway. 11.1.5.6 Ring servomotor (Courtesy Kværner Brug as) Fig. The seal ring is then moved against the valve rotor seat ring. The water pressure in the penstock and the spherical valve housing is pushing the seal ring back when chamber B is drained.

5 With this arrangement the adjoining pipes have to be dimensioned to withstand bending and torque forces in addition to the forces from the closed valve.8.7 Spherical valve operated by a Fig. These two systems represent the automatic part of the control system. Therefore the servomotor must be operative for action both as a brake and as a motor for the valve rotor. During valve closing however. 11. In addition the control system is provided with manually operated valves. By means of these valves it is possible to lock a closed spherical Fig.8 Control system of a spherical valve /2/ . The sum of these torques will act partly in the closing direction and partly in the opposite direction. 11.5 Control system The control system is in principle built up/2/ as shown on Fig. 11. the valve rotor is subject to a closing torque caused by the flow and a bearing friction torque caused by the support forces acting in the opposite direction. It is made up by a pilot control system located in “Spherical Valve Control Desk” and a main control system located in the “Control Cabinet”. 11.1.Valves 11.

11. This system of operation has proved to be convenient and reliable. will be more complicated and expensive.2.2. Ribs are normally welded to the outer side of the housing ring in order to improve its stiffness. The disc therefore is often cast with a shape as a lens with internal ribs. Butterfly valves consist of mainly of a ring shaped housing.10. The effect of this cone is lower flow losses through the valve. Alternatively the servomotor may be operated by means of oil hydraulics. The housing is either not split or split axially. The water is carefully filtered and only rustproof materials are used in control and shut-off valves. 11. The control system of a spherical valve is normally operated with the pressure water from the penstock. in most cases be too weak to carry the load of the water pressure when the valve is closed. For the larger sizes of these valves the disc may be made as a biplane structure to be sufficiently stiff and cause low flow losses. In .2 Butterfly valves Butterfly valves are normally applied in front of low and medium head water turbines.9 shows a picture of a butterfly valve with the disc in open position. is supported in bearings in the ring housing. 11. It is favourable to cone the valve ring housing to a smaller diameter from the upstream to the downstream end.9 Butterfly valve (Courtesy Kvæner Brug) The trunnions are offset to the upstream side of the valve disc (considered in the closed position). the valve disc. This valve disc is a plane with a packing around the cicumference. A plane disc plate would however. In this case the disc is usually welded from plates with integrally welded boss with trunnions. 11. In addition bosses for the disc trunnion supports are welded to both sides of the housing ring. Fig. For high head power plants the butterfly valve is from time to time used as a closing device in inlet tunnels and alternatively as emergency closure valves. heads up to 200 m.1 Valve housing The butterfly valve housing is a cylindrical ring with the same diameter as the connecting pipe. The valve ring with end flanges is mostly a welded design. This way of operation however. In the fully open valve the disc plane is parallel to the water flow.e. operating mechanism and counter weight. i.2 Valve disc Inside the valve ring housing a revolving circular disc with two trunnions. An example of a such design is shown in the butterfly valve on Fig.Valves 11. Fig.6 valve and to shut off the automatic control system to operate the spherical valve manually. 11. 11.

7 this way the seal between the disc and the valve housing ring may be a complete ring without joints at the trunnions. This facilitates the achievement of complete tightness. They are rotating in a bronze bearing with spherical shape as shown on Fig. In a groove in the disc a rubber profile is inserted and kept in position by a clamp ring as shown on Fig. Fig. the rubber is pressed outwards against the stainless seat by tightening the clamp ring . 11.2.2.4 Seal The valve housing ring/2/ contains a machined stainless seat. Spherical bearings/2/ are therefore normally used for the trunnions. 11.11 Butterfly valve bearing /2/ The disc trunnions are also offset somewhat either below or above the valve ring centre. 11. This is called the butterfly valve’s eccentricity. 11. The seal around the trunnion is located in the bearing cover. 11. The bronze bearing is supported in a bearing ring made of steel or cast iron with internal spherical shape.10 Butterfly valve with a biplane disc (Courtesy of Kvæner Brug) Fig.11. and may also be designed on the base of self lubricating material. With the disc in the closed position.12.11. The bronze bearing is lubricated by grease. The seal consists of an U-shaped rubber profile and an O-ring located outside this profile. Replacement of the bearing seals requires draining of the penstock.Valves 11.3 Bearing The valve disc has a bending tendency when it is in the closed position.

If the seal should leak. 11.13. 11. Common for gate valves is linear operated gate along a perpendicular to the longitudinal axis. the gate is mounted to the piston with a certain freedom of movement.2. The servomotor may also be mounted on the top of the valve housing ring. The seal surface is inclined in relation to the gate closing direction. The reason is that the spherical valves need smaller space and cause lower flow losses than the gate valves. some of these valves are produced with welded housings too. In the closed position the water pressure acting on the gate is transferred directly to the valve seal. In addition emergency closure valves shall close automatically in the case of penstock rupture. and in this case the piston rod is acting directly on the valve disc.Valves 11. The counterweight with the arm bolted to the trunnion. The valve is kept in open position by oil pressure in the servomotor when the turbine is running. have come more and more in use instead. 11. the valves are designed for closing at any conditions without supply oil pressure. This may be mounted on the side of the valve and is acting on the counterweight arm which is bolted to the trunnion. Therefore the gate valves are produced merely with diameters up to 750 mm. . by tightening the screws in the leaking part of the circumference. For lower heads however. When the valve is fully open the gate is pulled away from the water canal.8 screws. When the valve is closed. In this way the butterfly valve will be completely tight.5 Operating mechanism The butterfly valve shall be able to open and close under equalised water pressure on the disc sides as well as to close at full turbine discharge. An ordinary gate valve design with a double acting servocylinder is shown on Fig. Increasing water pressure therefore results in increasing seal pressure. The servomotor is then acting as a brake and ensures controlled closing. The opening is done by means of one (or two) servomotors. 11. closes the valve when the flow is zero. To avoid bending between piston rod and the gate. By closing movement the gate meets the seal surface just prior to fully closed position and slides against the seal surface the last part of the movement. Fig.4 Gate valves Gate valves are also applied as shut off valves in front of turbines. this may be stopped under full upstream water pressure. The spherical valves however. They are mostly produced with cast housing.12 Disc seal of the butterfly valve /2/ The servomotor is operated by means of pressure oil from an external oil hydraulic unit. The movement of the gate is conducted by guides in the valve housing. As the closing function is more important than the opening function. The seal surface on the gate is also made of stainless material. the gate is pressed against the downstream stainless seal surface.

14. 11. . An example of the design of a ring valve/2/ is shown in Fig. 11. electrical or manual. However. they are applied also as pipe break valves. the cylinder wall has an inner layer of rustproof material. and together with the closing device it forms a ring shaped flow cross section. The closing device consists of a piston with piston rod connected to a cylindrical member. and there is also a connection for emergency closing C. For this operation a hydraulic power unit is needed.Valves 11. The piston and piston rod are centered by a bushing at each end. For the hydraulic operation water pressure from the penstock or oil pressure from a hydraulic power unit is used. In pump storage plants they are the most applied valve for closing the outlet of the pumps. The water must pass a filter and be carefully cleaned before entering the cylinder. On larger valves it is natural to use hydraulic control due to the large forces involved. Some ring valves are using oil as operating fluid. This has a piston shaped closing device which is moved axially when opening and closing. For smaller remote controlled valves electrical operation is an alternative. The design shown on Fig.13 Gate valve with double acting hydraulic cylinder conical and partly cylindrical. 11.9 For opening and closing of the valve the operating mechanism may be hydraulic. This member has a seal ring fastened to the dowstream end of it.5 Ring valves Ring valves have been used in many types of hydro power applications. The seal ring is made of stainless steel and designed to adapt to the housing seal ring in the closed position. If water pressure from the penstock is used. The closing device is supported in the housing by ribs. In this case the piston normally has a leather gasket against the cylinder wall. 11. drain valves and safety valves.14 is operated by water pressure from the penstock through the connection A and B. The valve housing is partly Fig.

The energy dissipator consists of consentric plates with a large number of small axial holes.15 Ring valve with energy dissipator /2/ 11. The pressure reducing device is an energy dissipator connected with the downstream end of the ring valve as shown in Fig. By this arrangement the pressure drop at any point is kept below a level where cavitation may occur. 11. The arrangement of a bypass valve is schematically shown in Fig. Fig.10 Fig. 11.8.6 The bypass valve A bypass valve is the opening/closing device in a pipe connecting the upstream and downstream side of the valve in the main conduit. For lower heads than 75 meters ring valves are delivered without pressure reduction device.11. This bypass is used to equalize the pressure on the two sides of the main valve to relieve .14 Ring valve section /2/ Ring valves installed in drain conduits/2/ are equipped with an auxiliary valve upstream and a pressure reducing device downstream of the ring valve. 11.15.Valves 11.

closing body and operating mechanism. 11. shape. 11. The valve needle is operated by a double acting servomotor. The operating mechanism is normally a hydraulic servomotor operated either by water pressure or oil pressure.16 Bypass needle valve /2/ An example of the design of a hydraulically operated bypass valve/2/ is shown on Fig. vibrations or mechanical wear from sand and so on. .11 the valve from large loads during normal opening and closing. The bypass is also used to fill the scroll casing of Francis turbines and the distribution pipe of Pelton turbines Fig. They consist however. The access to the upstream side may be difficult to achive.normal wear . of the same main components: valve housing. 11.16.7 Guidelines for inspection of valves On valves and the connecting pipe ends the usual damages to be found are: . Spherical valves.Valves 11. probability of cavitation. and the time interval between inspections must be determined on the base of the choice of materials.mechanical damages The valve housing and the closing body as well must be inspected. Opening and closing times are determined by orifices in the supply pipes to the servomotor. butterfly valves and gate valves have different properties and patterns of damages.

Valves 11. 1986 Bibliography Raabe.: Water Power Machines (in Norwegian). Düsseldorf. Oslo 1980. Kvæner Brug: COURSE III. 1989. . Oslo. VDI-Verlag.: Hydraulische Maschinen und Anlagen. Kjølle. A. 2. Lecture compendium.12 References 1. ISBN 3-18400801-0. Universitetsforlaget. ISBN 8200-27780-1. J.

Some small governor systems have been designed also for operation at oil pressures as high as 100 bar. These are however. An oil pressure system for 40 bar/2/ which is common and up to date for medium and big size turbine governors. The pressure tank which is designated accumulator. simple power packs which are individually dimensioned and installed for the respective valves./2/. The usual applications then are off the shelf bladder or piston accumulators.1 CHAPTER 12 Auxiliary Equipment Introduction The auxiliary equipment for the mechanical systems in water power plants comprises . is described in the following section.air pressure supply system 12. 12.12. 40 bar design pressure of the air/oil pressure accumulator /2/ . is of the oil-air type for pressures of these levels.oil pressure system . Different types and sizes of these systems are in use and they exist for pressures between 25 and 40 bar.1 gives an overlook of a such oil pressure system.1 Oil pressure system. Oil pressure systems for operation of the shut off valves in main water conduits to the turbines are also found as optional installations in some power stations. Fig. In this case the oil and air in the accumulator must be separated. The limitation in the design of these higher oil pressure systems is not only the accumulator size but also the availability of big size control valves. Fig. Such power packs are not further described in this book.1 Oil pressure system The oil pressure system has to supply pressurised oil energy for the turbine governor system/1/.Auxiliary Equipment 12.

1 System construction A general function diagram of the oil pressure system/2/ is shown in Fig.1. 12. Function diagram /2/ General .g. 12. oil pressure tank . The corresponding hydraulic circuit diagram is shown in Fig.check valves ..relief valve .Auxiliary Equipment 12.oil sump tank .switches and indicators .2.3.main oil valve .unloader valve .oil cooler Fig.oil pump units . e.2 12.accumulator. The main components can be summarised as follows: .2 Oil pressure system. 12.

This energy storage allows a short time high oil consumption which is much higher than the capacity of the oil pumps.Auxiliary Equipment 12. The energy storage is also sufficient for the oil consumption during a stop sequence of the turbine unit without the oil pumps in operation Fig.3 The accumulator is filled with oil and air under pressure. The system is designed for complete remote control with necessary indicators and signal transmitters for safe operation. An oil cooler may be connected to the oil return line.3 Oil pressure system. . Hydraulic circuit diagram /2/ The system is designed for a maximum working pressure of 40 bar. 12.

Unloader valve The unloader valve is installed to prevent a fast degradation of the oil quality. A DC motor driven pump is operating only if the AC supply fails. The oil level in the tank is controlled by refilling of compressed air. one power rotor and two idler rotors. The absorbed air releases from the oil during the passage of the oil sump tank. Oil pump unit The oil pressure system is equipped with two equal oil pump units. A man hole gives access for inspection and service. Each pump unit consists of a screw pump. One pump unit may even be dismantled for service and overhaul when the turbine is operating. The oil sump tank contains a special arrangement with strainers to ensure deaeration of the oil. The tank has inspection openings to give access for service and routine inspections. The control of the oil pump units permits the selection of either pump as the preferred unit. A relatively fast . The pump is of the self priming positive displacement type. The power rotor is the only driven element and the idler rotors turn due to the action of the driven rotor. The pump will then start and stop via a pressure switch control which keeps the pressure below but close to the normal oil pressure. Refilling of air is necessary because that pressurised oil absorbs air linearly dependent on the pressure. The pump units are equipped with a fluid trap on the suction side to ensure that the pump remains filled with oil in the stand by mode.Auxiliary Equipment 12. The fluid is transported axially and quite uniformly according to the screw rotation. distance piece. As an option a direct current (DC) motor driven oil pump can be supplied.. Correct oil level is important to obtain necessary energy storage and necessary amount of oil. Accumulator The accumulator is mounted on the top of the oil sump tank. The oil pump units are driven by alternating current (AC) motors.4 Oil sump tank The oil sump tank is designed with a volume sufficient for the amount of oil in the system. e. The main parts in the pump are the three rotating screws. flexible shaft coupling. Their thread surfaces are shaped to form a tight seal both in relation to each other and the surrounding rotor housing. Due to the pump start and stop automatic control the DC motor driven pump unit has no unloader valve system. An oil pressure system with two pump units has one pump running continuously while the other pump is in stand by. tube/fittings and an electric motor. The stand by pump will start automatically at low pressure in the accumulator. It can be removed as a separate unit for overhaul. This fluid trap shall be filled with oil before the pump is started after overhaul. The separation of air entrapped in the oil prevents rapid oxidation and ensures long service life of the oil and also of the components in the system.g.

Fig. These valves prevent pressure oil to flow back to the oil sump tank through the oil pump.3.3. The unloader valve pos. In this mode the pressure in the accumulator will decrease due to the oil consumption in the governor system and no oil supply from the pump.3. is installed in the pipeline between the oil pump unit and the inlet check valve of the accumulator. The pressure on the top of the unloader valve piston is then decreased. 12.4 Unloader valve /2/ Energy is saved as long as the unloader valve delivers the oil directly to the oil sump tank. This valve is operated when the solenoid valve (7) is being activated by a pressure switch. The valve piston is spring loaded to ensure that the valve is closed during pressurising the oil pressure system. When the pressure reaches the lower setting level. . At low pressure in the accumulator. The unloader valve may also be operated as a pilot controlled pressure relief valve. the pressure switch activates the unloader valve. the solenoid valve closes. The pressure on each side of the valve piston equalises and the unloader valve closes due to the force from the spring in the valve piston. is in continuous operation and thereby cause unwanted oxidation and cavitation. the oil is fed from the pump to the accumulator. The design of an unloader valve is shown on Fig. the piston moves upwards and the oil flow is led to the oil sump tank. The oil pump unit. Fig.5 degradation will happen if the relief valve (11). 12.Auxiliary Equipment 12. The unloader valve also reduce the demand for cooling of the oil. Check valves Between each oil pump unit and the accumulator a check valve is installed as shown on Fig. The unloader valve works only when the oil pump is running. 12. As soon as the oil pressure has reached the upper set point. 12. (6) on Fig.4. 12. the oil pipe and other equipment between the pump and check valve may be dismantled without depressurising the accumulator.

This valve drains or pressurises respectively the piston chamber. protects the accumulator against unintended high pressure.5.6. Relief valve The relief valve (11) on Fig. 12.Auxiliary Equipment 12. This opening and closing sequence can be done by remotely controlled solenoid valves. 12. The design of the main oil valve is shown on Fig. The relief valve shall not open before the pressure in the accumulator exceeds normal working pressure. Also at zero pressure on the piston sides the valve is kept closed due to the spring force. The design of the valve is shown in Fig. is the shut off valve between the accumulator and the main oil piping system. The design of the valve with a long coil spring and a large valve piston gives a very accurate flow pressure characteristic. Opening and closing of the main oil valve is controlled by the pilot valve.5. The main valve will be closed automatically at critical low oil level in the accumulator to prevent air from entering the main piping system.6 Main oil valve The main valve (12) on Fig.5 Main valve with pilot valve (schematically drawn) /2/ Manually operated valves are supplied for the by-pass function (6) on Fig. The oil begins to flow through the valve when the oil pressure on the lower side of the valve piston balances against the spring pressure.3. 12.3. the valve therefore remains in closed position. The closing/ opening member is a differential piston. and for the opening and closing sequence. 12. . For equal hydraulic pressure on the two sides of the piston. The valve is adjusted by turning the top cover. This process occurs independent of the manual or automatic sequence control Fig. 12. 12.

Fig. The limit switch on the main oil valve indicates open and closed position.7 If the oil pressure system has no unloader valves or if the valves are out of function. In closed position the . Some oil pressure systems do not need oil cooling when the temperature conditions are favourable. In open position the piston chamber will remain drained through the bore in the piston rod.3 shows the cooling principle for the oil pressure system. This may be done during normal operation of the system. Closing sequence When the solenoid valve for closing is activated. It is based on the oil temperature being sensed in the sump tank to control the water flow through the oil cooler in accordance with the adjustable temperature setting on the valve. the spool in the pilot valve moves to the second stage.1.6 Relief valve /2/ 12. When the solenoid valve for opening is activated. The control voltage to the solenoid valve is switched off and the spool in the pilot valve will move back to the neutral position. Oil temperature control is accomplished by a thermostatic valve. 12. The cooling is being done in the return line.Auxiliary Equipment 12. 12. An automatic control as well is applied. Together with the inlet oil through pipe (4) the necessary pressure is being built up to close the valve. The pilot valve has this function. As soon as the system pressure feedback in the main piping system is high enough. the relief valve can work as a pressure control valve.2 System operation Opening sequence The main valve shall not be opened without a preceding careful pressurising and deaeration of the main piping system/2/. can easily be done by removing the end covers. Oil cooler The hydraulic circuit diagram Fig. the spool in the pilot valve moves to the first stage and oil passes through the by-pass line (3) to the main piping system. Cleaning of the internal cooler surfaces which are in contact with water. Pressure oil flows to the piston chamber in the main oil valve. the piston chamber in the main oil valve is then drained and the main oil valve opens. the spool in the pilot valve moves to the closed position.

the outlet from the piston chamber is being closed. The system shown is designed with two .5. In the sump tank the absorbed air releases again during the pressure relief to atmospheric pressure. Emergency closing By closing the manually operated valves (1) and (2) in Fig.5. The hydraulic circuit diagram Fig. respectively are adjusted so that the main oil valve closes if the oil level in the accumulator becomes extremely low. This process however. With pressurised accumulator. The air in the accumulator is in direct contact with the oil. Air pressure is to be supplied until approximately 2/3 of nominal pressure po is reached. The function diagram Fig.Auxiliary Equipment 12. 12. The spool in the pilot valve moves back to neutral position. It must be checked that the level in the oil sump tank is not too low. takes some seconds to be fulfilled. air supply and pressure to closing side of the main valve piston are to be opened. 12. One oil pump unit has to be started and run until the oil level can be seen at the lower end of the level indicator. pressure to actuator and manual by-pass are to be closed.8 outlet from the valve chamber will be closed and the control voltage to the solenoid is switched off.8. 12. respectively. Manual valves for pressure gauge. Precautions to be taken by start at zero pressure The oil level in the sump tank has to be checked. oil draining. 12. the oil pressure increases and the main oil valve closes. 12.3 shows the instrumentation and the control functions. the oil absorbs air linearly with the pressure.7. the unloader valves and the instrumentation have to be checked and adjusted if necessary. Automatic emergency closing The orifices in the inlet pipe (4) and outlet pipe (12) in Fig. but the passage time for the oil flow through the sump tank is longer than for the air release process A function diagram of a typical air pressure system/2/ is shown in fig. The corresponding pneumatic circuit diagram is shown in fig. pressure switches. Nominal pressure is obtained by filling or draining of air.2 Air supply system The air pressure system serves to refill the accumulator in the oil pressure system with air. Before switching to automatic operation the relief valve. 12.2 shows all in and out going signals and power supply. 12. One oil pump unit is then started and run until correct level in the accumulator is reached. Instrumentation The oil pressure system is designed for complete remote control with necessary indicators and signal transmitters for safe operation according to up to date standards. Manual valves for air draining.

valves The start and stop of the refilling cycle is controlled by a level switch on the accumulator. 12.Auxiliary Equipment 12.relief valve mounted on the compressor . Fig.7 Function diagram /2/ A relief valve on the compressor is a system protection and is adjusted below the maximum allowable pressure of the system.9 compressors. Fig. To avoid short cycles for start and stop of the compressor.one or two AC powered high pressure air compressors with inlet filter . The main components are: . An air-cooled aftercooler is normally installed on the tube between the compressor and the accumulator equipped with a manual or automatic drain valve. This logic is a part of the main control system. the stop command is normally delayed to obtain a minimum of working time. 12. The compressor utilised for the air supply system is an air cooled two stage compressor. Air pressure systems with two compressors are equipped with two level switches on the accumulator.air cooled aftercooler with condensate trap .9 shows the compressor with motor assembled on a subbase. However. The condensate trap on the compressor is equipped with a manual or automatic drain valve for drainage of condensate. The level switch for compressor 1 is placed at normal oil level and the one for compressor 2 is placed 50 to 150 mm above the normal oil level making compressor 2 to start only if the system for compressor 1 is failing. systems with only one compressor are common as well. .

Auxiliary Equipment 12.9 Compressor /2/ References 1. Condition Control of Hydropower in Norway: Handbook – Governor (in Norwegian).8 Pneumatic circuit diagram /2/ Fig. 2. . 12. Lecture compendium.10 Fig 12. Oslo. Kværner Brug: COURSE III. 1986.

1 CHAPTER 13 Forces transferred to the foundations Introduction In water power stations the forces to be transferred to the foundations from the installed units are: . 13. The torque from the generator is transferred through the generator foundation and partly through the turbine structure. The torque forces are transferred to the generator stator foundation.Forces transferred to the foundations 13. are transferred through the housing to the concrete foundation. The resultant of the jet forces on the runner and the runner weight are transferred to the radial bearings which are bolted to the concrete foundation.resulting hydraulic forces from the inlet side of the turbines .reaction forces from energy dissipaters .reaction and action forces from jets and jet deflectors respectively . .1 Horizontal turbines For horizontal Pelton and Francis turbines normally all the hydraulic forces from the inlet penstock are transferred to and carried by the flange at the inlet end of the penstock via a rigid connection through the inlet shut off valve. For vertical Pelton turbines the forces are correspondingly transferred through the distributor.axial forces from runners and generators via thrust bearings For Francis and Kaplan turbines with steel scroll casing the main forces are transferred through the scroll casing to the concrete foundation. The struts transfer the axial and radial hydraulic forces from the turbine. The transfer and magnitude of these forces are different for horizontal and vertical turbines. The dominating horizontal hydraulic force is transferred via the outer cone and the main struts.torque forces from the generator stators . For a bulb turbine the forces are transferred to the foundation in the river ground through the concrete in which they are embedded. In Pelton turbines the minor reaction forces from the jets and the action forces from the deflectors during rejections. The turbine structure is dimensioned for the total axial force with closed guide vanes. In addition to the axial forces the outer cone and plate cylinder in bulb turbines are exposed to radial expansion. This effect requires a heavy reinforcement of the concrete in the area around the struts.

This is easily stated by calculation of the maximum reaction force of each jet πd 2 j (13.2 Vertical turbines The vertical Pelton turbines installed in cavern power houses normally transfer the axial forces from the distributor through the concrete to the rock wall on the downstream side of the power house. However.1. The maximum magnitude of this force is 2 πD c F = ρgH max (13. 13.Forces transferred to the foundations 13. . 13. This purpose comprises also the necessary reinforcement bars which are laid in to avoid cracking of the concrete during pressurising of the distributor.1) 4 where Dc is the outer diameter of the dismantling pipe (of telescopic type with seal ring) located downstream of the inlet shut off valve.2 13. The reaction forces from the jets are negligible compared with the static hydraulic forces on the distributor. Fig.1 Reinforcement collar for transfer of axial forces on a Pelton distributor. must be introduced to reduce the specific pressure on the concrete and avoid crushing and cracking. to transfer the large axial forces to the power house an extension of the inlet flange of the distributor must be welded to the inlet flange.2) Fj = 2ρg 4 where dj is the maximum jet diameter. This extension which is indicated by (E) on fig.

are valid only for cavern power plants with solid rock on the downstream side. The corresponding reaction flow force is transferred vertically as well. are the weights of the turbine and the generator stator and the axial forces from the thrust bearing. The reinforcement bars are laid in only to avoid cracking. In addition on Francis turbines there is a by-pass from the scroll casing through an energy dissipater. For high head plants the hydraulic forces carried by the tangential stresses in Pelton turbine distributors or scroll casings of Francis turbines are so large that only a negligible part of the hydraulic load is to be carried by the concrete. For vertical turbines in open air power houses the horizontal axial forces must be transferred to the penstock flange by a rigid connection through the inlet valve as described for the horizontal turbines. The inlet of the scroll casing is then welded to the oulet of the conduit and also in this case the axial forces are transferred to the penstock. Especially for Kaplan turbines with unlined concrete scroll casings a large support from the generator weight may be utilised in addition to the anchoring of the stay ring. Vertically however. the valve is anchored to avoid vibration during closure with open needles. in the axial direction of the turbine shaft. During rejections the valve in the by-pass opens according to the governor regulation. Moreover. are transferred through the reinforced concrete structures to the rock wall and bottom of the cavern. The reason is that dangerous hardening and cracks may occur. The spherical inlet shut off valve is normally free to slide horizontally on its foundation plate on the top of the concrete foundation. The twisting force and all the vertical forces which are of minor magnitude compared with the horizontal hydraulic force from the inlet conduit.Forces transferred to the foundations 13. For high head Francis turbines the hydraulic forces transferred to the concrete foundation are similar to the forces from a vertical Pelton turbine. For Kaplan turbines with scroll casing there is normally no inlet valve. However. five millimetres soft material are also put in on the steel plates where the deformation is large in axial direction. It should however.. The forces transferred to the power house from vertical turbines described so far.e. reinforcing bars which are located at each bifurcation in a distributor will not be used for a Francis scroll casing. On account of large dimensions and flexible design the vertical forces from the scroll casing will partly be transferred to the concrete foundation by utilising the weight of the generator.3 An extension of the same type and an installation analogous to that for the Pelton turbine is applied for high head Francis turbines as well. i. In the rotational direction the torque of the unit transfers twisting forces to the foundations. The vertical forces on the foundation. be emphasised that no welding is allowed of reinforcement bars to the high tensile strength steel plates in the stress carrying parts of high head Francis and Pelton turbines. .

Lecture compendium. References Brekke. In this way the weight of the rotating parts are transferred via the upper turbine cover to the stay ring.4 The trust bearing is often located in the turbine pit below the generator. Oslo 1986 . NTNU. Kværner Brug: COURSE III.Forces transferred to the foundations 13. H. Trondheim 1997.: Forces transferred to the foundations of water turbines in underground power stations.

At present guide vanes and runners exposed to high flow velocities with danger of cavitation or turbulence corrosion are made of stainless steel 13% Cr 4% Ni and 16% Cr 5% Ni respectively.1 Cavitation The turbine parts exposed to cavitation are the runners and draft tube cones for the Francis. are considered. As a conclusion it has been an extensive and successful advance in the development of materials with properties as high strength. criteria for choice of materials and methods for estimation of durability of stressed components have been developed. Measures for combating erosion and damage under cavitational conditions are improvements in hydraulic design and production of components. corrosion resistance. The 16% Cr 5% Ni is used in the runner due to good weldability without preheating.1 CHAPTER 14 Causes to damages Introduction Damages concerning water turbines are caused mainly by cavitation problems. Through the three last decenniums extended research is done on developing new alloy steel qualities. pressure variations and high water velocities which to some extent depend on the ever prevailing search for a minimising of the costs of the investments. These problems are consequences essentially of high pressures. Precautions to be taken to avoid or minimise damages have been recommended. studies and research of the phenomena as well as the properties of materials have been carried out and are going on. Successively those materials which have performed the best properties. This development of material properties is in further progress. To cope with these problems. 14. nozzles and the runner buckets of the Pelton turbines. In the following section a survey of aspects of the main damage problems and how to reduce or avoid these. material defects and fatigue. weldability and reduction of defects and brittleness in heat affected zones. . Damage problems occur primarily in turbines for higher heads than about 250 m. sand erosion. The further considerations are focused merely on the search for materials with high resistance against erosion from cavitation. Kaplan and bulb turbines and the needles. In harmony with these attainments certain types and qualities of materials are chosen according to the prevailing conditions for the different components exposed to cavitation. have been tested in relevant applications. wear resistance. search for erosion resistant materials and arrangement of the turbines for operations within the good range of acceptable cavitation conditions.Causes to damages 14.

the seal rings in the nozzles and the runner buckets which are most exposed to sand erosion. and extended indentations may occur just behind the edge. the Pelton buckets are also severely eroded while the damage of the nozzles may be less serious. This phenomena may be caused by the strong turbulence in the high jet velocity bringing the grain particles to oscillate and rotate in circles causing collisions with the steel surface. Materials resistant to sand erosion The real mean to minimise sand erosion in the turbines is to apply the most suitable material with properties that match the highest possible resistance against erosion. If coarse sand is present. Sand erosion is designated as abrasive wear.2 Sand erosion Sand erosion problems in Norwegian water power plants are generally limited to plants at net heads above 200 . The reason may be explained by the extreme acceleration of a particle passing the Pelton bucket. Sand erosion therefore may be both a releasing and contributing cause for damages which are observed in power plants with a large transport of wearing contaminants in the water flow. This hardness is about 70 Brinell different from the hardness of the guide vanes and that is chosen to prevent tearing of the surface when the guide vanes are moved. and contemporary satisfy . On Pelton turbines it is the needle tip. That implies experiences limited to Francis and Pelton turbines. Usually the wear of the guide vane cascade and the labyrinth rings have the most significant influence on the efficiency of the turbine. The surface of the covers against the guide vane end faces are normally clad welded with stainless steel 16% Cr 5% Ni with hardness of about 300 Brinell. The wear on needle tips occurs as streaks and indentations forward to the tip. The parts exposed to high flow velocities such as needle tips and nozzles are made of hardened stainless steel of 13% Cr 4% Ni or 16% Cr 5% Ni. The erosion damages are to some extent different for Pelton and Francis turbines. On the buckets the sand contaminants in the water flow is wearing the bucket gap backwards. In some serious cases also the surfaces of the covers against the guide vane end faces and the runner blades have been damaged. A flow analysis shows that an acceleration of 100 000 m/sec2 may occur for small buckets in a high head turbine.Causes to damages 14. The bucket edge is usually exposed to an even wear and tear and becomes wider. This type of wear will brake down the oxide layer on the flow guiding surfaces and partly make the surfaces uneven which may be origin also for cavitation erosion.300 m. That causes a delayed contact with the jet and makes an erroneous splitter. In Francis turbines the guide vane cascade and the labyrinth rings are the major parts which are exposed to wear.2 The upper part of the draft tube cone is also made of stainless steel 16% Cr 5% Ni. It should be emphasised that sand erosion even from silt with grain size less than 60 µm have made severe damage on needles and nozzles of a Pelton turbine at 800 m head in Norway while the runner buckets have had negligible damage. 14.

while the static labyrinth seals in the covers are made of Ni-Al bronze which has a hardness different from that of the rotating ring. On the basis of the above mentioned requirements the maximum main stress must be limited to about 200 MPa for any material quality developed untill now.3 manufacturing and operating conditions. but only by a factor of two to three. This requirement limits the maximum size of the turbine depending on the toughness of thick materials. The reason is that a crack through the thickness will be easy to detect by the leakage. but improvements are made in recent years. At present however. Coating of facing plates of Francis turbines is under development as well. For needle tips and nozzles in Pelton turbines which are exposed to high flow velocities.3 Material defects For high head turbines the stress carrying parts are made of fine grain high tensile strength carbon steel. That means guide vanes and runners are made of stainless steel types as 13% Cr 4% Ni or 16% Cr 5% Ni. This condition is designated Leakage Before Rupture (LBR). However.09% Welding defects . To fulfil this requirement limitations in the chemical composition is made. These same materials are used also in the rotating seal rings on Francis runners. Against sand erosion stainless steel does not really show acceptable resistance. while the guide vanes may be treated in the same way as the needles and nozzles of a Pelton turbine. These limits are: Carbon C < 0.Causes to damages 14. To allow for acceptable material and weld defects within realistic values for production. The base for the dimensioning criterias of these parts is the maximum stress and the number of pressure pulsations cycles. The most important requirement for the manufacture is the weldability to avoid defects and brittleness in the heat affected zones of the material. For large vertical Pelton turbines the development of high tensile steel has allowed for increasing size of turbines for high heads in the range of 800 to 2000 m.01% and Vanadium V < 0. Grinding of the coating is also regarded as a problem because the coating may be too thin or even penetrated. With basis in fracture mechanics it is essential to design a turbine to fulfil the requirement that unstable fracture from a crack shall not occur until the crack has penetrated the whole plate thickness. hardened stainless steel of 13% Cr 4% Ni or 16% Cr 5% Ni is recommended. severe sand erosion is expected. materials with a yield point value above 460 MPa are not recommended.13%. So far ceramic coating of Pelton runners is not commercialised with sufficient success. A general problem with the surface coating is however. the materials with the best properties against cavitation erosion are also used even if sand erosion is expected. If however. promising work in developing coating processes of ceramic material as wolfram carbides is going on. The materials stellite and titanium show better resistance. This means a decreased efficiency of the turbine. Sulphur S < 0. As long as a crack has not penetrated the whole plate thickness an unstable rupture will be prevented. 14. a ceramic coating on the needle tip and the nozzle ring has been used successfully. that it will be more rough than a polished steel surface.

The most dangerous defect is a propagating crack with a very sharp edge. it is therefore essential to have acceptance criterias for defects which will not grow to rupture under the operational conditions for the regarded structure. Gas cavities may also indicate hydrogen which is very dangerous due to micro cracks. However. The stress in front of a crack tip in a complete elastic material is expressed by σ= where σ K r K 2πr is the mean stress which cause the crack to propagate is the stress intensity factor is the distance to crack tip (14.. e. the stress intensity factor becomes K= σ πaf (φ ) where a f(φ) is the crack depth is a factor which is a function of crack length and geometry of the material surrounding the crack (14. Three dimensional defects such as slag and gas cavities are not so dangerous except if sharp edges of slag is connected to a lack of fusion or a crack.1) By means of this theory one will find that the stress at the crack tip will reach an infinite value.2) . An acceptance criterion for material defects may be based on the theory of fracture mechanics. a two dimensional defect or a flaw. If the load or stress level and crack depth are within certain limits the crack will stop in the plastic zone. The material will have a certain crack arresting ability depending on the ratio between the elastic energy and the elastic energy stored in front of the crack tip.. Cracks and lack of fusion are the most serious defects because they are two dimensional. Crack propagation based on fracture mechanics As defects always occur in a weld or in the heat affected zones in the base material.g.4 Defects will always occur in a weld. The critical elastic energy at the crack tip is expressed by the stress intensity factor K found in the following way. An applied criterion is briefly described as follows.Causes to damages 14. If the average stress in the uncracked material is σ. As a conclusion: A crack will propagate only if the loss of elastic energy is equal or greater than the energy needed to form new fracture surface. This indicates that the crack should propagate even for low average stress values σ in the surrounding of any small crack with depth a in a complete elastic material with no ductility. all materials suitable for structural design will undergo a plastic deformation at a certain stress level which limits the stress peak value.

It is proven however. Therefore. if the material cross section is thick another value KIC instead of KC is valid. but this is not further considered here. For a life time of 50 years that leads totally to about 50 000 cycles. The constant KC is a material constant determined by testing of the respective material quality or welding joint. Basically the stress carrying parts in a Francis turbine are statically loaded. Such defects will in any case be detected by a leakage or rupture during the pressure test which is a very important type of tests at the end of the manufacture. A turbine in typical peaking operation however. Depending on the strength of the material and the level of the working stress the material includes both elastic and plastic deformation in front of the crack tip before propagation. Safety margin to yield stress or ultimate stress is not sufficient as safety criterion if high tensile strength steel is used. In addition minor stress amplitudes caused by pressure oscillations from the turbine regulation will be superimposed. loaded and unloaded three times or more a day. On the base of this conditions the stresses must be limited to avoid small fabricated cracks and other material defects to grow to critical size. In modern fracture mechanics theory this is in the low cycle fatigue domain.Causes to damages 14. This method is called Crack Tip Opening Displacement (CTOD). Materials for turbines are of the ductile type. Unstable crack propagation may occur as a brittle fracture with sound speed.e. On the contrary some research works have indicated a slight improvement of fatigue lifetime of high cycle fatigue in materials with low yield stress. For any material there will be a critical crack size which leads to unstable fractures. On the other hand the crack propagation speeds in brittle materials and tougher materials show only negligible differences.4 Fatigue Defects of critical size rarely occur in a new turbine. Unfortunately the fatigue crack propagation speed has not decreased by the development of high tensile strength steel even if the toughness and strength have increased. i. 14. another method than to find a critical stress intensity factor must be used to find the crack arresting ability and the critical size of a ductile material. From these experiences the following conclusions are drawn: . grow to critical size during life time due to fatigue propagation caused by a certain number of load cycles. But for ductile materials KIC values are not valid. Smaller defects in a new turbine may however. by small scale CTOD-tests that high tensile strength steel with high working stress level allows for a smaller crack size than a low tensile strength steel with a lower stress level. This crack size may be based on the CTOD determined experimentally for the base materials and welds. may be stopped and started. A critical crack size may be calculated.5 An unstable crack propagation will occur if K ≥ KC.. However.

will be exposed to high cycle fatigue up to the range of 1010 .: Choice of materials for water turbines and the influences this has on the design manufacture. Lecture compendium. H.6 • For turbine parts exposed to a number of loading cycles above 20 000 in the lifetime it is not reasonable to increase the maximum working stresses above 200 MPa because acceptable defects then will be too small to be detected. Moreover. • Critical area in scroll casings is the joint between the shell and the stay ring where both the stress and wall thickness have the maximum value. Otherwise after a number of years in operation. Parts exposed to high cycle fatigue and erosion Runners and guide vanes especially in reversible pump turbines. crack growth may lead to unstable fracture starting from cracks which do not penetrate the whole plate thickness. Trondheim 1984. The fatigue threshold limit for a number of cycles higher than 1011 indicates infinite lifetime for stress amplitudes ∆σ < 45 MPa and a surface crack less than one mm in depth and two mm in length. The same material is used also in Francis runners. For Pelton turbine distributors the bend joint on the inside is the critical point. This steel shows a somewhat better cavitation resistance. General Doctoral Lecture NTH. testing and operation. References Brekke. welds should be heat treated after the welding. Pelton runners are normally casted of 13% Cr 4% Ni alloy steel. For all thick plates therefore. Oslo 1986 . However. for Francis runners also the 16% Cr 5% Ni has been used. Kværner Brug: COURSE III.1011 cycles with relatively low stress amplitudes.Causes to damages 14. In heat affected high tensile strength steels hardening effect and residual stresses may occur. it may be welded with no preheating except for a moderate temperature of 50 oC to keep the material well above the dew point during welding.

Condition Control

15.1

CHAPTER 15
Condition Control

Introduction
Condition control of water turbines and additional mechanical equipment is the primary basis for organizing and carrying out - preventive maintenance - a continous process which is taking place with certain time intervals and at planned dates. - overhauls - being performed to improve the operation conditions, rectify wear and leakages on the plant according to plans adapting to the plant operation. If an accident occurs or preventive maintenance and overhauls are not carried out properly, situations requiring repairs may arise. A repair is here defined as an unplanned overhaul. Continous monitoring and condition control is of great importance to all types of turbines. The content of the condition control activities are however, somewhat different from one type to another of the turbines. Therefore, condition control is briefly described specifically for the respective turbine types. 15.1 Activities for Pelton turbines

Turbine guide bearing The first oil change should be done after 3 - 6 months of operation. The later oil changes are to be done as required by evaluating oil sample tests. To empty the bearing for oil it has to be done at standstill by pumping through the oil level pipe in the bearing housing. If babbit metal particles are found in oil samples, the bearing should immediately be dismantled for inspection. Runner The runner should be regularly inspected to record possible damages from foreign objects in the water. The time interval between each inspection is dependent on sand content in the water. The runner inspection is done visually by means of magnaflux and/or dye penetrant. Particular attention should be paid to the area between the buckets.

Condition Control

15.2

If minor cracks or defects have been formed, these should be removed by grinding and polishing according to advices from the manufacturer. The special shape of the runner buckets makes it difficult to detect material defects just below the surface. These defects may penetrate to the surface during the first operation time period. To prevent an extensive crack propagation they must be rectified as soon as possible. Main injector with needle servo motor The needle tip and the nozzle should be inspected with respect to cavitation damages and damages from foreign objects. If the water contains fine silt or sand, the needle tips may loose their original shape. It is of great importance that the nozzle is inspected from the inside. The needle servomotor should be run to neutral mid position and the oil pressure taken off for safety reasons. The leakage indicators should be regularly inspected. Seal ring in deflector bearing Leakage in this seal do not require immediate replacement of the seal ring, but replacement should be done as soon as possible to avoid bearing corrosion. The seal ring must be provided with a spring of stainless material. Filter Filter for breaking system control water supply should be checked and cleaned if necessary. It may be cleaned after closing of the valves for this water supply system from the penstock. 15.2 Activities for Francis turbines

Routine inspections Routine inspections means visual inspection of the complete turbine: - look for possible leakages - inspect bolted connections - drain pumps should be inspected and level switches tested. RPM shutdown curve The activity is to record the RPM with 30 seconds intervals from the moment of closed guide vanes to standstill of the unit. The RPM shutdown curve should be drawn from nominal RPM to standstill. Leakage control of guide vanes The activity is to record the RPM with the spherical valve open and the guide vanes closed. Shaft alignment The activity is to record the shaft misalignment by means of a micrometer dial instrument against the shaft at the turbine bearing top. The misalignment should be recorded at different loads on the unit.

Condition Control

15.3

Labyrinth seal water flow The assessment of wear and control of the labyrinth rings is possible by measuring the labyrinth water flow. Runner Visual inspection of the runner is required to record possible cavitation and erosion damages as well as cracks in vanes. The inspection of the inlet is done from the scroll casing. Three of the guide vane arms should be dismantled and the guide vanes rotated by hand to open position. The unit should be rotated manually to enable inspection of the complete runner circumference. The outlet side of the runner should be inspected from the draft tube cone. Scroll casing and draft tube The activity is to carry out inspection of painting for possible corrosion and ensure that all manometer connection openings are open and that the manhole cover is drop tight after completed inspection. Guide vane mechanism The guide surfaces of the covers should be inspected from the scroll casing and possible wear recorded. Visual inspection of the surfaces of the guide vanes. The clearances between the guide vanes and the cover surfaces and the clearance between guide vanes should be checked. Look for possible leakages in the guide vane bearings. Look for slacks in the bearings of the guide vane arms and links. Check the connection between regulating ring and the servomotor. Shaft seal box During operation water will normally not flow over the the shaft seal box. It may however happen during start and stop. If water runs into the upper cover it is removed by a drain pump. Turbine bearing The same activities as for Pelton turbines. 15.3 Activities for Kaplan and Bulb turbines

The general principles for condition control are the same as for the Francis turbines. Further considerations are therefore connected only to a few specific details of Kaplan and Bulb turbines. Runner The runner should be inspected both from above and below. Particular attention should be given to possible cavitation erosion and scratches on the blades as well as leaks around the blade flange against the hub.

Shaft seal box For Bulb turbines at standstill it should be checked that the water does not flow out of the box along the shaft into the turbine bearing. Guide vane mechanism For guide vane mechanism with individual vane servomotors on Bulb turbines it should be checked that the vanes have an identical movement. Oslo 1986 . Lecture compendium.4 Runner chamber The narrow gap between runner and the runner chamber should be checked if foreign objects may have passed the gap and made scratches in the chamber.Condition Control 15. References Kværner Brug: COURSE III. Generally for Bulb turbines Special attention should be paid to changes in the sound when the unit is in operation.

There are several ways to ensure the requirements above. objectives and commitment to quality shall be documented by the management. • A management representative shall.activities.1 CHAPTER 16 Quality Assurance (QA) The organisation for building a hydropower plant performs a quantity of specifications. the need for a Quality system in order to avoid nonconformity is equally important to everybody involved in a hydropower plant. The requirements for carrying out the project are that it is equally important that all sub suppliers are capable of delivering their supply in accordance with demands as those performed by the project organisation. authority and interrelation of all personnel who manage. The most common however. . The Operational Organisation will be customer of the Project Organisation as the consumers will be customers of the Operational Organisation. • Responsibility. Hence.Quality Assurance 16. The one part is aimed at organisational matters and the other specifically at the project. The requirements may be divided in two parts. The most applied standard in Europe is EN ISO 9001 which specifies requirements aimed primarily at preventing nonconformity at all stages from design through servicing. whatever role an organisation have in a hydropower project. • Quality audits shall be carried out to verify whether quality activities comply with planned arrangements and to determine the effectiveness of the quality system. is to apply and follow an international quality standard. have defined authority and responsibility for the Quality System and its maintenance. Examples of organisational requirements are: • Policy. The requirements through a project life are shown in the flow-chart defining period. irrespective of other responsibilities. However. activities and end results of different QA . perform and verify work affecting quality shall be defined. there is always a customer of Your services. time and quality. One may say that the picture differs depending on whether You are a customer or a supplier. expectations and goals for the project with respect to economy.

2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ROUTINES PERIOD ACTIVITY RESULT WORK DISTRIBUTION OFFER SCHEDULE STARTING UP MEETING OFFER OFFER REVIEW CONTRACT REVIEW DESIGN REVIEW PRODUCTION FOLLOW UP SUB-CONTRACTOR CONTROL ERECTION TAKING OVER PROJECT ORGANIZATION SCHEDULE DESIGN VERIFICATION QUALITY PLAN ORDER VERIFICATION VERIFICATION COMMISSIONING ASSESSMENT OF PRODUCT QUALITY GUARANTEE INSPECTION TEST RESULT COMMISIONING REPORT GUARANTEE PERIOD DELIVERY ASSESSMENT DELIVERY FINALIZATION REPORT .Quality Assurance 16.

Oslo 1986 .3 References Kværner Brug: COURSE III.Quality Assurance 16. Lecture compendium.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful